JP7265183B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In conventional pachinko game machines, in order to announce the degree of expectation of winning a big hit, a lamp step-up effect is executed in which the light emission mode is switched in stages in the effect lamp provided on the game board, and depending on the progress of the lamp step-up effect There has been known a machine that notifies the degree of expectation of a big hit (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-2125

In the conventional pachinko game machine of Patent Document 1, the light emitting unit used for the ramp step-up effect has a structure using a half mirror, and the pattern is invisible in the normal state (when the ramp step-up effect is not executed). is constructed to make the player aware of the execution of the ramp step-up effect and to notify the degree of expectation for a big hit, but usually the pattern is visible. Since it is configured with a structure (performance specification) that cannot be performed, there is a problem that a sufficient performance effect cannot be exhibited when the ramp step-up performance is not executed.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine equipped with a light-emitting section capable of exerting a production effect both when the ramp step-up production is executed and when the ramp step-up production is not executed. and

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine according to the present invention comprises main control means (main control board P40, main control CPU) for controlling the progress of the game; Control means (effect control board P41, effect control CPU), effect image display means (effect display device P80) for displaying a effect image corresponding to the effect controlled by the effect control means, effect controlled by the effect control means A light emitting effect unit (character role light emitting unit P692) having a plurality of light emitting units for executing a light emitting effect corresponding to and an operation means (effect operation unit P380) that can be operated by the player, and effect control means is an image announcement effect control for displaying an image announcement effect by the effect image display means, and a light emission announcement effect control for executing the light emission announcement effect by light emission of a plurality of light emitting parts of the light emission effect part (using the character role P691 a ramp step-up effect), and the effect control means can execute a light emission effect in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the image preview effect control in a period in which the light emission effect control is not executed, The luminous advance notice effect control indicates in stages the possibility of obtaining an advantageous result for the player in relation to the progress of the game using the luminous effect unit. is operated by the player, the player's operation on the operating means starts the light emission notice effect, and the light emission effect unit is switched from the normal light emission mode to the initial state of the light emission notice effect . If the player does not operate the operation means during the effect period, the light emitting effect part is caused to emit light in the normal light emitting mode, and the light emitting effect effect control switches the light emitting effect part to the initial mode of the light emitting effect. At least a part of the plurality of light emitting portions of the light emitting effect portion, which is a specific light emitting portion, is caused to emit light in an initial mode different from that of the other light emitting portions of the plurality of light emitting portions of the light emitting effect portion.

Any combination of the constituent elements according to the above invention, and the constituent elements and expressions of the present invention are mutually replaced among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc. Configurations according to the embodiments and modifications described in the detailed description are also effective as aspects of the present invention.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine equipped with a light-emitting section capable of exerting a rendering effect both when the ramp step-up rendering is executed and when the ramp step-up rendering is not executed.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a perspective view in the front direction of the pachinko game machine with the frame member opened. It is the perspective view of the back direction of the state which opened the frame member of the said pachinko game machine. It is a perspective view showing a game board attached to the pachinko game machine assumed. It is a functional block diagram of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the game stop state setting process during the said power-on process. It is a diagram showing the interrupt processing of the main control board of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a figure which shows the success-or-failure lottery table of the pachinko game machine which is assumed. It is a diagram showing a winning symbol lottery table of the premise pachinko gaming machine. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the low base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a variation pattern lottery table during the high base state of the pachinko gaming machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a special variation pattern lottery table that is referred to during a limited period of the pachinko gaming machine that is assumed. It is a diagram showing the power-on processing of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing an interrupt process of the effect control board of the pachinko game machine to be assumed. It is a diagram showing a game effect of symbol variation display (decorative symbol stop display) during normal game (low probability/low base) of the premised pachinko gaming machine. It is a figure showing the game production|presentation of the situation where the ready-to-win production|presentation with high expectation which becomes a big hit of the premise pachinko game machine is performed. It is a diagram showing a game effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the pachinko gaming machine as a premise. It is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function, which is a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base) of the premised pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of production (holding charge production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (breakthrough zone battle production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production (breakthrough zone battle victory production) of a specific game (breakthrough zone) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (V prize promotion production|presentation) at the time of a small hit game in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of production (jackpot type notification production) during the special game start demonstration in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a special game (first big win) when shifting to a specific specific game (pseudo big win) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of production during a special game (second jackpot) after execution of a specific specific game (pseudo jackpot) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (battle mode first half) in specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko game machine of a present Example. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (reserved charge effect (battle mode)) of the effect displayed in a maximum of four remaining pending from the final variation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect (battle mode final battle effect) that is displayed in the maximum four remaining pending from the final variation in the specific game (battle mode) in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of arrangement|positioning relationship, such as a prize-winning device, in the game area of the pachinko game machine of 2nd Example. It is a diagram showing a game flow in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is a diagram showing a distribution ratio of big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed the example of the long-time chance state production of the pachinko game machine of 2-1 Example. It is a diagram showing an example of the production of the normal electric accessory opening production in the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation in the chance time of the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the chance time of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation in the super chance time of the pachinko game machine of 2-2 Example. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 2-3 Example. It is a diagram showing a distribution ratio of big hit (small hit) symbols in the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-3 embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game flow in the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example. It is a figure explaining the outline|summary regarding the self-power type rank-up bonus of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Example, and a continuation battle. It is a board configuration diagram of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a game transition diagram of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a time chart of the stock mode in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display screen of the stock mode in the pachinko game machine of 4th Example. It is an example of a table showing the change pattern of the normal design reserved image and the display pattern of the normal design change swaying effect in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of normal symbols and the release pattern of normal electric accessories for each easy-to-enter state in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a table showing the winning symbol selection ratio and the game state after the big win in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the table which shows the selection ratio of the small hit pattern in the pachinko game machine of 4th Example, and the game state after a big hit. It is a time chart showing the end timing of the easy ball entry state in the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of a table showing a special symbol variation pattern controlled by the main control CPU and an effect pattern controlled by the sub-control CPU in the easy-to-enter state in the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the stock mode and extra stock mode of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the stock completion screen of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the display screen of the battle production in the stock mode of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the display screen of the music presentation in the stock mode of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. It is an example of the display screen during the jackpot end demonstration of the pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state of the time saving state 1st time in the pachinko game machine of 4th Example, and the display condition of the hitting|distribution alert|reporting. It is an effect time chart when winning a small winning game with a specific reach of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is an effect time chart when winning a small hit game with a non-specific reach of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is an example of effect display when winning a small hit game with a non-specific reach of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is an example of effect display in the afterglow effect period when winning the small winning game with the specific reach of the pachinko game machine of the fifth embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game board front view (presentation accessory initial position) of the pachinko game machine of 6th Example. It is a diagram showing a game board front view of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment (at the time of performance accessory operation). It is a diagram of another example showing the game board front view of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment (at the time of performance accessory operation). It is a figure which shows an example of the ramp step-up production of the pachinko game machine of 6th Example. It is a diagram showing a time chart of reach production and ramp step-up production (low expectation) of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the time chart which shows the change of the light emission mode of the lamp step-up effect|action (low expectation) of the pachinko game machine of 6th Example. It is a diagram showing a time chart of reach production and ramp step-up production (high expectation) of the pachinko game machine of the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the ramp step-up production of the pachinko game machine of the modification of 6th Example. It is a figure which shows the other example (sound volume adjustment) of the light emission effect|presentation control using the lamp|ramp of the performance accessory of the pachinko game machine of the modification of 6th Example. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a front view of the center decoration unit of the pachinko game machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the upper role of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the side role of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement of the lower role of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation|movement (2nd pattern) of the boss of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of the production|presentation operation means of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the process of the initialization / reset operation|movement process of the presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the processing of the initial position return operation processing of the production|presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a diagram showing the processing of the initial operation confirmation processing of the presentation movable accessory of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example, and an effect|presentation state. It is a figure which shows the kind of special game of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the kind of variation pattern of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of A reach (loss, small hit) of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of A reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. It is an effect time chart diagram at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the timing (A) in the production|presentation time chart at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the timing (B) in the production|presentation time chart at the time of B reach (jackpot) of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example. It is an example of the effect screen of the pachinko game machine of the 7th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the priority of the effect|presentation display of the pachinko game machine of 7th Example.

(Prerequisite technology)
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as "prerequisite technology") on which the present invention is based will be described with reference to the drawings. 1 and 3 show a pachinko game machine as a representative example of the pachinko game machine according to the base technology, and FIG. 4 shows a game board provided in this pachinko game machine. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine will be explained. In the following description, for convenience, the directions indicated by the arrows in FIG. 2 are referred to as the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction.

[Machine configuration of pachinko machine]
First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko game machine P will be described. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko game machine P is configured in a rectangular outer shell, and is configured in a rectangular shape with a size matching the opening of the outer frame P1 in front of the opening of the outer frame P1 fixed in the game facility. The front frame P2 is mounted so that it can be horizontally opened, opened, and detached by means of upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20) disposed on the front left edges of each other.

A game board P5 and a glass frame P3 are detachably set on the front frame P2. The glass frame P3 has a square shape, and is assembled and held on the front side of the front frame P2 so as to be able to open, close, and detach from the front using upper and lower hinge mechanisms (upper hinge portion 10, lower hinge portion 20). The game board P5 is detachably set on the front side of the front frame P2, and configured so that the player can visually recognize a game area P501 provided on the front side of the game board P5 through the glass P301 of the glass frame P3 which is closed and held. It is In addition, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 can be rotated in either the left or right direction by inserting a key into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 provided on the front right edge of the pachinko game machine P, depending on the direction of rotation. , the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, or the locking of the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 is released. As a specific example, when the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the right, the locking of the outer frame P1 and the front frame P2 is released, and the key is inserted into the keyhole of the locking portion P30 and rotated to the left. By doing so, the front frame P2 and the glass frame P3 are unlocked.

Under the glass frame P3, upper and lower ball trays P340 (upper ball tray P341 and lower ball tray P342) for storing game balls are provided. In addition, the glass frame P3 is provided with a production lamp P350 that emits light according to the progress of the game, and a speaker P370 that can output sounds such as sound effects according to the development of the game. An effect operation unit P380 for performing a predetermined effect operation is attached to the lower center of the glass frame P3. The button P381 allows the player to operate at all times, while the lever P382 is one of the movable objects (frame movable accessory P360) provided on the glass frame, and the operation means itself. is displaced to an upward projecting state (input permission state), operation input is possible (a plurality of operations are possible with one effect operation means).

A handle P204 is provided at the lower right portion of the front frame P2 for controlling the shooting operation of the game ball and the shooting intensity. A shooting device unit P240 is further provided at the lower part of the front frame P2, and although illustration is omitted, a ball feeding mechanism P241 that feeds game balls stored in the upper ball tray P341 one by one, and the ball feeding mechanism P241 feeds out the game balls. A launching device P242 having a launching mechanism (ball-hitting mallet driven by a rotary solenoid) that launches a game ball toward the game area P501, a launch control board P243 that synchronously controls the operations of the ball feeding mechanism P241 and the launching device P242, etc. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board P5 (game board unit) is configured with a base material formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using transparent synthetic resin or wood. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine P including the game board P5, and FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the game board unit P5. FIG. 4 shows a state in which the production accessory P560 (also called "movable production device", "movable production body", "movable production accessory", etc.) provided in the game board unit is in operation. On the front surface of the game board P5, an arc-shaped outer rail P502 is arranged from the lower left to the upper right, and a circle is arranged from the lower left to the upper left inside the outer rail P502 from near the lower center of the game board. An arc-shaped inner rail P503 and a rail decoration P504 formed in a curved shape that is arranged between the end of the upper right outer rail P502 and the lower part of the board surface and opens leftward, and the outer rail P502 A substantially circular game area P501 is defined inside surrounded by the inner rail P503 and the rail decoration P504. The game area P501 is divided into a left area P501L (left-handed area), which is an area on the left side of the center role P540, and an area on the right side of the center role P540, which is disposed substantially in the center. and a right area P501R (right hitting area). Further, the outer rail and the inner rail form a guide passage for guiding the game ball launched by the launcher unit P240 to the game area P501.

In the game area P501, along with a large number of game nails P510 and a windmill P511 (not shown), there are a first start winning opening P711 (first starting opening), a second starting winning opening P721 (second starting opening), a general winning opening P731, Various ball entry devices (referred to as "winning devices" when prize balls are generated) such as a normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation gate device), a large winning prize port P751 (attacker), etc. are provided. It should be noted that the number of the big prize winning opening may be one, or it may be configured to have a plurality of openings. Further, in this specification, due to the structure of the ball-entering device, the game ball is ejected after entering the ball-entering device, or further flows down the game area P501 after entering the ball-entering device (gate type). On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by an internal detection switch, it is called "entering ball" or "winning (especially when a prize ball is generated)", and flows down to the downstream game area like a gate type ball entrance. There are cases where it is described separately from "passing" in particular. Also, the ball entry device is sometimes referred to as a ball entry port, and the prize winning device is sometimes referred to as a prize winning port.

In addition, at the lower right of the game area P501, the main control display device P50 which is lighting controlled by the main control board described later, such as the first special symbol display device P51, the second special symbol display device P52, the normal symbol display device P53, etc. are centrally located. A center accessory P540 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501, and the screen of the effect display device P80 is provided so as to be visible through the opening of the center accessory P540. Above the center accessory P540, etc., there is provided a production accessory P560 (movable accessory device) that performs a production operation according to the development of the game. At the lower end of the game area P501, an out port P790 is provided through which a game ball that has flowed down without entering the winning port of various ball entry devices can pass. A game ball that has entered a prize winning opening of various prize winning devices or a game ball that has flowed into the outlet P790 flows down to the rear side of the game board P5 through a through hole (not shown) formed through the game board P5 from front to back. Then, it is collected in the collection channel (played ball passage) at the bottom of the front frame P2 and passes through the out ball sensor P792 (shot ball number sensor) provided at the bottom of the front frame for detecting the total number of shot game balls. After that, it is discharged out of the game machine.

The first starting winning device P710 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the first special symbol game. This first start winning device P710 is provided with a first start winning opening P711 into which a game ball can enter. The entry of the game ball into the first start winning opening P711 is a trigger for acquiring the random number used for the lottery related to the first special symbol, and is based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning opening P711. A lottery related to the first special symbol is executed after the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed.

The second starting winning device P720 is provided as a starting winning device corresponding to the second special symbol game. This second start prize winning device P720 has a second start prize winning port P721 into which a game ball can enter, and a state in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second start prize winning port P721 when winning a normal symbol lottery to be described later. A normal electric accessory P770, which is a switching movable body, is provided. The entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening P721 is the trigger of the random number used for the lottery related to the second special symbol, and based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting winning opening P721. A lottery relating to the second special symbol is executed at the timing immediately after entering the ball or after the holding period has passed. The second start winning device P721 has an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered into the second start winning port P721 by the action of a normal electric accessory P770, and a game ball enters the second starting winning port P721. It changes to a closed state that is impossible or difficult to enter. In other words, the second starting winning device P720 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning port unless it is displaced to the open state, and a predetermined opportunity described later (a chance to win the normal symbol lottery) When it becomes an open state at , the ease of entering a game ball increases. In addition, the structure of the normal electric accessory P770 is known in various forms, and there are cases where it is not a structure that changes the ease of entering a ball by opening the movable body P771. ” may be expressed as “easy-entering state (easy-entering mode)” and “difficult-entering state (difficult-entering state)” respectively.

The general winning device P730 has a left general winning device P730L arranged in the left hitting area P501L and a right general winning device P730R arranged in the right hitting area P501R. In the pachinko gaming machine P according to the underlying technology, the left general prize winning device P730L is configured as one unit with three general prize winning ports P731La to P731Lc, while the right general prize winning device P730R is a large prize winning device P750 described later. configured as part of Entry of a game ball into the general winning hole P731 triggers the payout of prize balls as with other winning devices. It should be noted that the number and positions of the general winning openings P731 of the pachinko game machine, which are assumed, are merely an example, and may be configured to be arranged only in the right-handed area P501R.

The normal pattern operation gate device P740 (normal pattern operation port) is provided as a starting entrance ball corresponding to the normal pattern game. This normal figure operation gate device P740 is provided with an operation gate P741 through which a game ball can pass, and the entered game ball is configured to be able to further flow downstream of the game area of the game board. The passage of the game ball to the operating gate P741 triggers a normal symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the second starting prize winning device P720, that is, whether or not to operate the normal electric accessory P770. . It should be noted that, as a modification, it is also possible to configure the above-described general winning port P731 to have a function that triggers the normal symbol lottery. It is also possible to provide the function of generating as one winning device (normal drawing operation winning port).

The big winning device P750 has a big winning opening P751 (special electric role P755) that opens and closes when the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery results in a big win or a small win. and is sometimes referred to as an “attacker (device)”. The big winning device P750 has an open state in which a game ball can enter the big winning opening P751 or is easy to enter (for example, a state in which a special electric accessory is activated P755), and a game ball cannot enter the big winning opening P751. Or it changes to a closed state where it is difficult to enter (for example, the special electric accessory P755 is inactive). In the jackpot game, a plurality of round games (unit games) accompanied by opening and closing operations of the jackpot P751 are performed. Even when the special electric accessory P755 is activated, a series of activation patterns (also called "open pattern") may cause the movable body P756 that constitutes the big winning opening P751 to be in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the ball. have

In addition, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the big winning device P750 may have a specific area P760 (referred to as "V zone" or "V area" through which game balls can pass). (referred to as "area", "continuation area", etc.) may be provided. As a function related to this "specific area", (a) activating the probability fluctuation function (described later) after the big win game with the passage of the specific area during the big win game as a trigger, (b) passing the specific area during the small win game to activate the accessory continuous operation device (flag for continuously operating the special electric accessory) and grant the right to execute the jackpot game, (c) specified in a specific round during the jackpot game Examples include deterministic or non-execution of subsequent rounds based on whether or not a region has been passed. In addition, an opening/closing member P761 (valve member), which is a structure for changing the ease of passage, may be provided for the "specific area". It may be configured to pass through the specific region P760 or other non-specific regions. Also, during the big hit game or the small hit game, it may have a period during which the passage of the game ball in the specific area P761 is valid and a period during which it is invalid.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, the big winning device P750 is provided in the right region P501R (right-handed region) in the game region P501. Therefore, in the big-hit game or the small-hit game, when the game ball is shot toward the game area P501, it is easy to enter the big winning hole P751 by hitting the right side area P501R, that is, hitting the right side. It's becoming

Next, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. On the rear side of the front frame, a back set unit P4 having a front-to-rear communicating window is mounted for mounting the game board unit P5 in the center. The reverse set unit P4 includes a storage tank P401 for storing a large number of game balls supplied from the gaming facility side, a gutter member P402 for flowing down the game balls from the storage tank P401, and a game ball guided by the gutter member. A prize ball payout unit P410 to be put out, a back side passage member P403 for causing the game balls paid out from the prize ball payout unit P410 to flow down to the upper ball tray P341 or the lower ball tray P342, and the like are provided. In addition, on the game ball flow down path from the storage tank P401 to the ball tray P340, there is a ball removal mechanism (ball removal operation lever P405, a valve member that forms a flow path that ejects the game ball from the flow path in conjunction with the operation lever. P406) is provided.

On the back side of the game board P5, there are a main control board P40 for comprehensively controlling the game progress of the pachinko game machine P, and an effect control board for controlling overall effects according to the game progress accompanying the control of the main control board P40. An image control board P41 and an image control board P42 for controlling image display according to game development are attached. Note that, in the pachinko game machine P of the underlying technology, the effect control board P41 and the image control board P42 form an effect display unit in an assembled state integrated with the effect display device P80 (liquid crystal display device). On the other hand, on the back side of the back set unit P4, there are a payout control board P43 for controlling the payout of game balls, and a power supply for receiving power from the game facility side and supplying power to various control boards and electric/electronic parts. A substrate P44 (not shown) and the like are attached. In addition, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are housed in a board case made of transparent resin having a caulking structure and a sealing structure. , respectively. These control boards and the electric/electronic parts of each part of the pachinko game machine are interconnected via harnesses (connector cables) to enable the progress of games and the execution of effects in the pachinko game machine P. .

[Function block]
FIG. 5 shows functional blocks of a pachinko game machine as a premise.

The pachinko game machine includes a power supply board P44 that generates power to be used in the game machine based on AC power supplied from the outside of the game machine, and a main control board P40 (main control CPU ), a payout control board P43 (payout control CPU) as a frame control device that controls payout of prize balls and shooting of game balls, and an effect control board P41 (sub-control CPU) that controls performance actions and processes. It is configured in a form in which functions are shared by In addition, the arrows shown in the figure indicate upper transmission/reception relationships by solid-line arrows and electrical connection relationships by broken-line arrows.

By operating a power switch P47 provided on the board, the power board P44 is connected to a main control board P40, a performance control board P41, a payout control board P43, and various game devices electrically connected to them. On the other hand, it generates and supplies the power required for operation. Although the details will be described later, since the power-on operation of the power switch P47 is a switch operation that triggers the start of processing of information related to the settings of the gaming machine, the power switch is covered with an opening/closing cover to prevent unauthorized operation. protected in good condition.

The main control board P40 includes a first start winning opening P711 (special figure 1 starting opening switch P712), a second starting winning opening P721 (special figure 2 starting opening switch P722), a large winning opening P751 (large winning opening switch P752), Various detection switches related to game progress such as normal pattern operation port P741 (normal pattern operation port switch P742) and other detection switches general winning port P731 (left side general winning port, right side general winning port), out port P790 It is also connected to switches and sensors such as the setting key switch P49, the vibration detection sensor P72, and the magnet sensor P73, which are used for managing various games and monitoring fraud. The main control board receives input of information related to the occurrence of various game states from these switches, determines control details related to the progress of the game, and is composed of solenoids, etc. A special electric accessory driving means P70 driven to expand the winning opening P751, and a normal electric accessory driven to make the normal electric accessory P770 easy to enter when winning the normal symbol lottery. Information relating to the driving mode is output to a game device such as the driving means P71.

Sensors and the like connected to the main control board P40 are connected to terminals called input ports on the main control board and notify the main control board P40 of the presence or absence of occurrence of various game states based on sensor detection as information, special electric Accessory drive means P70, normal electric accessory drive means P71, and other information output from a terminal called an output port, such as a launch permission signal for the launcher P242, is received to control each device.

In addition, the main control board P40 includes special symbol display devices P51 and P52 that perform variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a round indicator light P54 that notifies the type (number of rounds) of the big hit and the small hit, and the game state. A main control display device P50 that performs various displays such as a status indicator P55 that notifies the and so on. Regarding the "base value", there are various other calculation methods such as data that excludes the winning of the starting prize opening P711, etc. Details are omitted in the explanation of the pachinko game machine.

In addition to the above, the main control board P40 is configured to be electrically connectable to devices outside the gaming machine through an external information output terminal P77, a test terminal P78, and the like, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The main control board P40 is also electrically connected to the effect control board P41 and the payout control board P43, which are other control boards in the gaming machine.

The payout control board P43 controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device P410 based on signals indicating the payout of prize balls and the control state of the main control board transmitted from the main control board P40. In response to the operation of , control relating to shooting of the game ball by the shooting device unit P240 is performed. The payout device P410 has, for example, a payout motor P411 and a ball counting sensor P412, and is configured to be able to pay out game balls one by one by the rotation of the payout motor P411. The launching device (shooting device unit) P240 moves the game balls staying in the ball tray P340 (upper ball tray P341) one by one to the position where they can be shot by the ball feeding unit P241, and then hits the game ball with the hitting mallet. It is configured to shoot a game ball by hitting it. The payout control board P43 is provided with a ram clear switch P48, which is mainly used for initializing the game machine and canceling errors that occur during the game. Operation information of the ram clear switch P48 is input to the main control board via the harness and connector used.

The production control board P41 includes the production display device P80, the drive source and position detection sensor (for example, drive motor, initial position detection sensor, production position detection sensor) of the production movable accessory P560, the speaker P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production operation unit P380 (for example, production button P381 which is production operation means P81, production lever P382, cross key P383, etc.), production lamp P82 (“decorative lamp”, “board lamp (P550)”, “frame lamp (P350) ”), and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. Also, the effect control board P42 and the effect display device P80 are connected via an image control board P42 (VDP) or the like that controls the display of the effect display device P80 (for example, a device that displays an image such as a liquid crystal display device). It may be something to do. In addition, in the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made, the speaker P83 is configured to be controlled by the performance control board P41. may be configured to control

Transmission and reception of data between the main control board P40 and the effect control board P41 is performed by unidirectional data transmission/reception so as to be in one direction from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41. Since the unidirectionality of data transmission from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the configuration included in the effect control board P41 to the configuration included in the main control board P40. , it is not possible to request data transmission. Therefore, the effect control board P41 cannot refer to the information unless the information generated by the main control board P40 is transmitted. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P assumed here, data transmission and reception are performed bidirectionally between the main control board P40 and the payout control board P43. However, as in the case between the main control board P40 and the performance control board P41, it may be configured to transmit and receive data in one direction from the main control board P40 to the payout control board P43.

[Basic game progression]
Next, the basic game progress and game method in the pachinko game machine P as the underlying technology configured as described above will be described for each game state. The "game state" is roughly divided into a "normal game state" and a "special game state" in which game balls are easier to obtain than in the normal game state. The "normal game state" is a state in which the player aims to acquire the right to transition to the "special game state". A plurality of states are provided, and among the plurality of normal game states, the state in which it is relatively easy for the player to acquire the right to transition to the special game state (which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state (low probability/low base state)) State) is expressed as "specific game state". The ``special game state'' corresponds to so-called ``big win game'' and ``small win game'', and the main control board P40 drives the special electric accessory drive means P70 to open the big winning opening P751, and the game ball is acquired. It means a state in which it is easy to

[Normal game state (low probability / low base state)]
First, the game method and the progress of the game in the normal game state will be explained. It should be noted that the normal game state described here is a description of the "normal game state (low probability / low base state)" (see FIG. 6) excluding the specific game state, and generally in the situation where the player starts the game The game state will be explained, and the game method, the progress of the game, and the meanings of the terms "low (high) probability" and "low (high) base" in the specific game state will be described later.

As a game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), first, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the game area P501 provided on the game board P5. In the premised pachinko game machine P, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player controls the operation amount of the handle P204 so that the game ball shoots toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area. The game is played by operating so that the

When a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game area by the player, the shot game ball flows down the game area P501 and hits a game nail P510 (also called "obstacle nail" or "nail") (not shown) or , While displacing the flow direction by the windmill P511, the first start winning opening P711 arranged at the substantially lower center position in the game area P501 of the game board called "navel" etc., or the general winning opening P731L of the left general winning device The ball enters (wins a prize), or enters an out hole P790 as a game ball that has been played without entering any of the winning holes. When the ball enters the first start winning hole P711 or the general winning hole P731, the main control board P40 sends information (control command ) is output, and the player acquires new game balls by paying out prize balls.

Here, a special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is arranged inside the first start winning opening P711. , When the ball is entered into the first start winning opening P711, the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start opening switch P712 is input to the main control board P40.

When the main control board P40 receives the input of the game ball detection information of the special figure 1 start port switch P712, in addition to paying out a predetermined number of game balls, the lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is performed. Get a random value to do. Acquisition of the random number is based on the detection of the game ball, the acquisition of the random number generated by the random number generation circuit on the electric circuit (hard latch), or the control device of the main control board P40 by software processing. There are methods such as executing processing to obtain random numbers from the random number generation circuit when detecting information on game balls, or obtaining updated random numbers in software (soft latch). It is possible to use them properly according to the random number value to be obtained, or to use them in combination. It should be noted that when the ball enters the general winning slot, the random number related to the special symbol is not acquired, and only the prize ball is paid out.

A lottery related to the control of the first special symbol is a "special symbol lottery", and the "special symbol lottery" includes a "win/fail lottery", a "winning symbol lottery", and a "fluctuation pattern lottery". The "win/fail lottery" is a process of determining whether the lottery result using the obtained random number value is a "big hit" or a "loss" (depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, the lottery result may include a "minor win"). ). The "hit symbol lottery" (sometimes simply referred to as "symbol lottery") is a process of determining the display pattern of the stop display symbol indicating the winning or failing lottery result in the special symbol display device P51 (P52) of the main control display device P50. It is possible to determine one pattern from a plurality of stop display patterns for one lottery result (big win, small win), and "big win" or "minor win" according to the stop display pattern determined here. It is possible to make the execution mode of the special game in . "Variation pattern lottery" is a process for determining at what timing the stop display pattern indicating the result of the winning lottery is to be displayed in the special pattern display device P51 (P52), and the special pattern in the special pattern display device P51 (P52). It determines the time (referred to as "variation display time" and "variation pattern") during which variable display indicating that the lottery has been executed is performed. It is common to use different random numbers for the "win/fail lottery", "win pattern lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery". called "random number". In addition, the lottery related to the control of the second special symbol, which is performed based on the detection of the game ball of the special figure 2 starting port switch P722, is also the same "special symbol lottery". Also, the explanation of the "special symbol lottery" will be given later.

Returning to the description of the game method in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area. Then, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711, the lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to the first special symbol is executed, and the special symbol indicating "big win" ("small win") on the special symbol display device. is displayed, a game aiming at acquiring the execution right of the special game is performed.

In the process of the player receiving the special symbol lottery, the variable display of the special symbols is performed according to the time determined by the variation pattern lottery. During this special pattern variable display period, when there is a new start winning hole (first start winning hole P711, second start winning hole P721), a special pattern lottery is executed a predetermined number of times. It has a holding function (holding control means) that temporarily stores a random number corresponding to a right (right or wrong random number, pattern random number, variation pattern random number). In the premised pachinko game machine P, as a holding function corresponding to the special symbol lottery based on the winning of the first start winning hole P711, it is possible to suspend the special symbol lottery up to four times. It should be noted that the holding function can be set for each special symbol, and in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, apart from the holding of the first special symbol, the holding function of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol can be set up to four times. It is possible to reserve the random number used for the special symbol lottery.

In this way, in the normal game state (low probability/low base state), the player shoots the game ball to the left area P501L of the game area and executes the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol. Then, in the special symbol lottery, when the lottery result of the special game state such as "big win" or "minor win" is won, and the fact that the right to shift to the special game state is acquired is displayed on the special symbol display device. , the game state of the pachinko game machine P shifts to a special game state.

[Special game state]
Next, the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state will be explained. The special game state includes "big win (game)" and "minor win (game)". , and the big winning hole P751 is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball. The big difference is that the "small hit" is completed by the operation of the special electric role product once, as opposed to being based on the operation of the operating device. Another difference is that in the operation of the special electric role product (jackpot) based on the operation of the accessory continuous actuating device, it is possible to make the operation mode more advantageous to the player regarding the operation of the special electric role product P755. Specifically, the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the operating state (big win) of the role product continuous operating device is allowed up to 30 seconds, while the total opening time of the big winning opening P751 in the small winning is allowed. There is a point that the time is limited to 1.8 seconds. In the following description of the game method and the progress of the game in the special game state, the jackpot will be described as an example.

The game progress of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the underlying technology, is chronologically called a "special game start demo" (in the case of a big win, it is called a "jackpot start demo", a "role combination operation start demo", etc.). In the case of a hit, a performance period called "small win start demo") to inform the player that various special games have been won, and a single time called "round (game)" (also referred to as "unit game") The operation period of the special electric accessory P755 and the “special game end demo” (in the case of a big win, it is called “big win end demo”, “role combination operation end demo”, etc., and in the case of a small win, it is called “small win end demo” ), which is mainly composed of the game results (such as the number of acquired game balls) during the special game and the period for performing notification related to the type of the normal game state (including the specific game state) of the transition destination.

Next, the game method during each special game period described above will be described. First, during the “special game start demo” period, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, the big winning opening P751 is arranged in the right area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area, and the normal game state (low probability/low Even if a game ball is shot into the left area P501L similar to the base state), it is almost impossible to expect the ball to enter the big winning hole P751, so the big winning hole P751 in the special game is in an easy-to-enter state Before the start of the round game In addition, a right-handed notification effect that prompts the player to shoot a game ball to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area is provided by the production display device P80, speakers (lower speaker P141, upper speaker P370), and production lamps. Execute using P82. The player adjusts the amount of operation of the handle P204 to increase the shooting intensity of the game ball according to the right-handed notification effect, and changes the shooting position so that the game ball flows down to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. to (perform a right-handed stroke).

During the “round (game)” period, in the pachinko machine P of the underlying technology, the main control board P40 outputs a driving signal to the special electric accessory driving means P70, thereby causing the large winning opening P751 to enter the easy-to-enter state or It is specified that it is more advantageous for the player to be in a state where it is difficult to enter a ball, and to congratulate the player for winning a big win (minor win) in accordance with the execution period of the special game, or to shift to a normal game state after the special game is over. An effect such as an effect suggesting whether or not the player is in a game state is executed. A player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area in order to enter the game ball into the big winning hole P751 and obtain a large number of game balls.

During one "round (game)" period, the opening pattern (operation mode of the special electric accessory) of the big winning opening determined based on the type of big win (minor win) is completed (opening time elapses). Alternatively, the game ends when a predetermined "specified number" (which may be expressed as "count", "C", etc.) of game balls enter the game. Then, according to the type of special game state being executed (type of big win or small win), when all the round games to be executed are completed, the state shifts to the state of "special game end demo".

Subsequently, during the "special game end demo" period, the pachinko machine P, which is the underlying technology, displays the number of game balls acquired during this special game state period, and Acquired in the special game state (acquired without transitioning to the normal game state (low probability / low base state)) to notify the total number of acquired game balls, or normal game that shifts after the special game state Effects such as the notification of the type of state and the notification related to the game method in the game state of the transition destination (such as the above-described right-handed notification effect) are executed. The player operates the steering wheel in preparation for a game corresponding to the type of normal game state to which the game is to be transferred from the effect being executed.

In many pachinko gaming machines P that are assumed, except for some exceptions, when a jackpot game as a special game state is executed, a special game state for the player is called a "specific game state" as a normal game state. The right to transition to is shifted to a state where it is easy to acquire, and the specific game state and the special game state are continuously repeated, so-called "Renso".

[Specific gaming state]
Next, a description of the "specific game state" will be given. As shown in FIG. 6, there are roughly three specific game states in the specific game state. And, there are "probability state" and "base state" as elements for classifying those types, and a specific game state is constituted by a combination thereof.

(probability state)
"Probability state" is a function that changes the probability that the lottery result will be a "big hit" in the winning lottery in the special symbol lottery. If it is expressed as "high probability (state)"("probability change state", "probability change state" when the success or failure lottery in the special symbol lottery becomes a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is not activated. There is also), and the state where the probability variation function is not operating is expressed as "low probability (state)". The "high probability (state)" is a game state more advantageous than the normal game state (low probability/low base state) in that the probability of winning a big hit in one special symbol lottery is high.

(base state)
The "base state" is a state related to the "base", that is, the ratio (expected value) of game balls obtained as prize balls when a predetermined number of game balls are fired. The state in which the operation of P770 is easier (advantageous) than the normal game state (low probability / low base state) is called "high base (state)" (also called "electric support (electric support) state"). . In addition, depending on the specifications of the game machine, even if the "electric chew support function" is not activated, the recommended shooting position of the game ball is switched, so that "when a predetermined number of game balls are fired, it is possible to obtain prize balls." If the "proportion of game balls to be played" increases, it may be expressed as "high base state". "High base (state)" means that the number of game balls paid out as prize balls increases (it becomes easier to pay out) during the period until the special game state is acquired, so that the consumption of game balls is suppressed and the special This is a game state that is advantageous to the player in that the player can aim to acquire the game state.

"Electric chew support function" is a state in which the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is easier than in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), but mainly a combination of three functions (at least one ). The three functions that make up the “electric chew support function” are “normal symbol probability change”, “normal symbol time saving”, and “open extension (of normal electric accessories)”. "Normal pattern probability variation" refers to a state with a high probability of operating the normal electric accessories in the "normal symbol lottery". "Reduced normal symbol time" refers to a state in which the time from executing a normal symbol lottery to displaying the result of the normal symbol lottery is shortened in the normal symbol display means P53 in the main control display device P50. "Extension of opening of ordinary electric role" is, for the type of winning in the ordinary symbol lottery, the ordinary electric role is placed in a manner in which the game ball can easily enter the winning opening related to the ordinary electric role P770. It refers to changing so as to operate, and as an example, it corresponds to extending and lengthening the total time in which the normal electric accessory is in the easy-to-enter state.

"Normal symbol lottery" is that the above-mentioned special symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, whereas the normal symbol lottery is a lottery related to the operation of the normal electric accessory P770. It differs in that the execution trigger is the entry of a game ball to the normal pattern operation gate device P740, but it is almost the same in that the success or failure, the pattern, and the variation pattern are determined by lottery and that it has a holding function. If you want to express the lottery of the normal pattern lottery, the pattern, and the variation pattern, you can say "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern lottery", "normal pattern fluctuation pattern lottery", such as "normal pattern lottery" (or " Ordinary design") is attached to the beginning.

"Probability state" and "base state" have been explained as elements that distinguish the types of "specific game state", but as an element that constitutes the specific game state, there are also "time reduction state" ("fluctuation time reduction state" , a state in which the "fluctuation time reduction function" is activated). In general, the "time saving state" refers to a state in which the variable display time (variation pattern) per special symbol is shortened and the number of times the special symbol lottery is executed per unit time increases. It is an advantageous state in that many special symbol lotteries can be received per unit time. "Time saving state" (fluctuation time shortening state) is often controlled at the same time as the above-mentioned "high probability state" and "electric chew support state", and rarely constitutes a specific game state by itself.

[Specific game state 1: low probability / high base state]
Returning to the description of the "specific game state", first, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (1), (8) and (12) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (1), (8), and (12) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 1 goes back to the specific game state 1 via a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (2), (7), and (11) in FIG. These game state transition conditions (2), (7), and (11) are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 1, and (d). The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(2) only) can be mentioned. It should be noted that the "number of games played" refers to, for example, "the number of times a special symbol lottery is executed".

When shifting to the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, both the above-described "electric chew support function" and "fluctuation time reduction function" are activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area is the normal figure operation gate device P740, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory A mouth P721 is arranged, and the player can easily receive a normal symbol lottery and a special symbol lottery by performing "right-handed hitting" in which a game ball is shot to the right side area P501R (right-handed area) of the game area. In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is also controlled in the above-described "time saving state" in the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state).

To explain the progress of the game in more detail, when the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) occurs, the player shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area, Entering (passing) the operation gate device P740 is performed as the first procedure, and by entering (passing) the normal pattern operation gate device P740, the normal symbol lottery is received in the main control board P40. The normal symbol lottery in the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is a hit with a high probability (about 1/1) due to the operation of the normal pattern probability variation function, so the game ball is 1 to the normal pattern operation gate device P740. When the ball enters (passes), one operation of the normal electric accessory P770 occurs. When the normal electric accessory P770 operates, the pachinko game machine P on which the premise is, the second start winning opening P721 that triggers the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol becomes easy to enter, and the player continues the second. As a procedure, a game ball is shot toward the second start winning opening P721. When the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, the detection information is input to the main control board P40, the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is executed, and the execution right of the special game (big win, small win). A lottery related to the acquisition of is executed.

The specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the execution of the jackpot, the type of jackpot executed, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). In the case of winning a small winning game, it is often assumed that the specific game state does not end, but depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, winning a small winning game (or winning multiple small winning games, or In some cases, it is designed to end with the acquisition of a small winning game. When the specific game state 1 (low probability/high base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 2: high probability / high base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (3), (7) and (9) in FIG. The game state transition conditions of (3), (7), and (9) in FIG. 6 are (A) to obtain a big hit game in each state. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 2 is transferred to the specific game state 2 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are satisfied, transitions are made as shown in (4), (8), and (10) in FIG. These (4), (8), and (10) game state transition conditions are (a) to acquire a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 2, (c) For example, a predetermined number of games has passed.

When moving to the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability change function" was further activated for the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state). It differs in that it is "high probability (state)". The progress of the game and the method of playing in the specific game state 2 are the same as those in the specific game state 1, and the difference is that the player can win the big win earlier than the special symbol lottery because the probability of winning the big win is high. do.

The specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) is predetermined by the game state transition condition (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 2 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. If the specific game state 2 (high probability / high base state) ends due to the number of games played, normal game state (low probability / low base state), specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state), specific game state Go to 3 (high probability/low base state).

[Specific game state 3: high probability / low base state]
Next, the progress of the game and the game method in the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) shown in FIG. 6 will be described.

The transition to the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is made by the game state transitions shown in (5), (10) and (11) in FIG. As the game state transition conditions of (5), (10), and (11) in FIG. ) only) and so on. Although not shown, there is also a case where the specific game state 3 is transferred to the specific game state 3 again via the jackpot game. On the other hand, when the conditions for ending the special game state are met, transitions are made as shown in (6), (9), and (12) in FIG. These (6), (9), and (12) game state transition conditions are (c) to obtain a jackpot game of the type that transitions to each game state in the specific game state 3, (d) The elapse of a predetermined number of games (*(6) only) can be mentioned.

When moving to the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), in the premise pachinko game machine P, the "probability fluctuation function" is activated "high probability (state)", specific game state 1 and specific game Unlike state 2, the "electric chew support function" and the "fluctuation time reduction function" are not activated. In the arrangement configuration of each winning device on the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the normal figure operation gate device P740 in the right side area P501 (right hitting area) of the game area, and the second start winning relating to the ordinary electric accessory Although the mouth P721 is arranged, it is assumed that in the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state), the player hits to the right by shooting a game ball to the right side area P501R (right hitting area) of the game area. Also, the probability of winning a hit in the normal pattern lottery is low, and there is no advantage in hitting right.

Therefore, the player proceeds with the game by shooting the game ball to the left area P501L (left-handed area) of the game area, and since this is a high-probability state, there is a high probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery. The game method and game progress are the same as those in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) except that the jackpot game can be obtained early because of the high value.

The specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is predetermined by the game state transition conditions (for example, if the big win is executed, the type of the executed jackpot, etc.) The game ends when the number of games (the number of times a special symbol lottery is received) elapses or when a new jackpot game is obtained (there is a case where the game shifts to this state again after the jackpot game). It is common that the specific game state 3 is not terminated in the case of winning a small winning game. When the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) ends due to the number of games played, it shifts to the normal game state (low probability/low base state).

In addition, the specific game state 3 (high probability/low base state) is different from the board arrangement configuration of FIG. Arrangement configuration of winning devices on the game board, such as by arranging the third start winning port of the type that does not have and activating the "time saving state" so that many special symbol lotteries can be received in a short time And depending on the control of the time saving state, there may be a game state where "right hitting" is recommended.

As described above, the premised pachinko gaming machine P progresses through a plurality of game states, but does not necessarily have all the game states described above. Therefore, among game machine specifications constituted by combinations of a plurality of game states, etc., game machine specifications (sometimes referred to as "specs") that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified below.

Regarding representative game machine specifications ("specs"), examples of the types of game machine specifications related to the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery are "(until the next time) probability change", "ST (number of times cut probability change)". , “V probability variation (also called “ball probability” and “attack round system”)”, and “latency probability variation” can be adopted. The difference in gaming machine specifications due to the difference in the probability variation function is sometimes expressed as "this gaming machine is a '○○ machine (eg: ST machine)'". In addition, in a gaming machine that does not have a probability variation function, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, the accessory continuous operating device will then operate (that is, shift to the big winning game). There is also a game machine specification called "small hit V".

[(Until the next time) fixed]
First of all, I will explain “(until the next time) probability change”. "Variable probability until the next time" is generally, among the plurality of specific game states provided in the pachinko game machine P, the most advantageous game state among the above-mentioned specific game states, "Specific game state 2 ( High probability/high base state) will continue until the next jackpot game right is acquired"Pachinko game machine specifications". In other words, the gaming machine with the “probability change until the next time” is configured so that the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) continues until the right to the next big hit game is acquired, and does not end depending on the number of symbol fluctuations. It is

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the "pachinko machine that continues until the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state) acquires the right to play the next big hit", the probability variation function continues until the next big hit. It may be called "probability change until next time", but the base state is "low base state", and the same game as the normal game state (low probability / low base state) may be required for the electric chew support function. , In this way, it is expressed as "latency probability change" because it is probability change until the next time when the electric chew support function is not operating.

[ST (Variable number of cuts)]
Next, "ST (Variable number of cut probability)" will be explained. "ST" is an abbreviation of "Special Time", and generally, "special game state 2 (high probability / high base state) performs a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of times symbol variation is executed) or the pachinko game machine that will continue until the right to win the jackpot game" is shown.

It should be noted that depending on the type of jackpot, it may be controlled to the specific game state 1 (low probability / high base state) or the specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). Also, in the same way as the above-mentioned "probability change until the next time", the game state is a specific game state 3 (high probability / low base state). For cases to be controlled, it is also possible to configure so as to have a state called "latency probability change (latency ST)".

In addition, even if it is "ST (variable number of cuts)", the period in which the game state is controlled to ST, such as when the special symbol lottery lottery is "until 10000 times", is substantially in a high probability state If it is a gaming machine specification that can be said to guarantee a big hit until the next time, it may be expressed as "until the next time".

As mentioned above, "probability change until the next time" and "ST (number of times cut probability change)" are different in terms of the end of the probability change function of the special symbol lottery, which distinguishes the "probability change state" as a game machine specification is. On the other hand, as in "V probability variation (" ball probability "" attack round system ")" described below, whether or not the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery in the specific game state is activated, that is, regarding the start of execution of the probability variation function, Game machine specifications (“specs”) may be expressed by requiring special conditions.

[V probability change]
Next, a game machine specification called "V probability variation" will be described. "V probability change" is a "specific area P750"("Vzone","Varea", etc.) provided in the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game before the game state shifts to the specific game state. ), when the passage of the game ball ("V winning") is detected under predetermined conditions (such as during the execution of a specific jackpot round), the probability variation function is activated after the jackpot game The game machine specifications of the pachinko game machine that performs control to shift to the specific game state (specific game state 1 or specific game state 3) are shown. Regarding the “specific region” used for “V probability variation”, it may be particularly referred to as “probability variation function operating region”.

As described above, "V probability variation" is a gaming machine specification that indicates whether or not the probability variation function is activated depends on the game result during the big hit game (depends on whether the game ball passes through the specific area P760). Yes, depending on whether the activated probability variation function ends with the same control as the previously described "probability variation until the next time" or ends with control equivalent to "ST" "V probability variation (V-loop) ” and “V-ST” are used to indicate game machine specifications.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P that adopts "V probability change" as a game machine specification, if the V prize is not won during the jackpot game, the probability change function does not operate after the jackpot game, and the normal game state and the specific game It is controlled to state 1 (low probability/high base state). In addition, it is possible to switch whether or not the game state in which the probability variation function is activated after the big win game, depending on whether or not the V prize is won, and at the same time, it is possible to change the operation mode of the electric chew support function. As an example, in the "V probability variation (V-loop)" machine, if you win a V prize, the probability variation function and electric chew support function will continue until you win the next big hit, and if you do not win a V prize, the probability variation function will not operate. First, the electric chew support function is limited until the special symbol lottery is performed 100 times.

[small hit V]
Next, a description will be given of a game machine specification (spec) called "small win V" as a game machine specification capable of providing a game state advantageous to a player in terms of winning a big win without having a probability variation function.

"Small hit V" is a "specific area P760" (sometimes referred to as "V zone", "V area", etc.), the game machine specification that activates the accessory continuous operation device following the small winning game, that is, starts the big winning game. be. In other words, it is a game machine specification that allows a big win game to be obtained without obtaining a big win result as a result of a special symbol lottery by passing through the specific area P760 during a small win.

"Small win V" is a "type 1 (pachinko)" game that activates the continuous activation device and special electric accessories as a result of the special symbol lottery, and the special electric accessories while the continuous activation device is not in operation. It is a specification that activates the role continuous operation device when passing through the specific area P760 during operation (during the opening of the big winning hole P751), and is sometimes referred to as "1st class small win V", while the conventional pachinko game It is sometimes referred to as a "mixture of 1 type and 2 types" because it has playability similar to the specifications of so-called "2 types of pachinko" machines.

In general, a pachinko game machine that adopts "small hit V" as a game machine specification does not have a variable probability function (probability variable function), and changes the degree of advantage depending on the presence or absence of an electronic chew support function. That is, when the electric chew support function is activated, the winning opening related to the normal electric role product P770, which is easy to win, becomes a change trigger for special symbols (for example, winning a small win at 1/2) that makes it easy to win a small win. By constructing a starting winning port, it is easy to win a small win under the condition that an electric chewing support function is operating, and it is possible to aim for a big win by winning a V prize during a small winning game. By doing so, it is possible to increase the possibility of obtaining a big win by a small win instead of increasing the random number range of the big win like the variable probability function.

[Other game machine specifications (specs)]
The game machine specifications described above are typical ones, and since there are several other characteristic game machine specifications known, they will be briefly described below.

(limiter)
"Limiter" is a state in which a specific game state in which the probability variation function and the electric chew support function are activated occurs repeatedly with the execution of the jackpot game (so-called "Consecutive" state). Even if a jackpot game that should originally operate the probability variation function or the electric chew support function is executed when the set number of repetitions (number of consecutive games) is reached, the probability variation function or the electric chew support function It is a function that restricts the operation. As a limiter function, the function that limits the "probability fluctuation function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "probability variable limiter", and the function that limits the "electric chew support function" based on the number of consecutive times is called "time-saving limiter (electric support limiter)". call. A game machine having a limiter function is called a "limiter machine".

(Fall)
"Falling" is a game machine that executes a "falling lottery" that determines whether or not to end the probability variation function every time a special symbol lottery is performed during the period when the probability variation function of the special symbol lottery is operating. Show specifications. In the situation where the electric chew support function is operating along with the probability fluctuation function, if you win the fall lottery, the operation of the electric chew support function will end when the probability fluctuation function ends, or only the probability fluctuation function will end. However, the operation of the electric chew support function may continue.

In addition, it is possible to combine a plurality of game machine specifications described above. 1) Winning the fall lottery, (2) Performing a special symbol lottery for a predetermined number of times, (3) Acquiring the right to play a big hit, If either of these conditions is satisfied, the specific game state 2 (high probability/high base state) ends (shifts to another game state).

Next, the control of the main control board P40 governing the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, will be described. It should be noted that the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise of the description of the present embodiment, will be described on the premise of a pachinko gaming machine that adopts "ST (variable number of cuts)" as the gaming machine specifications (specs) described above. . In the description of the embodiment, the notation of "P-s ◯◯" indicating the processing step in the figure is described as "step ◯◯" in the text.

[Main control board power-on processing (main control board main loop processing)]
The main control board P40 of the premised pachinko game machine P first executes a power-on process (step 1000) when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. Here, details of the power-on process will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on processing is started in the main control board P40 of the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, the initial setting relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the main control board P40, is performed (step 1002). The initial setting is to appropriately perform settings necessary for subsequent operation of the CPU, and the details thereof will be omitted.

When the CPU initial setting is completed, input port confirmation processing (step 1004) and power failure information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) are executed. ).

More specifically, the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is a "set value ” can be changed, and the flag indicating whether or not the ``setting confirmation process'' for confirming the ``setting value'' is in the state of performing This is a process of generating information for determining whether or not to be established (whether to turn on) in the game stop state setting process to be performed later. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the detection status of the frame open switch P131 (a switch that detects that the front frame is opened with respect to the outer frame), and the detection status of whether the ram clear switch P48 is operated by the player , data including data indicating whether or not the setting key switch P49 is rotated is generated as 1-byte data.

In the subsequent power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006), the pachinko game machine P normally shuts down the power when the power was turned off last time, and the control data related to the game state when the power shut-off occurred normally. This is a process for confirming whether the data is normally saved and stored in the storage area of the CPU of the main control board P40. If the data is not normal, the game is stopped in the game stop state setting process (step 1008) described later as an error. This is the process of setting (turning on) a flag to stop.

In the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), after the process in the power-on process is completed and the process shifts to the main loop process to start the game, a flag is set to prevent the player from actually playing the game. Based on the results of the input port confirmation process (step 1004) and the power failure information confirmation/checksum process (step 1006), the "setting change status", "setting confirmation status", and "unrecoverable status" are displayed. This is a process of setting a flag for shifting to any game progress disallowed state of "error state". Details of the "game stop state setting process" are described in FIG.

In the game stop state setting process, first, it is determined whether the frame is open based on the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) (step 1100). If the front frame P2 of the pachinko game machine P is open to the outer frame P1 when the power is turned on (YES in step 1100), the specific bit of the 1-byte data is "1" Therefore, the subsequent processing of step 1102 is omitted. On the other hand, if the frame is not open when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, it is assumed that some of the essential operations for executing the setting change process are not satisfied, and the 1 generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004). Operation information of the setting key switch is calculated from the byte data so that it becomes OFF data. Although not shown, whether the result in step 1102 is YES or NO, calculation is performed so that the frame open bit in the 1-byte data is also OFF data.

In the subsequent step 1104, it is determined whether or not the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) is information that allows determination of "there is a setting change operation". In the premise pachinko game machine P, the situation where it is determined that "there is a setting change operation" is (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (the frame is being opened when the power is turned on), and (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON. and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON. As described above, among the 1-byte data, the information of the frame open switch P131 is set to OFF, and it is determined in this step whether both (2) and (3) are satisfied. For example, if two specific bit data are "1", it is determined that there is a setting change operation (the active data indicating that the two switches are on does not necessarily have to be "1"; One data may be "0"). Then, if it is determined that there has been a setting change operation, that is, if it is determined YES in step 1104, data indicating "setting being changed" is stored as a game stop state flag, and the game stop state setting process is terminated ( step 1106, step 1118). On the other hand, if NO is determined in step 1104 , the process proceeds to step 1108 . In addition, when the setting value information stored in the RAM (RAM=Random Access Memory) of the main control board P40 is abnormal data (in the case of recovery operation from an unrecoverable error state), as the initial setting value The data corresponding to the setting value "1" is set in the setting value storage area (step 1118).

Next, at step 1108, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred. A game stop error is an error that requires RAM clearing and setting (change) processing of setting values when the game cannot proceed, such as checksum abnormality (RAM abnormality) or setting value abnormality. refers to The determination of step 1108 determines whether or not to set the game stop state based on the processing result of the power-off information confirmation/checksum processing (step 1006) and the error information stored during the previous power-off processing. . When it is determined that an error state should be established (when determined as YES in step 1108), the game stop state flag is set to "unrecoverable error state" and the game stop state setting process is terminated (steps 1110 and 1118). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to the subsequent step 1112 .

In the subsequent step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated. In the game stop state setting process, as a state when proceeding to the step,
(a) When an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state is being performed, in other words, in the determination of "there is a setting change operation", (1) the frame opening switch P131 is ON (frame is being opened when the power is turned on). , (2) the setting key switch P49 is ON, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is ON, is not satisfied,
(a) when the ram clear operation for data clear is performed, in other words, (2) the setting key switch P49 is on, and (3) the ram clear switch P48 is on. when it is sufficient,
(c) When the power is turned on without performing any operations such as "setting change operation", "setting confirmation operation", "ram clear operation",
Either In these states, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 1004) are: (a) bit data indicating ON/OFF of the setting key switch P49 is "1 (ON data)"; Either the bit data indicating ON/OFF of the operation detection state of P48 is "1 (ON data)" or (C) all 1-byte data is OFF data (for example, all bits "0").

Then, in step 1112, it is determined whether or not the ram clear switch P48 has been operated, and if there has been a ram clear operation (if YES is determined in step 1112), the pachinko gaming machine enters the game ready state after clearing the ram. In order to make the transition, a process of clearing the game stop state flag is performed (step 1114). On the other hand, except when the RAM clear operation is performed, the current 1-byte data is set as it is. If NO), the bit data indicating the operation status of the setting key switch P49 is "1", and the 1-byte data indicating the game stop state flag is stored as data indicating "setting confirmation" ( step 1118). Further, when there is neither a RAM clear operation nor an operation to shift to the setting confirmation state, the 1-byte data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 1004) is originally data indicating that the game is not stopped as a game stop state flag. It is set as no-game-stop information.

Regarding the game stop state flag set in the "game stop state setting process" (step 1008), if a value indicating some stop state is stored, the main flag which is the game allowable state in the power-on process (step 1000) In the interrupt processing (step 2000) which is the main part of the game progress control executed after the transition to the loop (steps 1028 to 1036), the value indicating the stopped state is referred to, and the progress of the game described as "basic game progress" These controls will be described later in the description of interrupt processing.

Returning to the description of the power-on process in FIG. 7, the following process will be described. When the game stop state setting process (step 1008) ends, it is determined whether or not there is a RAM clear operation (step 1010). The ram clear operation is that the ram clear switch P48 is operated when the power of the pachinko game machine P is turned on. This processing is executed both when the setting key switch P49 is off and when it is on. If it is determined in step 1010 that the ram clear operation has been performed, a predetermined portion of the memory area of the ram of the main control board P40 is initialized.

In the subsequent processing from step 1014 to step 1020, a processing of setting an effect control command (effect command) for recognizing the state of the game machine from the main control board P40 to the effect control board P41 when the power is turned on is performed. More specifically, in step 1014, processing is performed to clear from the storage area the effect control commands that have not been transmitted when the power was cut off last time (when the power was cut off). Then, in step 1016, information about the current game state of the main control board P40 that has returned after power-on is generated as an effect control command. An effect control command indicating the played state is set in an area for storing the transmission data of the effect control command.

When the processing related to the setting of the effect control command at the time of power-on is completed, the necessary data (driving signal ) is output from the output port to the special electric accessory drive means P70 and the normal electric accessory drive means P71. (Step 1022)

Then, when the processing up to step 1022 in the power-on processing is completed, the CPU of the main control board P40 is processed to set the generation interval of the interrupt processing time (step 1024). In the premise pachinko game machine P, the interval at which interrupt processing ( FIG. 9 , step 2000 ) to be described later is executed is set to 4 ms (milliseconds). When this process ends, the game shifts to a cyclic process called a main loop in which the player is ready to play, and the cyclic process in the main loop is repeated until a power failure occurs.

(Main loop)
In the main loop processing of the main control board, as shown in FIG. 7, first, in step 1026, processing is performed to prohibit the occurrence of interrupt processing, and until the processing of the main loop is completed (interrupt is permitted in step 1036). (until) limit the execution of interrupt processing.

When the interrupt is disabled, in the following step 1028, a watchdog timer called a CPU for the main control board P40 runs out of control (such as a situation where the process loops and does not proceed) to monitor the occurrence. Clears (initializes) the area that stores the clock information.

Then, in step 1030, it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (for example, whether a power failure signal sent based on a voltage drop from the power supply board P44 is input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40). If a power failure occurs, the current game state is stored, power failure information and checksum information are stored, and power failure processing (step 1032) stops processing of the main control board P40 as a CPU. ). If power failure has not occurred, the process proceeds to the next step.

In step 1034, a process of updating the random number used for the special symbol lottery and the random number value used for the normal symbol lottery is performed. Some of these random values are updated in interrupt processing, which will be described later, and this is processing to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant due to random numbers being updated only in interrupt processing. If there are processes that are executed irregularly in the interrupt process, it is also possible to prevent the random number update cycle from becoming constant by adopting a method such as updating random numbers according to those processes. Therefore, it is not essential to provide random number update processing in the main loop.

Step 1036 is the final processing in the main loop, and performs processing for enabling interrupts. Immediately after that, the process returns to step 1026, which is the first process in the main loop, to disable interrupts. If the CPU of the main control board P40 receives an input indicating the state of the state that the state has been set, an interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed.

[Interrupt processing]
Next, the interrupt processing (also called "timer interrupt processing") performed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described with reference to FIG. In the premised pachinko game machine P, most of the progress of the game is controlled by interrupt processing (step 2000), and the submodule program provided to be changeable according to the game machine specifications (spec) is universally fixed. are configured to be read out and controlled in the order of The processing for these submodules is briefly described below.

(clear watchdog timer)
At the beginning of interrupt processing, watchdog timer clear processing is provided. This process is the same as the watchdog timer clear process in the main loop process (FIG. 7, steps 1026 to 1036) executed by the CPU of the main control board P40. (Step 2002)

(Input port confirmation processing)
In the input port confirmation process, by confirming the information input to the input port of the CPU of the main control board P40, it is possible to identify whether or not there is input information as information necessary for judgment in subsequent processes. This is the process to generate. (Step 2004)

The information input to the input port includes an input signal indicating the operation status of the ram clear switch P48 and the setting key switch P49, and an input signal indicating the operation status (whether touched or not) of the handle P204. , An input signal indicating the game result by detecting a game ball such as a special figure 1 starter switch P712 and a large winning opening switch P752, a magnetic sensor P73, a door open sensor P131, a vibration detection sensor P72, etc. provided for fraud monitoring There is an input signal that indicates the detection status of the sensor.

In the input port confirmation process, the input signals of these input ports are read three times in 10 μs (microseconds), and the data that becomes the same data (same bit) in all readings is the input data ("level data") for this interrupt. ) in the RAM of the main control board P40. Of the data read three times, the data that was determined in the previous interrupt processing (interrupt processing 4 ms before) is adopted as the level data for the portion that is not the same data in all the readings. If the data cannot be read normally in the above, the data stored in the previous interrupt will not be updated.

Then, when the input data (level data) for this interrupt is determined, a comparison operation is performed with the input data for the previous interrupt to generate "rising data" (data specifying the bit where the input data changed from off to on), Stores data specifying the switch that has been switched to ON input by the interrupt this time.

(random number update process)
Random number update process is software This is a process of updating so-called soft random numbers, which are random numbers to be updated (step 2006). In the premised pachinko game machine P, the random numbers used for the special symbol lottery and the normal symbol lottery are those in which the random number generation circuit updates the random numbers at the update cycle on the circuit, and those which are updated at the software cycle. By combining them, it is configured to maintain the randomness of various random numbers when obtaining random numbers.

In the random number update process, as described above, the process of updating the soft random numbers is performed.
(a) A random number is updated by incrementing (+1) or decrementing (-1), and if the upper limit (or lower limit) of the random number range is exceeded, the lower limit (or upper limit) is set;
(b) Subtracting (or adding) an arbitrary prime number to a random number, and adding (or subtracting) the value of the random number range +1 (or random number range -1) when the random number range is exceeded,
(c) Repeatedly increment (or decrement) from the random number set as the initial value, and when one cycle of updating is completed, set the separately updated "initial random number" as the new initial value and perform the same update. Repeated ones (also called initial value updating random numbers),
Various update methods can be exemplified. It should be noted that the update method is not limited to the one exemplified in this embodiment, and any method may be adopted as long as the method can maintain the randomness of random numbers.

(Setting control processing)
The setting control process is performed when the game stop flag set during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) in the CPU of the main control board P40 is "setting changing" or "setting checking". (Step 2008)

In the setting control process, it is first determined whether the bit data indicating that the setting key operation of the data stored as the game stop flag during the power-on process is ON data. If the setting key has not been turned on when the power is turned on, this process is exited.

On the other hand, if the bit data indicating that the setting key is being operated in the game stop flag is ON data, the current interrupt Referring to the input information of the setting key switch P49 in the process (generated in the input port confirmation process described above), when the setting key switch P49 is turned off, the game stop flag is cleared and the game is enabled. An effect control command for returning (or starting) the effect to the effect control board is set depending on whether the return is from the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".

Also, in the power-on process (see FIG. 7), if the game stop flag is "changing settings", the role of the "setting change switch" at this interrupt timing is played until the setting key switch P49 is turned off. Check the operating status of the ram clear switch P48 (switch operated to change the set value). When the game stop flag is "under change of setting", in the current interruption, when the rising data related to the operation of the setting change switch P48 is generated, the "set value" is changed to the next in the predetermined change order. Change the data so that it becomes the set value. For example, in the case of a pachinko game machine P having set value data such that the setting is switched in order from 1 to 6, every time there is start-up data based on the operation of the setting change switch (ram clear switch P48), the setting is set in this setting control process. Perform processing to increase the value by "1" (when the set value before the operation is 6, it is changed to 1 as the next value).

In the premise pachinko game machine P, by providing the processing in the setting change state and the setting confirmation state during the interrupt processing (see FIG. 9), the operation of the setting key switch and the setting change switch is monitored at the cycle of the interrupt processing. A program for periodic monitoring during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) that enables the output of display data to the display device by the LED output process described later, and the interrupt process cannot be set separately (see FIG. 7) can be omitted. Note that, during the power-on process, it may be configured to monitor switches related to setting changes and setting confirmation, control the display device, and update the set values.

(Game stop monitoring process)
In the game stop monitoring process, the CPU of the main control board reads the data of the game stop flag generated during the power-on process (see FIG. 7) executed when the power of the pachinko game machine is turned on, and determines whether the game is stopped. This is a process to confirm whether (Step 2010)

In the game stop monitoring process, if some game stop information (game stop flag) is stored in the read game stop flag data, for example, if the game stop flag data is not 0 but one of the bits is "1 ”, it is determined that the game is in a stopped state (a state in which the game needs to be stopped), and assuming that the game is stopped, part of the processing during the interrupt processing (“timer subtraction processing (step 2014)” in FIG. 9 to “special electric Accessory control process (step 2028)") are omitted.

In the premise pachinko gaming machine P, as a state in which the game needs to be stopped, that is, in a state in which the player cannot play the game, "setting changing", "setting checking", "unrecoverable error" is occurring" can be exemplified.

(Timer subtraction processing)
The timer subtraction process is a process of updating the timer data used for time management regarding the progress of the game (step 2014).

Examples of timer data update processing include management of the variable display time set when the variable display of special symbols is started, operation time of the special electric accessory P755 during the big hit game (open time of the big winning opening P751 ) and other timer data update processing triggered by game progress, timing processing for error determination such as detecting ball clogging, LED lighting pattern in main control display device P50 such as special symbol display devices P51 and P52 and a process for timing a period for outputting information from the external information output terminal P77 or the like to an external device (such as a hall computer).

The timer data to be updated by the timer update process is stored in the storage area (ram storage area) of the main control board P40, divided by type of timer data such as "1-byte timer" and "2-byte timer". Each is stored in a storage area.

In the timer update process, processes such as "1-byte timer update process" and "2-byte timer update process" are performed on the storage area that stores the types of individual timer data, and the time values of various timers are updated. I do. In the timer update process, the timer data stored in the storage area is decremented (-1). If the stored timer data is already "0", it will be processed to be "0" even after processing (if it becomes a negative value, it will be set to "0", Do not decrement if "0", etc.).

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the cycle of one interrupt is 4 ms, so in the case of 1-byte timer data, only the managed object that ends in a maximum of 255 updates (about 1 second) is controlled. It is possible, but if there is no game information managed within one second (when there is little), it is possible to configure only with 2-byte timer data and without 1-byte timer update processing. is. Also, if it is necessary to manage a time value that cannot be managed with a 2-byte timer, it may be configured to have timer data that can manage a longer time than a "3-byte timer".

(Effective period setting process)
Validity period setting processing is a period for controlling the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode for winning holes that can be changed to the easy-to-enter mode or the difficult-to-enter mode (mainly the big winning hole P751 and the winning hole related to the normal electric accessory P770). And, it is a process of setting the valid period in the valid extension period, and setting the invalid period for the other period (when the winning opening is in the difficult-to-enter state and the valid extension period is not valid). (Step 2016)

In the premise pachinko game machine, the winning of the second start winning opening P721, which is the second starting winning opening P720 provided with the large winning opening P751 as the big winning device and the normal electric accessory P770, is set as the valid period. It becomes the processing to do.

In addition, during the effective extension period, the large winning opening P751 (special electric function P751 (special electric function P755) and ordinary electric accessories such as P770 are treated as effective periods even after the control period for executing the opening control has passed. control period.

Further, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, when the specific area P760 (V area) is provided, an effective extension period for the passage of the game ball with respect to the specific area P760 may be set. The validity period of the specific area is also set.

(Prize monitoring process)
The winning monitoring process determines whether or not the winning is valid based on the winning of game balls to various winning ports (large winning port P751, starting ports P711, P721, general winning port P731) in the pachinko game machine, It is a process of generating information that triggers the process of generating (occurrence of suspension) the right of special symbol lottery for balls and starting entrance balls. (Step 2018)

The contents of the processing are (a) detecting the presence or absence of a winning prize for each of the various winning ports in a predetermined order based on the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004); If there is a winning during the valid period, and if there is a valid winning for each winning slot, (c) a performance control command indicating winning information for each winning slot to be sent to the performance control board P41. setting, (d) updating a counter value (referred to as a "winning counter") for storing the number of occurrences of operation triggers based on winning for each winning opening (in other words, among operations based on detection of various winning openings); update a counter value that stores the number of unprocessed operations in ).

In addition, in the winning monitoring process, not only the occurrence of winnings to various winning holes, but also the out ball detection switch P792 provided for counting out balls, the operation hole switch P742 that triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game machine Depending on the specification, it is also determined whether the game ball enters or passes through the specific area P760 (V area), and in addition to the occurrence of the prize ball and the occurrence of the special symbol lottery, the operation of the gaming machine (for example, In this process, presence or absence of detection of the game ball required for the process of transmitting information indicating that the operation port switch P742 or the specific area P760 has passed is performed with respect to the effect control board P41.

(Working opening monitoring process)
In the operation port monitoring process, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 start-up data is generated from the data generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), processing related to the occurrence of a hold related to the normal symbol lottery is performed. conduct. (Step 2020)

More specifically, when the normal pattern operation port switch P742 is detected, the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is confirmed, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit, a random number is stored as a new reservation. Because it is possible, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area that stores the number of reservations and increasing the number of reservations information by 1, the general pattern accuracy random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number Get it from the generator circuit or get the current corresponding soft random number and store it as pending.

(Normal symbol control process)
In the normal symbol control process, normal symbol lottery, normal symbol fluctuation display, and normal electric accessory P770 are processed (step 2022). These processes shift to different submodule processes depending on whether the data indicating the control state of the normal symbol called normal symbol status or the control state of the normal electric accessory is performed, and control is performed according to the state. As the status of the normal design, "0: Normal design waiting", "1: Normal design changing", "2: Normal design stop display", "3: Normal electric accessory in operation", "4: Normal "Demonstrating the end of electric accessories" is available, and processing is performed according to each state.

<<Normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "0: normal symbol standby".

In the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is "0". If it is "0", the right to change the normal symbol has not occurred, so the normal symbol control process is exited. On the other hand, if the number of reservations related to the normal symbol lottery is not "0", it means that the normal symbol fluctuation right has occurred, and it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation start conditions are satisfied, and the normal symbol fluctuation is started. Execute the process related to start.

When it is determined to start changing the normal pattern, after subtracting 1 from the holding number information from the area that stores the holding number information related to the normal pattern lottery, the general pattern success or failure random number, the general pattern random number, and the general pattern fluctuation pattern random number are respectively Call it and perform a general pattern lottery, a general pattern pattern lottery, and a general pattern variation pattern lottery, store the lottery results in the storage area of the main control board, clear the random number information used this time, and save the storage area for the pending number information. While performing a process of shifting so as to be processed in the stored order, the normal design status is updated to "1: during normal design fluctuation". Regarding the normal symbol lottery, different lottery tables are used according to the operation status of the above-mentioned "base state" (normal symbol probability variation function, normal symbol variation time reduction function), and it is easy to win in the high base state. , The variable display time of normal symbols tends to be determined to be short.

《Processing during normal symbol fluctuation》
The normal design changing process is a sub-module process called from the normal design control process when the normal design status is "1: normal design changing".

In the normal symbol fluctuation process, the normal symbol fluctuation display time corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determined during the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process elapses, that is, the timer that manages the normal symbol fluctuation display (normal Until the symbol variation display timer) becomes 0 in the timer update process, the normal symbol display device P53 is a process of executing variation display of normal symbols.

More specifically, when the normal symbol fluctuation display timer is not 0, the maximum value of the general pattern display switching counter is "5" every time this process is executed, and the general pattern display switching counter is " 5", a process of storing information on the next light emission pattern is performed in a storage area for storing data for designating the light emission pattern of the LEDs constituting the normal symbol display device P53. It should be noted that the normal map display switching counter is reset to the initial value of "0" at the timing when it reaches the maximum value of "5". That is, the variable display of the normal design is such that the lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 is switched at intervals of 5 interrupts (4ms×5=20ms). In addition, the switching interval can be set as appropriate, for example, if the maximum value of the normal pattern display switching counter is set to 25, the display pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 is switched at intervals of once every 25 interrupts (once every 100 ms). be done.

When the normal pattern fluctuation display time ends, that is, when the normal pattern fluctuation display timer is "0", in this process, the display pattern of the normal pattern stop display pattern determined by the normal pattern lottery is displayed on the main control display device. The data for designating the LED lighting pattern indicating the stop display mode is stored in the storage area for storing the LED lighting pattern of the normal design display device P53 so as to be stopped and displayed on the normal design display device P53 in P50. Then, the normal symbol fixed time (time for displaying the stop display symbol) is stored in the normal symbol stop display timer, and the normal symbol status is updated to "2: during normal symbol stop display".

<<Normal symbol stop display process>>
The normal symbol stop display process is a sub-module process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "2: normal symbol stop display".

In the normal symbol stop display process, it is confirmed whether the value of the normal symbol stop display timer, in which the symbol fixed time is set at the end of the normal symbol fluctuation process, is "0", and at the timing when it becomes "0" Then, a setting process for moving to the next game operation is performed.

When the normal pattern stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal pattern lottery is "hit", according to the winning pattern and the operating state of the base state (normal electric accessory extension function) , Call the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770, set the operation pattern, clear the prize counter related to the normal electric accessory P770, etc., and set the normal symbol status to "3: Normal electric accessory in operation ”.

On the other hand, when the normal symbol stop display timer becomes "0", if the result of this normal symbol lottery is "lost", the normal symbol status is updated to "0: normal symbol waiting". I do.

《Processing during operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operating process is a submodule process that is called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "3: normal electric auditors product in operation".

In the normal electric accessory operating process, based on the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P770 set in the normal symbol stop display process, the opening operation (change to easy entry mode) and closing operation of the normal electric accessory (Change to difficult-to-ball mode) and monitor the establishment of the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory. The end of the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is (a) when the specified number of normal electric accessories winning set as the end condition of the normal electric accessory occurs, (b) the operation of the preset operation pattern ends This is the case (when the opening operation period of the normal electric accessories has ended).

When the condition for ending the operation of the normal electric accessory is established, the timer area for storing the effective extension period of the normal electric accessory is used to measure the extended period of a certain time predetermined corresponding to the structure of the ordinary electric accessory P770. set the time. Then, the time value related to the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration is set to the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer, and the normal symbol status is set to "4: Normal electric accessory end demonstration in progress".

《Demonstration process for ending operation of ordinary electric accessories》
The normal electric auditors product operation end demonstration process is a submodule process called from the normal symbol control process when the normal symbol status is "4: normal electric auditors product end demonstration".

In the normal electric accessory operation end demonstration process, wait until the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer set in the normal electric accessory operation process becomes "0", and the normal electric accessory operation end demo timer becomes "0" When it becomes, the process of updating the normal symbol status to "0: normal symbol standby" is performed.

(Starting door monitoring process)
Starting port monitoring processing, from the data generated in the input port confirmation processing (step 2004), when the rising data of the special figure 1 starting opening switch P712 and the special figure 2 starting opening switch P722 are generated, a special symbol lottery Perform processing related to the occurrence of the hold related to. (Step 2024)

More specifically, when the special figure 1 starter switch P712 and the special figure 2 starter switch P722 are detected, check the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery, and if the number of reservations is less than the upper limit , because it is possible to store a random number as a new hold, after incrementing (+1) the data in the storage area storing the hold number and increasing the hold number information by 1, the success or failure random number, pattern random number, variation pattern A random number is obtained from the random number generator or the current corresponding soft random number is obtained and stored as pending.

It should be noted that, in the pachinko gaming machine P, as a premise, there are two types of special symbols, a first special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 1) and a second special symbol (sometimes referred to as special figure 2). Since the symbols are provided, for each starting port provided on the game board P5, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol and the data of the starting port switch are called, and the pending number is added and the random number is acquired for each starting port. is processed.

In addition, when the starting opening to be processed is composed of the starting opening (electric chew) related to the normal electric accessory, the starting opening winning related to the normal electric accessory P770 is valid in the valid period setting process described above. After judging whether or not it is performed within the period, if it is within the effective period, the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, when storing random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, the obtained random number information is used in advance by using the advance notice judgment value table, and the content of the variation when the variation based on the various random numbers to be withheld is executed in advance. Information that can be guessed is generated, and notified as an effect control command to the effect control board P41 (referred to as "pre-determination command", "pre-determination information", and "pre-reading determination command"). Pre-judgment commands are generated for each of the win/fail random numbers, pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers, and when transmitted to the effect control board P41, the effect control board P41 uses the lottery related to the execution of the "prefetch effect" described later. be done.

(Special symbol control processing)
The special symbol control process (step 2026) includes state information for managing special symbols called special symbol status (also referred to as "special symbol status") and special electric accessory status (also referred to as "special electric game status"). Depending on the state information for managing the operating state of the called special electric accessory, any of the special symbol variation start management (special symbol variation start monitoring control process), special symbol variation process, and special symbol stop symbol display process or

The special symbol status includes "0: waiting for special symbol fluctuation", "1: special symbol fluctuating", "2: missing symbol stopped display", "3: big hit symbol stopped displayed", "4: small hit The status of the special electric role product is "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role product in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", "3 : Big win end demonstration in progress", "4: Small win special electric power in operation", "5: Small win closed", and "6: Small win end demonstration in progress". It should be noted that, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, there may be cases where no small win is provided, and in that case, there is no status data related to the small win. Control based on these statuses will be described later.

The special symbol control process is performed based on a predetermined order (priority order) when there are a plurality of special symbols. As a predetermined order, the second special symbol is preferentially controlled, and in the situation where both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol is changed first. The game machine specification processed so as to be started (the second special symbol preferentially fluctuates) is called "second special symbol (special figure 2) priority digestion control", and the implementation of the pachinko game machine P as a premise In the description related to the form, the processing related to this type will be illustrated and described.

In the special symbol control process, first, the second special symbol is controlled. When the control of the second special symbol is started, the information of the special symbol status of the first special symbol and the special electric accessary product status is referred to first. If the special electric role product status is data indicating that the big win game or the small win game is in progress (when the special electric role product status is other than "0: waiting for winning"), the first special symbol is fluctuating. If the special symbol status of the special symbol is other than "0: waiting for special symbol variation", the process is completed without performing the process.

When the situation is such that the control of the second special symbol is executed, a process of updating the timer value of the control related to the second special symbol is executed. The timer is updated by decrementing (-1) the data in the storage area storing the timer, and if the result of the decrement is a negative value, "0" is set. Then, when the update of the timer ends, based on the special symbol status corresponding to the special symbol 2, a sub-module process, which will be described later, is called and executed. Although it has a timer subtraction process even during the interrupt process, the timer data updated by the special symbol control process is not included in the timer updated by the timer subtraction process, and in the special symbol control process It manages timer data for control related to special symbols.

<<Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control process>>
The special symbol variation start monitoring control process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "0: waiting for special symbol variation".

In the special symbol variation start monitoring control process, it is confirmed whether or not the special symbol being processed as a target is reserved, and if there is no reservation, the process is finished, and if there is a reservation, the subsequent process is executed. The subsequent process is a special symbol lottery that is performed when the fluctuation is started. In the special symbol lottery, first, the data stored as set values are read and inspected to determine whether or not the set value information is appropriate. If the set value is appropriate, the data in the area storing each flag indicating the game state etc. is referred to, and the appropriate lottery table is selected. After being stored in the storage area, the special symbol status is updated to "1: during special symbol fluctuation". In addition, the content determined by the special symbol lottery is transmitted to the performance control board P41 as a performance control command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command), and the content of the variable performance executed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. is used as information for determination processing (lottery processing). The details of the special symbol lottery will be described later.

《Processing during special symbol fluctuation》
The special symbol fluctuating process is a sub-module process that shifts when the special symbol status is "1: special symbol fluctuating".

In the special symbol variation process, the timer for managing the variation display time of the special symbol is monitored until the variation time of the special symbol determined by the variation pattern lottery passes, and until the remaining variation time becomes "0", every interruption. With the special symbol display switching timer (maximum value "24") to be updated, the special symbol display device (second special symbol display device P52 (at the time of control of special symbol 1) to show the variable display of the special symbol every 25 interrupts performs switching processing of the lighting display pattern of the first special symbol display device P51)).

When the remaining variable display time of the special symbols becomes "0", it indicates that the variable display of the special symbols has been executed once for an external device (data counter, hall computer, etc.) connected to the pachinko game machine P. Setting of information for outputting an external signal, processing of setting a symbol fixation time for fixed display of a special symbol stop display pattern, and stop display indicating a stop display pattern determined as a result of a win-or-fail lottery and a pattern lottery. Setting of lighting pattern data for displaying the pattern on the special pattern display device P52 (P51) is performed. Then, the special symbol status is set to any one of ``2: Losing symbols are stopped and displayed'', ``3: Big win symbols are stopped and displayed'', and ``4: Small win symbols are stopped and displayed'' according to the result of the lottery.

<<Process during special symbol missing symbol stop display>>
The special symbol lost symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "2: during lost symbol stop display".

In the special symbol lost symbol stop display process, it is checked whether the value of the timer for managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation process has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. Update the special symbol status of the special symbol that is currently running to "0: special symbol variation standby", and the remaining game count of the game state (probability variation function, electric chew support function, variation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery As well as updating, it confirms whether the end condition is satisfied, and when the game state transition condition is satisfied, it performs control (flag off, etc.) related to the transition of the game state.

<<Processing during special symbol jackpot symbol stop display>>
The special symbol big-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "3: big-hit symbol stop display".

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display processing, it is checked whether the value of the timer managing the symbol fixing time set in the special symbol fluctuation processing has become "0", and if it becomes "0", it becomes a processing target. While updating the special symbol status of the special symbol that is being played to "0: special symbol variation standby", the special electric role product status is updated to "2: large winning opening closed". Furthermore, in order to end the game state (probability fluctuation function, electric chew support function, fluctuation time reduction function) related to the special symbol lottery, the processing of clearing the remaining number of times information storage area and the operation flag storage area is executed. Then, in order to execute a jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot pattern, the information in various storage areas used as data during the previous jackpot game is initialized from the jackpot pattern information, and the special electric role product P755 is controlled during the jackpot game. Set content data.

In the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, further, a process of transmitting an effect control command for executing a big win game effect (big hit start demo effect) to the effect control board P41 is executed. In addition, in accordance with these processes, a right-handed indicator P56, which is one of the constituent elements of the main control display device P50, indicates a game state in which a right-handed game in which a game ball is shot aiming at the right side of the game area is recommended. Setting of the lighting pattern data for lighting the LED which is lit at times is also performed.

<<Process during special symbol small hit symbol stop display>>
The special symbol small-hit symbol stop display process is a process that shifts when the special symbol status is "4: during small-hit design stop display".

As in the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process, the special symbol big hit symbol stop display process is performed with the end of the symbol fixing time, setting data related to the operation of the special electric accessory P755, and turning on the right hand indicator light P56. Such setting processing is performed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the underlying technology, when a small winning game is executed (stop display of small winning symbols), unlike when the big winning symbols are stopped, the game state related to the special symbol lottery (high probability state or High base state) does not have processing to end, and the game state is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the end condition is satisfied for each game state, similar to the processing of the special symbol lost symbol stop display process. Control. In addition, in accordance with these processes, the special electric role product status is updated to "5: Closed for small prizes". Depending on the specifications of the game machine, as a modified example, when a small winning game is executed, the specification is designed to have a process for forcibly ending the game state (high probability state or high base state) in the same way as when the big winning pattern is stopped. is also possible.

When any one of the above sub-module processes is selectively performed, the first special symbol process is performed following the second special symbol process. Regarding the processing of the first special symbol, only the information to be referred to is different from the processing of the second special symbol (for example, regarding whether or not the fluctuation can be started, the special symbol status of the second special symbol is not the special symbol status of the first special symbol. , etc.), the description is omitted because almost the same processing is repeated.

《Entrance order digestion control, parallel control》
In addition, in the explanation of the special symbol control process described above, the explanation was based on the process related to the "second special symbol priority digestion control", but in the case of adopting a game machine specification different from the pachinko game machine on which this assumption is made. Alternatively, it is possible to proceed with the special symbol control process in a different process. A brief description of typical examples will be given below.

"Entering ball order digestion control" is a game machine specification in which the reservation information corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is processed one by one in the order of occurrence. While one pattern is fluctuating, the other is not displayed, and in a certain game state, both the reserved ball corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved ball corresponding to the second special pattern are generated. It is a specification that is often adopted when it is expected.

"Parallel control (parallel digestion)" is different from the above-mentioned "second special symbol preferential digestion control" and "entering order digestion", and at the same time both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time. It is a type of game machine specification that can be used. Since two symbols can be digested at the same time, it is possible to increase the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time. In addition, when the special electric accessory P755 is activated along with the stop display of one special symbol (when a big hit or a small hit is executed), the other symbol is forcibly lost and the symbol is stopped, or the variable display is performed. A specification that suspends the subtraction of the remaining time is appropriately adopted. As an example, when one special symbol becomes a big hit, the other special symbol is forcibly removed and stopped and displayed, and when one special symbol becomes a big hit or a small hit, the other special symbol is displayed. It is possible to adopt a specification that temporarily suspends the variable display of special symbols.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
The special electric role product control process executes submodule processing related to the operation of the special electric role product P755 according to the data content (value) of the special electric role product status (sometimes referred to as the special electric role product status). This is the process of managing the operation of the object (step 2028). In other words, when executing the big winning game or the small winning game, each state in the big winning game or small winning game state is controlled, and the opening and closing of the big winning opening P751 is controlled.

As described above, the special electric role product status includes "0: Waiting for winning", "1: Special electric role item in operation", "2: Closed big prize opening", and "3: Demonstrating the end of big win". , ``4: small winning special electric is in operation'', ``5: small winning closed'', and ``6: small winning ending demonstration in progress''.

Among these special electric role product statuses, if the status is "0: Waiting for winning", it is because the player has not yet acquired the right to execute the big winning game or the small winning game by playing the game. , The special electric accessary product control process ends without performing the process.

Then, when the special electric role product status is other than "0: Waiting for winning", one of the processes described later is executed according to the status.

<<Process during operation of special electric accessories>>
Special electric auditors product in operation process is a process that is executed when the special electric auditors product status is "1: special electric auditors product in operation" or "4: small hit special electric in operation". This process is a process in a state in which a so-called round game (unit game) is being executed in a special game (a state in which the opening of the big winning opening P751 can be controlled).

In the special electric accessary product in operation process, first, a process of determining whether or not the end condition of the round game (unit game) is satisfied is performed. The conditions for ending the round game are (a) whether the specified number of winnings (also called "count") corresponding to the activated special electric accessory has been performed, or (b) the operation pattern of the special electric accessory to be executed. It is determined that the opening time (opening pattern) set as has ended or has ended when either of the following is satisfied. If these conditions are not met, the special electric accessary product control process in this interrupt process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. In addition, among the operation patterns (opening patterns) of the special electric accessory P755, there is a pattern that opens and closes the big winning opening P751 multiple times, and when these patterns are executed, one round While the timer used for the determination of (a) becomes "0" multiple times during the game, after confirming whether or not there is next operation data during one round game, condition (c) " If it is determined that there is no next operation pattern data in the current unit game, it is determined that the above (b) is satisfied.

On the other hand, if either of the round game end conditions (a) or (b) is satisfied, as a subsequent process, the closing time of the big winning opening is stored in the closing time management timer of the special electric accessory. , the special electric role product status is incremented to be "2: Closed big prize opening". Then, the command data for notifying that the round game has ended is set as the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the process ends.

《Processing while the big winning mouth is closed》
The large winning opening closing process is a process that is executed when the special electric role product status is "2: large winning opening closed" or "5: small prize closed". This process is a process in a state of being controlled "between rounds" between so-called round games in a special game, and before the start of the first round at the start of a big win game or a small win game When the state is controlled by the state of "big win start demonstration (period)" or "minor win start demonstration (period)", or after the round game of the final round is completed, the process during the winning end demonstration, which will be described later, is executed. This is a process related to the state of being controlled during the waiting period until it becomes possible.

In the big winning opening closing process, first, it is determined whether or not the big winning opening closing time set in the special electric accessory operating process has passed, and the closing time management timer is not "0", that is, the closing time If has not elapsed, the special electric accessary product control processing in this interruption is terminated.

When the closing time of the big winning opening has passed, whether the operation (round game) of the special electric role product P755 whose operation has ended first was the final round game in the current winning game (big winning game, small winning game). It is determined whether or not, and different processing is executed at the end of the final round game and at the end of the round game other than the final round (or at the time of winning start demonstration). It should be noted that, to determine whether or not it was the final round game, the cumulative data of the number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 operated during this winning game is the maximum number of times of operation of the special electric auditors P755 in this winning game , and the accumulated data of the number of operations of the special electric accessory P755 is "0" at the time of the winning start demonstration.

When it is determined that the final round game is finished in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the execution pattern of the winning end demonstration according to the type of winning (the type of special symbol that started the big winning or small winning). (mainly winning end demonstration time data) is read and set. Then, the special electric accessory status is incremented to set "3: big win end demonstration in progress" or "6: small win end demonstration in progress", and a production command for executing the winning end demonstration production is set in the production control board P41. to do Furthermore, in order to set the effective extension period of the big winning opening P751, the time value data determined as the effective extending period is stored in the timer that manages the effective extending period of the big winning opening P751, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end of a game other than the final round game (or at the time of a winning start demonstration) in the processing during closing of the big winning opening, the effect control command for the effect control board P41 is issued to the effect control board P41. Information that makes it possible to identify whether there is (N round start demo command * N is an integer) and recommended firing position during winning game Sends information to instruct (right-handed command).

Then, the special electric role product status is decremented and updated to ``1: special electric role product in operation'' or ``4: small winning special electric prize in operation'', and the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening P751 during the round game. Initialize the data in the data area for counting. Then, the operation pattern data of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory P755) in the round game is set as the time value related to the first opening of the big winning opening P751 during the round game (or closing immediately after the start of the round game). and increment the data in the storage area regarding the cumulative number of operations of the special electric accessory P755.

(Prize ball control processing)
The prize ball control process is a process for giving a game ball as a prize ball to the player in response to winning of a game ball in a prize winning hole arranged on the game board P5. The processing contents are configured to execute the following three sub-module processes. (Step 2030)

<<Payment data reception monitoring process>>
The payout data reception monitoring process is a process of confirming the presence or absence of a control command related to execution of prize ball payout transmitted from the payout control board P43 to the main control board P40, and receiving (storing) the transmitted command. . The main control board P0 stores the information transmitted from the payout control board P43 in two registers (storage areas). Register 1 is called a status register, and stores information for determining whether or not there is information transmitted from the payout control board P43 and whether or not the transmitted information has been transmitted normally. It is The other register is called a data register, and stores control content information regarding payout control transmitted from the payout control board P43. If the status register is abnormal, the data in the data register is stored as payout control information. store in the area.

<<Payment command request processing>>
In the payout command requesting process, winning counter data for each winning opening storing data on the number of winnings of various winning openings stored in the winning monitoring process (step 2018) is confirmed to confirm whether or not there is an unpaid winning. In the confirmation process, each winning hole is confirmed in a predetermined order, and if it is determined that the winning counter data for one winning hole is not "0", the number of winning balls of the corresponding winning hole , a process of transmitting a control command for executing the payout of game balls to the payout control board P43. By this process, even if the winning counter data for a plurality of winning holes is not "0", the number of payout control commands transmitted to the payout control board P43 in one interrupt is limited to one.

<<Payout command control process>>
In the payout command control process, it is checked whether or not the payout control board P43 has normally received the information regarding the number of payouts. It will happen. Until the command reception status is determined in the payout command control process (it is determined whether the command has been received normally or an error has occurred), the next payout control command transmission in the payout command request process is performed by the payout command request process. And it is temporarily interrupted by the flag data set to ON/OFF respectively in the payout command control process.

(abnormality detection processing)
The anomaly detection process is a process for confirming whether or not an anomaly has occurred based on information from a sensor provided for fraud detection in the premise pachinko game machine P. FIG. (Step 2032)

More specifically, regarding the input of sensors such as the vibration sensor P72, the magnetic sensor P73, the radio wave detection sensor P74, and the frame opening sensor P131, the occurrence of an abnormality is detected based on the input information generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004). This is the process of determining whether or not the In addition to the various sensors, the sensor also detects unplugged harnesses for electrical connection, short circuits on wiring, and the like.

Then, when there is abnormal data for any of the determination information, after storing the corresponding error flag to be turned on, a command for notifying the error information is set as the effect control command for the effect control board P41. do.

(Sensor detection judgment processing)
In the sensor detection determination process, the period during which sensor or switch detection was continuously performed is determined from the sensor or switch detection data (level data) generated in the input port confirmation process (step 2004), and the process is performed. This is processing for establishing a flag. (Step 2034)

In the sensor detection determination process, when the level data of the target sensor and switch detection data information is ON, the data for counting the continuous ON input period of the corresponding switch is incremented and updated, and various processes are executed. It is determined whether or not a start condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, a process corresponding to the switch to be monitored is executed. When the monitored switch is no longer ON data, the data counting the continuous input period is initialized (updated to "0").

For example, if the winning hole detection switch provided in the winning hole continuously detects that the switch is in the ON state, it is determined that the ball clogging has occurred, and the error state is controlled and produced. Processing of setting command information for performing error notification to the effect control board P41 as a control command, and generation and output request of signal data for notifying the occurrence of an error to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

Switches to be detected in this process include a touch sensor switch provided on the steering wheel P204 and a switch for fraud detection. It also targets sensors that require on-data input for a certain period of time.

(Game state display processing)
The game state display process is a process of generating lighting data for displaying information about the progress of the game on the main control display device P50. Although the name is display processing, output of display contents to the main control display device P50 is performed not by this processing but by LED output processing described later. (Step 2036)

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as an example, an error indicator light (status indicator light P55) indicating that it is in an error state, a special symbol hold indicator light (special figure 1 hold indicator light) that displays the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery P61, special figure 2 reservation indicator light P62), normal design reservation indicator light P63 that displays the number of reservations related to the normal design lottery, etc. are generated, and the lighting data (lighting pattern) is generated and output in the LED output process. Store.

In addition, in the game state display process, when blinking display is required for the LED indicator lights whose lighting is controlled, the lighting pattern switching process is performed by updating the display switching counter for the corresponding LED and comparing the counter value with the threshold value. done. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the number of pending special symbol lotteries can be held up to four, but two LED indicator lights constitute a special symbol holding indicator light (special figure 1 pending indicator light P61 , Two LEDs are provided for each of the special figure 2 pending indicator lights P62), so if there are 3 or more pending numbers, at least 1 LED is not a continuous lighting display, but a blinking display. It is designed to do so.

(output port output processing)
The output port output process is a process of setting to transmit a signal related to a game operation to an electric accessory, which is an operation device on the game board P5 connected to the main control board P40, or to the payout control board P43. (Step 2038)

More specifically, during normal symbol control processing or during special electric auditors control processing, when the operation pattern of normal electric auditors or special electric auditors is set, by processing during output port output processing, normal electric Signal data for opening (or closing) each electric accessory is output to the accessory drive means P71 and the special electric accessory drive means P72 (solenoids in the pachinko game machine).

Also, to the payout control board P43, a control signal (shooting permission signal) for permitting or prohibiting the shooting of the game ball based on the player's handle operation is generated by the output port output process and output. The output content of the launch permission signal is set according to the state of communication with the payout control board P43 and the occurrence of an error that requires the game to be stopped.

(Production control command transmission process)
The performance control command transmission process is a process of outputting a performance control command to the performance control board P41. It is a specification for transmission (step 2040). Regarding the setting of the effect control command to be transmitted, it is set (set) in a predetermined storage area as an untransmitted effect control command during other processing.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, a storage area called a ring buffer, which cyclically refers to a storage destination, is used as an area for storing unsent effect control commands. In the storage area called the ring buffer, in the next process called "write pointer" and "read pointer", which are updated by each process of writing (setting) the effect control command and reading (sending) the effect control command It is a specification to execute writing and reading of the effect control command using information for calculating the address of the storage area where the command is written and the address of the storage area where the command is read.

Also, in the pachinko game machine P, the configuration of the effect control command is composed of two data, MODE data indicating the type of the command and EVENT data indicating the content of the command.

Returning to the description of the specific processing contents of the effect control command transmission processing, the description will be given. In the performance control command transmission process, first, it is confirmed whether or not the information of the write pointer and the read pointer match, and if they match, it is determined that there is no performance control command to be transmitted, and the processing ends. On the other hand, when the data of the write pointer and the data of the read pointer do not match, it is determined that there is an effect control command to be transmitted, and the process proceeds to the next process.

When it is determined that there is a performance control command to be sent, MODE data and EVENT data are called from the address of the storage area of the main control board P40 calculated from the data of the read pointer, and temporarily stored in the register in the CPU of the main control board P40. After storing and clearing the effect control command in the read destination ring buffer, the value of the read pointer is updated to the value used in the next process.

As effect control commands, MODE data and EVENT data stored in the register of the main control board P40 are transmitted P41 to the effect control board in order. First, the MODE data is set to the effect command output port which is an output port for transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board P41, and the strobe signal for causing the effect control board P41 to perform the reading operation is output. The main control board P40 will subsequently output the EVENT data, but in order to ensure a sufficient period until the effect control board P41 receives the MODE data, after performing processing with a waiting time of 26 μs, the MODE data As in the case of transmission, setting of the EVENT data to the output port and output of the strobe signal are performed. When the strobe signal is confirmed, the performance control board P41 generates a performance control command reception interrupt and receives the performance control command transmitted from the main control board P40.

(external information output processing)
In the external information output process, the external information output terminal 77 outputs, as a signal, information related to the game status and information related to security such as the occurrence of an error to an external device (data counter or hall computer) connected to the premised pachinko game machine P. (Step 2042). The signal output from the external information output terminal 77 is output based on the data set to the output port of the main control board P40, and when a signal output trigger occurs, it transmits a pulse signal that is ON potential for a certain period. Others continue to output an on-potential until a condition for terminating signal output is satisfied.

In the external information output process, first, a signal regarding the game state is generated. As a signal related to the game state, in order to be able to identify the type of the specific game state, in the premise pachinko game machine P, the operating state (probability state) of the probability variation function and the operating state (base state) of the electric chew support function By referring to the corresponding information and the information indicating that the special game is in progress (big win or small win), external output data is output so that the corresponding data is transmitted when each game state is controlled. Update. Note that depending on the specifications of the game machine, the output signal is generated based on information indicating whether or not there is a variable time reduction function, or information indicating that a particular type of jackpot is being won. There may be cases.

As an output signal output in the external information output process, not only a signal relating to the game state but also information based on the occurrence of a predetermined game result is output. For example, the variable display of the special pattern is executed, a signal (also referred to as a "fixed pattern signal") that is transmitted each time it is displayed stopped, and the starting port switch (special 1 starting port switch P712, special 2 starting port switch 722) or the big winning opening switch P752, or every time a game ball is detected entering each winning opening, or the payout of winning balls based on the winning balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). Each time, data is set in the external output data, and there is a signal that is transmitted to the external device. These signals are mainly composed of pulse signals, and a signal of 1 is transmitted as a pulse signal with a continuous ON potential of 128 ms. After the output of the pulse signal is finished, the pulse signal is output again after outputting an off-potential for a certain period of time.

In the external signal output process, the data in the storage area storing the error flag as a result of the confirmation in the abnormality detection process (step 2032) and comparison data for confirming whether or not an error requiring security notification has occurred. are calculated and compared, and if it is determined that a security signal needs to be output, the output data to be set to the output port is updated so as to turn on the bit corresponding to the security signal in the external output data.

(LED output processing)
The LED output process is a process for outputting data indicating a lighting pattern to a plurality of LEDs constituting the main control display device P50, causing the LEDs to emit light, and displaying the game progress and game status. (Step 2044)

The LEDs that make up the main control display device P50 are the first special symbol display device P51 (8 LEDs), the second special symbol display device P52 (8 LEDs), the first special symbol holding indicator light P61 (2 LEDs), the second Special symbol holding indicator P62 (2 LEDs), normal symbol display device P53 (2 LEDs), normal symbol holding indicator P63 (2 LEDs), round indicator P54, status indicator P55, right-handed indicator (total It has a total of 32 LED display units (8 LEDs).

In addition, the state indicator light P55 is a collective representation of indicator lights related to a plurality of game states, and in detail, a special figure probability variation indicator light indicating whether the probability variation function is operating or not, and the operation of the normal symbol probability variation function It refers to indicator lights such as the normal map probability indicator light that indicates the presence or absence (whether or not the electric chew support function is activated), and the error indicator light that indicates the error state.

In the LED output process, 1 byte of the lighting data for the display section of the main control display device is set to the output port for each interrupt processing to light the main control display device P50, and the main control display device P50 is updated for each interrupt processing. LEDs of the main control display device P50 to be lit by this interruption are selected based on the value of the digit counter, lighting pattern data corresponding to the gaming situation is selected, and set as display data to control the lighting of each LED. It's like

That is, in the premised pachinko game machine P, the main control display device P50 is used for 32 LEDs, and the main control display device P50 is operated by a dynamic lighting method in which lighting data is output in order using at least four interrupt processes. controlling.

In addition, in the LED output process, in addition to the LED display to be visually recognized by the player as the main control display device P50, lighting control is performed only when the game stop flag is in a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or an unrecoverable error state. It also controls the lighting of the LED display.

Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P on which the assumption is made, if the game stop flag stores a flag indicating some kind of game stop state, the setting of the lighting pattern data for the main control display device P50 is omitted. , during setting change, during setting confirmation, and during an unrecoverable error, the LEDs constituting the main control display device are all extinguished. As a modification, when the game stop flag is set, light emission may be displayed using a fixed lighting pattern set for each state. For example, the main control display device P50 may be configured to light up all the LEDs constituting the .

(Outside area control processing)
Out-of-area control processing includes test signal output processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines (processing for outputting signals used for testing pachinko gaming machines) and performance display device display. It is configured by a process for controlling (step 2046). The meaning of "outside the area" is that it is a process executed by a program in a storage area that is not included in the calculation of the capacity of the program storage area stipulated by the pachinko game machine rules.

In the test signal output process, a process of setting information relating to the game result and game state to the output port from the test terminal P78 of the pachinko game machine P to an external test device is performed. In the performance display process, the game state is confirmed, the number of out balls and the ratio (base) of the number of out balls and the number of prize balls are calculated, updated as display data, and displayed on the performance display device P59. This is the process of outputting.

[Special design lottery]
Next, the special symbol lottery executed by the CPU of the main control board P40 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 14. FIG. The "special symbol lottery" is mainly composed of "win/fail lottery", "hit symbol lottery", and "fluctuation pattern lottery".

(Lottery drawing)
The "win or fail lottery" is a lottery that determines whether or not the special electric accessory P755 will be activated based on the result of the executed special symbol lottery. , "big win", "minor win", or "lose". Depending on the specifications of the pachinko game machine P, there are some machines that do not have a "minor win" as a lottery result of the winning lottery. In addition, when configured to have the first special symbol and the second special symbol, it has a "small hit" as the lottery result of the win or lose lottery for one special symbol, and the lottery result of the other win or fail lottery is "small hit". It may be configured so as not to have "hit".

Win/fail lottery uses a random number called a "win/fail random number" out of the random numbers acquired and stored when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting winning port P711, second starting winning port P721, etc.). lottery. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the range of possible random numbers (random number range) of the success/fail random number is 65536 from "0" to "65535", which is composed of so-called 2-byte random numbers. When a lottery is performed, the result of the lottery is determined by comparing the value of this random number with a lottery table (called a "lottery table") used for the lottery according to the game state and set values. process.

FIG. 10 illustrates several lottery tables used for lottery. FIG. 10(A) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a low probability state, and FIG. 10(B) shows a winning/failing lottery table in a setting value of "1" and a high probability state. (C) and (D) of FIG. 10 respectively show win/fail lottery tables in a low probability state and a high probability state when the set value is "6".

For example, in the situation of executing the lottery lottery using the lottery table of FIG. Assuming that the numerical value is "1500", the flow of the lottery will be explained.

First, it is determined whether or not it belongs to the jackpot random number range ("0" to "327") as the result of the first lottery. Specifically, the process of subtracting the random number value range "328" of the big hit to be determined from the random number value "1500" of the hit/fail random number of this time is performed. At this time, the result of the subtraction is "1172", which is not a negative value. Therefore, it is determined that the hit/fail random number of this time does not belong to the big hit random number range.

As a subsequent process, the random number value "1172" after the calculation of the previous big hit judgment is compared with the random number range ("328" to "65370") as the determination area for the success or failure lottery result of the success or failure lottery table. . More specifically, the random value range "65043" to be determined is subtracted from the primary data "1172" of the hit/fail random number. At this time, since the calculation result is a negative value, information corresponding to the result of "lost" is stored as the result of the lottery.

Hypothetically, if a special symbol lottery is performed in a high probability state with respect to this random number "1500", the lottery will be made on the win/fail lottery table shown in FIG. Determine whether it belongs to the range (“0” to “1639”). At this time, the result of the comparison operation (subtraction) between the hit/fail random number and the random value range is a negative value, so the result of the hit/fail lottery is determined to be a "big win".

The pachinko machine P, which is the premise, adopts a method of judging the lottery result by sequentially comparing the data obtained as random numbers and the random number range according to the lottery result of the lottery table. The same lottery method is adopted for the winning pattern lottery and the fluctuation pattern lottery, which will be described later. In addition, the lottery method is not limited to the above example, and a method of directly determining whether or not the obtained random number matches the random number that will be the big hit may be adopted. may be employed.

(Hit design lottery)
"Hit symbol lottery" receives the lottery result of the special symbol lottery described above, the control contents related to the operation of the subsequent special electric accessory P755, and the lottery table of the fluctuation pattern lottery described later (see FIGS. 12 to 14) ) is the process of determining the stop display design of the special design as the lottery result necessary for switching.

FIG. 11 shows a jackpot pattern lottery table (see FIG. 11A) used in the winning pattern lottery when the lottery result is "big hit", and when the lottery result is "small hit". , a small winning symbol lottery table (see FIG. 11 (B)) used in the winning symbol lottery, and a losing symbol lottery table (Fig. 11 ( C)) is shown.

The "symbol random number" used in the winning symbol lottery has a random value range of "1000" ("0" to "999"). 0” to “3”, and the lower 1 byte is represented by “0” to “255”.

To explain the winning symbol lottery with a specific example, for example, when the winning lottery result is a big hit, the first special when the symbol random number is "400" (the upper byte is "1" and the lower byte is "144"). In the case of the winning pattern lottery for the pattern, using the lottery table of the upper 1 byte "1" shown in FIG. is obtained as a result of the lottery, and when the special symbols are changed and displayed, the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is the first special symbol display device P51 (in the case of the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol display device P52) is stopped.

Then, when the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is stop-displayed on the first special symbol display device P51, the jackpot game corresponding to the "5R probability variation 2" symbol is executed. At this time, when "5R probability variation 2" is displayed as a stop display symbol on the first special symbol display device, and when "5R probability variation 1" is displayed as a stop display symbol, each of the 5 rounds of the jackpot game. The content of the round game (opening pattern and opening time of the big winning hole P751, etc.) may be varied based on the stop display pattern, and control may be performed to vary the control content in the specific game state that shifts after the jackpot game. It is possible. These jackpot games and control assignments in the specific game state are appropriately determined in order to realize game performance according to the specifications of each pachinko game machine P, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Incidentally, in the pachinko gaming machine P, which is the premise, the lottery shown in FIG. After determining the type of jackpot such as 5R probability variable 2", the type of jackpot is determined by performing another lottery from a plurality of patterns to determine the stop display pattern for executing the jackpot of the corresponding type. , and determination of the symbols to be displayed to be stopped, and the winning symbol lottery may be executed in two stages.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P as a premise, as shown in FIG. , the types of winning symbols that can be determined are different. More specifically, in the premised pachinko gaming machine P, the possibility of determining "10R probability variation 5" to "10R probability variation 8" is increasing in the second special symbol jackpot, and the first special symbol It can be said that it is easier to win a big win with a large number of rounds than a winning symbol lottery, and it is easy to win a big win that shifts to a high probability / high base state as a specific game state.

FIG. 11B illustrates a small winning symbol lottery table. The small winning symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery success or failure lottery is "small win", and the lottery method is the above-mentioned big winning symbol lottery table. is similar to

In the small winning symbol lottery table shown in FIG. 11 (B), most of them are winning the "small winning 1" symbol, and when the second special symbol lottery result is "small winning". , a "small hit 2" can be determined. It should be noted that one type of small winning pattern may be used, or three or more types of patterns may be determined.

As an example of the purpose of providing a plurality of small winning symbols like the pachinko game machine P that is the premise, the number of game balls that can be obtained by simply changing the opening mode of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game For example, in a pachinko game machine P that adopts a small win V as a game machine specification (spec), to separate a small win game that is easy to win a V in a specific area and a small win game that makes it difficult to win a V. The purpose is to execute a mode such as differentiating the small winning patterns and differentiating the small winning patterns in order to separate the type of the specific game to be shifted after the execution of the big winning game after winning the V prize.

FIG. 11(C) illustrates a lost symbol lottery table. The lost symbol lottery table is a table referred to in the winning symbol lottery when the result of the special symbol lottery lottery is "lost", and the method of lottery is the jackpot symbol lottery described above with respect to the first special symbol. It is the same as the time of the table, and has a different method for the second special symbol.

More specifically, FIG. 11(C) shows only the winning symbol lottery table for the first special symbol. Only in this case, lottery processing is performed, and either "lose 1" or "lose 2" is determined as the stop display symbol.

The "lost 2" pattern is a winning design with a probability of about 6.4% when the 1st special pattern is lost. A special lottery table (not shown) is referred to to facilitate determination of the variation pattern (variation time). For this reason, "losing 2" may be referred to as "reaching loosing pattern" or the like.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, does not have a winning symbol lottery table for the second special symbol, and is designed to determine a winning symbol of 1 regardless of the random number of symbols. The table comparison process itself is omitted, and one missing pattern is stored. It should be noted that it is also possible to use a lottery table that always wins one symbol so that a winning symbol is won.

(fluctuation pattern lottery)
The "fluctuation pattern lottery" is a process of randomly determining the fluctuation display time until the stop display symbol, which is the lottery result of the special symbol, is stopped and displayed. In the premised pachinko game machine P, a special pattern lottery is used as the performance time required for notifying the performance display device P80 whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, and what the type of the jackpot is in the case of a big win. is determined using a variation pattern table, which will be described later.

FIG. 12 mainly shows a normal game state (low probability/low base medium) and a low base state (non-electric chew support state), that is, in the premise pachinko game machine P, a game ball is shot to the left area P501L of the game board. It represents the “low base medium fluctuation pattern lottery table” in which it is recommended that

The "ID" shown in FIG. 12 represents information stored as a result of the variation pattern lottery, and the "variation pattern" is displayed on the effect display device P80 when the same ID is won. It shows a representative example of the mode of production of variation. "Variation time" is the variation display time value of the special symbol in the target variation pattern lottery result (variation pattern ID), and represents the time from when the special symbol is variably displayed to when it is stopped.

"Holding 1 fluctuation" to "Holding 4 fluctuation" in FIG. Then, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) is N, the fluctuation pattern lottery is executed using the fluctuation pattern table of "Hold N fluctuation". That is, the variation pattern lottery for the first special symbols in the low base state is configured to vary the variation pattern table to be used depending on the number of reservations. It should be noted that, when the game ball enters the start winning hole in the state where there is no suspension, it is temporarily stored as suspension for processing, so the variation pattern lottery is executed using the variation pattern table of "Hold 1 variation". be.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12, the variation pattern lottery corresponding to the second special symbol is independent of the number of reservations, and is configured to use a common lottery table regardless of the number of reservations. It should be noted that, although not shown, as a result of the pattern lottery, if "missing 2 (reaching lost pattern)" is determined, even if it is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, 1 variation that does not depend on the number of reservations It is configured to perform a variation pattern lottery using a pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for loss 2).

"10R probability variation", "5R probability variation", "10R normal", and "5R normal" in FIG. is a "big hit", and represents that the lottery is performed by appropriately selecting the variation pattern table according to which symbol the symbol lottery result is. In FIG. 12, since the second special symbol is not the subject of the game in the low base state, the big hit variation pattern table is expressed so as to be determined in a form independent of the big hit symbol, but the big hit of the second special symbol is also expressed. , and may have a plurality of patterns according to the type of the jackpot.

Here, a specific example of the variation pattern lottery in the low base state will be described with reference to FIG. As a specific example, it is a lottery of the first special symbol, the situation where the variation pattern random number is "30000" and the number of pending balls at the start of variation is 3 (situation where the number of pending is 2 after the start of variation). I will explain the situation where the winning or losing lottery result and the winning symbol lottery are "lose 1".

First, since the number of reservations at the start of fluctuation is "3", the fluctuation pattern table of "maintain 3 fluctuation" is used. The lottery process compares (subtracts) the variation pattern random number and the random number range corresponding to the variation pattern ID of each lottery result, similarly to the lottery process in the winning lottery described above, and determines whether the random number belongs to the same range. do. By performing this process, at the timing of normal fluctuation B of ID "2", the result of repeating the comparison operation between the fluctuation pattern random number and the random value range becomes a negative value, and the same ID is determined as a fluctuation pattern lottery, special After the variation display for 7 seconds is performed as the symbol variation display, the missing symbol 1 is displayed on the first special symbol display device P51.

Next, the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state will be explained using FIG. The configuration of the variation pattern table in the high base state has a configuration that is the same as the variation pattern table in the low base state shown in FIG. It is constructed so as to have a table and a table for each jackpot pattern at the time of jackpot. Although FIG. 12 and FIG. 13 are configured so that many fluctuation patterns can be determined in common, this is also for the purpose of simplifying the explanation, and is determined by the low base state and the high base state. It is also possible to configure such that the variation patterns overlap only a few times or do not overlap at all.

In addition, as a feature of the fluctuation pattern table in the high base state, the lottery result of the second special symbol "H3 fluctuation" and "H4 fluctuation" at the time of loss is the shortest fluctuation time of the pachinko game machine P that is assumed. A 2-second variation (variation pattern ID “12”) is configured to be determinable.

Furthermore, as a characteristic point of the variation pattern in the high base state, the 10-second variation of the variation pattern ID "4" is always determined for the lottery of the first special symbol. The reason for configuring the first special symbol with a variation of 10 seconds is that the player's profit in the case of a big hit is large in the big hit symbol lottery table shown in FIG. This is due to the fact that there are many jackpot patterns that shift to the probability fluctuation state as the specific game state), and by performing a large number of variable displays corresponding to the second special pattern with priority, the jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. is intended to make it possible to obtain In addition, even if there is almost no difference in the degree of advantage between the first special symbol and the second special symbol jackpot game, the first special symbol is based on the fact that the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted. It is easy to hold the hold established in the normal game state (low base state) until the end of the specific game state (high base state), which is an advantageous state, to avoid the variable display. Another object is to avoid requiring a large amount of game balls to cause the first special symbol hold in the low base state, relative to the amount of game balls used to generate the special symbol hold.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a special table for a limited period, representing a special variation pattern table that is referred to during a specific period. In FIG. 14, as an example of a special variation pattern table provided in the pachinko game machine P as a premise, special variation pattern tables for three periods are comprehensively described.

More specifically, FIG. 14 shows the period from the 1st to the 4th fluctuation after the big hit (so-called "retained ream" (retained ream), which is a big hit with 4 holds that exist at the time of the big win). period), and the reach variation of 55 seconds, which is referred to in the n-th to m-th variation after the big hit, is likely to be selected. Referred to in the high frequency reach table (IDs "52", "53", "54", "72") and the last variable display in the high base state, the "result effect" described later is mainly executed. It is shown that a different "result variation table" (for IDs "55" and "73") is provided in the premise pachinko game machine P.

Such a special variation pattern table that is referenced for a limited period of time is called a "special variation pattern table" or a "limited frequency (pattern table)".

In the premise pachinko game machine P, the reference period of the limited frequency pattern table can be referred to during a predetermined period after the jackpot game (operation of the special electric role product, in other words, operation of the role product continuous operation device). are doing. Regarding these reference periods, it is possible to change whether or not to refer to them depending on the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern). It is also possible to configure them differently. What kind of special variation pattern table to refer to in what situation can be appropriately set for each pachinko game machine, and the details are not limited to the examples, and if necessary, the details can be explained in a separate description. and

Next, the control of the effect control board P41 that performs control related to the effect operation in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, will be described. The operation control of the performance control board P41 is less restricted in the model test of the game machine, and has a higher degree of freedom in design than the control of the main control board P40, so it will be explained in the following explanation. It is not limited only to the processing, and the timing at which the processing is performed can also be changed as appropriate.

[Power-on processing of production control board to main loop processing]
In the premise pachinko game machine P, power-on processing (step 4000) is executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 when the power of the game machine is turned on. Here, details of power-on processing of the effect control board P41 will be described with reference to FIG.

When the power-on process (step 4000) is started in the effect control board P41 of the pachinko game machine P as a premise, the initial setting process relating to the operation of the CPU, which is the arithmetic device provided on the effect control board P41, is performed. (Step 4002). The initial setting process is to appropriately perform settings necessary for the operation of the CPU thereafter, and details thereof will be omitted. There is a time lag between the completion of the power-on processing (Fig. 7) and the power-on processing of the effect control board (Fig. 15). Since there is a risk of deviation, in the initial processing of the effect control board P41 at the time of power failure recovery, the effect information etc. are often initialized so that the effect that was being executed before the power failure is not executed ("effect called “control board reset” and “sub-reset”).

(Main loop of production control board)
In the premise pachinko game machine P, the main loop process is performed after the initial setting process. In the premised pachinko game machine P, the image control board P42 connected to the effect display device P80 (image display device) is set so that the cycle (frame) for drawing the effect image is drawn 30 times per second. Since the cycle is set to approximately 33 ms (30 FPS), the main loop processing loop is performed once at a cycle of 16 ms, which is approximately half the cycle (steps 4002 to 4016).

In the main loop processing of the effect control board P41, clear processing of the watchdog timer for detecting runaway of the CPU is first performed (step 4004).

Subsequently, a process of updating the effect control random number data (step 4006) is performed, and various effect control random numbers used when an opportunity to execute the effect lottery occurs are updated.

Next, input port monitoring processing is executed (step 4008). The pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, is designed to monitor the input port even during the interrupt processing of the effect control board P41, which will be described later. Therefore, monitoring of inputs such as switches, which are necessary monitoring objects in the system, is limited, and monitoring of inputs such as sensors necessary for controlling the effect of the effect movable accessory P560 is omitted. As a modified example, sensors to be monitored for performance may be checked in the input port monitoring process in the main loop process.

The contents of the input port monitoring process are the same as the input port confirmation process of the main control board, from the input data of various sensors, level data is generated and stored, and rising (falling) data is stored. be done.

Subsequently, the effect control board P41 performs effect device control processing (step 4010), and executes control related to effect operations other than the effect display device P80 (image display). The production devices controlled in this process include lamps P82 ("board lamp (P550)" and "frame lamp (P350)"), speakers P83 (upper speaker P370, lower speaker 141), production movable accessories P560, and the like. An effect operation command corresponding to the content of the effect decided to be executed by a process such as the effect control process (step 4012), which will be described later, is transmitted to each effect device to execute the effect operation.

This is because the output of the effect operation commands to various effect devices in the effect device control process (step 4010) must be executed (started) in synchronization with the effect image displayed on the effect display device P80 (image display device). , the signal transmitted at regular intervals from the image control board P42 controlling the effect display device P80 to the effect control board P41 or the signal for forcibly synchronizing is received (the input port monitoring process described above). ), it synchronizes with the effect switching timing of the effect display device P80, and outputs the effect operation command to various effect devices.

In addition, regarding the operation control of the effect movable accessory P560 among the effect devices, it is necessary to control the driving means of the effect movable accessory P560 in a shorter period, so the effect set in this process Regarding the operation pattern of the effect movable accessory P560 to be executed by the operation command, sensor monitoring and operation switching are executed even during an interrupt process (see FIG. 16) of the effect control board P41, which will be described later.

Next, the effect control processing (step 4012) executed in the main loop processing of the effect control board P41 will be described. Effect control processing is based on the result of analyzing the effect control command received from the main control board P40 in the effect control command analysis process to be described later, and the information of the received effect control command itself (such as the lottery result ID of the special symbol lottery) ), input port monitoring processing (step 4008), interrupt processing (FIG. 16), etc., based on the flags established during other processing, lottery or selection processing to determine the contents of the presentation to be executed by various presentation devices. is.

The effect control process selects the effect determination process to be executed based on each flag information and command analysis information, and calls and executes the corresponding effect determination submodule process. As an example of the production content determined here, the process of determining the variation production corresponding to the variation of one special symbol based on the command (win/fail command, symbol command, variation pattern command) related to the execution result of the special symbol lottery (processing to determine the content of notices, reach, and decorative patterns to be stopped), and pre-reading performance (" Based on the information sent as a production control command when executing a pre-reading lottery process that determines whether or not to execute a special game (big hit or small hit), the content of the production during the special game is determined. There is a special game effect content determination process and the like.

In addition, the effect control process is not only the process for the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40, but also the determination process of the error display content when an error is detected by the effect control board P41 (error transmitted from the main control board). (including determination processing of error display content based on information), adjustment of the volume output from the speaker P83 based on the player's input operation such as the effect button P381 and the cross key P383 which are the effect operation means P81, and the lamp P82 It also executes the determination of the effect contents such as the light amount adjustment for changing the light emission luminance of the display and the customization of the effect contents and the effect content determination tendency.

It should be noted that the processing for determining the contents of various effects performed in the sub-module processing called in the effect control process is often subject to the invention, since the specifications unique to each gaming machine are often used. When the pachinko game machine P executes a characteristic process, the details will be explained in the explanation of the embodiment of the pachinko game machine P which is the object of the invention.

Returning to the description of the main loop processing of the effect control board, the effect control command analysis processing (step 4014) will be described as the last processing of the main loop processing.

The effect control command analysis process is based on the information stored as the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40. and set flags. In this process, it is necessary to determine the processing contents according to the command transmitted from the main control board P40. process is executed.

Since there is a possibility that one command (MODE data and EVENT data) will be transmitted for each interrupt processing (every 4 ms) of the main control board P40, the effect control command can Until the period (16 ms) of the main loop processing of the substrate P41 elapses, the analysis of the effect control command is repeatedly executed as long as it can be processed (step 4016).

[Interrupt processing of production control board]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the CPU of the effect control board P41 will be described. Interrupt processing in the effect control board P41, unlike the interrupt processing of the main control board, has a plurality of interrupt processing that is started at different execution timing (see Figure 16 (A) and (B)). In addition, priority is set for these multiple interrupt processes, and if an interrupt with a higher priority occurs, even if the interrupt process is being executed, the higher interrupt process will be executed. controlled by In this description, the production control timer interrupt process (FIG. 16(A)) and the production control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)) will be described as representatives.

(Production control timer interrupt processing)
Effect control timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16(A)) is interrupt processing executed at a 1 ms cycle in the CPU of the effect control board P41.

Port input/output processing (step 5002) is input from the input port of the effect control board P41 to the sensor provided for detecting the position of the effect movable accessory P560 and other sensors (input sensor of the effect operation means P81). From the output port, the drive means (solenoid, stepping motor, etc.) of the movable accessory P560 is driven according to the operation pattern set in the production device control process. A process for outputting a signal is executed. Also, when data is output from the output port, the data in the counter (storage area) for counting the number of times of output is updated if necessary.

The timer update process (step 5004) is a process of subtracting or adding a timer for measuring the switching timing of the effect operation. When the update processing for each timer is completed, a comparison operation is performed with a comparison value, and it is determined whether or not the switching condition for the performance operation has occurred, and information necessary for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) A process for storing the flag in the storage area is performed.

The sensor monitoring process (step 5006) is based on sensor detection data generated in the port input/output process to obtain sensor detection information related to the switching of the effect operation, such as whether or not the condition for switching the effect operation of the effect movable accessory P560 is met. is determined, and processing for switching the operation pattern table is performed, and processing for setting a condition flag for determining the content of the performance in the performance control processing (step 4012) is performed.

The effect button monitoring process (step 5008) is a process for judging whether or not the effect switching condition is established based on the inputs of the effect button P381, the lever P382, the cross key P383, etc., which are the effect operation means P81. In the effect button monitoring process, the level data indicating the input state of each input device generated in the port input/output process (step 5002) and the rising data (data indicating that the level data has changed from OFF last time to ON this time) are used to generate effects. It determines whether or not the operating means P81 is operated and how it is operated.

For example, when start-up data is generated as input information for the effect operating means P81, it is assumed that the player has operated the effect operating means P81, and information such as a flag for executing the corresponding effect is stored. . In addition, if the input is judged only by the rise data, there is a possibility that the effect operation will be switched due to erroneous detection due to electrical noise. It may be determined that the player's operation (sometimes expressed as "single push (single pull) operation" or "single blow operation") on the effect operation means P81 is triggered by the continuation.

Further, when the ON input level data is continuously detected 500 times, that is, when it is determined that the effect operation means P81 has been operated for 0.5 seconds, it is determined as a "long press (long draw)" operation, It is configured to handle as a special operation. In addition, the falling data (data indicating that the level data has changed from the previous ON to the current OFF) may be electrically detected as noise when judging whether or not there is a "long press (long pull)" operation. , In this case as well, similar to the measures to prevent false detection described above, after detection of falling data, based on the detection of input of level data (off data) multiple times, input of "long press (long draw)" operation It is also possible to determine the end.

Then, in the premised pachinko game machine P, depending on the content of the effect being executed, the effect operation means is executed once at a constant cycle (for example, every 0.3 seconds) by executing the "long press" operation on the effect button P381. It is possible to repeat the processing that assumes that there is a "single press (single pull)" input operation on P81. Execution of repetitive processing assuming that a "single-press" operation has been performed is called an "automatic repeated-press" operation. It should be noted that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation is not limited to the operation content illustrated, but by operating a plurality of effect operation means P81 at the same time or by turning on and off a DIP switch provided as a switch different from the effect button, It is also possible to adopt a method of assuming that the "automatic repeated hitting" operation has been executed based on the input of the effect button P381.

Note that the input to the effect operation means P81 has a period treated as a valid operation (“operation valid period”) and a period treated as an invalid operation (“operation invalid period”) depending on the execution status of the effect.

Multi-task processing (step 5010), depending on the value of the task counter (updated between the value "0" ~ "15") that is updated each time the effect control timer interrupt process is executed, effect control generated this time This is a process performed by changing the contents of the process to be executed during the timer interrupt process. The task counter is configured to circulate at a cycle of 16 ms, and the processing for each counter value is executed substantially in synchronization with one cycle of the main loop processing. As an example of processing in each task, whether or not the operation of the image control board P42 can be executed is determined based on a signal (input information is generated by port input/output processing) transmitted from the image control board P42, and the image is displayed. A process of monitoring the operation status of the control board P42 is performed.

The image control command transmission process (step 5012) sends an image control command ("inter-sub command") to the CPU of the image control board P42 so as to execute an image display corresponding to the content of the effect determined in the effect control process P41. ) to the CPU of the image control board P42. Although the image control board P42 and the performance control board P41 may be configured by the same board, they are referred to as the image control board P42 for the sake of convenience in this specification.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the effect control board P41 consists of a first command indicating the type of display content and a second command designating the pattern of the display content as the image control command. It is configured to send.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P, which is assumed, is configured to transmit image control commands in the effect control timer interrupt process. It is also possible to configure such that transmission and reception are performed by providing interrupt processing.

(Production control command reception interrupt)
In the effect control command reception interrupt (FIG. 16(B)), a strobe signal is output in the effect control command transmission process (step 2040) in the interrupt process (FIG. 9) of the main control board P40, and the strobe signal is transmitted to the effect control board. This is an interrupt process that occurs when P41 receives.

When the effect control command reception interrupt is started, the effect control board P41 reads the effect control command (MODE data or EVENT data) transmitted from the output port of the main control board P40, and updates and stores the temporary buffer data (step 5502, step 5504).

When the update of the temporary buffer data ends, it is determined whether or not the reception of one effect control command (a combination of MODE data and EVENT data) has been completed (step 5506). It should be noted that the effect control command transmitted from the main control board P40 has specific bits of "1" and "0" in the 1-byte data.

When updating the temporary buffer data (2-byte data storage area) in step 5504 described above, processing is performed to store the content of the effect control command received this time in the normal lower 1-byte storage area. At this time, if the part of the specific bit in the lower 1-byte storage area of the current temporary buffer data before update indicates that it is MODE data, the storage data of the temporary buffer data is shifted to the upper 1-byte storage area. After that, the EVENT data received this time is stored in the lower 1-byte storage area of the temporary buffer data.

Then, in the determination of completion of reception of the effect control command in step 5506, it is determined whether or not a specific bit in the lower 1 byte of the temporary buffer data is data indicating EVENT data, and it is determined that it is EVENT data. In the case, the reception of the effect control command of 1 is completed (step 5506 YES) and proceeds to the next process, and when it is determined that it is MODE data (step 5506 NO), the transmission of EVENT data from the main control board P40 Until receiving the strobe signal based on, it exits the effect control command reception interrupt, performs other processing and waits.

In step 5506, when it judges that reception of the production|presentation control command was completed, it judges whether the sent production|presentation control command was normal (step 5508). This process is determined, for example, based on whether or not matching data exists in the list data of the effect control commands that can be transmitted from the main control board P40. Then, when it is determined that the command is normal, it is stored in a storage area for storing the effect control command received so as to be analyzed by the effect control command analysis process during the effect control timer interrupt process, In the case of abnormal data, the temporary buffer data is discarded.

[Example of basic image display effects]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 to 20, the basic effects in the pachinko game machine P as a premise will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (during display of decorative symbols stopped) during normal game (during low probability/low base), and FIG. It is a figure showing the situation where it is. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a state in which a jackpot game is being executed, and FIG. 20 shows a game performance during operation of the electric chew support function during a specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). It is a diagram of

(Example of effect display in normal game state)
《Decorative pattern》
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing symbol variation display (decorative symbols are stopped) during a normal game (during low probability/low base). Three numbers are displayed in a substantially central area of the screen in such a manner that the player can clearly see them. These three patterns are called "decorative patterns (P801)" (also called "design"), and are dramatic display items displayed corresponding to the result of the special pattern lottery, and the fluctuation of the special patterns. The display is changed according to the display. Although only numbers are shown in FIG. 17, each number may be displayed with a decoration image such as a character image. Also, in the case where each number is displayed with a decoration image, the display mode of the decoration image and each number may be changed according to the game state. Such a configuration makes it easier for the player to determine the current game state.

The decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed as one effect for one variable display of the special pattern (one special pattern lottery), except when a special effect is performed. Although not shown, when the decorative pattern P801 is variably displayed, the decorative pattern is variably displayed at high speed (transparent display or non-display depending on the case), and animation and production effect images are displayed. By the production called "notice", the production that raises the expectation of acquiring the right of the big hit game is performed.

The decorative pattern P801 shown in FIG. 17 is displayed by scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom) when the variable display is started, and then the left pattern (P801a), the right pattern (P801c), and the middle pattern (P801b) in this order. The stop display symbols determined by the effect control board P41 are stopped and displayed for each symbol row. Generally, when the three decorative patterns P801 are stop-displayed in the same manner (zoroshi), a big hit is reported in a dramatic manner. In addition, while one symbol is displayed in a variable manner, other symbols are displayed. The state in which the right and left symbols are displayed in the same pattern (temporary stop display) is called "reach" ("reach state", "reach state").

The variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is often displayed in a form of scroll display in the vertical direction (from top to bottom), but the form of the variable display is not limited to the vertical direction, and can be scrolled forward and backward using the horizontal direction and depth ( It is also possible to perform a scroll display operation in a diagonal direction, or to perform a rotation operation on the spot without scrolling and to switch the display in order.

Also, the decorative symbol P801 may be stopped and displayed a plurality of times during one time of variable display of the special symbol. At this time, when the stop display is performed a plurality of times, the stop display showing the result of the special lottery is a stop display displayed at the same timing as the stop display pattern of the special pattern is stop-displayed on the special pattern display device. A stop display at a timing other than this is called a "temporary stop (display)." In addition, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display at the same time may be expressed as "main stop".

When the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped, the decorative pattern P801 is not completely fixed in order to distinguish it from the final stop display of the pattern (main stop). It is configured to rotate, move in directions such as up and down or left and right, and swing around one rotation axis. Such a state may be expressed as "shaking fluctuation" in addition to temporary stop.

After the decorative pattern P801 is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display may be repeated again, and generally, the re-fluctuation from the state where the symbols other than the jackpot pattern are temporarily stopped is called a "pseudo-variation (pseudo-run)" effect. , The re-fluctuation that may change the jackpot pattern that is stopped and displayed after the jackpot pattern is stopped is called "promotion (fluctuation)" effect. In addition, when the promotion performance is executed, it may be configured not to change to a jackpot pattern that is more disadvantageous than the stopped jackpot pattern, or to not change to a losing pattern.

In addition, when the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed, there is a kind of special decorative pattern that is not displayed during normal variable display and is displayed only when a part of the effect is executed. (P804)” (special symbol). The special design has a meaning in each pattern, for example, suggesting that a specific jackpot will be executed, suggesting that the above-mentioned pseudo-fluctuation effect will be performed, or a specific reach effect (reach mode) Examples include those that suggest that the advance notice effect displayed in the case) will be executed. When a special symbol is used, the special symbol may be temporarily stopped as the decoration symbol (middle symbol P801b) to be temporarily stopped at the end. A special pattern may be temporarily stopped as a decorative pattern.

《Simple layout (mini layout)》
Three numbers displayed in the same manner as the decorative pattern P801 are displayed on the upper right of the screen. This design is also called "simple design (P802)"("simpledesign") or "mini design", and shows the lottery result of the special design according to the variable display of the special design, similar to the above-mentioned "decorative design". Displayed as a display object.

Unlike the "decorative design", the simple design P802 (mini design) is different from the "decorative design". In accordance with the display on the display devices P51 and P52, one stop display is always performed for one special symbol lottery.

In addition, the variable display of the simple design P802 may be configured to form the same ready-to-win state when the decorative pattern P801 described above is in the ready-to-win state, or to notify the result of the special design lottery. In order to achieve the minimum purpose, it is possible to adopt a simple variable display method such as performing constant display switching until the variable display of the special symbol is in a stopped display state regardless of the decorative symbol P801. good.

《Reserved display area》
A pending display area P810 is provided in the lower area of FIG. In the reserved display area P810, a reserved object P811 corresponding to the reserved (random number) corresponding to the unexercised right is displayed as the special symbol lottery right acquired by the player. The example of FIG. 17 shows a state in which three special symbol lottery rights are reserved.

In the example of FIG. 17, the earlier the execution time of the special symbol lottery is (that is, the earlier the hold is), the closer the position is to the center of the lower part of the screen, and the hold display area P810. The display position of the reserved object located on the rightmost side of the screen is called "H1 (display area)", and as it goes to the left side of the screen, it is "H2 (display area)", "H3 (display area)", and "H4 ( display area)”.

Further, in the vicinity of the right side of the reserved display area P810, an object having substantially the same form as the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 is displayed at a higher position and larger in size than the reserved object P811. This display area continues to display the pending display corresponding to the random number value that triggered the current special symbol variable display from the pending display area, and is called the "variable object display area (P812)". . In addition, the object displayed in the variable object display area P812 is called "the variable object (P813)", but it may also be called "the pending display", and is differentiated from the pending object P811 in the pending display area P810. Therefore, the acronym “applicable” is used.

The display mode of the changing object P813 in the changing object display area P812 does not have to be completely the same as that of the suspended object P811. In some cases, the shape may change or disappear (hidden). Further, the variable object P813 may also be configured so that the display mode can be changed in the same way as the pending display in the pending change look-ahead described later (for example, the shape and color of the object change at the timing during the variable display). ).

《Simple hold display》
Two numbers are displayed side by side in the vertical direction at the substantially central position in the height direction on the left side of the screen. These two numbers represent the current number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols, and are called "simple reserved display (P814)". In the example in FIG. 17, the reserved number of the first special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "3" displayed above, and the reserved number of the second special symbol is indicated by the numerical value "4" displayed below. .

(Look-ahead effect)
《Pending change lookahead》
Also, in FIG. 17, the reserved object P811 in the H3 display area in the reserved display area P810 is displayed in a different manner from the reserved objects P811 in the H2 and H1 display areas. The premise pachinko game machine P is configured such that the display mode of the 3rd retained object P811 has a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the display mode of the 2nd retained object P811. In this way, the effect of changing the display mode of the pending object P811 and displaying it for a specific pending is called "holding change (prefetching)".

It should be noted that it is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. may be changed.

In addition, not limited to "suspension change (prefetch)", when it is determined that the random value stored as suspension is to be executed, the variable display corresponding to the suspension that is the execution target of the production is started. The production that suggests that there is a high possibility that the pending jackpot, which is the target of execution of the production ahead of time, is called the “pre-reading production” (sometimes referred to as the “pre-judgment production”). I'm in.

Then, when executing the "prefetching effect", the hold determined as the hold that is the execution target of the effect may be referred to as "prefetch target hold", "trigger hold", "criminal hold", etc. , The variable display of special symbols based on prefetch target suspension is referred to as "prefetch target variation", "trigger variation", "culprit variation", and the like.

Here, some representative examples that can be adopted in the premise pachinko game machine P are exemplified as "prefetching effect".

《Foresight of Opportunity》
"Chance eye look-ahead" is the variation display of the decorative symbols P801 until the variation of the look-ahead target variation is started. It is a production that will be done. As an example of the rule of the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 predetermined as the chance eye, (a) when the winning pattern is stopped by combining only the patterns with the same hue of the numerical portion of the decorative pattern, (b) When displayed in a regular stop display mode such as ``1'', ``2'', ``3'', ``5'', ``4'', ``3'', etc. (c) A special number such as "7" or a pattern different from a number such as "first" is stop-displayed as a medium-sized stop display pattern.

《Direction movable role-reading》
"Effective movable accessory look-ahead" reads ahead the effective movable accessory P560 or the frame movable accessory P360 (such as the lever P382 of the premise pachinko game machine P1) provided on the game board P5 or the frame (glass frame P3). This is an effect that makes a lively action from the start of the change until the change display of the target change starts or straddles the look-ahead target change according to the effect operation pattern.

《Zone Transition Look Ahead》
"Zone transition look-ahead" moves to a special production mode (called "zone") in the variable display of special symbols before the look-ahead target variation starts, and until the look-ahead target variation is displayed, special This is a look-ahead effect suggesting that the possibility of a big win is high by executing a notice lottery for executing a notice effect corresponding to a special effect mode. For example, "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> big hit", or "normal background display -> look-ahead background display -> winning pattern stops and returns to normal background".

(Display example when executing reach effect)
Next, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a situation in which a ready-to-win effect with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed. As described above, the "ready-to-win effect" is a situation in which decorative patterns (left pattern P801a, right pattern P801c) other than one decorative pattern (middle pattern P801b) are displayed in the same manner, and one more pattern is displayed. It means an effect in a state in which it is announced that a big win will be achieved if the game is stopped in the same mode.

In many cases, the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, has a specification for notifying a big hit by displaying three decorative patterns P801 in the same stop display mode via a ready-to-win effect.

In the example of FIG. 18, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c of the decorative patterns are displayed as "5", and "4", "5", and "6" are displayed as the patterns in the middle pattern row during fluctuation. It shows a situation in which the "4" symbol vibrates violently, and if it switches to "5", it will be a big hit.

Here, in the example of FIG. 18, the left and right decorative symbols "5" are displayed in a smaller size than the decorative symbols P801 during stop display in FIG. The row decorative pattern P801b is displayed in a larger size than the decorative pattern P801 during stop display, and is highlighted. At this time, the decorative symbols displayed in small sizes corresponding to the left symbol P801a and the right symbol P801c may be called "retreat symbol (P803)" or "reach symbol". In the ready-to-win effect, in addition to the example shown in the figure, whether or not a big hit will be announced depending on how the animation of the advance notice effect (ready-to-win effect) displayed with the variable display of the decorative pattern will end. In some cases, the left pattern P801a and the right pattern P801c, which have already been temporarily stopped and displayed, are displayed (or hidden) in a reduced size in the retracted pattern P803 so as to enhance the visibility of the effect that the player wants to pay attention to. ing.

Also, there is a game machine that does not display three decorative symbols P801, and there is also a multi-line reach that simultaneously forms a reach mode of multiple lines, but the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As an exception to the ready-to-win effect, there is a ready-to-win effect called “full-rotation ready-to-win” in which all three decorative symbols P801 are synchronously and variably displayed in the same manner. What is the standard for ready-to-win performance, ``a situation in which decorative symbols other than one decorative symbol are displayed in the same manner, and a state in which it is notified that a big win will occur if one more symbol stops in the same manner''? Depending on the context, a full spin reach is also recognized by those skilled in the art as a reach performance.

Also, in FIG. 18, an "effect setting display area (P850)" is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and in the example of FIG. 18, a volume setting display P851 is displayed as the effect setting display.

The production setting display area P850 has a volume setting function for adjusting the volume level output from the speaker P83 of the game machine P, a light amount adjustment function for adjusting the emission brightness of the decoration lamp P82 of the game machine P, and a production mode. This is an area for displaying the setting status and change status of the presentation mode change function for changing the type of notice presentation to be called and for changing the frequency of occurrence of notice presentation.

The effect setting display area P850 is not always displayed, but is temporarily displayed when the player performs an operation related to the above-described various effect settings (volume adjustment function, light amount adjustment function, effect mode change function). For example, by operating the cross key P383 in the left/right direction, it is possible to display an effect setting display (volume setting display P851) related to the volume adjustment function shown in FIG. In the situation of FIG. 18, when the player further operates the right button of the cross key P383, the set volume level (black area in the figure) increases, and the volume setting value changes from "3" to It is designed to change to "4".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when adjusting the light amount, it is configured so that the change operation is performed by operating the cross key P383 in the up and down direction, and the effect mode change function is performed according to the operation of the effect button. An example of switching the production mode in a predetermined order is given. It should be noted that the operations related to these effect settings may adopt different operation modes in relation to the execution of effects during the game, and can be appropriately adopted other than the exemplified method of changing the settings.

In addition, regarding the display of the effect setting display area P850 and the use of various effect setting functions, it is possible to set a period during which the player's effect setting operation is valid and a period during which it is invalid. When executed, the effect setting display area P850 is hidden and the use of various effect setting functions is disabled.

(Example of effect display during jackpot game)
Next, based on FIG. 19, a description will be given of the display mode of the effect in a state in which a jackpot game is being executed in the premised pachinko game machine P. FIG.

《Production display indicating the type of jackpot》
At the bottom left of the screen and the top right of the screen in FIG. 19, the decoration pattern P801 that triggered the execution of the big hit game is displayed. At the lower left of the screen, similarly to during execution of the ready-to-win production described above, 1 decorative pattern P801 (also called "big hit design (P805)") is displayed in a display mode smaller than the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable display, and the upper right of the screen is displayed. , the simplified design P802 that was displayed when the variable display of the special symbols was completed is still displayed.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the type of the jackpot executed by the player and the number of game balls that can be obtained during the jackpot are determined by the type of the decorative pattern P801 that triggered the jackpot (stopped and displayed when the jackpot occurred). and the game state after the end of the jackpot (normal game state). Therefore, by displaying the decorative patterns (jackpot design P805, simple pattern P802) that triggered the execution of the big win, the type of the big win and the number of game balls expected to be obtained can be determined even during the big win game. It makes it possible to suggest

Further, as a display indicating the type of jackpot, in FIG. 19, an icon image P821 imitating a pentagonal shield is displayed below the character string "ROUND6" (referred to as "round display (P820)"). The letter "MAX" is written in the center of P821. An icon P821 in the figure indicates a jackpot suggested by the character string "MAX", and indicates that a jackpot game of the maximum round of the premise pachinko gaming machine P is executed. This icon P821 is called a "jackpot icon" or a "consecutive (display) icon", and every time the specific game state and the jackpot game are repeatedly executed, the display increases cumulatively, and the so-called "consecutive game" is displayed. This is an effect display for informing the player how many times and what kind of jackpot he has won in the state so that the player can understand.

Although not shown in the figure, the pachinko machine P on which the premise is assumed, "00 bonus!" An effect of informing the player of the type of the big win is executed by displaying "△△ Chance" (suggesting a big win other than the maximum round).

In addition, for example, even if it is suggested that it is a big hit such as "△△ chance" in which the number of rounds to be executed is small, the execution round of the big hit will be performed as "Extra bonus! + 0 rounds" during the big hit round. In fact, it is also possible to execute a "jackpot promotion effect" such as notifying that the jackpot is the maximum round.

It should be noted that the "jackpot promotion effect" is also used when suggesting that a jackpot game is being executed in which a transition to a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the previously notified jackpot type is performed. There is something. For example, from the production of a jackpot game that suggests that the probability fluctuation function does not operate after the jackpot game (referred to as "non-probability variation jackpot" and "normal jackpot"), the probability fluctuation function will operate after the jackpot game (" There is an effect display such as switching to the effect of "probable variable big hit", "specific big hit").

<<Production display showing the progress of the jackpot game>>
Next, when executing the big win game, the effect display showing the progress of the big win game will be described. In FIG. 19, as an effect showing the effect display of the big hit, "round display (P820)" executed by displaying the character string "ROUND_〇" at the upper left of the screen, and displaying the character string "TOTAL_○○pt" at the lower right of the screen. "Acquired ball number display (P822)" executed in , and "Count display (P825)" displayed with 10 circular image objects substantially in the center of the right side of the screen. Although not shown, during the jackpot game, in addition to these displays, an image display such as an animation called "round effect" is displayed.

《Round display》
"Round display (P820)" is a display indicating what round the round game (unit game) being executed is during the jackpot game. The numerical value on the right side of "ROUND" is updated at the timing when the round game is started. The example of FIG. 19 shows a situation in which the sixth round game is being played.

It should be noted that the "round display (p820)" does not necessarily need to be synchronized with the actual number of rounds executed during the jackpot game. For example, in the specifications of the "small win V" described above, the small win game is counted as the first round, and the first round of the big win game executed after the V winning is treated as the second round. In another example, when the opening pattern of the large winning opening P751 in the round game ends with a transition to the easy ball entry state for a short period of time, the value of "round display" is not updated and the large winning opening P751 is closed. There may be a case where the substantially executed round is treated as a “substantial round” only when the open pattern of is in a state of easy ball entry for a long period of time.

《Acquired number of balls display》
"Number of winning balls display (P822)" is a special game sandwiched between "Number of winning balls display (P823 * not shown)" that displays the cumulative number of game balls that have been acquired in one big hit game during execution. There is a type such as "accumulated winning ball number display (824)" that displays the number of game balls cumulatively acquired in multiple jackpots. FIG. 19 shows an example in which a 5-digit display of the number of acquired balls, ie, "accumulated number of acquired balls display (P824)" is displayed. It should be noted that the "big hit acquired ball number display (P823)" and the "accumulated acquired ball number display (P824)" may be simultaneously displayed in parallel.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, the "number of won balls display (P822)" displays the cumulative number of prize balls paid out based on the balls entering the big winning hole P751 during the big win game. However, as the accumulation target of the prize ball payout of the acquired ball number display P822, the payout based on the ball entry into the general winning hole P731 and the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right area P501R of the game board P5 is accumulated and added. may

In addition, as another modification, the display period of "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" may be displayed not only during the jackpot game but also during execution of a specific game, or "display the number of acquired balls (P822)" , may be extended not only during the big win game but also during the specific game or the small win game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P on which the assumption is made, in addition to the "display of the number of winning balls (P822)", the number of accumulated prize balls paid out is divided into "2500 balls", "5000 balls", "10000 balls", etc. Only in a special situation such as when the number of payouts has been reached, it is possible to execute an effect of ``display of the number of obtained balls'' to emphasize and notify the player in addition to the ``display of the number of obtained balls'' (for example, ``GET 10000! !”).

《Count display》
"Count display (P825)" indicates how many more balls can be entered up to the number of game balls set as the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 in one round game, or how many game balls can be entered in this round game. This is a display showing whether the ball has entered the big winning hole P751. The former is displayed as a circular object that is shaded in FIG. 19, and the latter is displayed as a white circular object in two columns at the approximately center position on the right side of the screen.

In the example of FIG. 19, as the sixth round of the game, five balls have already been entered into the big winning slot (indicated by white circular objects), and five more balls can be entered (indicated by shaded circular objects). display) is indicated by the count display P825. The count display P825 is reset to its initial state each time a new round is started.

During the execution of the round game of the jackpot game, the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 is consecutive to the game balls that satisfy the closing condition of the big winning hole P751 depending on the flow of the game balls. Winning may occur, and the occurrence of winning with the number of game balls exceeding the closing condition is called "over winning".

Although not shown, when an "over winning" occurs, a special effect is performed using the object display of the count display P825, special light emission of the effect lamp P82, and special effect sound is emitted from the speaker P83. You may notify Further, with respect to the above-described winning ball number display P822, the number of winning balls paid out based on the winning of "over winning" may be added or may be excluded from addition.

<<Other production display during jackpot game>>
Next, another effect display that is executed in FIG. 19 will be described.

First, the two numbers displayed at the substantially center position on the left side of the screen are the aforementioned simple hold display P814.

The display "Sound_2" displayed on the right side of the decoration pattern (jackpot layout P805) at the bottom left of the screen is the "Selected Music Display (P854)" indicating the title of the song being played during the current jackpot game. . In the premise pachinko game machine P, the player can arbitrarily select a piece of music to be reproduced by operating the production button P381 or the cross key P383 during the first round or the second round during the jackpot game. have specifications. As for the selected music display P854, when the music can be changed, an image of "can be changed with (up) and (down) keys" is displayed near the selected music display P854 as shown in FIG.

In addition, the selection of the production during such a jackpot game is not limited to the selection of music, but it is also possible to change the round production and select the production (production mode) during the specific game after the jackpot game (generally (referred to as “effect customization display (P853)”), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Finally, the "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol displayed at the bottom of the simplified layout P802 on the upper right of the screen are image displays related to "Shooting division notification (P830)" (also called "recommended firing position notification" etc.) is. In the premise pachinko game machine P, during the jackpot game, it is a game state in which it is recommended to shoot the game ball to the right side area P501R of the game area, so "Right shot notification (P832)" ("Right shot" , and the right arrow symbol display) are being executed.

The "beating notification" is displayed not only during the jackpot game, but also during the game in the specific game state or during the game in the normal game state. In particular, in a situation where the game state changes (occurrence/end of a big win or occurrence/end of a specific game state), a display of a size larger than the split notification P830 shown in FIG. 19 is displayed so that the player can easily recognize it. is temporarily displayed in the center of the screen, etc., an effect is executed to notify the player of the recommended firing position in the next game state.

It should be noted that in the "beating division notification (P830)", the one that is temporarily displayed in a large size at the timing of the transition of the game state is the "first division notification image" ("right hitting large display (P831)", " left-handed large display (P833)"), and during the jackpot game or during the specific game state, the recommended firing position in the game state is displayed almost all the time during which the game state continues. It may be expressed as "announcement image" ("right shot small display (P832)", "left shot small display (P834)").

In addition, as another type of effect of "beating split notification (P830)", when detecting a situation in which the game ball is shot at a position other than the recommended shooting position, for example, during a big hit, the left side area of the game area ``Left-handed warning notification'' (``Right-handed attention alerting notification (P835)'' for alerting the player that the game ball should be shot to the right side area P501R of the game area when the game ball is shot to P501L) ) to display a message such as "Please hit right"). In addition, in a situation where the recommended firing position and the player's actual firing position are opposite to each other, "Right-handed warning notification" ("Left-handed attention calling notification (P936)") is executed.

(Example of effect display during specific game state)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a game effect during operation of the electric chew support function during the specific game state (high probability or low probability/high base). There are a wide variety of effects displayed in the figure, but the explanation of what was explained in the previous explanation is omitted, and the effects that have not been explained so far, and the differences from the above explanation A description will be given regarding the effect display having.

First, as an effect display that has not been explained so far, as an explanation of the effect display during the specific game state, the "production mode display (P840)" and the "remaining number of games display (P841)" will be explained.

<<Production mode display>>
The "effect mode display (P840)" is a display that indicates the state of the current effect display mode, and is a display that indicates that an advance notice effect corresponding to the corresponding mode is being drawn according to the state information called the effect mode. . When the presentation mode display is different, it is common that the type of announcement presentation visually recognized by the player is made so that the visual impression is greatly different, although there are some announcement presentations that are partly common. . In FIG. 20, "RUSH_MODE" is displayed, indicating that the game state of the pachinko game machine P as a prerequisite is "ST (variable number of cuts)" (high probability/high base state). ing.

It should be noted that the "production mode display (P840)", in addition to notifying the production mode in the specific game state, may be displayed in the normal game state (low probability / low base state), or may be displayed in one game When the state has a plurality of production modes, the display may be performed temporarily or continuously until the production mode ends each time a condition for switching the production mode is established.

《Remaining number of games displayed》
"Remaining game count display (P841)" is the number of times the special symbols are displayed variably until the specific game state ends (the number of special symbol lotteries), and the number of times the special symbols variably displayed until the current production mode ends. It is a display showing the number of times. In FIG. 20, the display "remaining _56" is executed in the upper center of the screen, and the game state of "ST (variable number of times cut probability)" is played until the special symbol lottery is executed 56 more times. people are notified.

Next, in the example of the effect display in the specific game state shown in FIG. 20, the display that is different from the example of the effect display in the other game states described above will be described.

《Decorative pattern (specific game state)》
At the center of the screen in FIG. 20, a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed smaller in the example of the decorative pattern P801 in the specific game state in FIG. 20 than in the decorative pattern P801 in the normal game state of FIG.

In the premised pachinko game machine P, as the effect display of the specific game state, the effect mode display P840, the remaining game count display P841, and the jackpot icon display P821 are performed in the upper part of the screen, and the selected music is displayed in the lower part of the screen. P854 and display of the number of balls acquired P824 are performed. In the specific game state, such additional display that is not displayed in the normal game state (low probability/low base state) is performed. In this case, the display of some symbols overlaps with a part of each display, and there is a possibility that the visibility of the stop display symbols is lowered. The display of the decorative pattern P801 is made small and simplified so that it is difficult for the display to occur. In addition, as an example of simplifying and displaying the decorative pattern P801, it is possible to adopt a method of reducing the size and not displaying a character image or the like that is displayed along with the number indicating the pattern.

《Reserved display area (specific game state)》
In the premised pachinko gaming machine P, as shown in the lower left of the screen in FIG. A display area is provided for the pending object of "H4". Note that the display of the variable object display area P812 (and the variable object display P813) is omitted in the "RUSH_MODE" rendering mode state.

When the change display shown in FIG. 20 ends and a new change starts in the state, the display of the pending object P811 positioned at the bottom in FIG. The display is controlled so that the display is enlarged.

In addition, although not shown, a description will be given of the "result display effect", which is an important effect displayed during the specific game.

《Result display performance》
The "result display effect" is mainly used in the pachinko game machine P, which is the premise, when the final variation of the specific game state (high base state) is executed, or when the hold that occurred during the specific game state disappears. This is a performance that is performed at the timing when the player recognizes that the “Renso” state has ended, and in the so-called “Renso” state, information on how many times the jackpot game has been won, and how many game balls have been played in total. This is an effect for informing the player whether or not the ball has been acquired (corresponding to display of the number of acquired balls).

[This embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the above-described underlying technology. In the following, differences from the base technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted or simplified. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is a pachinko gaming machine that adopts the "small win V" described in the description of the typical gaming machine specifications ("specs") of the premised pachinko gaming machine, According to the "base state" in the normal game state when starting the winning (or big winning) game, after the execution of the big winning game (or during the small winning game, by passing through the specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751, The contents of the ``specific game state'' in the normal game state (especially the length of the period in which the ``base state'' is maintained at the ``high base state'') are varied after the execution of the jackpot game based on the activated accessory continuous actuating device. This is a pachinko game machine that provides new gameplay.

In particular, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is controlled to the "(low probability/) low base state" immediately after the normal game state "specific game state" (low probability/high base state) ends. If you acquire the right of a small hit (or a big hit) in the special pattern reservation (reservation of the second special pattern) that is the subject of the game in the specific game state that is digested when you are playing, after the special game state (big hit game) The period of maintaining the specific game state (low probability / high base state) as the game state is configured so that the next small win (or big win) can be obtained substantially, so that substantially two small wins ( It adopts a characteristic game property that the right to win (big hit) can be obtained.

A detailed description of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment having the features described above will be given below.

(board configuration)
First, the configuration of the board configuration (configuration of the game area) of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described.

The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment can be implemented with substantially the same board configuration as the premised pachinko game machine shown in FIG. Since the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment employs the later-described game characteristics (specs), it is configured to include a specific area P760 inside a large winning opening (attacker) P751. It should be noted that as long as it is a change that does not change the gameplay disclosed below (or a change that is only minor), a different board configuration may be adopted as appropriate.

(spec)
Next, the game performance (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be explained. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "setting" (setting value) that affects the ball output performance, only the specifications related to "setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values are set as appropriate. is.

In the pachinko machine P of this embodiment, the winning/losing lottery probability is set to a jackpot probability of 1/269 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) and a small winning probability of 1/9.1 (only the second special symbol). The number of prize balls is 4 balls for the first start prize opening (first start opening) P711, 3 balls for the second start prize opening (second start opening) P721, 3 balls for the left general prize opening P731L, The right side general winning hole P731R is set to 2 balls, and the big winning hole (attacker) P751 is set to 15 balls.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment employs the second special symbol priority digestion control, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is Priority is given to variable display. In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, only the second special symbol is configured to have a "small hit" as a special symbol lottery result, but the first special symbol may be configured to have a "small hit". It is possible. It should be noted that, if the game property of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment is not lost, not only the second special symbol priority digestion control but also the first special symbol priority digestion control is applied as a modification, or Needless to say, entry-ball order digestion control may be applied, in which balls that enter the ball first are digested first.

The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment employs a game feature (spec) called "small win V" described as the underlying technology, and in addition to the "big win" in the special symbol lottery, special A "small win" is obtained in the symbol lottery, and when the game ball passes through a specific area P760 inside the big winning opening P751 during the small win game executed thereafter, the accessory continuous operating device is operated and the big win game is started. It is designed to be executed. In this embodiment, when a small winning game develops into a big winning game, a series of special game states from the start of the small winning game to the end of the big winning game are set to "small winning V" or "small winning development big winning". etc.

The types of big wins (including small win V) in the special game state in the pachinko gaming machine P of this embodiment are 3 round big win (first special symbol big win) and 10 round big win (second special symbol big win or small win V). ) is provided. In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment does not have a probability variation function for a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, and an electric chew support function (electric support function) after various big hits (including small win V) A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the

In addition, among the detailed control examples to be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is determined in advance during the period of the specific game and/or during the period in which the remaining hold maximum four variable display after the end of the specific game is displayed. The special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at the timing, and the variation pattern is selected to ensure the variation display time of the special symbol as required, but the special variation pattern table is referred to, the number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the number of variable display times of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are separately counted and stored, and the number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is counted and stored separately. At the start of variation, when the stored information of the number of variations stored corresponding to each is a specific value, the special variation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special variation pattern table for the second special symbol can be referred to. there is

(game flow)
Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. The game flow shown in FIG. 21 is a flow assuming that a game (normal game) is executed as intended by the player. Note that the game flow when a game (abnormal game, irregular game) that ignores the design intention of the player is executed may be an operation that does not apply to the situation shown in FIG. description is omitted.

First, in the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" of FIG. The game is played with the so-called "left-handed hitting"). When the game ball enters the 1st start winning port, a special design lottery based on the 1st special design (special design 1) is performed, and if the special design lottery result is a big hit, "big hit (special design 1)" is executed (FIG. 21(A)). It should be noted that the state surrounded by double lines in the figure represents a special game state (big hit game, small hit game).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" ends, the game state shifts to the specific game state (high base state) (FIG. 21(B)). The specific game state after the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is "breakthrough zone_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 1 time) + remaining pending maximum 4" (details will be described later), and the second The high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until the special symbol (special figure 2) changes once and is stopped.

After moving to the "breakthrough zone", the player shoots a game ball aiming at the second start winning hole P721 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, and performs the game by so-called "right hitting". Since the "breakthrough zone" is in a high base state, the movable body P771 of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning port P721 is likely to be in an easy ball entry state, and the game ball can be shot into the right region P501R. , a game ball is entered (passed) to the normal pattern operation port P741, a normal pattern lottery is performed, the normal electric accessory P770 is operated, and the second special symbol is entered by the ball to the second start winning port P721. A special symbol lottery based on (Special Figure 2) is performed.

In the "breakthrough zone", since the high base state continues until the variable display of the second special symbol is completed once, one time in the high base state and the maximum number of pending second special symbols (in this embodiment 4), you can receive the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol having the "small hit" which is the lottery result that triggers the small win V. Here, in the "breakthrough zone", a special symbol lottery (up to 5 times) of the second special symbol results in a big hit or a small hit, and the player can "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (C) )) is set at about 45%. In addition, in the "breakthrough zone", if the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not win (big hit, small hit), it shifts to "normal game (low probability / low base)" (Fig. 21 ( D)).

When "small hit V / big hit (special 2)" ends, "battle mode _ low probability / high base (special 2: 6 times) + maximum 4 remaining pending" or "pseudo big hit _ low probability / high base (Special figure 2: 95 times) + Remaining maximum 4 pieces" (Fig. 21 (E), (H)).

Here, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment determines which of the "battle mode" and the "pseudo jackpot" as the specific game state to be shifted after the "small hit V / jackpot (special figure 2)". The pachinko machine P of the present embodiment is not a special pattern (stopped display pattern) that triggered the execution of "small win V / big win (special figure 2)", Depending on the game state when the special pattern hit variation that triggered the execution of the "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" is started, it is decided whether to shift to "battle mode" or "pseudo big win". are doing.

Specifically, when it is controlled to "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", "pseudo jackpot", and when it is in a high base state where the electric chew support function is operating, the fluctuation display starts In the case of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" triggered by the variation of the special pattern that is the hit, "battle mode" after the end of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" (Fig. 21 (E)), and the second special symbol hit variation corresponding to the remaining suspension (holding related to the second special symbol) that starts variation in the low base state where the electric chew support function is not operating After the end of the "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" triggered by is controlled to shift to "pseudo big win" (Fig. 21 (H)).

"Battle mode_low probability / high base (special figure 2: 6 times) + maximum of 4 remaining pending" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 6 times It is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player shoots the game ball to the right area P501R in the same manner as the "breakthrough zone", until the second special symbol is displayed with a maximum of 10 times (6 times in the high base state + maximum 4 times for the remaining reserved portion). It is a specific game aiming to acquire "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" during the period (Fig. 21 (F)). In addition, when the second special symbol does not become a small win V or a big win in maximum 10 times of fluctuation display, the game shifts to "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)).

"Pseudo jackpot _ low probability / high base (special figure 2: 95 times) + remaining pending maximum 4" (details will be described later) stops after the second special symbol (special figure 2) changes 95 times It is a specific game in which the high base state (operating state of the electric chew support function) continues until it is displayed. The player shoots the game ball to the right area P501R in the same way as the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode", and the second special pattern is a maximum of 99 times (95 times in the high base state + maximum 4 times of the remaining reserved amount). It is a specific game aiming to obtain "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" before the variable display is performed (Fig. 21 (I)). In the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the probability of "small hit" is set to 1/9. By the time the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is performed 95 times, which is the number of times, it can be said that the small win V or the big win will be substantially confirmed, but the "pseudo big win". In the middle of the game, if the result of the special symbol lottery is not a "small hit" or a "big hit" even if the second special symbol is displayed 94 times during the game, it shifts to the production mode of the "battle mode" ( FIG. 21(J)). And, the variation of the 95th rotation of the "pseudo jackpot" is the same as the 6th variation in the "battle mode", and the variation display of the 95th rotation and the hold of the second special symbol are displayed for a maximum of 4 times. If the "big win" or "small win" does not occur, the game shifts to a "normal game (low probability/low base)" (FIG. 21(G)). As a modified example, the transition timing of the production mode to the "battle mode" may be set to an earlier timing, for example, the timing when the second special symbol is displayed 89 times during the "pseudo jackpot". In other words, it is also possible to set the timing at which the number of times equal to the number of continuations of the high base state in the "battle mode", which is 6 times, remains.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, during the period controlled by the specific game "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", the variable display of the second special symbol is used as the end condition for each. In addition to the termination condition based on the number of times, the game may be terminated when the first special symbol is changed five times. 95 times, which is the end condition of the specific game based on the number of times of variation of the second special symbol of the "pseudo jackpot", is the maximum duration of the electric chew support function in the current rule, 100 times of the number of times of variation of the special symbol, and the first special It is set so as not to exceed either the specific game end condition of the variable display of the symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol without being satisfied, for example, the end condition of the specific game based on the number of times of variation of the first special symbol 3 times, the period of the "pseudo jackpot" can be set until the second special symbol (special symbol 2) changes 97 times and is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine P of the present embodiment having the game flow as described above has a high probability of winning in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot". Earn a small hit V (or big hit) based on "hit" and loop "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" to get a large amount of balls It is a game property aimed at. In particular, during the digestion of up to 4 remaining reserves that occurred in the specific game of "Breakthrough Zone" and "Battle Mode", that is, after the high base state has ended, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol "small hit" or " By obtaining a "jackpot", the game is shifted to a "pseudo-jackpot", which is a specific game in which the next small win V (or big win) is substantially decided, and the balls for one small win V (or big win) are given out. Since it is possible to obtain more, as a player's experience, depending on the timing of obtaining the small win V (big win) during execution of the "battle mode", the ball will be released once for the small win V (big win). It is possible to provide a game feature in which whether or not the balls for two V (big hits) are paid out is different.

In the game flow (FIG. 21) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment described above, the second The number of variable display times of special symbols is 1 time, 6 times, and 94 times, respectively. Probability of looping "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit" and "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", for example, the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition, is set to 4 times, which is the same as the number of reservations. It is possible to adjust appropriately to 10 times in order to increase The number of rounds of the special game executed in is also adjusted accordingly).

In such a modified example, if the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is less than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, a win is obtained in a lower base state. It is possible to perform an emphasized effect, and if the number of variable display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is the same as the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, for example, "small win V / big win ( Special figure 2)” can be presented in such a way that the chance will come twice. In addition, if the number of fluctuation display times of the second special symbol, which is the end condition of the high base state, is greater than the maximum number of reservations related to the second special symbol, then in the high base state, "small win V/big win (special figure 2)". It is possible to provide an interesting production and game property that makes the game enjoyable with a sense of anticipation that the game can be obtained many times.

(breakthrough zone)
Next, the game control and performance contents in the "breakthrough zone" will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24. FIG.

In the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol is displayed once in the high base state, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to a maximum of four reserved second special symbols that occur during the high base state. This is the production mode corresponding to the period.

In the "normal game (low probability / low base)" (see FIG. 21), the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "big hit", and when the "big hit (special figure 1)" is executed, the "big hit" (Special Figure 1)", "breakthrough zone" starts.

After the "breakthrough zone" is started, when the first variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the effect display of the "holding charge effect" shown in FIG. 22 is started. The first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is about 60 seconds long with reference to the special variation pattern table (breakthrough zone 1st variation variation pattern table) in the variation pattern lottery of the main control board P40. A time variation pattern is selected, and the "holding charge effect" is executed for a period of about 30 seconds from the start of variation.

The "suspended charge effect" is an effect that prompts the player to suspend the second special symbol during the effect display period of the "suspended charge effect" and display the suspended object P811 in the pending display area 810. be. The "suspended charge effect" is a character displayed on the screen and an effect displayed around the character ( Effect) The production is configured to change so as to improve the degree of expectation for winning, and it is possible to urge the player to increase the holding of the second special symbol by hitting to the right.

When the "suspended charge effect" ends at the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", the second special symbol continues during the first variable display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" Based on the result of the winning lottery of the first fluctuation display and the preliminary judgment information related to the holding of the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the "holding charge effect", the "small hit V / big hit (special FIG. 2)” is performed (in the present embodiment, “Breakthrough zone battle effect”, see FIG. 23) is performed.

"Breakthrough zone battle production" is a production that collectively informs the lottery results (including pre-judgment information) for up to 5 fluctuations in the "breakthrough zone", and in a high base state (especially during the execution of "holding charge production") With regard to the holding of the second special symbol that has occurred, the effect notification related to the winning lottery result is not performed other than the variable display of the simple design P802. In addition, regarding the remaining reservation of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" (reservation of the second special symbol digested after transitioning to the low base state), the main control board P40 has a special variation pattern table (special figure 2 remaining reservation digestion It is configured so that a short variation pattern of about 1 second is selected by referring to the variation pattern table for low base or special figure 2 variation pattern table at low base). In addition, like the "breakthrough zone battle effect", the lottery result of this time's fluctuation display and the notification of all the lottery results, including the pre-judgment information of one or more pending changes that will start from the next time onwards A dramatic change display performed in one change display may be referred to as a "summary change".

During the five fluctuations of the "breakthrough zone", when a hit change that triggers a small win V (big hit) is executed, in the "breakthrough zone battle production", a "breakthrough zone battle" as shown in FIG. Victory effect” is displayed. The ``breakthrough zone battle victory effect'' is displayed if there is a ``hit'' in the remaining reserves even if the first variation display of the second special symbol in the ``breakthrough zone'' is ``losing''. In the example of FIG. 24, since the number of pending of the second special symbol in the simple pending display P814 is 1, the holding that started the fluctuation when the remaining two holdings of the second special symbol is a hit fluctuation. It shows that there was In the "breakthrough zone battle victory effect", if the result of the special symbol lottery is "small hit", the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751 ), the big hit (small hit V) is achieved only after the game is finished, so the display of the simplified drawing P802 is not composed of grids, and the “V” pattern, which is not displayed as a normal decorative pattern, is displayed. The player is notified that the license has been obtained. Further, although not shown, when the hit variation is not executed during the five variations of the "breakthrough zone", the "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" is executed.

When the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed, the game state changes from the high base state to the low base state, and the game state changes from the high base state to the low base state. The timing of the transition is the timing when the variable display time of the second special symbol has passed, and in order to delay the variable display timing of the second special symbol for the first hold that has occurred as the remaining hold, from the high base state to the low base. After switching to the state, a waiting time for a certain period of time (in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the symbol fixing time of the special symbol) is set, and the first fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone" is completed. Even if the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning port P721 is operated just before, the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 is terminated during the standby period ("pseudo jackpot", "battle", which will be described later). The same is true for the high base state final variation in mode"). Therefore, even if the remaining pending digestion is started and the second special symbol can be further held, the possibility that the normal electric accessory P770 of the second start winning opening P721 will operate is normal game ( as well as low probability/low base). In addition, since the standby time is set to a long time of about 6 seconds, the "breakthrough zone battle effect", "breakthrough zone battle victory effect", and "breakthrough zone battle defeat effect" will continue to be executed even during the standby time. It is

In addition, although detailed explanation is omitted, the second special If a hit hold occurs regarding the hold related to the pattern, it is difficult to replace the production content from the "breakthrough zone battle defeat production", so by performing a different alternative production from the "breakthrough zone battle victory production", Acquisition of the right of a small win V (big win) is reported to the player.

In addition, in the "breakthrough zone", the effect display on the effect display device P80 related to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is not the subject of the game, only performs the variable display of the simple design P802. Effect displays that are recognized to be highly relevant to the "Breakthrough Zone" (such as display of advance notice effects related to the "Breakthrough Zone") are not performed. If a "jackpot (special figure 1)" occurs at the timing controlled by "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot", "battle mode" is used instead of "breakthrough zone". It is also possible to control to shift to

(Small hit V effect and pseudo big hit)
Next, an example of a small hit V (big hit) effect and a “pseudo big win” effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 29 . 25 to 29 are the effects following FIG. 24, when the small win V is won with the rest of the "breakthrough zone" reserved, and the transition to the "pseudo big win" as a specific game. , shows an example of the performance when a small win V (big win) is obtained again during the "pseudo big win".

FIG. 25 shows that during a small winning V game, in order to activate the character continuous device, the player is encouraged to enter (pass through) a game ball into a specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751. It shows a display example of "V Winning Promoting Effect".

In the "V prize promotion effect", an image simulating the game board P5 is displayed in the substantially central area of the screen, and an image simulating the game area P501 is displayed with an arrow image that draws an arc and an emphasized "V ” is superimposed on the character image while adding animation or the like. Also, on the right side of the screen, in addition to the right hitting notification P832, the V winning promotion notification P837 is displayed. It is an effect that encourages the ball to enter the area P760).

Also, during the execution of the "V winning promotion effect", if there is a game ball entering (passing) the specific area P760 in the big winning hole P751, that is, "V winning", "V winning effect" is executed. As an example of the "V prize effect", the character display of "V" (V winning display P837) displayed at the bottom right of the screen in FIG. is mentioned.

The "V winning promotion effect" can be displayed from a period called "small winning start demonstration" of the small winning game to during execution of the round (special game) of the small winning game. In addition, in the small winning game round (special game) of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the process of opening the big winning opening P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and closing it for about 1 second is repeated 13 times. By doing so, it is performed in an open mode in which 10 game balls are almost certainly entered into the big winning hole P751 during the opening of about 1.560 seconds unless there is an abnormality such as ball clogging.

FIG. 26 is displayed during execution of a combination operation start demonstration (jackpot start demonstration), which is the timing at which the small win game in the small win V ends and the transition to the big win game state by the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is performed, and the big win is achieved. This is a display mode of "jackpot type notification effect" for notifying the amount of balls to be put out.

In the "jackpot type notification effect" of FIG. 26, two icon displays (jackpot type icon 1P861 displaying "BONUS" and jackpot type icon 2P862 displaying "TWIN_BONUS") are displayed as the jackpot type icon P860. ing. The big hit type icon 1P861 displayed as "BONUS" is the first variation display of the second special symbol in the "breakthrough zone", that is, the small hit by the variation display of the second special symbol that started to vary in the high base state. This is an icon that is selected when a V is reached, and is an icon that suggests shifting to the "battle mode" after one small win V.

On the other hand, the big win type icon 2P862 displayed as "TWIN_BONUS" is an icon selected in the small win V when any one of the remaining four holds in the "breakthrough zone" is a win. As shown in 21, it is an icon suggesting a shift to a pseudo-big-hit game state (specific game) after the small-hit V. In addition, during the "pseudo big hit", the small hit V (or big hit) acquired during the "pseudo big hit" from the production of the small hit V (or big hit) that triggered the transition to the "pseudo big hit" Since the effect mode is such that a series of effect contents are executed until the effect is executed, the player feels that two small wins V (or big wins) are equivalent to one small win V (or big win). ) will be performed as if it was acquired.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in a part of the "breakthrough zone" and "battle mode" (described later), one variation of the second special symbol that started variation in the high base state and the remaining 4 reserved Since a summary change is performed for each minute, a "jackpot type notification effect" is performed for the acquired small win V, and a small win (jackpot ) is executed as an effect for notifying the player of whether or not the result is a "jackpot type notification effect". It should be noted that during the execution of the summary variation, by checking the number of times of variation display of the simplified drawing P802 and the simple reservation display P814, it is obvious which one is selected in the "jackpot type notification effect", but pachinko If the player is not familiar with the specifications of the gaming machine, he/she can know the amount of winning balls for the first time in the "jackpot type notification effect".

FIG. 27 shows a small hit V (big hit) ahead of "TWIN_BONUS", which is an effect related to the small hit V (big hit), which is executed as a hit in the remaining reserve of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo big hit". ) is a diagram showing an example of an effect during In the example of this figure, as shown by the round display P820 displayed on the right side of the screen, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" for two times executed across the "pseudo big hit" It shows that the 5th round of the small winning V to be executed (counting the small winning game as the 1st round) is being executed.

In the round display P820 shown in FIG. 27, the right column shows the number of rounds of the small hit V (big hit) executed earlier in the two times of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)", the number of completed rounds The left column indicates the number of rounds scheduled to be executed for the small win V (big win) obtained in the specific game "pseudo big win". In FIG. 27, the left column of the round display P820 shows the number of rounds of the small win V (big win) being executed, since there is a considerable possibility that the small win V (big win) will not occur during the "pseudo big win". Compared to the round display P820 in the right column to be displayed, it is configured so as not to make a clear display such as a translucent display.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing an example of an effect display during a "pseudo jackpot" which is a specific game. During the ``pseudo big win'' of the specific game, a performance display as if the special game is continuing is performed although it is not in the special game state (during the big win game or the small win game).

In the example of the effect display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in FIG. 28, an animation is displayed in which a group of cat-shaped spherical objects move from the back side of the screen to the front side, and "TWIN_BONUS_V waiting... ” is displayed. In addition, the round display P820 also continues to display the number of rounds of the preceding small win V (big win) among the two rounds of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)", and the left column of the round display P820. remains translucent to indicate that it is waiting for the subsequent small win V (big win). It should be noted that the effect display during the "pseudo jackpot" is not limited to the one in which the same animation is always executed as shown in the example, but may be configured so that the player can select the content of the animation, the content of BGM (music), etc. at any time. may

In addition, during the "pseudo-big hit", it is necessary to obtain a small hit V (big hit) by causing a ball to enter the second starting prize-winning hole P721 and receiving a special pattern lottery for the second special pattern. , it is necessary for the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 even during the execution of the "pseudo-jackpot" effect that looks like between the rounds of the big win. Therefore, as shown in the lower part of the example of the effect in FIG. 28, in addition to the usual right-handed information P832, the character ``continue hitting to the right.'' It's becoming

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment motivates the player to continue hitting to the right during execution of the "pseudo jackpot" in which the effect display looks like between rounds. A rendering object P870 is displayed. In this example, an object similar to the cat-shaped spherical object in the "pseudo-jackpot" animation is displayed as the setting suggestion effect object P870 moving from right to left on the screen so that it can be easily distinguished from other objects. is an example. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the display of the setting suggesting effect object P870 is a specification that performs a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value for each ball entering the second start winning opening P721, or a second special symbol. For each change, there is a specification of performing a display lottery with a predetermined probability for each set value as a change effect.

"Pseudo-jackpot" is a gaming state in which the high base state continues 95 times, but the main control board P40 refers to the special fluctuation pattern table (pseudo-jackpot fluctuation pattern table) until the fluctuation is displayed 94 times. By doing so, the variation pattern related to the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time variation of about 0.5 seconds to 1 second is likely to be selected. Since the small hit probability is 1/9.1, which is very high probability, it is almost the case that a small hit (big hit) is obtained during 94 fluctuations that repeat short-time fluctuations, but if it is the 95th rotation If the small hit (big hit) is not drawn until the fluctuation display of , the production display during the "pseudo jackpot" shown in FIG. It shifts to an effect display state that is substantially the same as the summary change of minutes. At this time, the display of "TWIN_BONUS" on the upper part of the screen and the big hit effect such as the round display P820 are also terminated.

The reason for shifting to the "battle mode" production display state (production mode) in the 95th rotation fluctuation display is that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol up to the 94th fluctuation tends to be selected for a short period of time. Due to the tendency, it is necessary to make the 95th rotation a long-time fluctuation display and give the player a margin to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, while the long-time fluctuation display of the 95th rotation As a production, by effectively utilizing the production prepared in other production modes, by performing production for the final change of the high base state and the maximum of 4 remaining holds, it is possible to give the player even a little production. It is intended to be interesting.

FIG. 29 shows a small hit V (big hit) during the "pseudo big hit" (within 94 rotations), which is a specific game, and a small hit when the second "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is being executed. This is an effect image that can be displayed during the winning game and combination operation start demonstration period. In the small hit V (big hit) in the "pseudo big hit" and the small hit V (big hit) other than the summary variation of the battle mode described later, it is a specification that shifts to "battle mode" after the small hit V (big hit) Instead of executing the above-mentioned "jackpot type notification effect", an alternative effect display such as displaying a blessing image by a character is performed. Further, when the second "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" is started, the round display P820 is switched from a transparent state to a clear state. It should be noted that the "V" indicating the small winning game of the round display P820 and the "○" indicating the big winning game may be clearly displayed at different timings. Specifically, when the small winning game is started, the display of "V" becomes clear, and when the game ball enters (passes) the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751, "○" indicating the big winning game ” is clarified.

In addition, as a modification, as the lottery result of the second special symbol, a plurality of small wins V (big wins) with different numbers of rounds and small wins V (big wins) with different types of specific game states after completion are provided. In this case, for the small win V (big win) that was hit in the high base state, the number of rounds (ball amount) of the small win V (big win) this time and the type of specific game after the end are notified. It may be configured to execute "jackpot type notification effect".

As a modified example of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", in the production example shown in FIG. At the timing when the number of games is 10 times or less, the remaining game number display P841 may be configured to display "remaining _ 10 times", and the second "small win V / big win (special figure 2)" Regarding the round display P820, when the number of remaining games of "pseudo jackpot" is low (when it is 10 times or less), or at the timing when the production mode switches to "battle mode", the display mode becomes more unclear, Alternatively, it may be configured to be hidden.

As another modified example of the production example during the "pseudo jackpot", when it is determined from the prior determination information during the "pseudo jackpot" that the suspension of executing the hit variation related to the second special symbol has occurred, the production The control board P41 is configured so as to notify immediately that a hold related to the second special symbol to be a hit has occurred using the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker P83, the effect accessory P560, and the like. , After notifying that the reservation related to the second special symbol to be a hit has occurred, even when the reservation related to the second special symbol to be a hit occurs, the same notification is continuously made, or a more conspicuous production mode. , it may be configured to be able to notify that a plurality of winning rights have been acquired.

(battle mode)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32, an example of effect display of the specific game "battle mode" will be described. FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the first half of the battle mode, and FIGS. 31 and 32 show an example of a final variation (sixth variation) in the high base state of the "battle mode" and a summary variation effect related to a maximum of four remaining reserves. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing;

《Battle Mode First Half》
FIG. 30 is an example of effect display relating to the first half of the battle mode (first to fifth variations of the second special symbol of the "battle mode"). The effect of the "battle mode" is the effect of informing the player of the acquisition of a small win V (big win) depending on whether or not the ally character can defeat the enemy character.

Specifically, the offense and defense between the ally character and the enemy character are staged for each change, and when the enemy gauge P883 becomes "0" (the state where everything is gone), it becomes a small hit V (big hit). is reported. In addition, the ally gauge is displayed at the bottom right of the screen, and by increasing or decreasing using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary judgment information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that is being held, A player is notified that the expectation of a V (big hit) is increasing (or the expectation is low).

A chance up icon display P880 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the example of effect shown in FIG. The display content of the chance up icon display P880 is determined using the special symbol lottery result of the second special symbol that is changing and the preliminary determination information regarding the suspension of the second special symbol that is being held. An icon display that suggests that a chance-up effect will be displayed so that the ally character will be superior during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the symbols, or during the execution of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols from the next time onwards. It has become.

Of the chance up icon display P880, the item chance up icon P881 is displayed in the upper row, and the character chance up icon P882 is displayed in the lower row. The item chance up icon is, for example, an "attack power UP icon", a "special move icon", or a "weapon icon", suggesting that the attack of the ally character is more advantageous (the enemy gauge P883 is more likely to decrease). , and the character chance up icon P882 is an icon suggesting that a chance up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit will occur by performing an effect related to increase/decrease of the ally gauge P884 according to the character that appears.

There are a plurality of icons in the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882, which are the chance up icon display P880. However, if a higher icon is displayed where the icon 1 is displayed, the item chance up icon P881 or the character chance up icon P882 is updated to the icon that was acquired this time. It may be configured to

Further, the item chance up icon P881 and the character chance up icon P882 may indicate occurrence of different chance up effects, respectively, and when a specific combination is displayed, the two icons act simultaneously to expect a big hit. It may be constructed such that one big chance-up effect is generated in which the chance is greatly improved.

《Battle Mode Second Half: Summary Change》
Next, an example of the effect of the "battle mode final change effect" executed for the high base state final change (sixth change) of the "battle mode" and a maximum of four remaining pending will be described.

“Battle Mode Final Variation Effect” is an effect in which the lottery result (including prejudgment information) for 5 variations is notified all at once, similar to the effect of “Breakthrough Zone”, and the effect structure is the same as the effect of “Breakthrough Zone”. , “Suspended Charge Effect (Battle Mode)” and “Battle Mode Final Battle Effect”. The variation display of the sixth variation of the second special symbol of the specific game "battle mode" in which the "battle mode final variation effect" is executed refers to the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation), A variation pattern of about 1 minute is selected, and about 30 seconds after the start of the variation is configured with a "holding charge effect (battle mode)", and after the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" ends, " Battle Mode Final Battle Production”. It should be noted that the fluctuation display of the second special symbol for the remaining 4 reserves is such that a fluctuation pattern of about 1 second is selected as in the "breakthrough zone".

In the "suspended charge effect (battle mode)" shown in FIG. 31, an effect display prompting the player to generate a hold related to the second special symbol aiming at the second start winning opening P721 is performed (for example, the bottom center of the screen Displayed nearer to "accumulate power (hold) with right-handed strikes !!"). In addition, the friend gauge P884 moves from the bottom left of the screen to the center, and by displaying the character string "CHARGE" and an arrow, the friend gauge P884 is accumulated (a mode that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high) ) to prompt the player to hit to the right.

When the player causes the suspension of the second special symbol according to the instruction of the "suspension charge effect (battle mode)", "P" (Power's initial) is displayed, or a chance-like pending object P811 suggesting acquisition (stock) of an item chance-up icon P881 (or a character chance-up icon P882) is displayed. At a predetermined timing (for example, 25 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), these accumulated suspended objects are displayed in an effect display on the friend gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880, increasing or decreasing the friend gauge P884, and increasing the chance. Acquire (stock) the icon display P880.

In addition, as a further application example of the effect using the reservation display area P810 of the "reserved charge effect (battle mode)", under the situation where four reservations of the second special symbol are accumulated, to the further second start winning opening P721 , the held object P811 displayed once is displayed in a manner that increases the expectation of a big hit (for example, from "P" hold to "P" hold with a flame effect, character chance up icon It may be configured to perform an effect display (holding chance up effect) such as changing to a hold suggesting acquisition).

Further, as another application example, the reserved display area P811 is moved and displayed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method, and the reserved object P811 jumped out of the reserved display area P811 in a state where four reservations of the second special symbol have occurred. According to the aspect of (1), an effect display may be performed on the ally gauge P884 and the chance up icon display P880 so as to increase the expectation of a big hit.

When the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" ends, the process proceeds to the "battle mode final battle effect" shown in FIG. "Battle mode final battle effect" is a effect display in which a ally character unleashes a special move. Depending on whether or not there is a hit, the friend character attacks the enemy character according to the degree of expectation of the small win V (big win).

At this time, the player is urged to operate the performance button P381 to create a performance for reducing the enemy gauge P883 depending on the type of special move performed by the ally character, and the content of the performance is changed according to the operating state of the performance button P381. It can be configured to be selected from several production patterns, such as a button production that can be performed, or a result is displayed without a button production. As for the types of button effects, there are a "single-press" effect in which the result is displayed by operating the effect button P381 only once, a "continuous-hit effect" in which the result is displayed by pressing the effect button P381 multiple times, and an effect lever P382. It has a type such as "lever operation effect" that allows you to operate. In addition, in the "battle mode final variation effect" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the effect pattern that does not execute the button effect is configured to have a higher degree of expectation. There is an example in which the button effect is not executed when the hit is definitely notified by the teammate gauge P884 emitting rainbow color light.

In addition, as described above, if the small hit V (big hit) is not achieved by the 94th spin of the "pseudo jackpot", it will be in the battle mode on the 95th spin. The control of the rotation and the remaining hold (selection of the variation pattern and the content of the effect) is the same as the summary variation in the second half of the battle mode. That is, at the 95th spin of the "pseudo jackpot", the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are performed with a variation of about one minute.

《Example of using ally gauge P884》
The ally gauge P884 in the "battle mode" represents the energy of the ally character, and adopts a mode suggesting that the greater the amount, the higher the expectation of the small win V (big win). As a modified example, during the second half of the battle mode, during the hold charge effect of the summary change, the blank area and the colored area of the friend gauge P884 displayed at the start of the change are reversed, and the display of the friend gauge P884 at the start of the summary change is expected to be a big hit. It is possible to employ an effect method in which the degree of expectation for winning in the combined variation (up to 5 variations at the end of the battle mode) increases as the number of degrees is less.

By doing this, in the first half of the battle mode, the more the friend gauge P884, the higher the expectation of a big hit. A novel effect display can be made.

In addition, by configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to display a character that decreases the friend character's friend gauge P884 on the character chance up icon P882, so that the character chance increases in each of the first half and the second half of the battle mode. It is possible to create more interest in the effective interference (increase or decrease in the friend gauge P884) of the character appearing in the up icon P882 to the friend gauge P884. For example, in the "holding charge effect (battle mode)", a character chance-up icon P882 that suggests the decrease of the friend gauge P884 is displayed, and after the effect of reducing the friend gauge P884 is performed, the friend gauge P884 is reversed. Examples include:

Here, several modifications that can be adopted for the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment will be described. In addition, the modification described below may be applied to the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment by combining a plurality of modifications.

(Modification 1)
The pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, after executing the "small win V/jackpot (special figure 2)", determines whether to be controlled in either the "battle mode" or the "pseudo jackpot" with the "small win V/jackpot (Special Figure 2)” was executed, and a method of determining depending on the game state (base state) at the timing when the hit variation was started was adopted.

In order to adopt the method in the present embodiment, information such as a flag related to the special game to be executed when the result of the special symbol lottery performed at the start of the fluctuation is "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" In addition to setting the special game ("small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)") information related to the game state set as a specific game (the number of times to control to a high base state, various setting values (offset value for calling, etc.) must be stored together, which makes execution possible.

Here, after the execution of "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)", as a modification 1 regarding whether to be controlled to "battle mode" or "pseudo big hit", "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2 )”, it may be determined after the stop display of the special symbol whether the control is to be performed in the “battle mode” or the “pseudo jackpot”. As a specification to judge after the special symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, the type of specific game of "small hit V / big win (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small win game which is the timing when the transition to the big win is definite. specifications that determine

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, as described in the present embodiment, the "breakthrough zone", the "battle mode", and the "pseudo jackpot" executed as specific games are finalized in the high base state. When the variation is executed, control is adopted to transition the game state (base state) at the time of stopping the variation of the special symbols.

Therefore, as a modification 1 "specification to determine after the stop display of the special symbol (specification to determine the type of specific game of "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" at the time of V winning during the small winning game)" By adopting it, it is the final variation of the high base state such as the 1st variation of the "breakthrough zone" and the 6th variation of the "battle mode", and the variation display of the special symbols that are collectively varied as a production, When the type of specific game is determined after the execution of "V/jackpot (special figure 2)", the determination is made under the condition of being controlled to a low base state, so the "pseudo jackpot" that is always advantageous to the player. ” can be controlled so that the transition to ” can be obtained as a judgment result.

In other words, the player always shifts to an advantageous specific game called ``pseudo-jackpot'' when a hit is achieved while a high-expectation performance display is performed in which a maximum of 5 fluctuations are executed as collective fluctuations. is guaranteed, and the “breakthrough zone battle performance” and “battle mode final battle performance” as performances corresponding to the overall fluctuations will increase the attention of players and provide highly entertaining performances. can be done.

(Modification 2)
The pachinko game machine P of this embodiment adopts a control method of changing the game state (base state) to the low base state in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol in the high base state final variation, but the game state ( The timing for changing the base state) from the high base state to the low base state may be set to different timings.

Specifically, as a modification 2, the timing for changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state in the high base state final fluctuation is "while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed and the It may be configured to adopt "when the hold related to the 2 special symbols reaches the upper limit value".

When the description is applied to the state in the present embodiment, "when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed" means "breakthrough zone During the first variable display, which is the variable display of the second special symbol of "Battle Mode", or during the sixth variable display, which is the variable display of the second special symbol of "Battle Mode", the hold related to the second special symbol is The timing is set to change the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state when the upper limit of four is reached.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, when shifting from the high base state to the low base state in the specific game, it is important to maximize the remaining hold, but as in the second modification " Adopting a method of changing the game state (base state) from the high base state to the low base state when the hold related to the second special symbol reaches the upper limit while the final fluctuation of the high base state is being displayed However, there is no effect on game performance (degree of advantage for the player).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the game state is shifted to the low base state when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, which is the final variation of the high base state, and the pattern fixing time for the stop display of the special symbols is set to a long time. By doing so, it was prevented that the normal electric accessory P770 was operating at the time of the first change after shifting to the low base state. Without waiting for the stop display of , it is possible to make the normal electric accessory P770 difficult to operate during the variable display, so that the symbol fixing time when the special symbol is stopped can be configured to be short. become.

In the case of adopting the modified example 2, as in the modified example 1, in the final variation of the high base state, the game state is shifted from the high base state to the low base state prior to the stop display of the special symbols. Therefore, it is possible to control the small win V (big win) in the final variation of the high base state to an advantageous "pseudo big win" game state, and " Breakthrough zone battle performance” and “Battle mode final battle performance” are recognized by the player as a performance in which a “pseudo jackpot” is confirmed if the performance is successful, and the attention of the player is further increased, and the performance is highly entertaining. can be provided as

In addition, when modification 2 is adopted and the symbol fixing time is shortened, by intentionally setting the hold related to the second special symbol to just before the end of the final variation of the high base state, after shifting to the low base state There is a concern that a state in which the normal electric accessory P770 is activated is created at the start of the first fluctuation, but the timing of the fluctuation end by allowing multiple patterns to be selected for the special pattern fluctuation pattern (variation display time) in the final fluctuation of the high base state Or by making it difficult to aim, or by setting the normal electric accessory P770 to the operation end condition of one or two balls (preferably one ball) entering the second start winning opening P721, there is a method of avoiding intentional capture. can consider.

Further, in the case of adopting the modification 2, during the period in which the final variation of the high base state is being executed, the player activates the normal electric accessory P770 and enters the ball into the second start winning hole P721. Due to this, when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be accumulated to the upper limit number (4 in this embodiment), the lottery result of the special symbol lottery of the final fluctuation of the high base state is When it is a "minor win" or "big win", it is processed in the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment as a win in the high base state, and there is a risk that the player will suffer an unintended disadvantage.

Therefore, in the case of adopting the second modification, a display prompting the player to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period in which the final variation of the high base state is executed (for example, FIG. 22 The display of the current number of holds and the message to the effect that "Please save the hold" as shown in the lower right of the "hold charge" production shown in ), the hold related to the special design lottery of the second special design It continues until it is notified that the upper limit value has been reached, and even at a predetermined timing when the remaining time of the fluctuation display time of the special pattern in the final fluctuation of the high base state is reduced, the special pattern of the second special pattern is still used. When the hold related to the lottery does not reach the upper limit, it may be configured to perform a display prompting to generate the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in a more emphasized manner.

Also, in the final fluctuation of the high base state, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol has not reached the upper limit, if you hit the "breakthrough zone battle effect", "battle mode final battle effect" Since there is a risk of discrepancy with the player's perception that it will be a "pseudo jackpot", the start conditions of the "breakthrough zone battle effect" and the "battle mode final battle effect" are changed to a predetermined timing ( For example, 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the hold related to the second special symbol lottery is set to the upper limit, and if the conditions are not met, the "breakthrough zone battle production", "battle mode final battle production ”, Other productions (such as reach production in low base and reach production executed in situations other than the final change in battle mode) will cause the final change in the high base state and the remaining second special symbol lottery to be held. It may be configured to notify the result of the special symbol lottery regarding.

It should be noted that if the starting conditions for the "breakthrough zone battle effect" and "battle mode final battle effect" are defined as described above, the effect control related to the final change in the high base state becomes complicated, and if it is determined that it is not effective In the final demonstration performance of the small win V (big win), the player is notified that the "pseudo big win" will not be executed by executing a notification performance of shifting to a "battle mode" instead of a "pseudo big win". In this case, in addition to the display content of the normal end demonstration effect, at the same time, "During the breakthrough zone battle effect (battle mode final battle effect), by maximizing the hold, you can be sure to display a pseudo It is also possible to display a game explanation such as "It will be a big hit".

In addition, when the modified example 2 is adopted, the execution mode of the effect is configured so that the player wants to maximize the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the final variation of the high base state. is preferred.

More specifically, during the period in which the final variation of the high base state is being executed, (1) the timing when the second special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery has reached the maximum value, (2) after (1) At the timing, when there is a further game ball entering the second start winning hole P721, the lottery or switching according to the number of entering balls, etc., the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final fluctuation of the high base state and Based on the pending pre-determination information related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol remaining pending, the expectation of a small hit V (big hit) is higher than the "breakthrough zone battle production" and "battle mode final battle production" / or It may be configured to be able to execute a "breakthrough zone battle effect_SUPER" and a "battle mode final battle effect_invincible" effect in which a small hit V (big hit) is confirmed.

As an example of an effect that increases the desire of the player to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period in which the final variation of the high base state is being executed, the effect with the above-mentioned special image display is used. Not limited to the example of switching, when the above-mentioned conditions (1) to (2) are achieved, the production accessory P560 can be moved, a special notification sound can be generated from the speaker P83, or a decorative pattern P801 constituting reach can be displayed. It is also possible to execute effects such as executing a decorative pattern promotion effect in which the mode switches to a more expected one, and to execute effects that increase chances, and furthermore, these and "breakthrough zone battle effect_SUPER ”, and “battle mode final battle effect_invincible” effect can be executed in combination.

In this way, when the modified example 2 is adopted, a performance with a special feeling is executed by maximizing the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the period in which the final variation of the high base state is executed. According to this configuration, the special symbol lottery corresponding to the final fluctuation of the high base state becomes a small win (big win) without the player maximizing the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It can be expected to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantageous event such as not being able to acquire the right to "pseudo jackpot".

(Modification 3)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment has a small winning game (small winning V) that is executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is a small winning, and a small winning pattern that triggers a 10-round big winning (small winning V). is selected, and as shown in FIG. As the number of rounds of the winning V, it may be configured to have a small winning pattern that executes a small winning V (big win) of a round number other than 10 rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds, etc.). ), the electric chewing support function may not be operated after the small win V (big win), that is, it may be configured to have a small winning pattern that does not shift to the high base state.

Adopting a configuration having a small winning pattern (referred to as "no time saving small winning pattern" or "no support small winning pattern") that does not activate the electric chewing support function after the small winning V (big hit) exemplified as Modified Example 3, When the time-saving small winning pattern is stop-displayed and the small winning V is executed, it becomes difficult to generate a new suspension related to the second special pattern after the small winning V (big win), and the consecutive game state is continued. becomes difficult. In addition, in the case of configuring the time-saving small hit pattern to be elected with a certain probability (for example, about 10% at the time of winning the small hit), the small hit itself should not be excessively deteriorated. It is preferable to increase the winning probability of and balance the easiness of winning consecutive houses.

On the other hand, by mixing such a time-saving small winning pattern, for example, there are two or more holdings that trigger a small winning V in the second special pattern currently fluctuating and holding related to the second special pattern. If the preceding small win V is a small winning pattern without time saving and the pattern that triggers the subsequent small win V is not a small winning pattern without time saving, the game state to be shifted after the subsequent small win V is a small winning without time saving. In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, which does not have a winning pattern, it was a "battle mode", whereas in the modification 3, it was a "pseudo jackpot", and the game characteristics changed when a plurality of small wins were consecutive. There is also the advantage of being able to attach

In the case of adopting the no-time-saving small winning pattern, if the winning of the no-time-saving small winning during the continuous game, if there is a remaining hold, the player should be very interested in whether or not the remaining hold will win. can be considered. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special symbol when the remaining hold that is the hold that occurred in the high base state is digested is "Special Figure 2 Remaining Hold Digestion Fluctuation Pattern Table" (or " It was configured so that a short-time variation pattern was selected by the special figure 2 variation pattern table at low base), but after executing the small hit V based on such a time-saving no small-hit pattern, the special variation pattern By using a table, a variation time of about 10 seconds to 1 minute is selected for each variation, and a performance display regarding whether or not a small win V (or a big win) is won for each variation without being combined variation. is preferably configured to perform

(Modification 4)
In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, in the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", a summary change is performed from the final change of the high base state to the change of the remaining hold maximum of 4, and the high base state and the low base state are changed. A performance specification is adopted in which a "jackpot type notification performance" is used to notify in which of the base states a small win V (big win) is obtained. Since the control of the specific game state after the small hit V (big hit) is different depending on whether it is started or when the fluctuation is started in the low base state, the small hit V (big hit) is a high base It can also be considered preferable to make it possible for the player to recognize whether it was acquired in the state or the low base state as the effect content during the variable display of the second special symbol.

Therefore, as a fourth modification, for the "breakthrough zone" and the "battle mode", the variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state and the second special symbol in the low base state with different types of specific games after the small win V (jackpot) By adopting a method of executing a different production mode (a state in which at least a part of the production display contents are different from each other) with the variable display of 2 special symbols, either a high base state or a low base state can be performed. It is possible to make it clear to the player whether or not a small win V (big win) is obtained.

《Production example when modification 4 is adopted as “breakthrough zone”》
The "breakthrough zone" of the pachinko game machine P of this embodiment displays the "suspension charge effect" and "breakthrough zone battle effect" as effects for one variation in the high base state and a maximum of four remaining holds. However, if a method of dividing the high base state and low base state effects as in Modification 4 is employed, the following effect examples can be considered.

That is, after the "jackpot (special figure 1)", "small win V/jackpot (special figure 2)" is acquired, and interest is whether to shift to the continuous state ("battle mode" or "pseudo jackpot") In the "Breakthrough Zone", where the high base state and the low base state are divided, the "suspended charge & logo step-up effect" that is performed with one change in the high base state and the remaining 4 suspensions are performed. A “remaining pending battle effect” can be exemplified.

"Holding charge & logo step-up effect" encourages the player to accumulate four holds in the "breakthrough zone", and at the same time, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)” is an effect for notifying whether or not the game has been won. ” is displayed, the character string “battle mode” is displayed, and “battle mode The display mode of the character string "" is gradually changed, for example, the character string is lit one by one or switched to red display, and when all are lit, a win is notified (displayed in rainbow color when all are lit). , The color of the character string "battle mode" changes to blue, green, red, and gold, and finally the effect button P381 is operated to emit rainbow color to notify the hit. A presentation display is executed.

The "remaining pending battle effect" can be exemplified by the same effect mode as the "breakthrough zone battle effect" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment. At this time, an effect may be executed in which the ally character and the enemy character confront each other in the collective change for the maximum of four remaining reserves. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs the production|presentation (the production|presentation aspect similar to the "battle mode first half") which a friend character and an enemy character show off for every remaining hold|maintenance fluctuation|variation. In addition, when the maximum 4 fluctuations of the remaining reserve are combined fluctuations, it is necessary to configure the fluctuation pattern related to the first special symbol of the remaining reserve to be a special fluctuation pattern.

In addition, during the execution of "holding charge & logo step-up effect", if the high base state fluctuation display is lost and there is a hit in the pre-judgment information of the remaining pending hold, the logo step-up mode will be changed. , after the rainbow-colored mode (first confirmation notification) for notifying the hit, the character string "BURST!" is added to the character string "battle mode" and the character string "battle mode_BURST!" The display mode (second confirmation notification) may be displayable. When "Battle mode_BURST!" In addition, after the first confirmation notification, the player stops shooting game balls toward the second start winning hole P721, and there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the step cannot be progressed. The second confirmation notification may be executed without going through the confirmation notification, and regardless of whether or not the rainbow color (first confirmation notification) is reached, the button effect to operate the effect button P381 at the end of the effect and may be configured to be promoted to the second confirmation notification.

《Production example when modification 4 is adopted in “battle mode”》
Next, in the "battle mode" in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, a specific game that shifts after the special game (big hit, small hit V) depending on the timing of acquiring "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" As an effect to notify whether is a ``battle mode'' or a ``pseudo jackpot'', the effect mode of the high base state and the effect mode of the low base state are divided, and at least a part of the effect is displayed. A method (modification 4) for making it easier for the player to understand the type of the specific game after the special game will be described.

In the "battle mode" of the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the "battle mode first half" production is performed in the first to fifth variations of the high base state, and the sixth variation, which is the final variation in the high base state, and the low It consists of a "holding charge effect (battle mode)" and a "battle mode final battle effect" that are performed with a summary change of up to 4 remaining holds that are displayed in the base state, but modified example 4 was adopted. In the "battle mode" of the case, the "battle mode first half" production is performed from the 1st to the 6th variation (final variation) in the high base state, and the variation display for up to 4 pending changes is displayed in the low base state. It is possible to adopt a mode in which a "battle mode final battle effect", which is a summary change, is executed.

Here, in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, a special variation pattern is selected by the special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) for the variation display of the special symbol, which is the final variation in the high base state. However, in the modification 4, since it is a specification that performs a summary variation for a maximum of 4 remaining reservations, it relates to the reservation of the second special symbol that is digested first in the low base state A special variation pattern is selected from a special variation pattern table (variation pattern table for battle mode final variation) when variation display is performed.

It should be noted that, when executing the "battle mode" employing the modification 4, since the timing at which the summary variation is executed is after the start of the variation of the remaining hold related to the second special symbol, the gaming state is a low base state, It is already in a state where it cannot be held. Therefore, in the case of the "battle mode" in which the modification 4 is adopted, the "holding charge effect (battle mode)" is not included as the collective change effect. However, if the hold related to the second special symbol is not generated before the end of the sixth variation in the high base state, the probability that the player can obtain the "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" is remarkably lowered. Therefore, it is necessary to prompt the player to hold the second special symbol in the sixth variation in the high base state.

Therefore, in the "battle mode" that adopts modification 4, in the final variation (6th variation) of the high base state, the "battle mode first half" effect, which is the same effect mode from the 1st variation to the 5th variation, is performed. While being executed, in order to give the player a grace period to cause a hold related to the second special symbol, using a special variation pattern table ("Battle mode first half final variation variation pattern table"), from 30 seconds It is configured to perform variable display of special symbols for about 40 seconds, and in the final variation (sixth variation) of the high base state, suggesting the number of reservations related to the current second special symbol, second start winning opening P721 Execute the "second special symbol holding increase promotion effect" that encourages the ball to enter.

``Second special symbol holding increase promotion effect'' is a ``battle mode first half'' effect in the situation where the effect display device P80 displays the ``battle mode first half'' effect in the same manner as up to the fifth variation in the high base state. For example, in the lower right direction of the screen of the effect display device P80 (near the second start winning opening P721), an arrow image having a display area section corresponding to the hold related to the second special symbol divided into four is displayed, and every time a hold related to the second special symbol occurs, the four-divided display area section is changed to a mode indicating "with hold". Also, in addition to the arrow image, a character or a message "Aim for the second start prize opening!" , When there are four reservations related to the second special symbol, characters such as "OK" and "preparation" may be displayed to notify that the purpose has been achieved.

In addition, in the "second special symbol hold increase promotion effect", the display area section divided into four of the arrow image indicating the presence of the hold, like the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment, the prior determination information is used. 31), such as displaying an image for acquiring an icon displayed in the chance up icon display P880 as a reserved image.

(Modification 5)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment is composed of only 10 rounds of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)", but special symbols that triggered "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" Depending on the stop display mode, the number of rounds (for example, 4 rounds, 7 rounds) of "small win V/big win (special figure 2)" can be executed.

At this time, the number of rounds is estimated by the effect display during the variable display of special symbols that triggers "small win V / big win (special figure 2)", the start demonstration effect of the small win game, or the stop display mode of special symbols. In addition, it is possible to construct a hit confirmation as a look-ahead effect, or a look-ahead effect with an extremely high degree of expectation of winning that can be executed for the subsequent suspension during the execution of the hit variation, or a plurality of hit determinations ( Alternatively, if a look-ahead effect with a high hit expectation) is configured to be executable at the same time with multiple holds, it is determined that the preceding "small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is a hit with a small number of rounds. In this case, the V prize is not intentionally won, and the subsequent ``small win V/big win (special figure 2)'' is intentionally executed in a low base state, discarding the wins of a small number of rounds and winning the subsequent wins. It is presumed that a strategy (fraudulent game) can be executed in which the game state after 2 is virtually determined to be a win.

As a countermeasure against these captures (illegal games), if you have already obtained information that will be a hit as pre-determination information or special symbol lottery result information related to this variable display, the newly generated second special symbol is reserved. Based on the pre-determination information for, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead effect, and the determination of the number of rounds is not based on the stop display mode of the special symbol. It may be configured such that the lottery is performed at the same timing.

(Modification 6)
The pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment wins in any hold ( In the case of a small win), the variable display of the special pattern in the high base state is hit in the "jackpot type notification effect" executed in the special game start demonstration of "small win V / big win (special figure 2)". It was configured to notify whether it was a hit (small hit) or whether the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the low base state was a hit (small hit), but the content of the production display during the summary fluctuation was a specific production content (for example Friend characters repeat specific special moves to defeat enemy characters, etc.), or by performing promotion effects for decorative patterns, hits (small hits) with variable display within the maximum of 4 remaining pending It may be configured to notify that it has become.

In addition, before executing the "jackpot type notification effect", if it is notified that it has become a hit (minor hit) within such a fluctuation display within the maximum four remaining holdings, the "jackpot type notification All of the jackpot type icons P860 of "Production" may display "TWIN_BONUS", or an alternative production display may be executed for the period in which the "jackpot type notification production" is executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment configured as described above and the pachinko game machines P of Modifications 1 to 6, "small win V" is adopted as the specifications of the game machine, and a high base A method of changing the type of the specific game to be shifted afterward (after the big win game) is adopted depending on whether the small win V (big win) is obtained in either the state or the low base state, but similar game characteristics, That is, the timing of the special symbol lottery of the random number (random number of the second special symbol) obtained with the start opening related to the normal electric accessory as a trigger was a high base state or a low base state. If the specifications of the gaming machine are capable of providing "game characteristics that differentiate the types of later specific games," it is possible to implement controls and effects similar to those described in the present embodiment and each modified example. Needless to say.

An example of the specifications of a gaming machine that can provide similar game characteristics is a low-probability gaming machine configured to have a jackpot probability of about 1/100 at low probability (when the probability variation function is not activated), At high probability (when the probability variation function is activated), the V-ST machine (ST 10 times) with a jackpot probability of 1/18, and the number of times of continuation of the high base state of "breakthrough zone", "battle mode", and "pseudo jackpot" , 1 time, 6 times, and 100 times.

In the case of such specifications, even after the end of the "breakthrough zone", there may be a special period in which the special figure 1 is drawn in a high probability state, but this period is a special production period (for example, low probability / It can also be set as a period of staying in the production mode that does not occur when the base state is low. Since the 11th and subsequent variations of the pseudo-jackpot are in a low-probability/high-base state, the probability that the jackpot cannot be obtained during the "pseudo-jackpot" is higher than in the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment. It is not appropriate to shift to the ``battle mode'' just before the end of the ``pseudo-jackpot'' because it is not even in the probability state, so it is preferable to configure so that the end performance is generated while the ``pseudo-jackpot'' screen is displayed.

[Second embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology and the present embodiment described above. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and omits or simplifies the description of the common points. Among the elements that constitute the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, elements that are the same as or correspond to the elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko game machine that employs the "minor win V" similarly to the present embodiment. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is 100%, and "retention related to the second special symbol occurs. ”Or ``the normal pattern lottery is won, and the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning port P721 is opened, and the game ball enters the ball'', that is, the big hit game (including the small win V). It indirectly means obtaining the right to execute.

Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment generates a special period in which it is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721 related to the acquisition of the right of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, A big win game (small win V) is executed by the number of reserved numbers corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbols based on the suspension of the second special symbols generated in a special period. By being configured in this way, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment has the possibility of continuously executing a plurality of big win games (small win V) and acquiring a large amount of game balls at once. It is possible to provide game characteristics to the player (*because the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control).

Below are three implementations of pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment that are more interesting by changing the possibility of occurrence of a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with respect to a special period. An example will be described, but before that, the basic configuration of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described.

(board configuration)
FIG. 33 is a diagram conceptually showing an example of a board configuration (arrangement of winning devices) that can be employed in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment.

Approximately in the center of the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, an opening is formed so that the performance display device P80 can be visually recognized. It is attached and constitutes a partition inside the game area P501.

Below the effect display device P80, there is provided a first start winning hole P711A into which the game balls flowing down the left side game area (left side area P501L) of the effect display device P80 enter, and further below it is not shown. An out port P790 is provided. In addition, a general prize winning opening P731 is arranged in the lower area of the left side area P501L of the effect display device P80. That is, when a game ball is launched into the game area on the left side of the effect display device P80, the ball enters the first starting prize winning port P711A or the general winning prize port P731, and it can be expected that a prize will occur. there is

On the other hand, in the game area (right area P501R) on the right side of the effect display device P80, as shown in FIG. 711B, a large winning opening P751 is arranged, and a game ball shot toward the game area on the right side of the effect display device P80 can win.

Here, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B are starting winning openings for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbols, and the second starting winning opening P721 is the first 2 It is a starting prize opening for acquiring the right related to the special symbol lottery of special symbols. That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, even if the game ball is shot toward either the left area P501L or the right area P501R of the game area P501, the first start winning opening P711A and the first starting winning opening P711B is configured to be able to acquire the right of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol.

(spec)
The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts the "small win V" as in the present embodiment, and the major difference from the present embodiment in terms of game performance (game performance) is the second In the special symbol lottery of special symbols, the probability of becoming a "small hit" or "big hit" is 100%, and the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big win game (small win V). are different.

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment also performs a specific game (high base state) by activating the electric chew support function (electric support function) after various big hits (including small win V) as in the present embodiment. However, as a condition for ending the specific game (high base state) in the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment, "variation based on the special symbol lottery of the specified number of times of the first special symbol or the second special symbol display is completed" or "the big win game (minor win V) is executed", for example, when the prescribed number of times is set to once, the first special symbol is displayed once. It is configured so that the high base state can end even if it does.

Although not described in detail, other design values (probabilities of big hits, numbers of winning balls in various winning slots, etc.) are not limited to those described in this embodiment, but are appropriately set in accordance with game characteristics. Incidentally, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, it is preferable to adopt the second special symbol preferential digestion control, the reason for which will be described later.

(Game progress procedure)
Next, a description will be given of the procedure and progress of the game in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. In order to simplify the explanation, the condition for ending the specific game (high base state) will be explained assuming that the "specified number of times" is once.

First, the player operates the handle P204 to shoot a game ball toward the left game area (left area P501L) of the effect display device P80. The game ball shot to the left area P501L enters the first start winning hole P711A, the right of the special symbol lottery related to the first special symbol is generated, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed.

When the jackpot game is executed by the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, the player increases the operation amount of the handle P204 and directs the game ball to the right game area (right area P501R) of the effect display device P80. Shoot a game ball. A game ball launched into the right area P501R during the jackpot game wins the big winning hole P751 and the first starting winning hole P711B. At this time, if the game balls are shot toward the big winning hole P751 during the big winning game, at least one ball or more will win the first start winning hole P711B, and the first ball will win during the big winning game. It is constituted so that the right of the special design lottery of the special design occurs. In addition, since it is controlled to a low base state (non-electric chew support state) during the jackpot game, there is almost no possibility of winning the second start winning opening P721 related to the normal electric accessory P770.

When the big win game ends and the specific game (high base state) starts, if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol generated during the big win game. Variable display is started. In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, since the second special symbol preferential digestion control is adopted, when the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is held at the end of the jackpot game, the jackpot is won. After the end, the variable display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is started.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, in the specific game (high base state) after the end of the big win, a change that results in a big win in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or a small win in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Or, when a variation to become a big win is started, a short-time variation pattern (variation time) such as 1 second is selected by a variation pattern lottery, and a big win game (small win V) is executed immediately after the end of the big win.

On the other hand, in the specific game (high base state), when the fluctuation display (lost fluctuation) in which the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is "lost" is started, a long-time fluctuation pattern such as 100 seconds ( The fluctuation time) is determined by a fluctuation pattern lottery, and the high base state continues for about 100 seconds until the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is stopped and finished.

The pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment aims at the operation opening P741 during the period (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "specific period") during which the first special symbol loss variation in the specific game is executed. By playing a game that shoots, the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721 is opened by the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is entered into the second starting winning opening P721 to specify 100 seconds Accumulating the right of the big win game (minor win V) during the period is the main game property (game property) for acquiring a large amount of game balls in the specific game.

Here, in the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, the probability of "hit" in the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is set to, for example, 1/20, and the normal symbol lottery (loss) related to one normal symbol lottery (loss) is set to 1/20, for example. The time of one cycle of the variable display period of the pattern, or the variable display period of the normal pattern related to one normal pattern lottery (hit) and the operation period of the normal electric accessory is set to about 5 seconds, and about 100 seconds in a specific period It is possible to execute 20 normal symbol lotteries. In addition, as the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 770, "elapse of the opening time of the specified time" or "winning of one game ball" is determined, It is possible to enter one game ball into the 2-start winning hole P721, that is, one "hit" in the normal symbol lottery corresponds to one acquisition of the right of the big hit game (small win V). .

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a new special symbol lottery is not executed in a specific period of a specific game, and a big hit (small win V ) changes, the performance display device P80 displays a pattern for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery as the decorative pattern P801, and the right of the big win (small win V) is given to the player. It notifies the occurrence of a state that can be acquired (the open state of the normal electric accessory 770 provided in the second start winning opening P721).

In the specific period (the period during which the first special symbol loss variation in the specific game is executed), if a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs, after the specific period ends, A special symbol lottery of the second special symbol and a big win game (small win V) are repeatedly executed by the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

When all the suspensions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurring in the specific period are lost and the last big win game (small win V) is finished, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the specific game (high base state) again. will start and the specific period will occur again. In the specific period, when the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be acquired, the specific game is terminated and the normal game is resumed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, which proceeds as described above, the second special symbol preferential digestion control is performed to continuously digest the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred during the specific period. By continuously executing the big win game (small win V), the game ball acquisition period can be condensed into a short period of time, and the effect of making it easier to feel that a large number of game balls have been acquired. have.

If the first special symbol preferential digestion control or the entering ball order digestion control is used, the first start winning opening P711B during the period when the game ball is fired to the right region P501R in the specific game or the big hit game (small hit V) In the situation where the entry to the ball occurs and the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is suspended, the period until the next big hit game (small win V) occurs again after the specific period occurs again It takes a long time, and there is a risk that the player may not feel that he or she has won a large number of game balls. In addition, it does not deny that the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is changed to the first special symbol priority digestion control or the entry order digestion control, and if these controls are installed, the second special A specific period can be generated when there is a hold related to the special pattern lottery of the pattern, and the period in which the game can be executed in the specific period increases as a whole, making it easier to acquire the hold related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern. There is also an advantage.

As described above, the pachinko game of the second embodiment, which is a pachinko game machine that expects to acquire a large amount of game balls by performing one or more jackpot games based on one or more reservations that occurred during a specific period The machine P has been described above, and the pachinko game machine P in which the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment is further applied to enhance the interest will be described based on three embodiments.

In addition, in the normal normal electric accessory control, after the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory 770 is satisfied, the effective extension period for detecting the residual ball inside the electric accessory is set, but the second implementation In the example pachinko gaming machine P, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is the right of the big win game (small win V), and one big win game (small Since the intention of the design is to grant the right of winning V), when the operation termination condition of the normal electric accessory 770 is satisfied, it may be configured not to set the effective extension period (especially "1 ball It is preferable to control in this way when the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 is completed with the establishment of "winning of the game ball", and an effective extension period may be set in "elapse of the specified opening time").

[2-1 embodiment]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a first application example (2-1 embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-1 embodiment, FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the jackpot (small hit) symbols of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the long-time chance state production of the 2-1 embodiment, and FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the normal electric accessory opening production of the 2-1 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-1 embodiment is that the length of the specific period (fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol) that occurs after the big hit (small hit) for the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, It is different depending on the type of special symbol that triggered the execution of the big hit (small hit) just before the specific period occurs.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to create a state in which the probability of being able to generate a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the specific period is different, and the expectation for Renso (again , Expectations for the grant of a specific period after the big hit) and the number of reservations related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern (rights related to the occurrence of the big hit / small win). A state can be provided to a player as a specific period, a change is given as a game of a specific game, and a pachinko game machine with high interest can be provided.

The details of the 2-1 embodiment will be described below. The board structure of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being the same as in the second embodiment, but it can be changed as appropriate as long as the game described below can be constructed.

(game flow)
First, referring to FIG. 34, the game flow (transition of the game state) will be described with respect to the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment.

The normal game (low probability/low base state) is a game state in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is the main part of the game, and the player enters the game area (left area P501L) on the left side of the effect display device P80. A ball is shot, the game ball is entered into the first start winning hole P711A, and the aim is to obtain a big hit by a special pattern lottery for the first special pattern.

In the normal game, when the jackpot is won (Fig. 34 (A)), the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is executed, and depending on the type of special symbol that has caused the jackpot to be executed, after the jackpot game, the "short-time chance state ', and 'long chance state' (FIGS. 34(B) and 34(E)).

FIG. 35 shows the result of the symbol lottery (at the time of the big hit) in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, the symbol lottery selects either "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" or "special figure 1_jackpot pattern B". or is selected. Although only two types of symbols are shown in FIG. 35, these are broadly classified according to the type of the specific game to be executed and the specific game after the big win, and actually the first special symbol display device. There may be two or more types of symbols to be stopped and displayed on P51.

The "special figure 1_jackpot pattern B" shown in FIG. 35 is a jackpot pattern in which the "short-time chance state" is executed as a specific game after the jackpot game, and the "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" is a jackpot game. It is a jackpot pattern in which a "long-time chance state" is executed later as a specific game.

《Short-time chance state》
After the "big hit (special figure 1)", when it shifts to the "short time chance state", when the big hit game is executed, the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first start winning opening P711B arranged in the right area P501R. The first special symbol lottery is held based on the reservation related to the special symbol lottery, or the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol remaining from before the big hit game. As a specific period, a chance state (low probability/high base state) occurs for one minute.

In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, in the chance state (low probability / high base state), the player shoots the game ball to the right region P501R, and when the game ball passes through the operation opening P741, the normal symbol A lottery will be held. At this time, the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed as a stop display symbol of the normal symbol after the variable display of the normal symbol for one minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53, and the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit". , the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, and the ball can be entered into the second start winning hole P721. Then, when the game ball enters the second start winning hole P721, a big win or a small win is won by a special symbol lottery of the second special symbol after the elapse of a specific period, and "small win V/big win (special figure 2)". (Fig. 34(D)). When the result of the normal symbol lottery in the chance state is "lost", or when the normal symbol lottery is "hit", but the ball does not enter the second start winning opening P721, "normal game (low probability/low base state)” (FIG. 34(C)).

In the "short-term chance state", one normal symbol lottery is performed during a one-minute chance state (low probability/high base state), which is a specific period, and a "small chance" is selected depending on whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. Distribution to "Hit V/Big Hit (Special Figure 2)" or "Normal Game (Low Probability/Low Base State)" is performed. In addition, the hit probability of the normal symbol lottery of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is set to 1/3.3, and in the "short time chance state", the "small hit V/big hit (special 2)” is 30% (see “Continuity Rate” in “Special Figure 1_Big Hit Design B” in FIG. 35).
After execution of the "minor win V/big win (special figure 2)", the game shifts to a "long chance state" (FIG. 34(G)).

《Long Chance State》
"Long-time chance state" shifts to (Fig. 34 (G)) after "big hit (special figure 1)" (Fig. 34 (E)) or after "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" It is a specific game, and the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol after the start of the specific game is lost, and the loss variation of the first special symbol is performed during a specific period.

The duration of the specific period of the ``long-time chance state'' varies depending on the type of special symbol that triggers the execution of the big win game (minor win V) that has been executed immediately before shifting to the ``long-time chance state''. A specific period (loss variation of the first special symbol) is executed at any duration of minutes, 6 minutes, or 9 minutes. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the case of "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" and "special figure 2_jackpot/minor win pattern A", the duration of the specific period is 5 minutes, and "special figure 2_ The duration of the specific period is set to 6 minutes in the case of "big hit/small hit pattern B", and the duration of the specific period is set to 9 minutes in the case of "special figure 2_big hit/small hit pattern C".

In the "long-time chance state", as in the "short-time chance state", the normal symbol lottery is performed by entering the game ball into the operation port P741 arranged in the right area P501R, and one normal symbol lottery is performed. The variable display of normal symbols for 1 minute is performed by the normal symbol display device P53. That is, when the duration of the specific period in the "long-time chance state" is 5 minutes, the normal symbol lottery can be received 5 times, and when the duration of the specific period is 9 minutes, the normal symbols are 9 times. You can get a lottery.

In the "long-time chance state", if a "hit" is obtained in the normal symbol lottery and the game ball can be entered into the second start winning opening P721 based on the opening of the normal electric accessory 770, After the lapse of the specific period, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is canceled, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol wins a big win or a small win, and "small win V / big win (special figure 2)". (FIG. 34(F)). In addition, even after the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs, as long as the specific period continues, it is possible to receive the normal symbol lottery, and it is related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. It is possible to accumulate (stock) rights related to the execution of a big win or a small win by the maximum number of pending pending.

In the "long-time chance state", it has been explained that the normal symbol variation time is 1 minute, but when the normal symbol is a hit, the normal electric accessory 770 is operated (opened) after the normal symbol variation time has elapsed. Therefore, one cycle including the operation period of the normal electric accessory 770 may be designed to end in about 1 minute as the normal symbol variation time (for example, 55 seconds) somewhat shorter than the deviation variation.

In the "long-time chance state", when a hold related to the special symbol lottery of one or more second special symbols occurs, "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)", the second special symbol "Small hit V/big hit (special figure 2)" is executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of reserved coins accumulated (stocked) as reserved. It should be noted that, when the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is repeated multiple times, each time it internally shifts to the same low probability / high base state as the long-time chance state, but the second The fluctuation display time of the big win (small win) based on the special pattern drawing of the special pattern is set to 1 second, and the ``small win V/big win (special figure 2)'' resumes immediately after the big win game (small win V) ends. be done.

Therefore, the "small hit V / big hit (special figure 2)" is executed a big hit production called "STOCK-BONUS", and the big hit production is continuously executed until the second special pattern special pattern drawing is no longer reserved. Even under the condition of being internally in a ``long-time chance state'', the performance for the specific period is not executed, and the performance for notifying the continuous occurrence of the big win (small win V) is provided. Execute.

In the "long-time chance state", when the normal symbol lottery is executed 5 times to 9 times and all are "lost", or the normal electric accessory 770 is opened, the second start prize When no ball is entered into the mouth P721, the game returns to "normal game (low probability/low base state)".

Although not shown in FIG. 34, in the "short-time chance state" or "long-time chance state", when the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol becomes a "jackpot", the variation time is 1 second. , and executes a "jackpot (special figure 1)" without the occurrence of a specific period. In addition, in the "long-term chance state" and "short-term chance state", if the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is performed, the special symbol that becomes a big hit or a small hit is displayed strictly. , a specific period of 1 second is generated, and during this period, there is a case where the variable display of the normal design is performed based on the ball entered into the operation port P741 or the hold related to the normal design lottery.

However, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, even if the result of the normal symbol lottery is "win", it must be in the high base state (electric chew support state) at the timing when the stop display is made. For example, the opening of the normal electric accessory 770 is not opened in a manner that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening P721, and there is almost no possibility of entering the second starting winning opening P721. is configured as follows. Therefore, even if the normal design lottery becomes "hit" in the first special design or second special design big hit fluctuation (small hit fluctuation) in "long time chance state" or "short time chance state", one minute later is after the special symbols are stopped and the jackpot game is being executed, so the state has shifted to the low base state. State" or "short-time chance state" during the winning fluctuation period of the special symbol, no new suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurs.

In addition, in the "long-time chance state", if the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol results in a big hit, it will shift to "big hit (special figure 1)", but this big hit is "special figure 1_jackpot pattern". B", the player will be shifted to a disadvantageous "short-time chance state", and the player may feel disadvantageous. In order to prevent such a disadvantage, if the "special figure 1 _ jackpot pattern B" is won in the "long time chance state" or "short time chance state", the game after the "jackpot (special figure 1)" The state may be controlled to be a “long chance state” (specific period of 5 minutes).

(Example of long-term chance state production)
FIG. 36 shows an example of an effect in the "long-time chance state" which is the most advantageous game state for the player (the game state in which the jackpot game is most likely to be obtained) in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment. . In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, in the "long chance state", "4 consecutive battle effects" are performed (when the specific period is "5 minutes" and the normal symbol lottery is in the "long chance state" is executed five times in succession after the start of ).

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-1 embodiment is a specific period (N minutes) in which the first special symbol of the specific game in the low probability / high base state is fluctuating, N times A normal pattern lottery can be received, and in the "long-time chance state" when the specific period is 5 minutes, one normal pattern production is performed for one normal pattern lottery, and the second In the pachinko game machine P of the -1 embodiment, four “battle effects” and one “final chance” effect (a common effect with the short-time chance state) are executed.

The example of the screen in FIG. 36 shows a state in which the third "battle effect" of the "four consecutive battle effects" is being executed. More specifically, the production mode display P840 on the upper left side of the screen displays the production mode title of "continuous battle" indicating that the production is "four consecutive battles", and the number of remaining games displayed P841 is currently the third. is being executed, indirectly suggesting to the player that there are two remaining "battle effects" (including the third) and a "final chance".

Two pending objects P811 are displayed in the pending display area P811 at the bottom right of the screen, indicating that two pending objects related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol have been obtained.

In the center of the "battle effect" screen, an image of characters facing each other is displayed. It notifies whether the result of the lottery is "hit" or "lose".

A simple design P802 is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-1 embodiment, the simple design drawing P802 displays the result of the normal design lottery as a decorative design. The simplified drawing P802 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery, and if a "win" is stopped and displayed with a double eye, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand that he or she has won a big win at that point. For example, it may be configured to notify that the result of the normal symbol lottery is "hit" in a mode in which a "V" symbol such as "3V3" is stopped and displayed in the center. In addition, during the "four consecutive battle" production, since the first special symbol is changed, the result of the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is not notified by the decorative symbol, but the simple symbol lottery for the special symbol lottery It is also possible to display by separately facilitating the drawing P802.

Below the simplified drawing P802 of the normal symbol, a right hitting notification P832 is displayed as a separate hitting notification P830. In the "long-time chance state" and "short-time chance state", it is necessary to enter the ball into the operation opening P741 during the limited time during the fluctuation display period of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol and receive the normal symbol lottery. In order to prevent the elapse of a specific period without being able to receive the normal symbol lottery as many times as intended, during the variable display period of the special symbol, control regarding the variation of the normal symbol or the operation of the normal electric accessory 770 When the control is no longer performed, after a relatively short time of about 3 seconds, the mode is switched to emphasize the right-handed notification P832, and the player is made to shoot the game ball to the right region P501R and enter the operation opening P741. You may make it alert|report to urge you to do it.

In the "battle effect", if the player side character wins, the "normal electric accessory release effect" is performed as shown in FIG. In the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an image simulating the second start prize-winning hole P721 and a character string such as "Aim" are displayed, and a game ball is shot toward the second start prize-winning hole P721. A performance will be held to encourage Ordinary electric accessory 770 has the end condition of "entering a game ball of one ball to the second start winning opening P721" or "elapse of the operation period of a predetermined time", so the pachinko game of the 2-1 embodiment In the machine, in the "ordinary electric accessory opening effect", an indicator display (recommended launch period display) substantially corresponding to the operation period of the ordinary electric accessory is displayed below the image imitating the second start winning opening P721, and the game is played. It shows the period during which the player can enter the second start winning hole P721.

It should be noted that the "normal electric role opening effect", considering the time from the launch of the game ball to reaching the second start winning opening P721, during the winning fluctuation of the normal design, the design fixing time of the winning design of the normal design, etc. , may be configured to be performed before the normal electric accessory 770 is activated.

According to the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in which the big hit (small hit V) is definite in the specific game. The length of the duration of the specific period can be varied according to the type of the special symbol for executing the big win (small win V) that was executed immediately before the start of the specific game. Like pachinko machines, we provide a game machine that gives you an interval to acquire a large number of game balls in a short period of time. To provide a pachinko game machine capable of providing different specific games and enhancing the interest of the specific games.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment described above, in the "short-time chance state" and the "long-time chance state", the big hit variation or the small hit variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to 1 second. (A) After the big hit game (small hit V) executed in the pattern type of some special symbols, even if it is a big hit variation, the specific period ( (e.g. 5 minutes) can be generated, (a) special symbol lottery in the "short-term chance state" and "long-term chance state" A big hit can be achieved in a ``short-time chance state'' or a ``long-time chance state'' by determining a fluctuation time of 5 minutes with a probability of several percent in a variation pattern lottery when a small win is made. It may be configured to separately provide a "special chance state" that can acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during variation (or small hit variation).

In such a "special chance state", if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is treated as a "recharge chance". It may be possible to restart the "4 consecutive battle production" while notifying that there is, and if there is no hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol at the start, the final of the "4 consecutive battle production" If the second special pattern is not reserved at the time of the battle, the occurrence of a big hit (small hit V) is notified as a resurrection effect, and if the second special pattern can be reserved during the ``special chance state'', the final It may be configured to perform an effect display such that a big win game (minor win V) to be executed in "STOCK-BONUS" is added after the battle.

In addition, when the "special chance state" is triggered by (a) a jackpot game (minor win V) executed in the pattern type of some special symbols, as another modification, the target special symbols In the big hit game (small win V) triggered by the symbol type, or a part of the big win (small win) not targeted (gase), a special battle production is generated as a “STOCK-BONUS” production, and the game is played in a special battle. It may be configured such that the occurrence of the "special chance state" is notified when a success mode in which the player's side character wins is displayed.

(Modification 2 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-1 embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine of the 2-1 embodiment, when the specific period lasts N minutes, it is designed on the assumption that N normal symbol lottery (1 minute / times) is executed, but the specific After shifting to the game, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate, and then there is a time until the normal symbol lottery is performed after entering the operation port P741, or the normal symbol fluctuation display during a specific period. In consideration of the possibility that the player may not be able to receive the normal symbol lottery N times due to, for example, the period in which the drawing is not performed continues, the time for the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol, which is the specific period, is set to N minutes + X seconds. Or, by setting the symbol fixing time after the variable display of N seconds of the first special symbol to X seconds, the guarantee time "X seconds" for the player not to lose the right of the normal symbol lottery is provided. may be configured.

When the guarantee time is provided in this way, after notification of the normal symbol lottery result of N times, the guarantee time " It is necessary to wait for the remaining time of "X seconds", but during these periods, when shifting to a big win (small win), "STOCK-BONUS execution waiting" is displayed, and when returning to the normal game, it is displayed. , may be configured to execute a "result effect" for notifying the total number of winning balls obtained by Renso.

Further, in order for the player to receive the normal symbol lottery N times, the attention may be called as the remaining time of the guaranteed time "X seconds" decreases. As an effect for calling attention, the right-hand shot notification P832 may be changed to an emphasized mode, and a warning message such as "If you do not hit right, you will lose the right to battle!" The guaranteed time "X seconds" is the period from the start of the first special symbol loss fluctuation (after the start of the specific period) until the normal symbol lottery is performed, and the control related to the normal symbol or normal electric accessory after that is stopped. If the period of time is counted and "X seconds" has passed, a new "1 minute" (corresponding to the normal symbol lottery fluctuation display and normal electric accessory operation for one cycle time) is set as the guaranteed time, and the same configured to repeat the control of

[Second-2 embodiment]
Next, a second application example (2-2 embodiment) relating to the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 41. FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-2 embodiment, FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect during the chance time of the 2-2 embodiment, and FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the 2-2 embodiment. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing another example of the effect during the chance time of the embodiment, and FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect during the super chance time of the 2-2 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2-2 embodiment is that the pachinko gaming machine P of the second embodiment has a first specific period (a period during which it is possible to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, which is simplified In addition, during the execution of the "chance time" which is sometimes called the "first specific period"), the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is a predetermined condition (in the 2-2 embodiment, the second special symbol When the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery is 2 or more) is satisfied, the second specific period that will occur next time (second special symbol lottery special symbol lottery) state (which may be simply referred to as a "second specific period") is given the right to be in a more advantageous state than the first specific period, so that the player can play the game during the specific period. It is possible to raise the interest of the game by drawing attention to whether or not it is possible to move to a further advantageous state depending on the result (the number of reserved acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol).

The details of the 2-2 embodiment will be described below. The board configuration of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.) will be described as being the same as in the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment, but if the game described below can be configured, Appropriate changes are possible.

(game flow)
First, with reference to FIG. 38, the game flow (transition of the game state) will be described with respect to the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. Incidentally, the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment also employs the second special symbol preferential digestion control like the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment.

In the normal game (low probability/low base), the game ball is shot to the left area P501L in the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, and the game ball is entered into the first start winning opening 711A. By doing so, the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol is executed, and the game state aims to acquire a "jackpot (special figure 1)" (FIG. 38(A)).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is executed, the "chance time" is started (FIG. 38(B)). "Chance time" is a game state of low probability / high base state (electrical sapo 1 time), similar to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment and the 2-1 embodiment, the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol It is a gaming state in which a specific period in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired occurs during the period (80 seconds).

In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, the "chance time" is composed of the 80-second deviation variation of the first special symbol. During this time, by entering the game ball into the operation port P741 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501, receiving a normal symbol lottery (per probability 1/9.99, variation time 10 seconds per time). is possible, and by performing 8 normal symbol lotteries during "chance time", the execution right of "STOCK-BONUS", which is a small hit V / big hit game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol described later. It is a game state aiming at acquisition of . That is, in this specific period of 80 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with a winning probability of 1/9.99 and a fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time can be received eight times.

In the "chance time", winning the normal symbol lottery with a probability of 1/9.99 mentioned above, and entering the game ball into P721 in the easy-to-enter state, relates to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. The probability (continuation rate) of acquiring at least one hold and acquiring the right to execute "chance time" or "super chance time" described later is 56.9. % (in other words, the expected value of getting a hit with a probability of 1/9.99 once in 8 times (80 seconds/fluctuation time of 10 seconds)), the probability of acquiring the execution right of "super chance time" is 19% (in other words, the expected value that a win with a probability of 1/9.99 is obtained twice or more in 8 times (80 seconds/fluctuation time of 10 seconds)). If the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "chance time", the game returns to the normal game (Fig. 38 (I)).

After the specific period of "chance time" has passed, if there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, "STOCK-BONUS" (small hit V / jackpot game based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol ) (FIG. 38(D)), and after the end of "STOCK-BONUS", the process shifts to "chance time" (FIG. 38(E)).

In addition, in the "chance time", if two or more reserves related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired, the execution right of the "super chance time" can be acquired. "Super Chance Time" is a period during which small hit fluctuation or big hit fluctuation of the second special pattern, which started to fluctuate when the number of reservations related to the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern is two, is executed, and is 170 seconds. A specific period, which is a variable display period of special symbols, occurs. That is, in the specific period of 170 seconds, as described above, the normal symbol lottery with the winning probability of 1/9.99 and the fluctuation time of 10 seconds per time can be received 17 times.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even in a specific period that is a small hit variation or a big hit variation period of the second special symbol, which is the execution period of "super chance time", the special symbol of the second special symbol It becomes possible to acquire a reservation related to the lottery. "Super chance time" (170 seconds) has a longer period than the specific period in "chance time" (80 seconds), so the number of executable normal symbol lotteries is large, and the number of second special symbols It can be said that the possibility of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery is increasing.

In "Super Chance Time", the number of executions of the normal symbol lottery is about 17 times, and it is possible to obtain a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol with a probability of about 83.3%. It is possible to acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time". If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time", the transition to "STOCK-BONUS" after the end of the "super chance time" (Fig. 38 (G)) 2 If the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2 special symbols can be obtained, the process shifts to "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" (FIG. 38(F)). After execution of "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS", it returns to "super chance time" (FIG. 38(H)).

"STOCK-BONUS", which is executed after "Super Chance Time", is repeated until the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol becomes 0 (the variation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 Seconds, even if it is internally the same as “chance time”, a specific period of 80 seconds does not occur), “SUPER_STOCK-BONUS” executed after “super chance time” is the second special symbol It is repeatedly executed until the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery becomes 2 (170 even if the state is the same as the "super chance time" internally because the variation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 1 second. specific period of seconds does not occur).

It should be noted that, if you get two holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the "chance time", the end of the 80-second deviation fluctuation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, which is the "chance time" Later, "super chance time" is to start. That is, the variable display period of the second special symbol is the base state that is the gaming state, in other words, regardless of whether the special symbol variable time reduction function (time saving state) is activated or not, the variable display time of the special symbol depending on the number of reservations When the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is determined, a variable display period of 170 seconds is selected when the number of reservations is 2, and a variation time of 1 second is selected when the number of reservations is other. It's like

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, even if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained in the "super chance time" which is the most advantageous state for the player, After the "STOCK-BONUS" is once executed, the "chance time" is started, so the most advantageous state is the most advantageous state, with a two-stage structure from the most advantageous state to the transition to the normal game. Even if the "super chance time" has ended, the game flow can make the player think that "there is still a chance" and suppress the decline of the player's desire to play.

(Example of production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment)
Next, examples of effects of "chance time" and "super chance time" in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41. FIG.

<<Example of chance time production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment>>
FIG. 39 shows an example of effect display in the chance time after the "jackpot (special figure 1)". At the top of the screen, an effect mode display P840 (“chance time” character string) and a remaining game number display P841 (“54 seconds left” character string) are displayed. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, since the specific period is the variable display period of the special symbols, as the remaining game number display P841, the "remaining variation time" of the special symbols (or the fluctuation of the special symbols The remaining time from the end of the display to the end of the electric chewing support state) is displayed.

A pending display area P810 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen. In the embodiment of FIG. 39, there is no pending related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the pending object P811 (see FIG. 36) is not displayed. Also in the simple reservation display P814 in the left center of the screen, "0" is displayed as the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

At the bottom left of the screen, the cumulative win number display P824 (display of "Total_00600pt") and the jackpot icon display P821 (display of icon "V" and "x1" indicating the number) are displayed. shows the number of winning balls and the number of big winning games (small winning V) in the game.

In the center of the screen, a "7" pattern with a character attached as a variable display of the decorative pattern P801 is displayed stopped (temporarily stopped) in the right and middle rows, and the left pattern is changed. It is shown that it is being displayed. Here, the decorative pattern P801 informs the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, and the normal pattern is displayed by displaying three 7 patterns in a grid pattern or by displaying other special decorative patterns. It is configured to notify "hit" as a result of the lottery.

In the example of FIG. 39, the 1 decorative pattern P801 (decorative pattern in the left column) is not stopped, and an image simulating the effect button P381 and "Aim for '7 (image)'" are displayed. By operating the effect button P381, it is determined whether three "7" symbols of the decorative pattern P801 are aligned (hit), or whether the decorative pattern P801 other than the "7" pattern is stopped and displayed in the left pattern (loss). A button effect for notification is being executed. Even when a predetermined period of time has passed since the presentation button was displayed (when the player does not press the presentation button for a predetermined period of time), the final display scheduled image such as 7 alignment or tenpai out is displayed.

In addition, not limited to the production example shown in FIG. 39, as a production to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery during the "chance time", for example, without accompanying the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, production using characters (for example It may be notified that the normal symbol lottery will be successful by executing the battle production) and displaying the success mode (battle victory).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another production example of the "chance time" of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment. More specifically, in the "chance time", one reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired (in FIG. 40, one reservation object P811 is displayed in the reservation display area P810 at the bottom right of the screen This is an example of the effect display displayed under the condition that at least "STOCK-BONUS" is executed and the entry into "chance time" is confirmed again, that is, under the condition that the consecutive residence is confirmed.

In the example of FIG. 40, the presentation mode display P840 is switched to "Promotion Chance", and a command-like message "Break the seal!" is displayed below the character string "Promotion Chance". In the center of the screen, a character with a heavy weapon is displayed, and if this character succeeds in ``breaking the seal'', which is required as a production, the result of the normal symbol lottery will be a win. It is suggested that In other words, in the situation of "chance time", before and after the second special symbol lottery hold related to the special symbol lottery is obtained, the tendency of the effect of notifying the result of the normal symbol lottery and the effect mode are configured to switch. there is

The reason for switching the presentation mode during the "chance time" is that in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol occurs during the execution of the "chance time". If not, the player is paying attention to whether or not the advantageous state continues (whether or not it is possible to acquire the right to enter "chance time" again), and the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol After the occurrence, interest is focused on whether or not the special symbol lottery for the second second special symbol, which is the right to execute the "super chance time", will occur, so these players have different interests. This is because the effect of enhancing interest can be expected by displaying an optimal presentation.

In the example of FIG. 40, an example of a production using a character with a heavy weapon is shown. You may show the result of a lottery. In addition, even after obtaining the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to execute the same effect display as before the occurrence of the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as shown in FIG. It may be configured as follows.

It should be noted that, although not shown, in the situation shown in FIG. 40, when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is acquired and the right of two or more big hit games (small win V) is acquired. Further, it may be configured so as to change to a state in which an effect is determined in a different effect tendency or effect mode.

<<Example of super chance time production of pachinko game machine P of 2-2 embodiment>>
FIG. 41 shows an example of super chance time effect executed in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment.

In the example of FIG. 41, as the effect of "super chance time", an effect display substantially equivalent to the effect of "chance time" shown in FIG. 39 is displayed. As a different point, in order to celebrate the fact that the situation is controlled in the most advantageous state, the display area of the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 for informing the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is changed, and the background is changed. The difference is that an animation is displayed as the effect image. In the example of FIG. 41, the background animation is assumed to display an image that is not related to the result of the normal symbol lottery, but the variable display of the decorative symbol P801 informs the expectation that the winning result will be notified. Therefore, there is a case where a preview image (mini-character action, addition of effects to the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, etc.) displayed superimposed on the background animation image is displayed.

During the execution of the "super chance time", when there are four holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the ball entering the second start winning opening P721 is a new jackpot game (small win V) right. , the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 for informing the result of the normal pattern lottery may be hidden or may be changed to be displayed in a smaller display area. By reducing the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern P801 in this way, the visibility of the animation display of the background may be increased.

In addition, in the pachinko machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, about 10 animations are displayed in order for the background animation during the "super chance time", depending on the number of times the super chance time is executed (or the number of consecutive times). configured to be Then, under the circumstances when "super chance time" is executed a specific number of times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), if you acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, in "SUPER_STOCK-BONUS" As the effect of the big win game (small win V) to be executed, a special effect (for example, an effect display related to the animation displayed in the immediately preceding "super chance time") may be executed. good.

In addition, in the "super chance time" which is the specific number of times, if the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can not be obtained, "chance time" will be after "STOCK-BONUS", If you acquire the right to execute "Super Chance Time" again, the same background animation as the previous specific number of times will be displayed again (delayed effect), and the "Super Chance Time" will be executed. At the time of execution, the background animation in the "super chance time" may be configured not to proceed unless a hold relating to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is obtained.

In addition, not only the effect display mode as shown in FIG. 41, but also in the "super chance time", the notice effect to inform the result of the normal symbol lottery like "chance time" as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 It may be possible to execute a production mode that draws attention to such as "chance time", or a plurality of production modes such as a production mode similar to "chance time" or a production mode based on the above-mentioned background animation. It may be configured to be arbitrarily selectable.

(Modification 1 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment)
Next, a modification of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment will be described. First, as a first modification, the pachinko game machine P of the 2-2 embodiment has two specific periods with different degrees of advantage as the specific period, but there is a modification that further increases such as 3 or 4 Conceivable.

More specifically, as a modification 1 of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, when determining the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the number of reservations is limited to the variation when two However, even when the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 3 or 4, a specific period (period during which the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired) can be generated. It is conceivable to control so as to determine the time (variation pattern) of the variation display related to the special symbol lottery of the special symbols.

At this time, the larger the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the longer the specific period may be (for example, 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 2, and 40 seconds when the number of reservations is 3). 50 seconds when the number of reservations is 4, and 60 seconds when the number of reservations is 4). Good (eg, 100 seconds for 2 holds, 20 seconds for 3 holds, 10 seconds for 4 holds).

(Modification 2 of the pachinko game machine of the 2-2 embodiment)
In the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-2 embodiment, as described above, during the second specific period (the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol when the number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is two The big hit (small hit V) fluctuation display period based on) is determined depending on the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state (high base state or low base state) It was explained that it is performed by the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation pattern lottery table, but when "the number of reservations and the game state related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are in a high base state" The second specific period may be generated with a variation pattern determined by a variation pattern lottery table referred to as a condition.

By configuring in this way, in the period of the first specific period (loss fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state), the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol generates the second specific period Even if the number of conditions for causing the second specific period is met, the game state shifts to the low base state at the end of the first period, and one of the conditions for generating the second specific period is not satisfied. After the end of one specific period, it is possible to shift to the big win game (small win V) without fail, and it is possible to perform control so that the second specific period is always executed after the big win game (small win V). becomes.

At this time, in order to acquire the execution right for the second specific period, the condition for generating the second specific period after the execution of the big win game (minor win V) in the first specific period +1 second Although it is necessary to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of 2 special symbols, as described above, after the end of the first specific period, after the end of the second specific period, it will always shift to a big hit (small win V). Also, the start of the first specific period and the second specific period can be always after the execution of the big win (small win V), and the transition of the game state is made easy for the players to understand. can be done.

[2nd-3rd embodiment]
Regarding the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a third application example (2-3 embodiment) will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the 2-3 embodiment, and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing the distribution ratio of the big win (minor win) symbols of the 2-3 embodiment.

The characteristic point of the 2nd-3rd embodiment is that for the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment, a special Depending on the type of symbol (big hit symbol, small winning symbol), one of a plurality of high base states (electric sapo mode) with different control related to the normal symbol lottery is set, so that a specific period in the specific game (second special symbol The period during which the reservation related to the special symbol lottery can be acquired) can be configured to vary the ease of acquisition of the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the game performance in the specific period (regarding the normal symbol lottery To enhance interest in a specific game by a difference in control).

More specifically, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, normal symbol lottery is "hit" as a type of high base state (electric sapo mode) different in control related to normal symbol lottery in a specific period It consists of "Electric Sapo Mode 1" with a probability of 1/1 (100%) and "Electric Sapo Mode 2" with a probability of 1/10 (10%) that the normal pattern lottery will be "hit", and further " In the case of controlling to the "electric support mode 2", the number of games to be maintained in the high base state is configured to be any one of 1 to 3 times.

That is, in the case of being controlled to the "power support mode 1", by playing the game as intended by the design, it is possible to acquire the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the four second special symbols without fail, and to the "power support mode 2". When it is controlled, the game that receives the normal symbol lottery is developed in anticipation of the continuation of the specific game (continuous play).

The details of the second-third embodiment will be described below. Regarding the board structure of the gaming machine (arrangement of winning devices, etc.), the description will be made assuming that it is the same as the second embodiment, the 2-1 embodiment, and the 2-2 embodiment, but the game described below will be described. As long as it can be configured, it can be changed as appropriate.

(game flow)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd-3rd embodiment. In the "normal game (low probability/low base state)" of FIG. 42, the player shoots a game ball into the left area P501L of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the first start winning opening P711A, and By receiving a special symbol lottery of 1 special symbol, it aims to acquire the right to execute the "big hit (special symbol 1)" (Fig. 42(A)).

When the "jackpot (special figure 1)" is started, the player shoots a game ball to the right area P501R of the game area P501, enters the game ball into the big winning hole P751, and shoots the game ball with the prize ball. Acquire. At this time, as in the second embodiment, 2-1 embodiment, and 2-2 embodiment, if the shot is aimed at the big winning opening P751 during the jackpot game, it will also enter the first starting winning opening P711B. A ball is generated, and a hold related to the special symbol lottery of at least one first special symbol occurs during the big win game (small win V). After the "jackpot (special figure 1)", the game shifts to "STOCK-TIME 1" as shown in FIG. 42 (FIG. 42(B)).

"STOCK-TIME 1" is a specific game with a low probability / high base state (electric chew support state), based on the pattern that triggered the execution of "jackpot (special 1)", a normal pattern lottery hit While controlling to one of two high base states (electric sapo mode) with different probability of becoming, based on the pattern that triggered the execution of "big hit (special figure 1)", the big hit game (small hit V) is executed The number of variable display times of the special symbols to be maintained in the high base state when not performed is also controlled to 1 to 3 times.

A specific example of the game state of "STOCK-TIME1" is shown in FIG. In the distribution of the jackpot game (small hit V) symbols of the pachinko gaming machine P of the 2-3 embodiment shown in FIG. The jackpot pattern (group) that is jackpot pattern D" is the jackpot pattern to be controlled in "STOCK-TIME 1".

Here, the "selection probability" in FIG. It shows the probability to be determined, and the "number of times of electric support" is the number of games to be maintained in a high base state set after each jackpot game of "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" to "special figure 1_jackpot pattern D" is shown.

The "normal pattern probability" in FIG. 43 is the probability that the normal symbol lottery will be "hit" in the specific game (high base state) controlled after the "special figure 1_jackpot pattern A" to "special figure 1_jackpot pattern D". A high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/1 is defined as "electrical support mode 1", and a high base state in which the normal symbol probability is 1/10 is defined as "electrical support mode 2".

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2nd and 3rd embodiments, the variation time of the loss variation based on the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol in the high base state is 30 seconds, and the normal symbol based on the normal symbol lottery. The variation time of is about 4 seconds per variation. That is, while the first special symbol loss variation in the high base state (electrical sapo state) is performed once, the normal symbol variation is executed about 7 times, and the duration of the high base state is the special symbol variation display twice. Or when it becomes 3 times, the maximum executable number of normal symbol lotteries increases to about 14 times and about 21 times.

"Continuity rate" in FIG. 43 indicates the probability (expectation) of being able to acquire a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in a specific period (the total period of fluctuation of the first special symbol in the high base state). , indicating that the execution right of the specific game (STOCK-TIME2) is acquired at the indicated continuation rate (probability).

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, there are cases where the number of times to maintain the high base state is multiple times (when the number of times of electric support is 2 times, 3 times), but the first or second time If the second special symbol holding related to the special symbol lottery can be acquired during the execution of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol which is the second specific period, the second or third specification is performed by the second special symbol priority digestion control. A big win game (minor win V) is executed by a special symbol lottery related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol without executing the period (loss variation of the first special symbol).

That is, in the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, in the specific game controlled to the "electric sapo mode 1", four holdings related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol are acquired in a short time (30 seconds). On the other hand, when it is controlled to "Electric Sapo Mode 2", even if the number of electric sapo times increases, the specific period (first special At the moment when the pattern loss variation) ends, the execution of the specific period that can acquire the hold related to the special pattern lottery of the new second special pattern is canceled, so when it is controlled to "electric support mode 2" Acquisition of a hold related to a special symbol lottery of a plurality of second special symbols is a rare event.

Returning to FIG. 42, the description of the game state (game flow) is continued. In "STOCK-TIME 1", the special symbol of the second special symbol before the specified number of games (the number of electric sapo times) based on the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the "jackpot (special figure 1)" When the holding related to the lottery can be obtained, the "jackpot (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'"" is executed (FIG. 42(C)). On the other hand, at "STOCK-TIME 1", before the specified number of times (the number of electrical sapo) is consumed by the special symbol lottery of the 1st special symbol, the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol could not be acquired. If so, it returns to the "normal game" (Fig. 42(D)).

"Jack (Special Figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is a jackpot game (small hit V) is controlled to repeatedly execute, and after execution of "big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, to "STOCK-TIME 2" Move (FIG. 42(E)).

In addition, every time "big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed, "STOCK-TIME2" is executed internally, but based on the reservation related to the special design lottery of the second special design Since the big hit (small hit) variation of the second special symbol ends in a short-time variation of about 1 second, there is no suspension related to the special symbol lottery of all the second special symbols, and the special symbol of the first special symbol. A specific period does not occur and the normal electric accessary product 770 is not released in a manner in which it is easy to enter the ball until the loss variation based on the lottery is executed.

"STOCK-TIME2" is a specific game that shifts after the big win game (small win V) based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and has three types of game states as shown in FIG. "STOCK-TIME2" is similar to "STOCK-TIME1". There is no difference as a game mechanism. However, "STOCK-TIME2", which shifts after the big hit game (small hit V) of "Special Figure 2_Big Hit/Small Hit Design A" to "Special Figure 2_Big Hit/Small Hit Design C", is normally drawn by lottery. The normal pattern probability of becoming a “hit” is 1/1. There is a high possibility that it will be played, and it is a game state in which it is easy to acquire a large number of balls in a short time.

In addition, "STOCK-TIME 2" is configured so that the number of times of electric support in a specific game is at least 2 times even in the case of "electric support mode 2" with a normal pattern probability of 1/10, When "STOCK-TIME 1" is executed in "power support mode 2", the minimum number of power support times is greater than 1, and the degree of expectation for the continuation of the specific game (continuous game) is also set high.

In "STOCK-TIME 2", when the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is obtained, "big hit (special figure 2) 'STOCK-BONUS'" is executed (Fig. 42 (F)), and the second When the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the special symbol cannot be acquired, the game returns to the "normal game" (FIG. 42(G)).

(Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the 2-3 embodiment)
Subsequently, a modified example of the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment will be described. In the pachinko game machine P of the 2-3 embodiment, as a state in which the control related to the normal symbol lottery in the high base state is different, the "normal symbol probability", which is the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery, is different. Although "sapo mode 1" and "electric sapo mode 2" have been explained, the types of "sapo mode" are not limited to two, and "electric sapo mode 3", "electric sapo mode 4", etc. having different "normal symbol probability" It may be settable.

In addition, as a method of differentiating the type of "Electric sapo mode", instead of "normal pattern probability", the type of "normal pattern fluctuation time reduction function (normal pattern time reduction)" is different, and fluctuation per normal pattern fluctuation A case where the time is set to 2 seconds per variation instead of 4 seconds, or a case of 8 seconds per variation may be provided, and the variation time of various normal patterns can be determined and the average is 4 seconds. Such cases may be provided. By making it possible to execute different "Electric support modes" depending on the "normal pattern time saving", the number of times the normal symbol lottery is executed in a specific period can be changed, and the normal symbol lottery can be executed in a shorter time, It can be sent out as a game state in which a high continuation rate can be expected. In addition, the "electric support mode" may be configured as different specifications by combining the types of "normal pattern probability" and "normal pattern time saving".

As described above, the 2-1st embodiment to the 2-3rd embodiment have been described as application examples of the pachinko game machine P of the second embodiment. The pachinko game machines P of the 2-1 embodiment to the 2-3 embodiment, which are these application examples, and their modifications can be implemented as independent techniques, but the techniques disclosed in each can be combined as appropriate. It is also possible to implement

In addition, the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment are the occurrence of a state where the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is easy to enter the second start winning opening P721, and the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. Although it has been explained in the embodiment of acquiring such a hold, as a modification to the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is the second special symbol lottery. It is also possible to construct a modified example as follows so as not to acquire (the right to execute a big win game (minor win V)).

In the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment, the "hit" of the normal symbol lottery is a modification that does not acquire the reservation (execution right of the big win game (small win V)) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As an example of a method of executing the example, a distribution device (such as a movable valve member) for distributing game balls to two flow paths is provided inside the winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770, and one of the flow paths is the general winning opening P731. It is conceivable to adopt a board configuration in which the other side is configured with a flow path that guides the game ball to the second start winning opening P721.

At this time, the operation pattern of the sorting device inside the prize winning device related to the normal electric accessory 770 is changed according to the winning pattern lottery of the normal pattern in the normal pattern lottery, the type of "electric support mode", etc., and the normal pattern lottery is performed. A state is created in which the winning probabilities for the second start winning port P721 are different when a "hit" is achieved. As a specific example, the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory 770 and the sorting device inside the winning device is set so that the winning probability for the second start winning port P721 is 100% in the "normal symbol _ winning symbol A", "Normal design _ winning design B" has a winning probability of 50% for the second start winning opening P721, and "normal design _ winning design C" has a winning probability for the second starting winning opening P721 of 10% (0% may be acceptable). An example of configuring as follows.

In the second embodiment configured in this way and the application example of the second embodiment, during the execution of the specific period, when a "win" is won in the normal symbol lottery, the "normal electric accessory opening effect" is executed. Then, when the game ball is urged to enter the normal electric accessory 770, and the player enters the game ball into the winning device related to the ordinary electric accessory 770, the general winning opening P731 or the second start winning Regardless of which of P721 the ball was entered, it is notified to increase the degree of expectation related to whether a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol has occurred (the color of the effect effect is "blue" ⇒ " Green” ⇒ “Red” ⇒ “Gold” ⇒ “Rainbow (confirmation of holding acquisition related to special design lottery of 4 second special symbols)”, etc.), and for a specific period At the end timing, it may be configured to notify the acquisition number of pending related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol as the game result (for example, the button effect is executed at the symbol fixed time of the special symbol at the expiration of the specific period Then, by operating a button, the number of pending acquisitions related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is displayed as "V x ○ pieces", etc.).

When configured in this way, it is preferable not to display the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery (display by the reservation display area P810, simple reservation display P814). In addition, by adopting such a modification, even if the normal symbol is a hit, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol does not always occur, so the normal electric accessory 770 can be opened. A pachinko game machine P which is a modified example of the second embodiment and the application example of the second embodiment that can send out many situations and increases the frequency of winning the normal symbol lottery in a specific period and has many changes in performance. can be provided.

(Activation of the variable time reduction function triggered by the number of times the special symbol is activated "relief function")
Operation of the variable time reduction function triggered by the number of times the special symbols are operated "relief function", in the low base state (so-called "normal game"), when the variable display of the special symbols of the predetermined number of games is executed , high base state (operation state of electric chew support function)).

More specifically, after the transition to the low base state (immediately after the RAM is cleared or after the game end condition is satisfied in the high base state, after execution of a special game that shifts to the low base state), a predetermined game When a special game that is the number of times is executed, by generating a high base state, the starting winning opening related to the normal electric accessory 770 (starting winning opening related to the first special symbol or starting winning opening related to the second special symbol It is a function that facilitates the winning of a prize in the mouth), facilitates the acquisition of the special symbol lottery right, and suppresses excessive consumption of game balls by the player.

"Relief function" sets a plurality of game times as a predetermined number of games, and the number of times of time reduction given when the first relief function is activated (the number of games to maintain a high base state), and the second time ( Third time) may be configured to vary the number of times of time saving given when the relief function is activated.

In addition, when the ``relief function'' is configured to always operate when a special symbol lottery is executed for a predetermined number of games, depending on the performance of the ``relief function'' to be activated, the player may be forced to play excessively. Since there is a possibility that the game will be lost, the lottery related to the operation of the "relief function" is executed when the special symbol lottery of the predetermined number of games is executed, and for example, the operation of the "relief function" is won. It may be configured such that the "relief function" operates at a probability of 50% and 1/2.

(Activation of special symbol fluctuation time reduction function by "time reduction symbol")
In the premise pachinko game machine and the present embodiment, etc., after the execution of the jackpot game (special game), the pachinko game machine P that operates the special symbol variation time reduction function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function has been explained. . The operation of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function (time saving function) and the electric chew support function is not limited only after the execution of such a special game, and a specific type of special symbol (losing symbol, small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed The operation may be started even when the jackpot game is executed and the jackpot game is not executed.

For example, in the special design lottery of the first special design, in the winning design lottery (lost design lottery) when the winning lottery is "lost", if you win the "time-saving _ lost design" that wins at 1/800 In addition, it may be configured to generate a high base state (time saving state, electric chew support state) that continues until 100 special symbol lotteries are executed.

In addition, it is also possible to provide different types of “time saving _losing symbols” so that the number of games to be maintained in the high base state differs according to the type of “time saving _losing symbols”. For example, 50 times for "time saving _ lost pattern A", 100 times for "time saving _ lost pattern B", 10000 times for "time saving _ lost pattern C" (* Substantially the next big hit confirmed), can also be

The variable time shortening function (time saving function) of the special pattern, the "relief function" related to the electric chew support function, and the "time saving pattern" are the technology disclosed in the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment. It is also possible to apply to

In particular, for the present embodiment, the second embodiment, and the application example of the second embodiment, which adopts a small hit V as the specification (spec) of the game machine, By adopting the ``relief function'' and the ``time saving pattern'', the second special pattern that becomes a big hit game (small hit V) with a high probability of being easy to acquire the reservation related to the special pattern lottery is the first in the ``normal game''. It can occur even when the special symbol lottery of special symbols does not result in a "big hit", and the effect of more effectively suppressing the consumption of game balls by the player can be expected.

[Third embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology and the present embodiment described above. The following description focuses on the underlying technology and the differences from the present embodiment, and omits or simplifies the description of the common points. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, elements identical or corresponding to elements described in the base technology or the present embodiment and the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts the "small win V" like the present embodiment and the second embodiment. In particular, in the low-probability/low-base state, which is a normal game, obtaining a small win V (special figure 1) with a lower probability of winning than the probability of a big win is a prerequisite for shifting to the most advantageous state. Due to the design, while the conditions for transition to the most advantageous state are set difficult, once the most advantageous game state Battle" specific game state) has a very high probability of winning a small win V (special figure 2) or a big win (special figure 2). It is available.

Also, in the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the most advantageous game state (specific game state of "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle"), the jackpot effect is within 3 fluctuations of the high base state. By continuously displaying the small hit V (or big hit), it appears as if there is no upper limit to the number of game balls that can be obtained in the big hit. By repeatedly executing a ``continuous battle'' effect in which a bonus can be obtained with a high probability, the player can experience a novel and highly interesting effect. Details of the outline of the effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45 and the like.

(board configuration)
Regarding the board configuration (game area configuration) of the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment can be implemented with almost the same board configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment. is.

(spec)
Next, the game performance (specifications) of the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment will be described. In addition, in this explanation, regarding the "setting" (setting value) that affects the ball output performance, only the specifications related to "setting 1" will be explained, but various numerical values related to other setting values are set as appropriate. is.

The pachinko machine P of the present embodiment has a winning lottery probability of 1/185 (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), a small winning probability of 1/555 (first special symbol), and a small winning probability of 1. / 3.7 (second special symbol), the number of prize balls is 1 ball for the first start winning opening (first starting opening) P711, and 1 ball for the second starting winning opening (second starting opening) P721 There are 2 balls, 3 balls for the left side general winning hole P731L, 3 balls for the right side general winning hole P731R, and 11 balls for the big winning hole (attacker) P751.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment adopts the second special symbol priority digestion control as in the present embodiment, and when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved, gives priority to the second special symbol and variably displays it. It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment as well as the second special symbol preferential digestion control, if the game property is not lost, the first special symbol preferential digestion control is not limited to the modification. It is needless to say that a control may be applied, or an incoming ball order digestion control may be applied in which the first entered ball is preferentially digested.

The types of big wins (including small win V) in the special game state in the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment are 2 round big win (first special symbol big win) and 5 round big win (first special symbol small win V, A big hit or a small hit V) of the second special symbol is provided. In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment does not have a probability variation function for a specific game that is an advantageous normal game state, and after various big hits (including small wins V), an electric chew support function (electric sapo) A specific game (high base state) is executed by activating the function.

Further, among the detailed control examples to be described later, the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment displays a variable display of a maximum of 4 remaining holdings during the specific game period (high base state) and/or after the specific game ends. During the period, the special variation pattern table (limited frequency pattern table) is referred to at a predetermined timing, and a variation pattern is selected to ensure the variation display time of the special symbol as required. However, at the timing of referring to the special variation pattern table, the number of times of variation display of the first special symbol and the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol after the execution of the special game are separately counted and stored, and the first special symbol is stored. Or when the second special symbol starts to fluctuate, when the storage information of the number of fluctuations stored corresponding to each is a specific value, the special fluctuation pattern table for the first special symbol or the special fluctuation for the second special symbol A pattern table can be referenced.

(game flow)
Next, the game flow of the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

Initially, the player starts playing in a low probability/low base state, which is normal play. At this time, the player shoots the game ball toward the left side of the game area (the left area P501L), and enters the game ball into the first start winning opening P711, thereby holding the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol. is generated, and a special symbol lottery for the first special symbol is received, aiming at acquisition of a small win V (special figure 1) or a big win (special figure 1). (See FIGS. 44(A) and (C))

As shown in FIG. 44, in a normal game (low probability/low base state), when a small hit V (special figure 1) is obtained, a specific game (low probability/high base state) is obtained after a small hit V (small hit development big hit) ) (see FIG. 44 (B)), and in the normal game (low probability / low base state), when the big hit (special figure 1) is won, the normal game is played again after the big hit game (low probability/low base state) (see FIG. 44(D)).

The specific game "Katsumai Spirit Battle Mode", which is in a low probability/high base state, is a state in which the electric chew support function is activated, and is related to the normal electric role P770 arranged in the right game area (right area P501R). The second start winning hole P721 is in a state where the frequency at which it becomes easy to enter the ball has increased. Therefore, the player hits the game ball to the right side (right side area P501R) and shoots the game ball to the right side area P501R. By generating the right (suspension) related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, it is possible to acquire the small win V (or big win) more easily.

In the specific game "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode", which is in a low probability / high base state, the electric chew support function continues until the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is performed four times, and the fourth second special symbol Until the variation display of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol occurring during the fluctuation is completed, that is, until the variation display of the second special symbol is completed a maximum of 8 times in total. continue.

In the low probability / high base state "Katsumai soul battle mode" of the specific game, if you win a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2), you will win a small hit V (small hit development big hit) or big hit After the game is executed, the state shifts to the specific game "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle" state, which is a low-probability/high-base state (see FIGS. 44(F) and (G)). On the other hand, if neither the small hit V (special figure 2) nor the big hit (special figure 2) can be obtained in the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode", the normal game returns to the low probability / low base (Fig. 44 ( E)).

In the specific game "Self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle", which is a low probability / high base state, the electric tuner is used until the special symbol lottery related to the second special symbol is performed 4 times, similar to the "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode". Until the support function continues and the change display of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the hold related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol occurring during the 4th change of the 2nd special symbol ends, that is, the maximum total of 8 It is a game state that continues until the variable display of the second special symbol of the time ends.

In the "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle" of a specific game with low probability / high base state, if you win a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2), you will get a small hit V (small hit development big hit ) or after the execution of the jackpot game, the state shifts to the state of "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle" of the specific game, which is a low-probability/high-base state (see FIGS. 44(G) and (H)). On the other hand, if neither the small hit V (special figure 2) nor the big hit (special figure 2) can be obtained in the "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle", return to the normal game low probability / low base ( See FIG. 44(I)).

(Direction description)
Next, in the explanation of the game flow, we will explain the outline of the production in the specific game (low probability / high base state) "Katsumai Soul Battle Mode" and "Self-powered Rank Up Bonus & Continuous Battle". do.

《Katsubu Soul Battle Mode》
First, I will explain the “Katsumai Soul Battle Mode”. As explained in the game flow, the "Katsumai soul battle mode" is a maximum of 4 variations that exist at the end of the fourth variation of the second special symbol in the high base state and the fourth variation of the second special symbol in the high base state. It is an effect executed in the variable display of special symbols for a maximum of 8 variations corresponding to the holding related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbols.

When entering the "Katsumai Battle Mode", when determining the variation pattern to notify the result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol during the "Katsumai Battle Mode", the special variation pattern lottery table A (Limited frequency table A) is selected. For the variation pattern selected in the special variation pattern lottery table A, for example, a variation mode of about 30 to 40 seconds is selected for the 1st to 3rd variations, and a variation pattern of about 60 seconds is selected for the 4th variation. It's like A variation pattern of 1 second is selected for the 5th to 8th variations. Although it has been explained that the 1st to 3rd fluctuations, the 4th fluctuations, and the 5th to 8th fluctuations are selected from the special fluctuation pattern table A, strictly speaking, in each of these periods, the special fluctuation pattern table A-1 ( 1st to 3rd fluctuation), special fluctuation pattern table A-2 (4th fluctuation), special fluctuation pattern table A-3 (5th to 8th fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to can be switched.

As an effect corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols determined using the special variation pattern lottery table, a battle effect such as that illustrated in FIGS. 30 to 32 of the present embodiment is executed. ing. For example, for the 1st to 3rd variations, a "battle mode first half" effect as shown in FIG. and execution of an effect similar to the "battle mode final battle effect" as shown in FIG.

《Self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle》
Next, the outline of the production of "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle" will be explained.

The “self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle” production is divided into a “self-powered rank-up bonus” production part and a “continuous battle” production part and executed.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the production part of the "self-powered rank-up bonus" is the production display during execution of the small win V (special figure 2) or the big win (special figure 2). It is a production state that continues until a period corresponding to three times of fluctuation display of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the high base state, and after the execution of the small win V (special figure 2) or the big win (special figure 2), the second As long as a small win V or a big win (special figure 2) continues to be obtained before the special pattern lottery of 2 special patterns is performed three times, a performance display as if the big win continues is performed.

On the other hand, the "continuous battle" effect corresponds to the suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that occurred from the fourth variation (final variation) of the second special symbol in the high base state to the end of the final variation. This is an effect that is performed during the period in which the variable display is performed, and an effect in which the player side character and the enemy side character battle is performed with maximum five times of the variable display as the combined variation. As for the display contents of the effect, the same effect display as the "battle mode final battle" effect in the present embodiment is executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, the characteristic effect is the "self-powered rank-up bonus", which will be described in detail.

When the game state of the specific game "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle", which is a low probability / high base state, is reached, the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern in the main control CPU of the main control board P40 is performed. (Limited frequency B) is used to determine the variation mode, for example, as shown below.

(1) 1st to 3rd fluctuation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: A fluctuation pattern (variation time) of 5 seconds is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-1)
(2) Fourth variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: A variation pattern (variation time) of 60 seconds is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-2)
(3) 5th to 8th variation display of the second special symbol in the high base state: A variation pattern (variation time) of 1 second is determined. (Determined by special fluctuation pattern table B-3)

The fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) determined by the special fluctuation pattern table described above is a fixed time in any fluctuation display, but it is possible to select from among a plurality of types of fluctuation time, and according to the fluctuation time It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) is different.

In the "self-powered rank-up bonus", during the production of the small hit V (special figure 2) or the big hit (special figure 2) being executed, for example, the final round, the 5th round, or the jackpot end demonstration (the end of the small hit development jackpot) (including demo), over the period of 3 times of variable display corresponding to 3 times of the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol in the high base state, "Rank up fanning effect" that informs whether the big hit effect will continue as a effect ” is executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, the small win V (special figure 2) or the big win (special figure 2) consists of 5 rounds, and the number of prize balls in the big winning opening is set to 11 balls. Approximately 500 game balls can be expected to increase by one small hit V (special figure 2) or big hit (special figure 2), and the success mode production is displayed in the "rank up fanning" production. (That is, the effect that the small hit V or the big hit is confirmed is displayed), "+500 shots acquired" is displayed, the big hit effect continues, and the small hit V (special figure 2) or A performance display is performed as if the big hit (special figure 2) was continued without ending.

After the "rank-up fanning" production starts from the final round of the big hit production or the production period of the big hit end demo, the main production display of whether it will be a small win V or a big hit is the second special symbol in the high base state. is displayed in the variation display period of the variation pattern determined by the special symbol lottery from the first to the third time, for example, in the variation display for 5 seconds, it is executed in the form of a button effect that prompts the operation of the effect button P381, or the variation A mode can be exemplified in which the production accessory P560 operates immediately after the start without going through the button production to notify that a small hit (big hit) is achieved.

In the pachinko game machine P of the third embodiment, since the probability of winning a small hit in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is set to 1/3.7, the special symbol of the second special symbol three times. In the lottery, the probability of becoming a small hit V (special figure 2) or a big hit (special figure 2) is about 62%. A performance display can be performed, and a performance display can be performed as if a large number of game balls such as 1000 shots, 1500 shots, 2000 shots, .

In addition, in the "Continuous Battle", the effect corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol 5 times is changed during one fluctuation display period (corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the 4th 2nd special symbol in the high base state Since it is executed during the variable display period), the probability that the player's character wins and the continuous state continues (returns to the specific game "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle") is about 80%. It is a game that is likely to return to the “self-powered rank-up bonus” again.

Therefore, according to the pachinko gaming machine P of the third embodiment, once the player acquires the right to shift to a specific game state of "self-powered rank-up bonus & continuous battle", about 500 balls will be released at 62%. You can enjoy a novel and highly interesting production mode as if the state (“self-powered rank-up bonus”) that can be obtained continuously with 80% of the time is looped.

[Fourth embodiment]
<Overview>
First, the gameplay of the fourth embodiment will be briefly described. Since the game characteristics during the normal game are substantially the same as those of the present embodiment and the like, the explanation is omitted. In the fourth embodiment, while the loss variation of the first special symbol fluctuates by 1 in the time saving state (also referred to as the easy entry state), a maximum of four second special symbols are retained, and the first special symbol is retained. After the end of the variation (the time saving state is also terminated by the end of the variation of the first special symbol), the winning game is executed by holding the acquired second special symbol. Whether or not the holding of the second special symbol can be obtained while the first special symbol changes by one depends on whether or not the normal electric accessory is released for a long time due to the hit of the normal symbol. In addition, when the normal electric accessory becomes long open, it is possible to obtain one reserved second special symbol. Therefore, the performance display device P80 displays an effect suggesting whether or not the normal electric accessory will be opened for a long time due to the hit of the normal symbol. When all of the second special symbol reserves are consumed, the time-saving state is entered again, and the second special symbol reserves are obtained while the first special symbol fluctuates by one. When the normal electric accessory does not open long due to the hit of the normal symbol and the reservation of the second special symbol cannot be acquired, the consecutive game ends.

For convenience of explanation, the same item (same terminology) may be described using a different numbering from other embodiments, but if the same item (same terminology) is used in other embodiments It has the same function as described. Further, since the control, structure, etc. provided as a basic game machine are the same as those of the present embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

(board configuration)
Next, FIG. 46 explains the board configuration in the fourth embodiment. The right side of the game board surface (right side game area where game balls flow down (right side game area)) will be mainly described. In the right game area, an opening (P901) to be described later, a delay mechanism (P902) to be described later, a distribution part (P903) to be described later, a normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) to be described later, and a normal pattern operation to be described later There are provided an opening 2 (P905), a first start-up winning device 2 (P906), which will be described later, a normal electric accessory (P907), a big winning opening (P909), and a specific area (P910). In addition, the first starting winning device (1) (P710) is provided on the left side of the game board surface (the game area on the left side where the game ball flows down (left game area)).

After passing through the opening (P901), the game ball is sorted into a left route (to be described later) or a right route (to be described later). The game ball distributed to the left route is the delay mechanism (P902) → distribution unit (P903) → normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) → first start winning device 2 (P906) → normal electric accessory (P907) (and Second start winning device (P908)) or big winning opening (P909), or delay mechanism (P902)→distribution unit (P903)→right side route. The game ball distributed to the right route flows down in the order of normal figure operation port 2 (P905) → normal electric accessory (P907) (and second start winning device (P908)) or big winning prize port (P909).

Next, the mechanisms, devices, etc. provided in the above-described right game area will be described.
(Aperture)
The opening (P901) is a place through which the game ball first passes when hitting to the right. Game balls that have passed through the opening (P901) are sorted to the left route or the right route. A delay mechanism (P902), a first start winning device 2 (P906), and the like are provided on the left route. The right route is provided with a normal map operation port 2 (P905). The game balls distributed to the left route are configured to pass through the first start winning device 2 (P906) which triggers the lottery of the first special symbols, and the game balls distributed to the right route are the first start winning. It cannot pass through the device 2 (P906), and is configured to go to the second start winning device (P908) or the big winning opening (P909).

(delay mechanism)
The delay mechanism (P902) is a mechanism through which the game ball that has passed through the opening (P901) passes when distributed to the left route. Any structure may be used as long as it delays the game ball so that it does not flow down at a constant speed. Two crews are provided on the left side of the delay mechanism (P902) for delaying the flow of the game ball, and one crew for delaying the flow of the game ball is provided on the right side of the delay mechanism (P902). there is A croon is a structure in which a tapered surface is formed on the upper surface side of a circular opening (a structure in which the end of a circular opening is cut to form a circumferential inclined surface). The center is offset (shifted) in the front-rear direction from the progress trajectory of the game ball flowing down through the opening P901, and when the game ball reaches the circular opening of the croon, a circular tapered surface It orbits above, slows down, and then drops downwards through a circular opening. At this time, if the cloon has two stages, the centers of the circular openings of the first stage and the second stage are offset in either the front, rear, left, or right direction to delay again. It should be noted that a structure or the like may be used in which the game ball flows down in a left-right zigzag manner.

(Distribution part)
The sorting section (P903) is a section through which the game ball passing through the delay mechanism (P902) passes. A sorting device is provided in the sorting section (P903), and the sorting device is electrically operated at regular time intervals. As a result, it is determined whether the game ball continues to flow down the left route or is changed to the right route. The operation of the distribution device is that when the game ball is continuously shot toward the right area P501R, 1 ball to 2 balls fall toward the normal figure operation port 1P904 and the first start winning device 2P906 in about 20 to 30 seconds. For example, if a shot is made toward the right side region P501R during a big hit game, the lottery value related to the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start prize winning device 2P906 by the end of the big win. At least one is configured to be obtained.

(Normal drawing operation port 1)
The normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) is an operation port for acquiring the lottery value related to the normal symbol lottery.

(Normal drawing operation port 2)
The normal pattern operation port 2 (P905) is an operation port for acquiring the lottery value related to the normal symbol lottery.

In addition, the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) and the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905) are operation ports for executing the lottery of the same normal symbol. In addition, the lottery probability of normal symbols is always (100%) hit in any game state. In addition, the lottery probability of the normal symbol may be set to 1/1.002 at the time of low probability, and 1/1.001 at the time of high probability (at the time of easy entry).

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment has three types of easy-to-enter states (easy-to-enter states 1 to 3), and the normal symbol lottery is the same depending on the type of easy-to-enter state that is set. Even in the case of winning with the pattern of , the operation pattern (long open/short open) of the normal electric accessory P907 is configured to be different. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, among the easy-to-enter states 1 to 3, the easy-to-enter state 1 is the most advantageous state for the player, and the easy-to-enter state 3 is the most playable state. It is an easy-to-enter state that is disadvantageous for players. The details of the operation pattern of the easy-to-enter state and the normal electric accessories will be described later.

(First start winning device 2)
The first starting prize winning device 2 (P906) is a prize winning port into which a ball can be entered when hitting to the right, and is a prize winning port for executing the lottery for the first special symbol. The first starting winning device 2 (P906) is a winning opening for executing the lottery of the same first special symbol as the first starting winning device 1 (P710) that can enter the ball when hitting left. Here, since the first start winning opening 2 (P806) is provided directly under the normal pattern operation opening 1 (P904), after entering the time saving state (easy entry state), the first variation of the normal design The 1st variation of the 1st special symbol (1st time reduction) is configured to be started almost at the same time. In other words, it is difficult to execute only the lottery of normal symbols.

(Normal electric accessories)
The normal electric accessory (P907) is activated when the normal symbol lottery wins, and when the normal electric accessory (P907) is activated, the game ball moves to the second start winning device (P908). It becomes possible to enter the ball. The normal electric accessory (P907) has a predetermined opening pattern (also referred to as an opening/closing pattern) according to the game state and the winning pattern of the normal pattern. Mainly as the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory (P907), the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), the long release (pattern), and the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908). Equipped with a difficult short opening (pattern).

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the normal electric accessory P907 is composed of a slide-type opening/closing member (slide plate), and when the normal electric accessory P907 is in the open mode (easy-to-enter mode), the game board It protrudes forward and is constructed so as to bridge the game ball to a second starting prize winning device P908, which will be described later, so that it can be guided. When the normal electric accessory P907 is not in operation (non-ball entry easy mode), the slide plate is in a state of retreating from the surface of the game board, and the game ball goes downstream without going to the second start winning device P908. It is configured to fall toward.

(Second starting winning device)
The second starting winning device (P908) is a winning opening into which the game ball can enter when the normal electric accessory (P907) is operated in the long open (pattern), and for executing the lottery of the second special symbol. It is a prize-winning entrance. The second starting prize winning device (P908) has the same big hit probability as the first starting prize winning device (P710, P809), but if the special symbol lottery does not result in a big hit, it always wins a small win (eg 1/1). .001). In addition, since the operation end condition of the normal electric accessory P907 of the fourth embodiment is the passage of the opening operation time or the winning of one game ball, the long opening pattern is executed once in the normal symbol lottery. When the symbol is stopped and displayed as a normal symbol, one game ball can be won in the second starting winning device P908, and one special symbol lottery right of the second special symbol can be acquired.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, since the second special symbol priority digestion control is adopted, when there are a plurality of lottery values of the second special symbol, a small hit or a special symbol lottery of the continuous second special symbol It has a game property in which the big hits are continuously executed.

(Grand Prize Entrance)
The big winning opening is a winning opening that is opened when the first special symbol or the second special symbol wins, as in the present embodiment. A special area (P810) is provided in the big winning opening.

(specific area)
As described in the present embodiment, the specific area is provided in the big winning opening, and is triggered by passing through the specific area during the small winning game. (flag) is activated, and the right to execute the jackpot game is granted.

Next, FIG. 47 is a transition diagram showing game transitions in the fourth embodiment.

《Normal stage》
The normal stage is a stage in which the game state is low-probability/low-base, and a left-handed shot is performed in which a game ball is shot toward the left game area. Here, when the first special symbol (first start winning device P710) results in a big hit, a big hit game (first hit bonus, which will be described later) is started.

《First Hit Bonus》
In the first hit bonus, a battle effect between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the effect display device P80. If you win the battle production, you will move to the stock mode described later. In addition, when the decorative patterns are all 7, the stock mode is also entered when the player wins in the special effect of the omen zone, which will be described later. In addition, if you lose in the battle production, you will return to the normal stage.

In addition, the first hit bonus is configured to display a battle effect with enemy characters with different expectations of victory, but the effect mode is not limited to the battle effect, and whether or not the ally character achieves the command is displayed. Any effect may be executed as long as it is possible for the player to recognize whether or not the stock mode has been acquired, which will be described later, in the form of success (advantageous result) or failure (unfavorable result), such as a mission effect to be notified. From the start of the first hit bonus, the stock mode or extra stock mode will be acquired in a deterministic manner, and the jackpot effect will be executed, and there will be no effect to notify the presence or absence of the stock mode in the form of success/failure. A jackpot effect may be executed.

《Stock Mode》
The stock mode is a one-time time-saving state (high base state), and is a state in which the first special symbol is mainly changed by one. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol is long (eg 170 seconds (170000ms)), and the symbol fixing time is also long (eg 30 seconds (30000ms)). Within this period (fluctuation time of the first special symbol + design fixed time), the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) or the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905), hits the normal pattern and normal electric When the accessory is released for a long time, the game ball wins the second start winning device (P908) and the second special symbol can be reserved. Although the details will be described later, while the first special symbol changes by one, the normal symbol lottery can be performed four times, and a maximum of four second special symbol reservations can be obtained. When the holding of the second special symbol is obtained in the stock mode, the game shifts to a big hit game (stock bonus) with the second special symbol. In the fourth embodiment, it is constructed so as to indicate whether or not the normal electric accessory is to be long-released by hitting the normal symbol by using the effect display device P80. In addition, as a result of performing the normal symbol lottery four times in the stock mode, if even one reserved second special symbol cannot be acquired, the stage returns to the normal stage. The stock mode is provided with a "high stock mode" with a high expectation of acquisition of the second special symbol and a "low stock mode" with a low expectation of acquisition of the second special symbol.

《Stock Bonus》
The stock bonus is a big hit game with the second special symbol. During the stock bonus in the fourth embodiment, a big win movie is displayed on the effect display device P80. As a supplement, the big winning game with the second special symbol includes a big winning game (“small winning development big winning”, “small winning V”) in the case of small winning→specific area passage→big winning.

After the stock bonus ends, it shifts to stock mode, and if there is still a hold of the second special design, the stock bonus will start again, and if there is no hold of the second special design, the first special design will change once in a short time state. The game (stock mode or extra stock mode) to acquire the reservation of the second special symbol is entered.

When the stock bonus (jackpot game) ends when the second special symbol is reserved, the special symbol lottery based on the second special symbol being reserved is executed by the second special symbol priority digestion control, and the stock bonus ( Small hit V or big hit) will be executed. At this time, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is executed in the same game state (low probability/high base state) as the stock mode or the extra stock mode, but the second special symbol When the pattern is reserved, unlike the stock mode (extra stock mode), the performance for notifying the result of the normal pattern lottery is not executed, but the variable performance corresponding to the lottery result of the second special pattern is executed. In addition, the variable display of the second special symbol in the low probability / high base state is configured for about 3 seconds, and as an example of the effect, immediately after the stock bonus ends, the decorative symbol P801 is stopped and displayed in a zoromo. The occurrence of a stock bonus is notified to the player.

Although not shown, the stock bonus has a configuration in which a plurality of big win (minor win V) games can be executed continuously, so there are a plurality of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the When the stock bonus is executed at the same time, as shown in FIG. 29 of this embodiment, the round display P820 is accumulated and displayed over successive big wins. In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, the jackpot (minor win V) of 4 rounds or 8 rounds can be executed a maximum of 4 times (maximum possible number of holds related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol), In the stock bonus, 4 to 32 round displays P820 can be displayed simultaneously.

The round display P820 is configured to increase each time the stock bonus is released (every time a big win or a small win is executed).

《Relief function》
In the fourth embodiment, a so-called rescue function is provided, and when the number of games in the normal stage reaches 599, the rescue function is activated from the 600th game. Supplementally, the relief function is a function that operates when you do not hit the jackpot a predetermined number of times in the normal stage (low probability/low base). Base) reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the cumulative number of games in a low probability state (low base or high base) after a big hit reaches a predetermined number, it will be in a predetermined easy-to-enter state (time-saving state). be. The easy-ball-entering state by the relief function is set to have a larger number of games, which is a termination condition, than the easy-ball-entering state to which the game can be shifted after the end of the big win. It should be noted that, after the relief function is activated, when the number of games (lost) that is the end condition is executed, or if a big win is achieved, the easy ball entry state by the relief function ends, and a small win V is adopted in the fourth embodiment. , the easy-ball-entering state is terminated even when the specific region P910 is not passed during the small-hit game.

It should be noted that the relief function, the denominator when the probability of special symbols is low (denominator X of the jackpot probability 1/X) is P, the operating range is n (the number of games where the game state is a predetermined easy-to-enter state), easy-to-enter When the number of times of the state (number of times of time reduction) is N (the number of games in which the easy-to-enter state continues due to the operation of the relief function),
The operating range n is 2.5P≤n≤3.0P
Time saving number of times N is 0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
is configured to be

In the fourth embodiment, since the denominator at the time of low probability of special symbols is 200,
The operating range n is 500≦n≦600
Time saving number N is 80 ≤ N ≤ 760
n is set to 600 and N to 80 so that

《Omen Zone》
The omen zone is a presentation mode that suggests that the relief function is about to be activated. In the fourth embodiment, when 570 games are played in the normal stage (low probability/low base), the zone becomes an omen zone (after the big hit, there is one loss fluctuation in the stock mode, When 569 games are played in the normal stage (low probability/low base), it becomes an omen zone). In the omen zone, the advance notice and ready-to-win effect that can be displayed on the effect display device P80 may be the same as or different from those in the normal stage. When it becomes the omen zone, it is preferable to display "Omen zone" on the effect display device P80 so as to indicate that it is in the omen zone.

When 599 games are played in the normal stage (including the sign zone), the relief function starts operating. When the ball becomes easy, it shifts to extra stock mode.

In addition, the portent zone is provided with a super portent zone that can be shifted to when the operation of the relief function is confirmed. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the number of games in the normal stage (low probability/low base state including precursor zone) reaches 599 times, the relief function is activated from the 600th time. It is configured to be able to shift to the super portent zone when a certain thing is confirmed and the number reaches 599 times, and when the lottery for whether or not the execution of the super portent zone is won. In other words, since the maximum number of reserved first special symbols is 4, during the 595th game (while the first special symbol is fluctuating), when the number of reserved first special symbols becomes 4 and all are lost. , it is determined that 599 times will be reached (three pending during the 596th game, two pending during the 597th game, and one pending during the 598th game). It is determined that 599 times are reached when all are lost), so it is possible to perform a lottery for the execution of the super precursor zone. The timing of the lottery for whether or not the Super Omen zone can be executed may be at the time of the pending ball entry or at the start of the fluctuation, but rather than shifting from the Omen zone to the Super Omen zone during the fluctuation, it is shifted at the start of the fluctuation. is preferred.

In addition, the omen zone is equipped with a special effect (reach effect) dedicated to the omen zone, and it is configured so that when the ready-to-win effect is hit, the game always shifts to the stock mode.

《Extra Stock Mode》
In the extra stock mode, as in the stock mode, the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) or the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905), wins the normal pattern lottery, and the normal electric accessory is long open. Then, the game ball wins the second starting winning device and can acquire the reservation of the second special symbol, and while the first special symbol fluctuates by one, the normal symbol lottery can be performed four times, and the maximum is the second. You can get 4 reserves of 2 special symbols.

A big win game (stock bonus) is started with the second special symbol from the extra stock mode, and when the big win game ends, if the second special symbol is reserved, the screen returns to the extra stock mode screen, and immediately again the second special symbol. A big hit game (stock bonus) is started with special symbols. When the jackpot game (stock bonus) ends and the second special symbol is not held, the stock mode is entered.

In addition, the first special pattern is the jackpot pattern A, which is a jackpot, and is configured to be able to shift to the extra stock mode even after the first hit bonus is executed.

Next, the stock mode in the fourth embodiment will be explained using FIG.

(Production in stock mode)
In the stock mode, it is configured to perform an effect indicating whether or not the normal electric accessory will be opened for a long time by the hit of the normal symbol on the effect display device P80. It is possible to indicate on the stock mode screen (regular pattern holding charge effect) whether or not the hit in the 1st fluctuation of the normal pattern will be long open, and the long open in the hit of the 2nd to 4th fluctuations of the normal pattern. It is possible to indicate whether or not it will be in the battle production.

《Normal pattern 1st variation》
In FIG. 48, the variation of the normal design is started in the jackpot state (low base, ie non-electric chew support state), and the design fixing time of the normal design is finished in the time saving state (high base, ie electric chew support state). there is In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the operation pattern of the ordinary electric accessory (the second start-up winning device P908) that changes to the easy-to-win state is determined by the game state at the time when the symbol fixed time of the normal symbols has elapsed. It's like As a result, the hit of the first variation of the normal symbol occurs in the time saving state (the example of FIG. 48 shows the situation where the normal symbol that becomes the long open is won). At this time, in the effect display device P80, a stock mode screen for acquiring a hold of normal symbols and an instruction to hit to the right are performed. Here, since the long opening pattern of the normal electric role is executed by hitting the first variation of the normal symbol, during the operation period of the normal electric role, mainly during the closing time (example: 42400 ms) of the normal electric role, the effect display device At P80, a winning effect is performed. In the first variation of the normal design, the charge effect of the normal design reservation to encourage the acquisition of the right to execute the second to fourth variations of the normal design (details will be described later as an example of the stock mode screen), and the second start Display for prompting entry of a game ball to the winning device (P908) (eg, character display of "Right hit and aim for electric chew") is started. Long opening is performed when the closing time of the normal electric accessory ends. In addition, as described above, a delay mechanism (P902) is provided, and it takes a certain amount of time for the game ball to reach the normal electric accessory (electric chew), so the second start winning device (P908) The display for prompting the entry of the ball is configured to start at an earlier timing (for example, 5 seconds before) than when the normal electric accessary becomes long open. When the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908) during the long opening and the second special symbol is held, the normal electric accessory is closed (the specified number of normal electric accessories is 1 ), a display (eg, character display of “V stock”) indicating that the second special symbol has been reserved is performed on the effect display device P80. This example shows the case where the long opening is won, but if the normal symbol that is the long opening is not won, a display (eg : Character display of "Right hit and aim for electric chew") will be omitted.

《Normal pattern 2nd variation》
When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the first normal symbol variation is completed, next, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the second variation of the normal symbol and the second variation of the normal symbol is started. The example of FIG. 48 shows a case where a short opening (an opening pattern with a short second opening time of 40 ms) is selected as the normal symbol lottery. At this time, the long open pattern (the open pattern with a long second open time of 5000 ms at maximum) is not executed due to the hit of the second variation of the normal symbol, and the short open pattern is executed. When the variation time of the second variation of the normal symbol and the symbol fixing time elapse, the short opening of the normal electric accessory is started, and the 1st game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the normal electric role, the closing time (eg, 47400 ms) starts, and the 1st game of the battle effect is displayed on the effect display device P80 during the short opening time and closing time of the normal electric role. Here, since the normal electric accessory is opened short after the closing time, after the display that the ally character is defeated in the 1st game of the battle production, the characters "NEXT production" are displayed, and the third normal pattern variation. It will be in a standby state until the 2nd game of the battle production by is started.

《Normal pattern 3rd variation》
When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the second normal symbol variation is completed, next, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the third variation of the normal symbol and the third variation of the normal symbol is started. FIG. 48 shows an example in which a long open pattern is won as a normal symbol lottery, and the long open pattern is executed by winning the 3rd normal symbol variation. When the variation time of the third variation of the normal symbol and the symbol fixing time elapse, the short opening of the normal electric accessory is started, and the second game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the ordinary electric role, the closing time (eg, 42400 ms) starts, and the second game of the battle production is displayed on the production display device P80 during the short opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric role. Here, since the normal electric accessory is opened for a long time after the closing time, in the 2nd game of the battle production, after the display that the ally character wins, the game ball is entered into the second start winning device (P908). A display (eg, text display of "Right hit and aim for an electric chew") is started. Long opening is performed when the closing time of the normal electric accessory ends. When the game ball enters the second starting winning device (P809) during the long opening and the holding of the second special symbol is acquired, the normal electric accessory is closed and the second special symbol is displayed on the effect display device P80. A display (e.g., a character display of "V stock") is made to indicate that the hold for the stock has been obtained. This display is continued until the 3rd game of the battle presentation by the 4th variation of the normal symbols is started.

《Normal pattern 4th variation》
When the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the 3rd normal symbol variation is completed, next, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the winning of the 4th normal symbol variation and the 4th normal symbol variation is started. In FIG. 48, the long open pattern is not executed due to the hit of the 4th normal pattern variation, and the short open pattern is executed. When the variation time of the fourth normal symbol variation and the symbol fixing time elapse, the short release of the normal electric accessory is started, and the 3rd game of the battle effect is started on the effect display device P80. After the short opening of the ordinary electric role, the closing time (eg, 47400 ms) starts, and the 3rd game of the battle production is displayed on the production display device P80 during the short opening time and closing time of the ordinary electric role. Here, since the normal electric accessory is opened short after the closing time, in the 3rd game of the battle production, after the display that the ally character is defeated, it shows the number of pending second special symbols acquired as the result production. A display is made (eg, two "V"s are displayed here to acquire two), and a standby state is set until the next special symbol variation starts. In addition, when the 4th normal pattern variation wins the long open pattern, the effect display for V stock is executed as shown in the example of the 3rd normal pattern variation, and for a certain period of time (for example, 3 seconds). After the V-stock is displayed, it is configured to shift to the result presentation.

(Normal design fluctuation time and design fixed time)
The fluctuation time of the normal pattern in the jackpot state or the time saving state is extremely short (eg: 120ms in the jackpot state, 100ms in the time saving state), and the fixed pattern time (eg: 500ms (0.5 seconds)) is also short. It has become.

(Normal pattern fluctuation + maximum time when normal electric accessories are activated)
When the normal pattern lottery wins with the normal pattern that is the long open pattern when the base state is high, the maximum time required to execute the normal pattern fluctuation and the normal electric accessory opening pattern is 100 ms (normal Design fluctuation time) + 500 ms (ordinary design design fixed time) + 40 ms (ordinary electric role short opening time) + 42400 ms (normal electric role closing time) + 5000 ms (normal electric role long opening time) = 48040 ms (48.04 seconds) ). In addition, when the normal pattern lottery becomes a short open pattern, it is 48.08 seconds = 48080 ms, and when the fluctuation display has already started at the end of the big hit, the fluctuation display time of each normal pattern is short for non-normal patterns. +20 ms because it is in the state.

That is, the cycle of one normal symbol variation in the stock mode (or extra stock mode) in the fourth embodiment and the operation of the normal electric accessory is a cycle of about 48 seconds. In addition, if the operation of the normal electric accessory is long open, if the game ball wins immediately after the start of the long open, the operation of the normal electric accessory will end at that point, so in the case of long open Only, one time normal pattern fluctuation, normal electric accessories may be shortened by up to 4 seconds to 4.8 seconds.

Also, although not shown, in the non-electric chew support state (low base state), when the normal pattern stops at the hit pattern, the normal electric accessory is controlled to the non-open extended state, so any hit Even if the symbol is stopped and displayed, the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 is completed only by executing the short opening (40 ms) once.

(Relationship between the time required for one variation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state (including design fixing time) and the normal design variation (including design fixing time) + the maximum time when the normal electric accessory is activated)
The total time of the deviation variation (170000 ms) of the first special symbol in the time saving state and the symbol fixing time (30000 ms) is 200000 ms (200 seconds). On the other hand, the total time of normal pattern fluctuation (including design fixing time) + maximum time when normal electric accessories are activated is 48060 ms (48.06 seconds). In other words, since one set of the normal symbol lottery and the opening of the normal electric accessory takes a maximum of 48060 ms, 4 sets of the normal symbol lottery and the opening of the ordinary electric accessory are performed within one variation of the loss fluctuation of the first special symbol. (Normal symbol lottery, 1 cycle of normal electric accessory operation [48 s] × 4 times = 192 s, even if the 5th variation of the normal symbol is executed, the first special symbol is fixed after time rushes in).

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the high base state (electric chew support state) is terminated when the end condition is satisfied at the time when the special symbol variation time elapses (when the symbol fixed time starts). It is configured, and the end condition of the high base state of stock mode (or extra stock mode) is 1 time of fluctuation display of special symbols (80 times at the time of relief function), so after the jackpot ends, move to stock mode. If there is, if the variation display of the 4th variation of the normal symbol is completed by the timing of 170000 ms after the start of the variation of the 1st special symbol, it is configured to enable the winning to the second start winning device P908. . (That is, until about 25 seconds after the start of the first special symbol variation display at the end of the big hit (170-48 x 3 = 26), even if the variation display of the first variation of the normal symbol is delayed, the game person will not be disadvantaged)

<Feature 1 in the fourth embodiment>
As described above, the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment has the feature 1, as described above, in the time when the first special symbol is lost in the time saving state and the symbol fixed time, the normal symbol lottery result (win or fail lottery + winning symbol lottery) N times ( N is configured to be able to display the maximum number of reserved second special symbols).

In addition, it takes 144180 ms (≈144 seconds) at the maximum until the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory due to the hit of the third variation of the normal symbol ends. The deviation variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is about 170 seconds, the normal symbol variation time in the time saving state is 0.1 seconds, and the symbol fixed time is 0.5 seconds, so the normal symbol 4th variation , It is configured so as not to exceed the deviation fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state. Therefore, even if the opening pattern due to the hit of the 4th normal pattern variation straddles the normal game state after the time saving state is completed, the normal pattern 4th variation is stopped in the time saving state, so the normal pattern 4th variation is hit. The release pattern is determined in the time saving state, and the long release pattern can be executed during the normal game state.

It should be noted that the long release of the normal electric accessory ends when one game ball enters the second starting prize winning device (P908), so it may end in an instant. In other words, when all the hits are in stock mode with long opening, the maximum difference is about 5000 ms (5 seconds)×4 (times)=about a little less than 20000 ms (20 seconds). Even if there is this difference, the 5th variation of the normal symbol always exceeds the timing of 170s after the start of the variation display of the 1st special symbol (ordinary electric accessory operation cycle 48s / times × 4 times - 20s = 172 s), so that even if the game is played in the shortest time, the fifth normal symbol lottery will not be executed in the high base state. Therefore, four normal symbol lotteries in the stock mode are configured so that all four normal symbols are stopped and displayed within the fluctuation time of the first special symbol.

Thus, in feature 1 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
with
As a special game, a first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first success judgment or the result of the second success judgment is the first hit, and when the result of the second success judgment is the second hit A second special game (for example, a small win) that can be executed at the same time, and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area after executing the second special game (for example, a small win → Pass through the specific area → Big hit ) and
In the specific game state, during the deviation fluctuation of the first identification information in the first identification information display part, the third right or wrong judgment can be executed N times (N is the maximum number of holdings of the second lottery value). It is a game machine.

In other words, in the specific game state, during the fluctuation of the symbols on the first symbol display device, the third success/failure determination can be executed N times (N is the maximum number of pending second lottery values), but the N+1 third It can be said that the success/failure determination is a gaming machine that is executed in a non-specific game state.

(Display screen in stock mode)
《Stock mode screen》
Next, FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a stock mode display screen in the fourth embodiment. When the stock mode is shifted to the stock mode, the effects are displayed with "friend character (P921)" displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device P80, and "aura (P922)" of the friend character displayed approximately in the center of the effect display device P80. The letters "stock mode", which is the "production mode display (P840)" displayed on the upper left of the device P80, and the lottery of the special symbols displayed on the middle left end of the production display device P80 (first special symbol, second special pattern) related to the pending number (simple pending display P814), the "production pattern (P802)" displayed in the upper right of the production display device P80, and the "right Hit notification (P832)" (display of a character string of "Right shot" and a right arrow symbol), "Normal symbol reservation display area (P923)" displayed at the lower right of the effect display device P80, and the effect display device The letters and symbols of "Charge!!" (hold acquisition suggestion display P924) are displayed at the bottom right of P80 and at the top of the normal pattern holding display area to prompt the ball to enter (pass) the normal pattern operation opening. be.

In addition, when the normal design reservation is acquired in the stock mode, the normal design reservation image (P925) is displayed in the normal design reservation display area. In addition, although the details will be described later, after obtaining the normal design reservation, the normal design reservation change effect (P926) for inciting whether or not the normal design reservation image changes is displayed.

"aura"
It is a notice effect suggesting whether or not the release pattern of the normal electric accessary includes long opening in the first variation of the normal symbol in the stock mode and the holding of the normal symbol. Three types of auras (P922) are provided, and are configured to indicate that there is a high possibility that a long open hold is obtained in the order of gold>red>blue. In addition, the change timing of the aura (P922) is 0 seconds (immediately after the operation of the normal electric accessory, displayed as the initial mode), 10 seconds, and 20 seconds after the start of the operation of the normal electric accessory due to the first variation of the normal symbol. It is set after (both are normally closed electric accessories). In addition, the aura is configured to be determined in consideration of the easy-ball-entering state, and has a state-indicating effect as well as an advance notice effect. For example, in easy-ball-entering state 2 (easy-ball-entering state with an intermediate level of expectation), a red aura is displayed from the start of the stock mode. In the easy-ball-entering state 2, the red aura may not always be displayed from the start of the stock mode, but may be configured such that the red aura is more likely to be displayed from the start of the stock mode. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 51, in the easy-entering state 1 (the most expected and advantageous easy-entering state), the normal electric accessory is long regardless of the winning pattern of the normal pattern. Since it is open, even if there is no suspension of the normal pattern, it is configured to be able to change to gold 10 seconds and 20 seconds after the start of the operation of the normal electric accessory due to the first variation of the normal pattern. .

《Direction pattern》
The performance symbols in the fourth embodiment are configured to be variably displayed according to the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but may be variably displayed according to the variation of the normal symbol. is also possible. In addition, it is also possible to have a first production pattern that is variably displayed according to the fluctuation of the first special design or the second special design, and a second production design that is variably displayed according to the fluctuation of the normal design. It is possible.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, when the normal design is displayed as the production design (second production design), the probability of winning in the normal design lottery is set to 100%. In the case of an easy result (determined by the type of the current easy winning state and the normal symbols to be stopped and displayed), the effect symbols are stopped and displayed with a grid pattern or the "V" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second winning pattern is displayed. It may be configured so as to notify that the winning to the start winning device P908 is possible.

In addition, the production pattern (second production pattern) of the normal pattern is configured to be able to display only a maximum of 4 fluctuations after the start of the stock mode, and after the start of the result production, even if the normal pattern lottery is executed, the second production pattern is displayed. It is configured so as not to perform the variable display of the production pattern. In addition, after the start of the stock mode, the execution of the normal symbol lottery is delayed, and if the normal symbols cannot be stopped and displayed before the start of the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol, it is the fourth or less normal symbol variable display. Also, it is configured not to display the variable display of the second production pattern.

《Normal pattern reservation display area》
In the normal symbol reserved display area (P923), there is a 1st reserved display area (P927) which is an opportunity to execute the 1st game of the battle effect, a 2nd reserved display area (P928) which is an opportunity to execute the 2nd game of the battle effect, and a battle A 3rd pending display area (P929), which is a trigger for executing the 3rd game of the effect, can be displayed.

《Regular pattern reserved image》
The normal symbol reserved image (P925) indicates the degree of expectation of victory in the battle production (=the degree of expectation of execution of the long open pattern of the normal electric accessory). The normal pattern reserved image indicates that the degree of expectation for victory in the battle production is high in the order of rainbow color>red>green>white. In addition, the rainbow color is a confirmed battle victory.

《Normal pattern hold change effect》
The normal pattern hold change effect (P926) is a change in the normal pattern hold image, and the expectation of victory in the battle production (the result of the second to fourth fluctuations of the normal pattern is long open) It is an effect display used for normal design holding change fanning production showing that degree) is up. There are three patterns of the normal pattern reserved change swaying effect: strong pattern, medium pattern, and weak pattern, and the possibility of changing the normal pattern reserved image is strong pattern>medium pattern>weak pattern. In addition, it is also possible to configure so that the strong pattern is always displayed when the normal pattern reserved image changes to red or more. Strong patterns, medium patterns, and weak patterns are indicated by different effect sizes, colors, and the like.

In addition, as a supplement, the normal design reservation image (P925) and the normal design reservation change effect (P926) are pre-determined for the special design when the main control CPU acquires the lottery value (random number) of the normal design. Similarly, the random number used for the normal design lottery is also pre-judged (read-ahead judgment), and the result of the lottery result of the normal design grasped by the pre-judgment and the information of the winning design of the normal design (pre-determination information of the normal design) is received by the sub-control CPU, and the sub-control CPU determines at what timing which normal symbol reserved image is to be displayed and which normal symbol reserved change effect is to be displayed. In addition, the fact that the main control CPU uses the look-ahead of the normal symbols and the sub-control CPU determines the production is not limited to these productions, and is also used in the long hit suggestion production described later (for example, the character determination of the battle production). . In the fourth embodiment, as a result of the normal symbol lottery, whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 operates in the long open state depends on the type of easy-to-enter state. Various look-ahead effects (ordinary design look-ahead effects) for stock mode normal design reserve are configured to be determined based on the information of the normal design pre-determination information and the easy-to-enter state type (game state type). .

<Feature 2 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 2 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, it is suggested whether or not the normal electric accessory will be long open due to the hit of the normal symbol during the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific game state. A suggestive effect (aura) can be executed, and the suggestive effect is further configured to be capable of suggesting the current state of easy ball entry.

Thus, in feature 2 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game; an effect display unit (for example, a effect display device P80) that can display an effect;
A sub control unit (for example, a sub control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining a stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value obtained when the ball enters the operating port;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (e.g., easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for the effect display executed by the sub control unit to the sub control unit;
The specific game state control means includes a plurality of types of specific games including at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state in which the entering ball variation means changes in frequency from a relatively difficult state to a relatively easy state. 1 specific game state can be set from the state,
The sub control unit
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, a first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first success judgment or the result of the second success judgment is the first hit, and when the result of the second success judgment is the second hit A second special game (for example, a small win) that can be executed at the same time, and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area after executing the second special game (for example, a small win → Pass through the specific area → Big hit ) and
The sub control unit
Suggestive effect (for example, aura production) can be displayed on the production display unit,
In the suggestive effect, it is possible to suggest whether the current specific game state is the first specific game state (for example, easy-to-enter state 2) or the second specific game state (for example, easy-to-enter state 3). It has become a game machine.

(Change pattern of normal design reserved image and display pattern of normal design change effect effect)
Next, FIG. 50 is an example of a table showing the change pattern of the normal design reserved image (P925) and the display pattern of the normal design change effect (P926). Here, the normal design reservation image of the 1st reservation display area (P927) (1st reservation), the normal design reservation image of the 2nd reservation display area (P928) (2nd reservation), the normal design reservation image of the 3rd reservation display area (P929) ( 3rd reservation) enters the ball with white reservation, and it is finally decided to be green reservation will be described as an example.

《Variable Point》
First, the 1st hold, 2nd hold, and 3rd hold are configured to be changeable at different points. The changeable point of the 1st hold is that the total number of game balls that passed through the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) and the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905) after the time saving state was started is the 6th ball (first time), This is the 9th ball (second time) and the 12th ball (third time). The changeable point of the 2nd hold is that the total number of game balls that passed through the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) and the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905) after the time saving state was started is the 7th ball (1st time), This is the 10th ball (second time) and the 13th ball (third time). The changeable point of the 3rd suspension is that the total number of game balls that passed through the normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) and the normal pattern operation port 2 (P905) after the time saving state was started is the 8th ball (first time), This is the 11th ball (second time) and the 14th ball (third time). The reason why the first change point of the 1st suspension is the 6th ball is that the random number of the normal pattern lottery is suspended from the 1st to 3rd balls, and then the introduction effect period (explanation effect etc.), a grace period is provided for the 4th and 5th shots so that the change does not progress ahead of the others. Also, by providing a grace period in this way, do not dare to see the pending change fanning effect (the game ball staying in the right area P501R does not cause winning to the normal figure operation opening after the 6th ball ) It can also be configured so that the player can easily proceed with the game.

《Change pattern of 1st hold and 3rd hold》
The change of 1st suspension and 3rd suspension is executed according to the ID determined by lottery by the sub-control CPU. As shown in FIG. 50, for ID1, the first time is white (no change), the second time is white (no change), and the third time is green (one step change). For ID2, the first time is white (no change), the second time is green (one step change), and the third time is green (no change). For ID3, 1st time: green (1 step change), 2nd time: green (no change), 3rd time: green (no change).

《1st hold, 3rd hold normal pattern hold change effect》
1st suspension and 3rd suspension normal design suspension change fan effect is executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU. For ID1, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern. For ID2, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a medium pattern. For ID3, the first time is a medium pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern.

<<Change pattern of 2nd hold>>
The change of the 2nd hold is executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU, like the 1st hold and the 3rd hold. Here, the change pattern of the 2nd hold is configured similarly to the change pattern of the 1st hold and the 3rd hold, but there is no problem if they are configured differently.

《2nd hold normal pattern hold change effect》
The 2nd hold normal symbol hold change effect is executed according to the ID determined by the lottery by the sub-control CPU in the same way as the 1st hold and 3rd hold normal design hold change effect. For ID1, the first time is a weak pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a weak pattern. For ID2, the first time is a medium pattern, the second time is a weak pattern, and the third time is a medium pattern. For ID3, the first time: medium pattern, the second time: medium pattern, and the third time: medium pattern. In this way, the 2nd hold normal symbol hold change swaying effect is configured such that the middle pattern is more likely to occur than the 1st hold and 3rd hold 1st hold and 3rd hold normal design hold change swing effect. It should be noted that the strong pattern may also be configured such that the 2nd hold normal symbol hold change fan effect is more likely to occur than the 1st hold and 3rd hold normal symbol hold change fan effect. In this way, regarding the change in the 2nd hold, the sub-control CPU is configured to be able to determine the lottery result ID different from the 1st hold and the 3rd hold, so that the combination number can be diversified, and it is possible to increase interest by avoiding the occurrence of production in a minor pattern in each time of the normal pattern holding change swaying effect that occurs continuously.

(Selection ratio of normal symbols and release pattern for each easy entry state)
Next, FIG. 51 is an example of a table showing the selection ratio of normal symbols and the opening patterns of normal electric accessories for each easy-to-enter state in the fourth embodiment.
《Assumption》
In the fourth embodiment, as the easy ball entry state, easy ball entry state 1 (extra stock mode), easy ball entry state 2 (stock mode (high)), and easy ball entry state 3 (stock mode (low)) are provided. I have it. In the easy-entering state 2 and the easy-entering state 3, a common stock mode screen is displayed on the effect display device P80, but they are different easy-entering states as internal states.

(Selection ratio of winning patterns in normal patterns)
The selection ratio of the normal design A is 330/1000, the selection ratio of the normal design B is 170/1000, and the selection ratio of the normal design B is 500/1000.

As described with reference to FIG. 48, the stock mode screen and the battle effect for informing whether or not it is easy to enter the second start-up prize device P908 in the stock mode are normally displayed during the operation of the electric accessory (normal In order to prevent the type of winning and the type of easy-to-enter state during stay from being discriminated by the normal pattern display device P53 during the production because the effect is executed after the winning pattern is stopped. , The normal symbols A to C shown in FIG. 51 are configured so that a plurality of types of normal symbol stop display modes can be applied. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the LED of the normal symbol display device P53 is composed of 6 lights, and a maximum of 63 types of normal symbols (2^6-1 [all off]) can be stopped and displayed. and At this time, for example, there are 21 stop display patterns for the normal symbol A, 11 stop display patterns for the normal symbol B, and 33 stop display patterns for the normal symbol C.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, since the normal symbol display device P53 is composed of six LEDs, the normal symbol stop display mode corresponding to each of the normal symbol A, the normal symbol B, and the normal symbol C. There are a plurality of types of , and constitutes a "symbol group" which is a stop display mode in which the same control is performed. In the fourth embodiment, the symbol group A corresponding to the normal symbol A, the symbol group B corresponding to the normal symbol B, and the symbol group C corresponding to the normal symbol C are simply assigned to the symbol groups for which the same control is performed. The normal design A, the normal design B, and the normal design C shall be described.

In the fourth embodiment, the pattern groups of the normal pattern A, the normal pattern B, and the normal pattern C are the same pattern group when the patterns are stopped and displayed, and the electric accessary product has the same operation mode. (Normal electric accessory P907) is executed. As will be described later, even if the same symbol group is stopped and displayed due to the game state in which the symbols are stopped and displayed, the electric accessory Different operation modes can be set as the operation modes of the .

(Release pattern of normal electric accessories in easy-to-enter state 1)
In the easy-to-enter state 1, even if any of the normal symbol A, normal symbol B, and normal symbol C is selected, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms) → closed (42400 ms). → Long open (5000 ms). Easy ball entry state 1 corresponds to part of the "extra stock mode" or "stock mode" in FIG. It is a game state in which four holdings, which is the holding upper limit value, can be accumulated for the special design lottery of the special symbols.

(Release pattern of normal electric accessories in easy-to-enter state 2)
When normal symbol A or normal symbol B is selected in easy-to-enter state 2, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms)→closed (42400 ms)→long open (5000 ms). . Further, when the normal symbol C is selected in the easy-enter state 2, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms)→closed (47400 ms)→short open (40 ms). In the easy-to-enter state 2, when the normal symbol C (selection rate 500/1000) is won, the reservation related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In other words, the easy-to-enter state 2 is a gaming state in which a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol can be acquired with a probability of 50% for one normal symbol lottery.

(Release pattern of ordinary electric accessories in easy-to-enter state 3)
When the normal symbol A is selected in the easy-to-enter state 3, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms)→closed (42400 ms)→long open (5000 ms). Also, when the normal symbol B or normal symbol C is selected in the easy-to-enter state 3 (total selection probability 670/1000), the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory is short open (40 ms) → closed (47400 ms)→Short release (40 ms). That is, the easy-entering state 3 is the most disadvantageous easy-entering state because the probability of obtaining a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is 33% for one ordinary symbol lottery.

(Opening pattern of normal electric accessory when non-entering easy state)
In the non-entering easy state, even if any of the normal symbol A, normal symbol B, and normal symbol C is selected, the normal electric accessory release pattern is short open (40 ms). Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation port 1 or the normal pattern operation port 2 in the non-ball easy state, only the open pattern that the game ball hardly enters the normal electric accessory is selected. will not be In addition, if the game ball passes through normal pattern operation port 1 or normal pattern operation port 2 when it is not easy to enter (for example, if two balls pass within 5 seconds), "Please hit left ' is displayed on the effect display device P80, and a voice saying 'Please hit left' is output as an error sound.

Also, even if it is in the easy-to-enter state, if it passes through the normal pattern operation port 1P904 or the normal pattern operation port 2P905 in a state where the first special symbol is not changed (for example, the easy-to-enter state and the first special symbol If three or more balls pass without any change in the number of balls), there is a possibility that the sorting part P903 has been tampered with. It may be configured so that it can be

<Summary of opening patterns of ordinary electric accessories based on easy-to-enter state and winning pattern>
In easy-to-enter state 1, since long opening is performed for any of the winning symbols of normal symbol A, normal symbol B, and normal symbol C, the ratio of executing long opening is 1000/1000 (100%). is. That is, in the easy-to-enter state 1, since the lottery of normal symbols with the execution ratio of long opening being 100% is performed four times, it is designed so that almost four reserved second special symbols can be obtained.
In easy-to-enter state 2, since long opening is performed when normal symbol A or normal symbol B is selected, the ratio of executing long opening is 500/1000 (50%). That is, in the easy entry state 2, since the lottery of the normal symbols with the execution ratio of the long opening of 50% is performed 4 times, it is designed to be able to obtain about 2 reserved second special symbols.
In easy-to-enter state 3, since long opening is performed when normal symbol A is selected, the ratio of executing long opening is 330/1000 (33%). That is, in the easy-to-enter state 3, since the lottery of normal symbols with an execution ratio of 33% of long opening is performed 4 times, it is designed to be able to obtain about 1 to 2 reserves of the second special symbol.

In addition, in easy-ball states 1 to 3, the probability that the hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol cannot be obtained is easy-ball state 1 (0%), easy-ball state 2 (6.1%), Easy to enter state 3 (19.9%), if you turn it over, you will get at least one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and the probability that the stock mode (or extra stock mode) will continue again. is easy-enter state 1 (100%), easy-enter state 2 (93.9%), and easy-enter state 3 (80.1%).

In addition, the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment is configured so as not to have a loss of normal symbols. When the winning pattern is won (for example, the winning probability is 5/1000), for example, a cut-in indicating the degree of expectation regarding the remaining normal pattern reservation is displayed, or a reservation change effect that changes the display mode of the normal pattern reservation. , and an example of displaying a setting suggestion effect that suggests the setting value of the pachinko game machine P, etc., can be considered. In addition, the deviation fluctuation of the normal pattern is also short (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds * including the design fixed time), and even if the deviation of the normal pattern occurs once or twice in stock mode, the normal pattern will be reserved again. It is preferable that the player is prevented from being disadvantaged by immediately executing the notification prompting the normal symbol during or after the deviation variation.

<Feature 3 in the fourth embodiment>
As described above, the game machine in the fourth embodiment has a plurality of easy-ball-entering states as feature 3, and the rate at which long opening is executed in the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory differs for each easy-ball-entering state. is configured as follows. In addition, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory by one winning pattern (normal pattern B or normal pattern C) is configured to be different depending on the ball-entering easy state.
Furthermore, in one easy-ball-entering state among a plurality of easy-ball-entering states, if the game is played normally (for example, in the easy-ball-entering state, the player hits to the right, or an error state such as clogging does not occur). etc.) is configured to be able to acquire N second special symbol reservations (maximum number of second special symbol reservations) at a higher rate than in other easy-to-enter states.

Thus, in feature 3 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
with
As a special game, the first special game (jackpot) that can be executed when the result of the first success judgment or the result of the second success judgment is the first hit, and the result of the second success judgment is the second hit. a second special game (minor win) that can be played, and a third special game (minor win→pass through the specified area→big win) that can be run when the game ball passes through the specified area after the second special game is run;
As a specific game state, it has at least a first specific game state (for example, easy-enter state 1) and a second specific game state (for example, easy-enter state 2),
In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, even if the pattern of the auxiliary identification information displayed on the third identification information display part is the same, the opening/closing pattern of the ball entry variation means may be different. cage,
The ratio of N (N is the maximum number of second lottery value reserved) second lottery values in the first specific game state is N (N is the maximum reserve of the second lottery value) in the second specific game state The gaming machine is designed so that the second lottery value of the second lottery value of the number) is higher than the reserved ratio.

(Ratio of jackpot pattern selection and game state after jackpot)
Next, the selection ratio of the winning symbols (big winning symbols) of the first special symbols and the second special symbols and the game state after the winning will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is preferable to also refer to FIG. 47 as necessary.

(Selection ratio of jackpot patterns)
The first special pattern (special pattern 1) is provided with four jackpot patterns, ie, a jackpot pattern A, a jackpot pattern B, a jackpot pattern C and a jackpot pattern D. The selection ratio of the jackpot pattern A is 40/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern B is 120/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern C is 400/1000, and the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern D is 440/1000.

The second special pattern (special pattern 2) is provided with three big-hit patterns of a big-hit pattern a, a big-hit pattern b and a big-hit pattern c. The selection ratio of the jackpot pattern a is 40/1000, the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern b is 120/1000, and the selection ratio of the jackpot pattern c is 840/1000.

In the fourth embodiment, an 8-round jackpot game is executed for any jackpot pattern, but a jackpot game with a different number of rounds depending on the jackpot pattern may be executed. Also, a big hit game in which the number of rounds differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be executed. For example, it may be configured such that a 4-round jackpot game is executed in the first special symbol, and an 8-round jackpot game is executed in the second special game.

(Easy entry state after the end of the jackpot)
As described above, in the fourth embodiment, easy ball entry states 1 to 3 are provided. Which easy-ball-entering state to transition to is determined as follows according to the big-hit symbol at the time of winning.
1st special pattern: Jackpot pattern A → Easy ball entry state 1 (once)
1st special pattern: Big hit pattern B → Easy ball entry state 2 (once)
1st special pattern: Big hit pattern C → Easy ball entry state 3 (once)
1st special pattern: Jackpot pattern D → None (non-entering easy state) (0 times)
2nd special pattern: Big hit pattern a → Easy ball entry state 1 (once)
2nd special pattern: Big hit pattern b → Easy to enter state 2 (once)
2nd special pattern: Big hit pattern c → Easy to enter state 3 (once)

(Transition of the variation pattern table after the end of the jackpot game and the number of times the variation pattern table is used)
The transition pattern of the variation pattern table after the end of the big win game and the number of times of use of the variation pattern table are determined by the big win symbols as follows. In addition, fluctuation pattern tables 0 to 6 are provided as fluctuation pattern tables, and accordingly, fluctuation pattern table 0 is "0", fluctuation pattern table 1 is "1", fluctuation pattern table 2 is "2", and fluctuation pattern table 3 is "3", the variation pattern table 4 is "4", the variation pattern table 5 is "5", and the variation pattern table 6 is "6".

<<Variation pattern table 0>>
Variation pattern table 0 is a variation pattern table that is mainly used in the normal game state (low probability/low base), and the number of times that can be counted with 1 byte as a reference period (number of games played) until switching to the next variation pattern table. is set.

<<Variation pattern table 1>>
A variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table in the easy-to-enter state 1 . That is, it is a variation pattern table used in the extra stock mode (or a part of the stock mode), and is a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation variation time of the first special symbol.

<<Variation pattern table 2>>
The variation pattern table 2 is a variation pattern table in the easy-to-enter state 2 . That is, it is a variation pattern table used in the high stock mode, and is a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation variation time of the first special symbol.

<<Variation pattern table 3>>
The variation pattern table 3 is a variation pattern table in the easy-to-enter state 3 . That is, it is a variation pattern table used in the low stock mode, and is a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern of 170 seconds is selected as the deviation variation time of the first special symbol.

The variation pattern tables 1 to 3 are variation pattern tables in an easy-to-enter state, and are created with the intention of executing the game in the stock mode with the deviation variation of the first special symbol. In the case of the 1st special symbol jackpot variation, or the 2nd special symbol jackpot variation or small hit variation (variation that occurs as a variation display during continuous redemption of the stock bonus), the variation pattern is about 5 to 10 seconds. configured to be selected.

<<Fluctuation pattern table 4>>
The variation pattern table 4 is a variation pattern table used for effecting entry into the portent mode. That is, it is configured such that a fixed variation pattern is selected for one variation for entering the portent mode, and when this variation pattern is selected, the portent mode entering effect indicating the entry into the portent mode is executed. It is

<<Variation pattern table 5>>
The fluctuation pattern table 5 is a fluctuation pattern table used during the precursor mode. By using the variation pattern table 5, it is possible to execute an advance notice, a ready-to-win effect, etc., which are different from those in the normal stage, in the omen mode.

<<Variation pattern table 6>>
The variation pattern table 6 is a variation pattern table used for effecting entry into the extra stock mode (ball entry easy state 1 by relief function). In other words, it is configured such that a specific variation pattern is selected for one variation that enters the extra stock mode, and when this variation pattern is selected, an extra stock mode entry effect that indicates entry into the extra stock mode is executed. is configured to

(When jackpot pattern A and jackpot pattern a are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot pattern A (second special pattern: jackpot pattern a), the variation pattern table is 1 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set used until ) (same below)). Specifically, including the production, after the jackpot game by the jackpot pattern A (jackpot pattern a) is completed, first, the extra stock mode (easy entry state 1) changes the first special pattern once (missing). variation 170 seconds) is executed. If the holding of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then the game is played 568 times in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th variation, the sign mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the portent mode, and at the 599th variation, the extra stock mode entering effect is executed. Then, at the 600th change, the extra stock mode is entered.

(When jackpot pattern B and jackpot pattern b are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot pattern B (second special pattern: jackpot pattern b), the variation pattern table is 2 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set used until )). Specifically, including the effect, after the jackpot game with the jackpot pattern B (jackpot pattern b) is completed, first, the first special pattern fluctuates (misses) once in the high stock mode (easy-to-enter state 2). variation 170 seconds) is executed. If the holding of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then the game is played 568 times in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th variation, the sign mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the portent mode, and at the 599th variation, the extra stock mode entry effect is executed. Then, at the 600th change, the extra stock mode is entered.

(When jackpot design C and jackpot design c are selected)
When the first special symbol: jackpot symbol C (second special symbol: jackpot symbol c), the variation pattern table is 3 (1 time) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (60 times) → 4 (1 time) → 5 (28 times) → 6 (1 time) → 1 (80 times) → 0 (0 times (= another fluctuation pattern table is set used until )). Specifically, including the effect, after the jackpot game with the jackpot pattern C (jackpot pattern c) is completed, first, the stock mode is low (easy-to-enter state 3), and the first special pattern fluctuates (misses) once. variation 170 seconds) is executed. If the holding of the second special symbol cannot be obtained here, then the game is played 568 times in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th variation, the sign mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the portent mode, and at the 599th variation, the extra stock mode entry effect is executed. Then, at the 600th change, the extra stock mode is entered.

(When jackpot pattern D is selected)
1st special symbol: When the jackpot symbol D, the variation pattern table is 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (127 times) → 0 (61 times) → 4 (1 time) )→5 (28 times)→6 (1 time)→1 (80 times)→0 (0 times (=used until another variation pattern table is set)). Specifically, after the jackpot game with the jackpot pattern D is finished, the time-saving state does not occur, so the variation pattern table in any of the easy-to-enter states is not set. Therefore, the game is played 569 times in the normal game state (normal stage). Then, at the 570th variation, the sign mode entry effect is executed. Subsequently, 28 games are played in the portent mode, and at the 599th variation, the extra stock mode entry effect is executed. Then, at the 600th change, the extra stock mode is entered.

In addition, the extra stock mode (easy ball entry state 1) is set for 80 times from the 600th variation by the relief function, and the variation pattern table 1 is configured to be used 80 times. , 0.4P≦N≦3.8P”, and in the fourth embodiment, since the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the normal game state is 1/200, the conditions for the number of times of time saving N are met.

In addition, even when entering the extra stock mode (easy ball entry state 1) by the relief function, just like the extra stock mode (easy ball entry state 1) immediately after the big hit game, only one variation is the easy ball entry state. 1 may be set and the variation pattern table 1 may be used.

(Selection ratio of small hit symbols and game state after big hit)
Next, the selection ratio of the second special symbols of the small winning pattern and the game state after the big winning (small winning + passing through the specific area) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is preferable to refer to FIG. 47 as needed.

《Selection ratio of small winning patterns》
The second special pattern (special pattern 2) is provided with 6 small prize patterns: small prize pattern 1, small prize pattern 2, small prize pattern 3, small prize pattern 4, small prize pattern 5 and small prize pattern 6. It is The selection ratio of the small winning pattern 1 is 10/1000, the selection ratio of the small winning pattern 2 is 30/1000, the selection ratio of the small winning pattern 3 is 210/1000, the selection ratio of the small winning pattern 4 is 30/1000, the small winning The selection ratio of the pattern 5 is 90/1000, and the selection ratio of the small winning pattern 6 is 630/1000.

In the fourth embodiment, the small winning symbols 1 to 3 are constructed so that 8 rounds of big winning games can be executed, and the small winning symbols 4 to 6 are constructed so that 4 rounds of big winning can be executed.

《Easy entry state after the end of the big hit》
As described above, in the fourth embodiment, easy ball entry states 1 to 3 are provided. Which of the easy-to-enter states to transition to is determined as follows according to the small winning pattern when winning.
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 1 (8R) → Easy ball entry state 1 (once)
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 2 (8R) → Easy ball entry state 2 (once)
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 3 (8R) → Easy ball entry state 3 (once)
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 4 (4R) → Easy ball entry state 1 (once)
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 5 (4R) → Easy ball entry state 2 (once)
Second special pattern: Small hit pattern 6 (4R) → Easy ball entry state 3 (once)

(Transition of the variation pattern table after the end of the jackpot game and the number of times the variation pattern table is used)
The transition pattern of the variation pattern table after the end of the big winning game and the number of times of use of the variation pattern table are determined by the small winning symbols. When the small-hit symbol 1 and the small-hit symbol 4 are the same as the big-hit symbol A of the first special symbol or the big-hit symbol a of the second special symbol. The small-hit pattern 2 and the small-hit pattern 5 are the same as the big-hit pattern B of the first special pattern and the big-hit pattern b of the second special pattern. The small-hit pattern 3 and the small-hit pattern 6 are the same as the big-hit design C of the first special design and the big-hit design c of the second special design.

In the pachinko machine P of the fourth embodiment, the ratio of small winning symbols is set as shown in FIG. is 12%, and the transition rate to easy-to-enter state 3 is 84%. By lowering the selection ratio, in the case of 8R with a large number of winning balls, it is possible to shift to easy-ball-entering state 1 or easy-ball-entering state 2, which is advantageous to the player with a higher probability than in the case of 4R, Depending on the number of rounds of the jackpot that triggered the start of the stock mode, the game may be played with a sense of anticipation that a more advantageous stock mode will be executed.

<Feature 4 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 4 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, after the jackpot game ends, the transition patterns (order of transition) of the variation pattern table and the number of times of use of each variation pattern table correspond to each other based on the jackpot symbols. is predetermined. The number of times of use of the variation pattern table used in the non-entering easy state (non-time saving state) is all manageable by 1 byte. For example, the variation pattern table 0 is set to be used 127 times, and after using it 127 times, the variation pattern table 0 is configured to be used again 127 times or 60 times (or 61 times). By configuring in this way, for example, in order to set the variation pattern table 0 continuously 568 times, it is not necessary to provide a counter (RAM storage area) for counting the number of times setting of 2 bytes or more. can be reduced.

Thus, in feature 4 in the fourth embodiment,
Starting winning port (for example, first starting winning device P710, P906, second starting winning device (P908)),
An identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying identification information triggered by the ball entering the start winning opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
a success/failure determination means for executing a success/failure determination based on a lottery value obtained with the entry of a ball into a start winning hole;
a symbol determination means for determining a stop symbol indicating the result of the success/failure determination;
Variation pattern table determination means for determining a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern of identification information for indicating the result of validity determination;
A variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of identification information from a variation pattern table;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
with
When a predetermined number of games are executed without becoming a special game after the end of the special game, it is configured to enter a specific game state,
After the end of the special game, the variation pattern table is determined based on the predetermined variation pattern table selection criteria based on the stop symbols,
The selection criteria include the change pattern and the number of references in the variation pattern table,
In the non-specific game state, after playing a game using a predetermined variation pattern table until a predetermined number of times of reference, the variation pattern table newly set based on the change pattern is a predetermined variation pattern table and a predetermined It is a gaming machine that can be set to be used until the reference count is reached.

(End timing of easy entry state (time saving state))
Next, with reference to FIG. 54, the end timing of the easy-to-ball-enter state (time-saving state) will be described. (a) shows the case where the first time in the easy-entering state is a losing variation, and (b) shows the case where the first time in the easy-entering state is a hit variation.

<<(a) In the case of change in the first time in the easy-to-enter state>>
Easy to enter state (time saving state) If the first fluctuation is a loss fluctuation, when the fluctuation display period of the loss fluctuation of the special pattern (here, the first special pattern) ends When the design fixed time starts It is configured to end the ball-entering easy state (time-saving state) and enter a normal game state (non-time-saving state).

<<(b) When the first time in the easy-to-enter state is a hit change>>
Easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) If the first variation is a hit variation, the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) ends when the hit variation of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) starts, It is configured to be in a normal game state (non-time-saving state).

In addition, even in the case of the big hit variation or the small hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured so that the ball-entering easy state (time-saving state) ends at the start of the small hit variation.

By configuring in this way, during the big hit or small hit fluctuation of the second special pattern, it becomes a non-entering easy state (non-time-saving state), so during the big hit or small hit fluctuation of the second special pattern, the normal pattern lottery It is possible to prevent an open pattern including long open from being selected by winning. That is, during the period in which the stock bonus is continuously digested by the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol acquired in the stock mode, there is no additional suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. , the game property that the stock bonus is executed by the number of stocks acquired in the stock mode becomes clear.

<Feature 5 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 5 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, when the fluctuation of the special symbol for the first time in the easy-to-enter state (time saving state) is a loss variation, when the loss variation of the special symbol ends When the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) ends and the first special pattern variation in the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) is a hit (big hit, small hit) variation, the special design hit variation It is configured to end the easy-to-ball state (time-saving state) when it starts.

Thus, in feature 5 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (e.g., easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
with
As a special game, a first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first success judgment or the result of the second success judgment is the first hit, and when the result of the second success judgment is the second hit A second special game (for example, a small win) that can be executed at the same time, and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area after executing the second special game (for example, a small win → Pass through the specific area → Big hit ) and
It is configured so that the specific game state ends when the first identification information changes for the specified number of times or the second identification information changes for the specified number of times,
If the first identification information or the second identification information of the specified number of times in the specific game state is a variation related to loss, the specific game state is terminated at the end of the variation, while the specified number of times in the specific game state When the first identification information or the second identification information is a change related to a first win or a second win, the gaming machine is configured to end the specific game state at the start of the change.

It should be noted that, when the number of consecutive houses of a predetermined multiple (for example, a situation in which 7n-1 (n>=2) such as 6 consecutive houses, 13 consecutive houses, 20 consecutive houses, etc. has been won), the next stock mode No. The fluctuation time of the loss fluctuation of one special symbol may be designed so that the number of lotteries for normal symbols is N (maximum number of reserved normal symbols)+1 times.

Specifically, for example, after the winning game with the second special symbol relating to the sixth stock mode has been performed four times (the end of the six consecutive mansions), any of the easy-entering states 1 to 3 is entered. The configuration is such that the variation pattern table X is selected even when the transition is made. In this variation pattern table X, when the first special symbol is lost, the variation pattern x is always selected. The fluctuation pattern x has a fluctuation time of 218060 ms (218.06 seconds). 218060 ms (218.06 seconds) is the variation time 170000 ms (170 seconds) of the deviation variation of the first special symbol selected when it is not the variation pattern table X in the easy-to-enter state, and one variation of the normal symbol This is the time plus the maximum time of 48060 ms (48.06 seconds) required for a hit. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to generate a seventh consecutive house when six consecutive houses are formed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of a maximum of four second special symbols can occur. When there are two reservations related to the lottery, intentionally avoiding the small hit V of the sixth consecutive game (not allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area P910), the number of consecutive games at the time of shifting to the stock mode is increased. By adjusting, a strategy that creates an advantageous situation is assumed.

In order to prevent such a strategy, depending on the winning pattern of the big win (small win V) that triggered the execution of the 7n-1 consecutive game, the presence or absence of the variation pattern table for the above advantageous stock mode is set. It may be configured to switch. By doing so, the winning symbols and the number of consecutive games become conditions, and it is possible to make it impossible to attack unless the correspondence with the winning symbols is known. In addition, if the combination of the winning pattern and the number of consecutive games is set as a condition, it is possible that the opportunity to refer to the advantageous stock mode fluctuation pattern table will be reduced, so the other winning patterns will be the 7n-2 consecutive games. The timing at which the stock mode becomes +1 may be irregular, for example, by setting a variation pattern table for an advantageous stock mode.

In addition to the strategy described above, the counter that counts the number of consecutive games is updated as the small winning game is executed, and regardless of whether or not the specific area P910 is passed, the number of consecutive games is counted. With this configuration, even if the game is played so as not to generate a small win V intentionally, the ball output of the big win is only lost, so that it can be used as a capture countermeasure.

(Relationship between fluctuation pattern (main fluctuation pattern) and production pattern (sub fluctuation pattern) in easy-to-ball states 1 to 3)
Next, a special symbol variation pattern (main variation pattern) controlled by the main control CPU in the easy-to-enter state and an effect pattern (sub-variation pattern) controlled by the sub-control CPU will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, there are three easy-to-enter states, and the main control CPU selects different variation pattern tables in these three easy-to-enter states. A common variation pattern A is selected as a variation pattern (main variation pattern).

On the other hand, the sub-control CPU has three production patterns corresponding to the variation pattern A, and is configured to select different production patterns according to the easy-to-enter state. Specifically, the sub-control CPU selects the effect pattern a in the easy-enter state 1, selects the effect pattern b in the easy-enter state 2, and selects the effect pattern c in the easy-enter state 3. do.

By configuring in this way, the sub-control CPU is in a state where the sub-variation pattern recognizes which ball is easy to enter, and the normal symbol when performing the variable display of the normal symbol in the stock mode or the extra stock mode. It is possible to switch the contents of the effect displayed on the effect display device P80 for the contents of the variable effect corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, the sub-control CPU is in the stock mode when the production pattern b or c is stored, so the screen that suggests the mode of the extra stock mode or the variable production of normal symbols (notice or prefetch) not be displayed. In addition, as will be described later, in the extra stock mode, in the battle production that suggests whether the opening pattern of the normal electric role includes long opening, an enemy character (enemy character 5) that can be fought only in the extra stock mode Since the battle effect of is executed, when the effect pattern b or c is stored, it is possible to perform control so that the battle effect with the enemy character 5 is not executed.

In addition, the sub-control CPU changes the selection ratio of the performance content of the long win suggestive performance (suggestive performance of whether or not the normal electric accessory is a win including long open) based on the stored sub-variation pattern. is also possible. That is, the type of the current easy-to-enter state is grasped by the sub-variation pattern, and the result of the normal symbol lottery (especially the type of the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed) determines whether the normal electric accessory P907 will be long open. It is possible to determine the contents of the notice effect related to the degree of expectation.

(Transition diagram of stock mode and extra stock mode)
Next, the transition of the effects displayed in the stock mode and the extra stock mode will be described with reference to FIG. Transitions in stock mode are indicated by thin lines and transitions in extra stock mode are indicated by thick lines.

《Stock mode transition》
First, when the stock mode is entered, the display of the stock mode screen of FIG. 49 is started.

Next, the characters "Aim for the gate" are displayed on the effect display device P80. In the fourth embodiment, it is important to pass through the gates (normal pattern operation port 1, normal pattern operation port 2) in the easy ball entry state, so multiple displays ("Aim for the gate", "Right shot", "Charge !!” etc.) to prompt the user to pass through the gate. "Aim for the gate" may be displayed larger than "Stock mode", "Right shot", and "Charge!!".

In particular, if the first variation display of the normal symbols does not start until about 26 seconds after the start of the stock mode and the start of the variation display of the first special symbol, the normal symbol lottery will be suspended three times. Even if it is stored, it is difficult to stop and display the normal symbols within the variable display period of the first special symbol (within the period of the easy-to-enter state), so 10 seconds from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. If the first variation display of normal symbols does not start even after a certain amount of time has passed, a warning display such as "Aim for the gate quickly!" Can be run additionally. If the variation display of the first variation of normal symbols is not started, it is possible to display only the pending display according to the number of times the variation display of the first variation of normal symbols is completed within the period of the easy-to-enter state. It is configured such that the display areas P927 to P929 for normal design reservation are erased one by one.

Next, as described above, after obtaining four normal design reservations, when a predetermined number of game balls pass through the gates (normal pattern operation opening 1, normal pattern operation opening 2), the normal design reservation image ( P925), a change effect (normal symbol holding change effect) is performed.

Next, when a predetermined period of time elapses after obtaining four reserved normal symbols, a stock completion screen, which will be described later, is displayed.

When the stock completion screen is displayed, the hit of the first variation of the normal pattern will be a success effect only if it becomes a long release depending on the type of easy-to-enter state and the type of normal pattern. , and the characters "Aim for the electric chew" are displayed on the effect display device P80. On the other hand, when the hit of the first normal pattern variation is not long open (when it is a hit of short open), wait for the next normal symbol variation display (normal electric accessory operation), and the normal pattern second variation hit is long. It shifts to a long hit suggestion production that suggests whether it will be open or not.

The display of "Aim for the electric chew" is before the start of the second opening (long opening) of the normal electric accessory P907, and the game ball fired to the right area P501R passes through the delay mechanism P902 etc. In anticipation of the timing when it becomes easy to reach the 2-start winning device P908, it is started about 5 seconds before the second opening of the normal electric accessory P907. In addition, since the period of long opening of the normal electric accessory P907 is 5 seconds, in order to indicate the elapsed time and the remaining time according to the long open period of the normal electric accessory P907 under the characters "Aim for the electric chew" indicator display and display of remaining seconds such as "Remaining X.X".

In the normal pattern 1st variation, the operation mode of the normal electric accessory P907 becomes long open, and when the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), the character "V" is displayed on the effect display device P80, and the second Indicates that a special symbol hold has been acquired. When there is a hold of the normal symbol, it will be in a standby state as it is, and will wait for the next long winning suggestive effect to start. At this time, when the situation is controlled in the extra stock mode, the appearance effect of the enemy character 5 is generated after the character "V" is displayed or during the period of waiting for the start of the second normal pattern variation.

《Suggestion production for long hits》
The long win suggesting performance is a performance suggesting whether or not the winning of the 2nd to 4th variations of the normal symbols will be a long open or not, and can be executed up to 3 times. The long win suggestive effect includes a battle effect, a music effect (described later), and a special effect (described later).

《Battle production》
In the battle effect in the stock mode, the effect display device P80 displays a battle with any one of the enemy characters 1 to 4 as opponents. When the ally character wins, the normal electric role is released in a long position and the reservation of the second special pattern can be obtained, and when the ally character is defeated, the normal electric role is opened in the short position and the reservation of the second special pattern can hardly be obtained.

Incidentally, the degree of expectation for victory in the battle production is enemy character 1<enemy character 2<enemy character 3<enemy character 4. FIG. Among these, when the enemy character 3 is defeated, it is configured to indicate that the hit of the normal symbol of the next variation includes the long release. In other words, the variable effect of the normal symbol to win the enemy character 3 is determined by taking into consideration that the pre-determination information of the normal symbol related to the next normal symbol lottery is a hit (long open), and the enemy character 3 is defeated. In this case, it is possible to obtain two reserved second special symbols. In addition, when the enemy character 3 is defeated, the normal symbol reserved image of the next change can be changed to a rainbow color. Furthermore, after defeating the enemy character 3, in the next long win suggestive effect, a special effect indicating that the long game will be released may be executed. The effect screen for the battle effect will be described later.

"Music production"
In the music production, the player can operate the production button P381. It is configured to suggest whether the hit of the normal symbol will be a long release or a short release depending on the degree of success of the player's operation of the production button P381. It should be noted that the music effect is configured so as not to occur when one or more pending second special symbols are obtained. In other words, the music presentation is configured to occur only in a situation where no hold of the second special symbol has been obtained yet. The reason for this control is that when there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, the continuation of the stock mode is a definite situation, and there is one hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. However, in order to play a song to congratulate the player from the situation that occurred to the rest of the stock mode period, the audibility of both Music Reach and the song for celebration overlaps and affects the audibility of both. is. Note that the effect screen for the music effect will be described later.

《Special performance》
The special effect is a effect that can occur only when the hit of the normal symbol becomes a long opening. In other words, the player can recognize that the normal electric accessory becomes long release at the time when the special effect is started, and the hold of the second special symbol can be acquired. The special effect may be, for example, displaying a rare scene, such as displaying a story of an ally character.

Returning to the transition diagram, if you win (succeed) in the suggesting effect for the long hit, the characters "Aim for the electric chew" are displayed on the effect display device P80 in order to obtain the hold of the second special symbol, and if you lose (fail), the next The character "NEXT" is displayed until the long win suggestive effect is started, and the game is in a standby state.

In addition, if all the hits of the normal patterns 1 to 4 variations are short open and the number of reservations of the second special pattern is 0, the result production that displays the number of winning balls etc. acquired during the consecutive period will be the first The special symbols are displayed on the effect display device P80 over the remaining variation control period (symbol fixed time), and the normal game state (normal stage) is entered. If any of the 1st to 4th variations of the normal symbols is long open, and the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol is 1 or more, the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery of the 2nd special symbol (stock number ) as a result, the display of the stock result screen is continued, and the winning game by the variable display of the second special symbol is awaited. In addition, when the lottery for the special symbol of the second special symbol is executed, the variation performance corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol for suggesting the number of rounds is displayed on the performance display device P80. are doing.

In this way, the effect display in the stock mode (the first special symbol is lost once) is a normal symbol variation effect corresponding to four normal symbol variations (activation of the normal electric accessory P907), It consists of a variable effect of the effect symbol P802, a notice effect such as an aura effect on the stock mode screen, a battle effect, and a notice effect such as music effect. In the variable display of the performance pattern P802, the execution mode of the notice performance is switched between the first variable display of the normal symbols and the second and subsequent variable display of the normal symbols, so that the performance mode is diversified and interesting. It is designed to provide high performance.

《Extra stock mode transition》
When shifting to the extra stock mode, the display of the extra stock mode screen is started. Like the stock mode, the text "Aim for the gate" is displayed and the stock completion screen is displayed. In the extra stock mode, even if the normal pattern is a hit in any pattern, the opening pattern of the normal electric accessory includes a long opening, so a successful production ("It's a hit" characters are displayed) is always performed. The extra stock mode screen is almost the same as the stock mode screen described above, but based on the notice lottery for the normal symbol variation effect corresponding to the first normal symbol change, the aura effect, other notice effects, and prefetch effects are extra. It can be displayed in a manner that can only be displayed in stock mode (for example, the aura P922 becomes rainbow colored, the content of the character display of the stock completion is displayed as "standby perfect", the normal pattern hold is all giraffe It is possible to display effects such as pattern (normal pattern long open confirmation mode).

Next, the character "Aim for the electric chew" is displayed, and when the game ball enters the second start winning device (P908), the character "V" is displayed on the effect display device P80, and the second special symbol is reserved. is obtained. When there is a hold of the normal pattern, it is in a standby state as it is, and waits until the next normal pattern fluctuation display and the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 are started, after which the next battle production (enemy character 5) is started. I will wait for it to be done.

After the second normal pattern variation, a battle effect with the enemy character 5 is performed. Since it includes a long opening, it will always be a victory, and the characters "Aim for the electric chew" will be displayed.

In this way, in the stock mode and the extra stock mode, the production corresponding to one normal pattern reserved is mainly performed by the production display device P80, and in the case of winning including long opening, the production becomes a victory (success). , one hold of the second special symbol can be obtained. This is done 4 times (including the successful production of the first normal variation), and it is configured to be able to acquire up to 4 reservations of the second special symbol.

《Stock completion screen》
Next, the stock completion screen will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, after obtaining four reserved normal symbols, the stock completion screen is displayed. In detail, after the operation of the normal electric role starts due to the hit of the 1st variation of the normal pattern (the 1st suspension of the normal pattern), the normal pattern is held until a specific period (eg: 25 seconds) elapses. It is configured to be displayed when three more are acquired. As a supplement, until the stock completion screen is displayed, it is the period of the above-mentioned normal design hold change fanning production. It should be noted that the stock completion screen is not displayed when the total number of reserved normal symbols acquired is less than four.

On the stock completion screen, the maximum number of reserved normal symbols has been obtained based on whether there is a hit including long opening in the reserved normal symbols (within 3) and the current easy entry state. A letter indicating that There are three patterns of displayed characters: "Standby completed", "Standby OK!", and "Standby perfect!!".

"Standby completed" is configured to occur easily when the expectation that there is a hit including a long open in the hold is low and/or when the ball is in easy-to-enter state 3. In other words, it is configured to occur easily when the second special symbol hold acquisition expectation is low. For example, in easy-ball-entering state 3, when the number of hits including long open in easy-ball-entering state 2 is one or less, it is configured to easily occur.

"Standby OK!" In other words, it is configured to occur easily when the degree of expectation for holding acquisition of the second special symbol is relatively high. For example, in easy-ball-entering state 2, when two or more hits are won in easy-ball-entering state 3, including long open, etc., it is easily generated.

"Standby perfect!!" is configured to occur easily when the expectation that there is a hit including a long open in the hold is high and/or when the easy-to-enter states 1 and 2 occur. In other words, it is configured to be likely to occur when the degree of expectation for holding acquisition of the second special symbol is extremely high. For example, in easy-ball-entering state 1, in easy-ball-entering state 2, when three hits including long open are won, etc., it is configured to occur easily.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to collectively incite whether or not the reservation of the second special design can be obtained by the reservation of the acquired normal design. In other words, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of predicting how many second special symbols can be reserved at the time the stock completion screen is displayed. Also, in the above example, depending on the contents of the characters displayed on the stock completion screen of the normal pattern reservation, the type of easy entry state and the normal design pre-determination information as to whether the normal design reservation is a long open winning pattern However, similar contents may be notified by different fonts, sizes, colors, character images, etc., in addition to the contents of characters.

(Display screen for battle production)
In the stock mode battle effect, a battle movie of friendly characters and enemy characters displayed on the entire effect display device P80, effect patterns (P802) displayed on the upper right of the effect display device P80, and "Right shot notification (P832)" (display of "right shot" character string and right arrow symbol) displayed at the bottom of the production pattern, and "Normal design reserved image" displayed at the bottom right of the production display device P80 (P925)" and the number of reservations (simple reservation display P814) related to the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed in the middle left end of the effect display device P80 are displayed (Fig. 58 reference).

The production pattern of the battle movie (battle production notice pattern) is, in order of expectation that the result of the normal pattern lottery will be long open, "Allied character special attack" > "Allied character preemptive attack" > "Competition" > "Enemy character It is a preemptive attack. In addition, in order to show the result to the player at the timing before the second opening of the normal electric accessory P907, the effect button P381 and lever P382 (lever P382 is configured by a button effect that is notified by the operation of the high expectation). By executing the button effect before the second opening of the normal electric accessory P907 in this way, even if the normal electric accessory is operated for a long time, it is difficult to miss the timing of the long opening. In addition, if the player wins in the notification effect as a result of the battle effect, then the effect "Aim for the electric chew" is started, and based on the start of the display, the player shoots the game ball into the right area P501R. It is configured to facilitate winning to the 2-start winning device P908.

(Display screen for music production)
The display screens for the music effect are the friend character displayed in the center row of the effect display device P80, the effect pattern (P802) displayed on the upper right of the effect display device P80, and the effect pattern displayed on the upper right and below the effect pattern. "Right shot notification (P832)" (display of the character string "Right shot" and the right arrow symbol), and "Normal symbol reserved image (P925)" displayed at the lower right of the effect display device P80, The number of reservations (simple reservation display P814) related to the special symbol lottery (first special symbol, second special symbol) displayed in the middle left end of the effect display device P80, staff score (P930), timing bar (P931), timing A mark (P932), a button image (P933), a long opening suggestion display (P934) described later, and a suggestion display history (P935) described later are displayed (see FIG. 59).

"Music production"
In the music presentation, the player operates a button when the timing mark (P932) reaches the position of the timing bar (P931), and if the button operation is allowed timing, it is suggested whether the win includes a long release. A long opening suggestion display (P934) is performed.

Three patterns of "EXCELLENT!" "GREAT!" > GREAT! > NICE suggests that expectations for normal electric accessories to be long open are high. In other words, when the normal electric accessory is long open, "EXCELLENT!" is likely to be displayed, and "NICE" is less likely to be displayed. In addition, if the button operation is not at the permissible timing, the long opening suggestion display is configured not to be displayed, or only "NICE", which suggests that the expectation that the normal electric accessory will be long opening is low, can be displayed. Can be configured.

The history of the long opening suggestive display displayed in the current music presentation is displayed as the suggestive display history (P935). As a result, the player does not need to memorize the displayed long opening suggesting display, and can easily predict whether or not the hit of the current normal symbol will result in a long opening.

In the fourth embodiment, the above-described "battle effect" and "music effect" are performed during the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 after the normal symbol to be the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device P53. Although it is an effect display that is performed, a variable display of the effect symbol P802 is also executed as a variable effect of the normal symbol.

The variable display of the production pattern P802 multiple times in the stock mode (or extra stock mode) is immediately before the second opening (short opening / long opening) in the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 (for example, 0.5 seconds before) and "Aim for the electric chew" are configured so that all patterns can be stopped and displayed, and if it is long open, special patterns such as "VVV" will be stopped and displayed, and short In the case of opening, it may be constructed such that a break mark such as "158" or a reach break mark such as "212" is stopped and displayed. In addition, the production pattern P802 of the normal pattern is displayed in a reach mode such as "7 (fluctuation) 7" in order to suggest the degree of expectation of "battle production" and "music production", forming a reach mode. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the type of symbol (in this example, "7").

<Feature 6 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 6 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the easy-to-enter state (time saving state) is a loss variation, each variation display of the normal symbol It is configured to determine the contents of the effect displayed on the effect display device P80.

Thus, in feature 6 in the fourth embodiment,
Starting winning port (for example, first starting winning device P710, P906, second starting winning device (P908)),
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
An identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying identification information triggered by the ball entering the start winning opening,
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or easy to enter a game ball;
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device P80) capable of displaying an effect,
A sub control unit (for example, a sub control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main control unit
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (e.g., easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed by the sub control unit to the sub control unit;
The sub control unit
a game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit;
A production pattern control means for controlling the production pattern displayed on the production display unit,
The production pattern control means is
While the identification information is changed by 1 in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a plurality of changes in the production pattern,
The effects displayed in the effect display section are displayed according to the change in the effect pattern multiple times (normal pattern 1st variation "stock mode screen", normal pattern 2nd to 4th variations "battle effect""music effect , "special effect", etc.) can be changed.

In addition, when the enemy character 3 is defeated in the stock mode battle presentation, it is confirmed that the normal electric accessory P907 will be long open due to the hit of the normal pattern and the hit of the next normal pattern (after one change). Although the specification has been described, the specification is not limited to this. For example, when the enemy character 3 is defeated in the stock mode battle production, the normal electric accessory is long due to the win of the next normal symbol (after 1 variation) or the success of the next normal symbol (after 2 variations). It is also possible to have a specification that it will be opened (that is, at least one of the remaining reserves suggests that the winning symbols with long opening are displayed stopped). In addition, it is possible to adopt a specification in which victory is determined in the case of the enemy character 3 in the 3rd game (variation display of normal symbols, which is the final stage of the stock mode).

In addition, when it becomes the enemy character 3 in the stock mode battle production, it is confirmed that the normal electric accessory will be released for a long time due to the hit of the normal symbol, but the next normal symbol (after 1 change) will hit. It may be configured so that it is not decided whether or not the normal electric accessary is long open. In this case, during the execution of the winning variation related to the winning of the normal symbol and the opening/closing pattern of the normal electric accessory, and during the execution of the opening/closing pattern of the normal electric accessory and the winning variation related to the next normal symbol. It is also possible to configure such that the straddling effect is displayed on the effect display device P80. For example, during the execution of the winning variation related to the winning of the normal symbol and the opening/closing pattern of the normal electric accessory, a scene in which the enemy character 3 attacks one or more times, etc., is displayed, and the next normal symbol is displayed. During the execution of the winning variation and the opening/closing pattern of the normal electric role, there is a scene in which the friendly character attacks and wins (the normal electric role is long open) or the enemy character attacks and the friendly character loses. It is also possible to display a scene (normal electric accessories are short-circuited). In other words, when a result in which the ally character is superior in the first variation is displayed (when the winning pattern is a normal symbol that is long open), it develops in the second half of the battle production with the enemy character 3 in the second variation, and the enemy in the second variation The degree of expectation of the battle production with the character 3 is higher than that of the enemy character 4 (although the degree of expectation is the highest, there is a slight possibility that the type of the winning pattern of the normal pattern will be short open). Can also be configured.

<Feature 7 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 7 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, it is suggested whether or not the normal electric accessory will be long open due to the hit of the normal symbol during the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the specific game state. It is configured to execute a normal pattern variation effect (battle effect, music effect, special effect, etc.), and in a specific normal pattern change effect (battle effect with the enemy character 3), it is normal due to the hit of the current normal pattern. It is a configuration that suggests that the electric accessory will be long open and that the normal electric accessory will be long open due to the hit of the next normal symbol.

Thus, in feature 7 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game; an effect display unit (for example, a effect display device P80) that can display an effect;
A sub control unit (for example, a sub control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining a stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value obtained when the ball enters the operating port;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (e.g., easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for the effect display executed by the sub control unit to the sub control unit;
The game information transmitting means can transmit the game information related to the third lottery value and the auxiliary symbol lottery value reserved by the third reservation control means to the sub-control unit before starting the variable display of the auxiliary identification information related to the third lottery value. is configured to
The sub control unit
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, a first special game (for example, a big hit) that can be executed when the result of the first success judgment or the result of the second success judgment is the first hit, and when the result of the second success judgment is the second hit A second special game (for example, a small win) that can be executed at the same time, and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area after executing the second special game (for example, a small win → Pass through the specific area → Big hit ) and
As the specific game state, at least a first specific game state and a second specific game state having different advantages for the player are provided,
The sub control unit
Ordinary symbol variation production (for example, , battle effects, music effects, special effects, etc.) can be displayed on the effect display section,
In the case of a specific result (for example, winning the battle) in a specific normal pattern variation production (for example, battle production with the enemy character 3), based on the stop pattern displayed on the auxiliary identification information display unit The game machine suggests that the ball entry variation means becomes an advantageous release pattern and that the ball entry variation means becomes an advantageous release pattern based on the stop pattern subsequently displayed on the auxiliary identification information display section. there is

(Example of the display screen during the jackpot end demonstration in the fourth embodiment)
Next, FIG. 60 is an example of a display screen during the jackpot ending demonstration in the fourth embodiment. (a) is when the second special symbol is not reserved, and (b) is when the second special symbol is reserved.

<<(a) When there is no reservation of the second special symbol>>
First, the case when the second special symbol is not reserved will be described. As described above, when the ball-entering easy state (time-saving state) is given after the end of the jackpot game, the stock mode (or extra stock mode) is entered. Here, the case of shifting to the stock mode will be explained. When the stock mode is entered, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 49 is displayed. Since the jackpot ending demonstration is being performed here, the variation of the production pattern is stopped.

<<(b) When there is a hold for the second special symbol>>
Next, the case where the second special symbol is reserved will be described. When the second special pattern is reserved at the end of the big win, the big win game with the second special pattern (including the small win + the big win game by passing through the specific area) is immediately started without shifting to the stock mode after the big win game ends. Since it is started, the number of reserved second special symbols is displayed at the jackpot end demonstration time. Here, three "V" are displayed, indicating that there are three reserved numbers of the second special symbol. In addition, the image of the ally character is displayed in the background. It is substantially the same as the image display of the teammate character displayed on the V stock result screen (the performance screen for notifying the number of reservations related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol).

In this way, even in different situations such as when the normal design is reserved (there is a reservation) and when the special design is reserved, by displaying the same image, it is possible to determine whether there is currently a reservation. It is configured so that the player can easily recognize whether.

When the jackpot ending demo time elapses, a special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is performed, and a variable display (about 6 seconds) of the performance symbol P802 corresponding to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol is executed, and the performance symbol P802 is displayed. The stop display suggests the type of big win (minor win V) to be executed thereafter. For example, when "7" symbols or "3" symbols are stopped and displayed, an 8-round big win (small win V) is executed, and when other symbols are stopped and displayed, 4 rounds are executed. It suggests that a big win (small win V) is likely to be executed.

Even when symbols other than the "7" symbol or the "3 symbol" are stopped and displayed, the small win V is executed when the specific area P910 is passed during the small win game. (Demonstration period for starting operation of the continuous differential device), the bonus screen that suggests 4 rounds is displayed, and a promotion effect that informs that the bonus of 8 rounds will be suddenly executed is configured to be executable. It is

<Feature 8 in the fourth embodiment>
As the feature 8 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the contents of the presentation displayed during the end demonstration of the jackpot game that occurs after the stock mode are configured to differ depending on whether or not the second special symbol is held. .

Thus, in feature 8 in the fourth embodiment,
a first start-up winning port (for example, first start-up winning device P710, P906);
a second start-up winning port (for example, a second start-up winning device (P908));
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A specific area (for example, a specific area (P910)) provided inside the big winning opening,
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of a game; an effect display unit (for example, a effect display device P80) that can display an effect;
A sub control unit (for example, a sub control CPU) that controls the effect display on the effect display unit,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a third right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value obtained when the ball enters the actuation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
Auxiliary symbol determination means for determining a stop symbol to be displayed on the auxiliary symbol display unit based on the auxiliary symbol lottery value obtained when the ball enters the operating port;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (e.g., easy ball entry state) in which the game ball entry by the ball entry variation means is relatively difficult to change to a relatively easy state;
game information transmission means for transmitting game information necessary for the effect display executed by the sub control unit to the sub control unit;
The sub control unit
A game information receiving means for receiving game information transmitted from the main control unit,
As a special game, a first special game that can be executed when the result of the first success/failure determination is the first hit (for example, a big hit by the first special symbol), and a result of the second success/failure determination is the second hit. A second special game that can be executed (for example, a small hit by the second special symbol) and a third special game that can be executed when the game ball passes through the specific area after executing the second special game (for example, by the second special symbol) a small win→passing through a specific area→big win) and a fourth special game (for example, a big win with a second special symbol) that can be executed when the result of the second win/fail judgment is the fourth win,
The performance displayed on the performance display part during the end period of the third special game or the end period of the fourth special game differs depending on whether or not the second lottery value is reserved by the second reservation control means. there is

(Breakout notification)
Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the transition of the game state in the first time of the time-saving state and the display of the split notice will be described. The upper diagram shows the main control display device P50 and the right-handed indicator lamp P56, and in the lower diagram, "1" indicates the game state or game state change, and "2" indicates the split notification. In addition, it is common to recommend hitting to the left if it is a normal game state (non-time-saving state), and hitting to the right if it is a time-saving state. A case of displaying the division notification will be mainly described.

《Right shot indicator P56》
A plurality of LEDs are arranged as the main control display device P50, and as shown in FIG. 61, one LED of the main control display device P50 is a right-handed indicator lamp P56. The right-handed indicator light P56 is an LED controlled by the main control CPU. The main control CPU turns on the right-handed indicator lamp P56 when instructing to hit to the right as a display indicating the shooting area of the game ball recommended for the player, and when instructing to hit to the left as a notice of hitting to the right. The right-handed indicator lamp P56 is extinguished. Mainly, the right-handed indicator light P56 is lit during the execution of the special game or during the specific game state (in the fourth embodiment, the easy ball entry state).

<< 1st special pattern deviation change >>
First, the case where the first special symbol is a loss variation will be described. When the first special symbol is a loss variation, as described above, the time saving state is terminated at the start of the symbol fixing time. At this time, while the easy-to-enter state, which is the specific game state, ends, it is configured to issue a right-handed instruction as a hitting division notification. In this, the normal electric accessory P907 is opened based on the 4th variation hit of the normal pattern during the pattern fixing time, and the game ball is shot to the right region P501R, thereby the second start winning device arranged in the right region P501R. This is because there is a possibility of entering the P908. That is, in the operation period of the normal electric role product P907 in which the operation pattern is set when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed as a winning symbol in the easy-to-enter state, after the start of the symbol fixing time of the first special symbol, the normal electric role Since the object P907 is to be short-released or long-released, there is a possibility that the second special symbol can be reserved, so that a right-handed instruction is given.

Then, if the second special symbol is not reserved at the end of the symbol fixing time, it is configured to instruct the left hand.

On the other hand, if there is a hold of the second special symbol at the end of the fixed symbol time, it is in a non-time saving state, but the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is relatively short (eg, about 6 seconds), and immediately the second Since the winning game by the 2 special symbols is started, it is configured to instruct to hit to the right. In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, since the delay mechanism P902 is arranged in the right area P501R, the game ball launched at the end of the symbol fixed time (at the start of the second special symbol variation) wins a large prize. It takes a time substantially equal to or longer than the variation time of the second special symbol until it reaches the opening P909, and even a game ball shot at the end of the fixed time in the easy-to-enter state will reach the big winning opening P909. This is because there is a possibility that the ball will enter the ball into the ball, and thus it is considered that there is little disadvantage given to the player.

<< 1st special symbol variation per pattern >>
Next, the case where the first special symbol is a winning variation will be described. When the first special symbol is a hit variation, the time saving state is ended at the start of the symbol fixed time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the winning variation of the first special symbol started in the time-saving state is relatively short (eg, about 4 seconds), and the winning game with the first special symbol is started immediately, so the right-handed instruction is given. configured to do so. After that, until the winning game of the first special symbol is started, a right-handed instruction is performed although it is in a non-time-saving state.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is started by winning variation, blackout suddenly occurs from the display during the jackpot ending demonstration shown in FIG. 60(a), and the winning of the first special symbol is notified For this purpose, a variation performance corresponding to the special symbol variation (a performance that the decorative pattern P802 is highlighted with a grid and stopped after the blackout is canceled) is generated, and the performance of shifting to the big win game is executed. In addition, although only the blackout effect is illustrated in this example, the big hit of the first special symbol may be notified by other effect methods.

<<Second special pattern small hit change>>
Next, the case where the second special symbol is a small hit variation will be described. When the second special symbol is a small winning variation, the time saving state is ended at the start of the symbol fixed time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the small hit variation of the second special pattern started in the time saving state is relatively short (eg, about 6 seconds), and the small hit game with the second special pattern is started immediately, so it hits right. configured to give instructions. Henceforth, although it is a non-time-saving state, right-handed instruction|indication is performed until the small-hit game of a 2nd special design is started.

《Second special pattern variation》
Next, the case where the second special symbol is a winning variation will be described. When the second special symbol is a hit variation, the time saving state is ended at the start of the symbol fixed time, and a right-handed instruction is given as a separate notification. This is because the winning variation of the second special symbol started in the time-saving state is relatively short (eg, about 6 seconds), and the winning game with the second special symbol is started immediately, so the right-handed instruction is given. configured to do so. After that, until the winning game of the second special symbol is started, although it is in a non-time-saving state, a right-handed instruction is performed.

<Feature 9 in the fourth embodiment>
As the characteristic 9 of the gaming machine in the fourth embodiment, as described above, the holding of the normal design is acquired during the deviation fluctuation of the first special design in the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state), and the holding of the second special design is obtained. It is a game property to acquire. In the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol in the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state), the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) ends when the fluctuation ends, in other words, when the design fixed time ends. there is However, if there is a hold for the second special symbol at this time, the easy-to-enter state (time-saving state) ends when the symbol fixed time ends, but the right-handed instruction is given by lighting the right-handed indicator light. done. As a result, the game can be played without bothering to return to the left-handed stroke in the variation of the second special symbol (relatively short-time variation) that starts after the completion of the symbol fixing time.

Thus, in feature 9 in the fourth embodiment,
a game board having a left game area where game balls can flow down and a right game area where game balls can flow down;
A first starting winning port (for example, a first starting winning device P710) provided in the left gaming area;
A second starting winning port (for example, a second starting winning device (P908)) provided in the right game area;
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) capable of displaying the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning hole;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) that can display the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
a first success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value obtained when the ball enters the first start winning hole;
Second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the second start winning hole;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
A special game control means for executing a special game that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning hole;
a specific game state control means for executing a specific game state (for example, easy ball entry state) advantageous to the player;
a right hitting suggesting means for suggesting that the game ball should be shot to the right game area by lighting a predetermined lamp;
The right-handed suggestion means is
It is configured to light a predetermined lamp during execution of a special game and in a specific game state,
A game configured to turn on a predetermined lamp when a hold exists in the second hold control means even in a situation where neither the special game is being executed nor the specific game state is set. It is a machine.

In addition, the lighting data of the right-handed indicator light P56 (lighting "1" when hitting right, extinguishing "0" when hitting left) is sent from the main control CPU to the sub-control CPU. It is also used as data for generating the command of the recommended firing position specification command (also called the firing position specification command) to indicate the position. At the start of the game, at the end of the winning game, at the time of changing the game state, etc., it is transmitted to the sub-control CPU, and the sub-control CPU displays a notification image related to the recommended firing position (for example, right-handed notification P832 and left-handed notification P834 It is used for display control of the separate notification P830).

That is, in the effect display device P80, it is indirectly understood that the display corresponding to "2. right-handed instruction" or "2. left-handed instruction" shown in FIG. can be hidden). Also, FIG. 61 shows a table for the first time-saving variable display, but after the first time-saving (stock mode), the variable display is in a state where a hold related to the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol occurs. is performed, the variation display of the second special symbol in a non-time-saving (non-entrance easy state) is also the same as the "special figure 2 small hit variation" and "special figure 2 per variation" in FIG. configured to run.

<Feature 10 in the fourth embodiment>
As described above, the game machine in the fourth embodiment has a delay mechanism (P902) → sorting unit (P903) → normal pattern operation port 1 (P904) → first start winning device in order from the upstream side on the left route as described above. 2 (P906) → normal electric accessory (P907) (and second start winning device (P908)) → large winning opening (P909), and when hitting right in a specific game state, normal symbols It is constructed so that the game ball does not pass through only the operation opening and does not enter the starting opening of the first special symbol. Furthermore, in one easy-ball-entering state among a plurality of easy-ball-entering states, if the game is played normally (for example, in the easy-ball-entering state, the player hits to the right, or an error state such as ball clogging does not occur). etc.) is configured to be able to acquire N second special symbol reservations (maximum number of second special symbol reservations) in the easy-to-enter state.

Thus, in feature 10 in the fourth embodiment,
a game board having a left game area where game balls can flow down and a right game area where game balls can flow down;
a first start-up winning port (for example, a first start-up winning device P710);
A second start winning port (for example, a first start winning device (P906)),
A third start winning port (for example, a second start winning device (P908)),
Working port (for example, normal pattern working port 1 (P904), normal pattern working port 2 (P905)),
A first identification information display unit (for example, a first special symbol display device P51) that can display the first identification information triggered by the ball entering the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening;
A second identification information display unit (for example, a second special symbol display device P52) capable of displaying the second identification information triggered by the ball entering the third start winning opening;
An auxiliary identification information display unit (for example, a normal symbol display device P53) capable of displaying auxiliary identification information triggered by the ball entering the operation opening,
Ball entry variation means (for example, normal electric accessory (P907)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning hole;
A large winning opening (for example, a large winning opening (P909)) that makes it relatively difficult or relatively easy to enter a game ball;
A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game,
The main control unit
First success/failure determination means for executing a first success/failure determination based on a first lottery value acquired when the ball enters the first start prize hole or the second start prize hole;
a second success/failure determination means for executing a second success/failure determination based on a second lottery value obtained when the ball enters the third start winning hole;
a third right/wrong determination means for executing a second right/wrong determination based on a third lottery value acquired when the ball enters the operation opening;
a first suspension control means for suspending the first lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the first identification information corresponding to the first success/failure determination;
second holding control means for holding the second lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the second right/fail judgment;
a third holding control means for holding the third lottery value up to a predetermined number until the start of variable display of the auxiliary identification information corresponding to the third right/fail judgment;
with
A first start winning opening is provided in the left game area,
The right game area is provided with a second starting winning opening, a third starting winning opening, an operating opening, ball entry variation means and a big winning opening,
In addition, in the right play area,
A distribution unit (for example, a distribution unit (P903)) provided upstream of the second start winning port and movable at a constant cycle;
The gaming machine is provided with a delay section (for example, a delay mechanism (P902)) for delaying the flow of game balls provided on the upstream side of the sorting device.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the transition to the extra stock mode after the end of the winning game is when the winning symbol that triggered the previous big win (small win V) hits the winning symbol that makes it easy to enter state 1. Only. However, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, the probability of shifting to easy-ball state 1 (percentage of winning symbols that shift to easy-ball state 1) is 4%. Very rarely controlled. If the trigger for executing the extra stock mode is thus limited to the type of easy-ball-entering state during stay, the frequency with which the player enjoys the extra stock mode (the most advantageous gaming state) decreases, which may lead to a decrease in the player's willingness to play. There is

As a response to such a problem, after shifting to the stock mode (the first variation of the normal pattern), the normal electric role is long open due to the current normal pattern 1st variation (operation of the normal electric role P907) And when it is more definitive than the pre-determination information of the normal design that the remaining normal design reservations are all long open (when 4 long open is under a definite situation) , Even if it is not in the easy-to-ball state 1, it may be configured to forcibly shift to the extra stock mode, or a production that wins the transition to the extra stock mode with a high probability (for example, about 70%). You may comprise so that an execution lottery may be performed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to generate many extra stock modes with a high expectation that a large number of paid balls can be obtained, and it is possible to expect an increase in the player's willingness to play.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, the execution mode of the aura is based on information on whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 will open for a long time based on the type of easy-to-enter state in which the player is currently staying and the winning of the first normal pattern variation. Although it is determined and the effect is displayed, it is not limited to this, and whether or not there is a hit that the result of the normal symbol lottery of the first variation of the normal symbol (the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P907) is long open may be configured to be displayed only based on

By configuring in this way, the player can recognize the expectation level per long opening for each hold by the normal symbol holding image of the effect display device P80, and the expectation level for long opening by all holdings by the aura (that is, , how many times the long opening is likely to occur) can be recognized.

In addition, as another modification, the timing at which the aura changes based on the type of easy-to-enter state and the information on whether or not the normal electric accessory P907 will be open for a long time based on the hit of the first variation of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol. Under the circumstances after three reservations related to the lottery have been stored, it may be the time when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation opening (gate) (the same timing as the normal pattern reservation change fanning effect). In other words, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation opening (gate), the normal pattern reserved image can change, so it may be configured so that the aura can also change according to the change in the normal pattern reserved image. .

With this configuration, the promotion of the aura effect (increase in expectation) depends on the player's game (passing through the normal pattern activation openings P903 and P904), and the presence or absence of notification of the type of easy-to-enter state is determined by the game. can be configured to be selectable by the user. That is, it is possible to enjoy the performance in a state in which it is unclear which state the remaining normal symbols are likely to stay (the second to fourth variations of the normal symbols).

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the "V" display pattern indicating that the second special symbol is reserved is not particularly described, but a plurality of "V" display patterns may be provided. For example, two types, gold and red, may be provided, with 8 rounds guaranteed for gold and 4R rich (possibly 8 rounds) for red. In addition to this, the 4th variation of the normal symbol in the stock mode (3rd variation of the normal symbol if the 4th variation of the normal symbol is not stopped and displayed before the first special symbol is fixed) After the end of the variable effect (battle effect), after displaying the stock mode V stock result screen (screen similar to FIG. 60(b)), until the first special symbol symbol fixing time elapses (in other words and until the variable display of the second special symbol is started), promotion production of "V" display (production to incite whether or not to be promoted from "red" to "gold") may be performed. . In the fourth embodiment, after the V stock result screen is displayed, the player only waits until the loss variation of the first special symbol is completed. state can be eliminated. Whether or not the "V" display is promoted by the promotion effect may be determined by the sub-control CPU by lottery each time the game ball passes through the normal pattern operation opening (gate), or the effect button P381 is operated. In that case, the sub-control CPU may decide by lottery, or it may be configured to change at a fixed timing such as 5 seconds after the display of the V stock result screen.

Also, on the screen (see FIG. 60(b)) informing the remaining stock number as V on the jackpot end demo screen instead of the V stock result screen, it corresponds to the special symbol lottery of the next second special symbol. The V image, which is a V image and is displayed in red, is displayed during the display of the jackpot end demo screen or immediately after the start of the variation of the second special symbol when the special symbol lottery for the next second special symbol is eight rounds. It can also be configured to be promoted to gold at such timings.

The effect that the number of rounds is promoted to 8 rounds (the maximum round in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment) by promoting the V image performed on these stock result screens, the jackpot end demonstration screen, etc. is the above-mentioned small win V The promotion effect that can be announced earlier than the promotion effect after passing through the specific area P910 can also be referred to as a pre-announced promotion effect.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, the effect during the stock bonus was only to display the big win movie. In such a configuration, as explained in FIG. 47, after the start of the stock bonus, the big win is repeated until the holding of the special symbol lottery for the second special symbol disappears. There is a risk that the production will become monotonous in which the movie is repeated. Therefore, it is configured to suggest the type of easy ball entry state after the end of the jackpot game by executing a battle effect or other mission effects that can notify the success or failure in the stock bonus related to the final reservation of the second special symbol. may It should be noted that, when the stock bonus relating to the final reservation of the second special symbol is set as a special jackpot effect pattern in this way, only two or more reserves are used in order to avoid the possibility that the normal jackpot movie cannot be seen. , it may be configured to execute an effect suggesting an easy-ball-entering state after the end of the jackpot game in the final reserved stock bonus.

Thus, for example, if the battle production is won, the extra stock mode (easy ball entry state 1) is entered after the big win, and if the battle production is defeated, the stock mode (easy ball entry state 2, 3) is entered after the big win. can be configured as It should be noted that the reward at the time of success of the production may be success = chance stock mode or higher (easy-entry state 1 or easy-entry state 2) instead of success = extra stock mode (easy-entry state 1). These rewards may be determined differently depending on the opponent in the battle production (for example, success for enemy character A = easy ball entry state 1, success for enemy character B = easy ball entry state 1 or easy ball entry state 2). etc.).

In addition, for players who want to play without being suggested the type of easy-to-enter state in the stock mode, it is possible to cancel the battle effect based on the effect customization in advance and the operation of the effect operation means P380 at the start of the effect. may be configured.

It should be noted that the execution of the effect suggesting the easy ball entry state (stock mode, extra stock mode) after the end of the big win is not limited only during the big win game. For example, it may be executed during the variation of the final reservation of the second special symbol, and when the variation display of the final suspension of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the production symbol P802 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the opponent character It is also possible to execute the introduction effect of determination to stock bonus (battle effect).

In this way, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable display for final suspension, in order to encourage the determination of the opponent character, etc., the hit variable time of about 6 seconds as in the fourth embodiment may be insufficient. Only when the number of reserved second special symbols is one, the variation pattern table is switched so that the variation pattern of the big win (minor win) of the second special symbol is changed to 15 seconds, By lengthening the pattern fixing time by about 9 seconds (fluctuation time of 6 seconds) according to the number of reservations being 1, the variable display of the second special pattern is changed to a special game (big win or small win). It is also possible to configure the control price until the transition to be long to secure the performance time.

In addition, when taking measures to ensure such a production time, in the stock mode, even if there is a hold related to the special symbol lottery of only one second special symbol (a situation where the battle production is not generated during the big hit) Since a similar effect scale will occur, it may be configured to prepare an alternative effect to be executed in such a case. For example, promotion of the V image corresponding to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol stocked with only one (It is possible to promote the V image from red to gold only if the stocked hold is around 8 rounds effect) is executed, for example, by operating the effect operation means P380, V The image may be configured to elevate (change to gold). It should be noted that this promotion is not intended to incite the type of big hit (small hit), but the easy-to-enter state that shifts after the big hit (small hit V) executed by holding the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol stocked. In the case of a display suggesting the type, for example, a hold related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol that transitions to the easy-to-enter state 1, the V image changes to a rainbow color to shift to the extra stock mode. The effect display to be determined may be executed as a notice effect in the variable effect corresponding to the second special symbol.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, during the period of the stock mode (one loss fluctuation of the first special symbol), the normal symbol lottery (activation of the normal electric accessory P907) is performed up to 4 times (special symbol of the second special symbol) (maximum possible number of reservations related to lottery) can be implemented, the fluctuation time of normal symbols is short (100 ms), and the operating time of normal electric accessory P907 is long. By doing so, the operation of the normal electric accessory P907 of the first normal pattern variation immediately after the start of the stock mode immediately after the end of the big hit is accelerated, and the normal pattern lottery after the fifth time in the first special pattern fixed time. It is configured to be executed in a non-entering easy state.

As a modification, the variable display time of normal symbols in the easy-to-enter state is configured to be long (47 seconds when short open, 42 seconds when long open), and the operation pattern of normal electric accessory P907 is configured to open once. (0.04 s for short open, 5.0 s for long open). In the case of such a configuration, the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P907 should be set in advance according to the winning pattern of the normal pattern that is won when the normal pattern starts to fluctuate, not when the fluctuation of the normal pattern stops. preferably. In the case of such a design, in the non-entrance easy state, even if any winning pattern is won, the variation time is 0.1 s and the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P907 is short open only.

In the case of such a configuration, when the variable production of the production pattern P802 corresponding to the variation of the normal pattern such as the battle production (operation of the normal electric accessory P907) is executed as in the fourth embodiment, According to the lighting pattern of the normal pattern display device P53 in the main control display device P50, it is not necessary to take measures to set the LED of the normal pattern display device P53 to 6 lights, which is a measure to prevent the operation pattern of the normal electric accessory P907 from being exposed, Only two LEDs capable of displaying three types of winning patterns need to be arranged, LEDs for other game displays can be prepared, and it is considered possible to enhance game characteristics other than the stock mode.

<Modified example for countermeasures against fraudulent gaming related to the fourth embodiment>
In the fourth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 46, a delay mechanism P902 and a distribution unit P903 are arranged upstream of the first starting prize winning device 2P906 to avoid winning the first starting prize winning device 2P906. It is difficult to play games aiming only at the normal figure operation port 2P905, the second start winning device P908, and the big winning prize port P909.

More specifically, when a game ball is shot toward the right area P501R of the game area P501 for 20 seconds to 30 seconds, one ball wins the first start prize winning device 2P906, and the jackpot game is completed. Therefore, when a game ball is shot toward the right area P501R, at least one hold related to the first special symbol lottery is generated by winning the first start prize winning device 2P906 during the jackpot game, and stock Stock mode (or extra stock mode) is configured to start immediately after the bonus ends.

However, if a player with malicious intent commits some kind of fraudulent act to the distribution device P903 and an illegal game is played so as to hinder the winning of the first start prize winning device 2P906, the first special symbol is displayed. Since the variable display of is not performed, the easy-to-enter state does not end, and a situation occurs in which it continues infinitely. put away.

If such an illegal game is performed, it will be possible to receive the normal symbol lottery until the normal symbol that is long open is won in the normal symbol lottery, and as a result, the second special symbol lottery will always be held. There is a risk that a state that can be obtained may be fraudulently created.

Therefore, as a modified example of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to consider adopting one of the following anti-illegal game countermeasures.

(Countermeasure 1)
As a first anti-fraud measure, it is conceivable to provide a limiter function (hereinafter referred to as a "time-saving limiter") regarding the continuation of the easy-to-enter state.

"Time-saving limiter", when the big hit (small hit V) occurs continuously during the period in which the ball is easy to enter, the big hit (small hit V) occurs continuously for the same number of times as the number of judgments determined as the limiter. This is a function to control so as not to forcibly generate the easy-ball-entering state which was scheduled to occur after the big win (small win V) when the player wins.

In the pachinko gaming machine P of the fourth embodiment, for a bona fide player who normally plays the game, the easy-to-enter ball state ends when the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the stock mode, is executed. At the time of occurrence of a big win (small win V), the state of easy ball entry ends, and control is performed so as to generate a situation in which a counter value relating to the operation of the limiter function is reset.

In the case of such a configuration, in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, since the easy ball entry state ends at the start of the winning fluctuation, the winning fluctuation in the easy ball entry state is completed. is started, it is preferable not to clear the counter related to the operation of the "time-saving limiter" and to continue counting the counter value as it is due to the occurrence of a big win (small win V). .

By constructing in this manner, a malicious player forcibly continues the easy ball entry state, waits for winning of long opening by the normal symbol lottery, and holds the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. If you repeatedly acquire and forcibly acquire hit fluctuations, a ``time-saving limiter'' will occur, allowing you to forcibly end the easy-to-enter state and shift to the normal game state. (In the case of an illegal game method that does not display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol immediately hits the jackpot (small hit V ) occurs, there is no suspension related to the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol after the jackpot game, and the state of easy ball entry due to fraudulent games is surely terminated).

In the case of countermeasure 1, "time-saving limiter", it is preferable to set the number of determinations for the operation of the limiter to a small number of times, about 7 to 8 times. In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, even when a well-meaning player is playing normally, the stock bonus may be consecutively given four times, and the subsequent lottery for the first special symbol rarely results in a big win. Considering this, the number of judgments is set so that the easy-to-enter state ends in a highly contingency situation where the first special symbol lottery after the start of the stock mode results in 3 to 4 consecutive big hits. there is

(Countermeasure 2)
Next, the second countermeasure will be explained. The second countermeasure is the end condition of the easy-to-enter state, the end condition in the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment (at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol or at the start of the hit fluctuation of the special symbol) In addition, there is an example of adding "when the normal symbol lottery is performed N times (N is 4 times in this example)".

In the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment to which countermeasure 2 is applied, even if a malicious player illegally repeats normal symbol lottery, a good player can play the stock mode as normally designed. Since it is only possible to receive the normal symbol lottery only four times in the same way as in the case of , the effect of cheating can be eliminated.

If such countermeasures are taken, the easy-ball-entering state is always ended after four normal symbol lotteries. It is also possible to configure so as not to set an end condition such as "when the variable display of symbols ends".

In addition, when countermeasure 2 is applied, like the pachinko game machine P of the fourth embodiment, the time of the deviation fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the operation time of the normal electric accessory are 4 cycles. There is no need to adjust it so that it fits within the minute, and it is possible to set a longer fluctuation time for the first special symbol to make it possible to select various patterns with a long fluctuation time for the normal symbol lottery. Become.
(However, it is necessary to set the control time (fluctuation time and design fixed time) of the first special symbol only for the time that can accommodate four times of the maximum time of the variation time of the normal symbol + the operation time of the normal electric accessory P907. .)

In this way, by configuring it so that various patterns can be selected in a short time to a long time during the fluctuation time of the normal design, the fluctuation production of the normal design is the same as the fluctuation production corresponding to the special design in the normal game state. It is possible to display the contents of the production that have a long and short difference in the time of the variable production such as SP reach, and depending on the type of production displayed and the composite pattern with the advance notice production, etc., the time to notify about the hit or miss of the normal pattern can be created.

In addition, as in countermeasure 2, when the easy-to-ball state ends with the number of lotteries of normal symbols, the variable display time can be set longer. It is not always necessary to execute the variable performance related to the result of the normal symbol lottery during the operating time of the electric role product P907, and during the period when the normal symbols are variably displayed on the normal symbol display device P53, all or large of the variable performance of the normal symbols is displayed. Since it is possible to display a part of the pattern without stopping and displaying the normal pattern in advance, it is possible to avoid making the hit probability of the normal pattern 100% as in the fourth embodiment, and the pattern that is lost in the normal pattern. can also be prepared. Furthermore, in the case that the normal pattern lottery has a deviation, instead of changing the type of the easy-to-enter state whether or not the normal pattern has a winning extension function, only the normal pattern that will be one hit is selected. It is also possible to adopt a specification in which the probability of winning is different for each easy-to-enter state (see FIG. 43, etc.).

[Fifth embodiment]
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment, like the present embodiment to the fourth embodiment, is a technique of effect control applied in a pachinko game machine that employs a small win V, and more specifically, a special symbol that becomes a small win game. When the specific reach is executed as the variable performance in the variable display, the reverberation performance after the hit notification of the reach performance is executed across the small winning game, so that the period of the winning reverberation performance is a special game (small winning). It is a technique that can be assigned to and can prevent the increase in the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

62 to 65, description will be given of the effect control contents of the specific ready-to-win effect of the fifth embodiment. Here, FIG. 62 and FIG. 63 show performance time charts when a small hit game is won with a specific reach or a non-specific reach (reach performance other than the specific reach) of the pachinko game machine, and FIG. 64 is a non-specific FIG. 65 shows an example of effect display showing the flow of the effect display of ready-to-win effect, and FIG. 65 shows an example of effect control regarding execution timing of reverberation effect, which is a feature of the fifth embodiment.

It should be noted that the game characteristics (specs) and game state transitions (game flow) of the pachinko gaming machine of the fifth embodiment may be any specs as long as they adopt the small win V (small win development big win). However, in the explanation of the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the same game characteristics and game state transitions (see FIG. 21) as in the present embodiment are assumed.

(Direction time chart for specific reach)
First, with reference to FIG. 62, the content of the variation effect in the variation display in which the specific reach is executed in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described. It should be noted that, in this description, the specific reach effect and the process leading up to the reach effect are omitted from the description because it is the content of the effect that can be set as appropriate, but as an example, the specific reach is a character reach with a main character and one (or two, three, etc.) of multiple heroine characters as the main heroine, and a reach production pattern that has multiple execution patterns for the number of heroines or more than the number of heroines. is executed as

In FIG. 62, (a) in the figure simply shows the control state of the special symbol and the special electric accessory in the main control board P40 (main control CPU). (b) in the figure shows an overview of the state of the effect (the content of the effect being executed) controlled by the effect control board P41 (the effect control CPU). FIG. (c) explains a representative portion of the content of the effect executed by the effect display device P80. Lamp control and sound control (voice, BGM, sound effect control) are shown. The following detailed explanation will be given for each performance period shown in (b) in the figure.

《Production control during reach to afterglow production (start)》
First, in the production time chart during the specific reach shown in FIG. 62, an example of production from the execution of the ready-to-win production to the start of the reverberation production, which is the production period shown at the start time, will be described. It should be noted that the performance period until immediately after the start of the ready-to-win performance and the reverberation performance is, as shown in FIG.

During the presentation period immediately after the start of the ready-to-reach presentation and the reverberation presentation, the following four presentations are executed as the main presentations constituting the features of the fifth embodiment.

The ``hit-loss branch of the ready-to-win performance'' is a performance period during which the ready-to-win performance is executed in the execution process of the variable performance corresponding to the special symbol lottery, and is a performance during the performance period for informing whether or not it is a big hit. . In the fifth embodiment, by operating the production operation unit P380 (production button P381, production lever P382), it is possible to indicate that the current special symbol lottery is a hit (small hit or big hit) or a loss (not shown). This is an effect that suggests switching to a notification effect (an effect that can be called an “operation input effect” when prompting an effect input). In the fifth embodiment, the decorative pattern stops at the timing when the performance accessory P560, which will be described later, is retracted. It is also possible to regard up to the timing of ``retraction of production accessories + stop of decorative patterns'' as a hit-drop branch production.

``Production role action + production role action effect'' is performed when the player performs an input operation to the production operation unit P380 in the period of the above-mentioned ``hit-loss branch of the reach production'', or an input to the production operation unit P380 This is an effect of a transition period when no operation is performed and a predetermined period (for example, an operation effective period of the effect operation unit P380) has passed. Specifically, the action effect of the performance accessory P560 which advances to the front of the display area of the effect display device P80 and operates, and the reach effect on almost the entire screen of the effect display device P80 to enhance the action effect of the effect display device P80. This is a presentation period for displaying effect images that are superimposed.

"Retreat performance accessory + stop decorative pattern" moves the performance accessory P560 advanced to the front of the display area of the performance display device P80 to a predetermined retreat position after the performance operation such as the initial position (other than the initial position which is the first standby position). Also, another position such as the second standby position may be used as the retreat position), and at the same time when the production accessory P560 moves, the image displayed as the production accessory action effect is white out. After that, it is configured so that the result image of the ready-to-win effect (which may be the afterglow effect described later) can be visually recognized by gradually passing through. In the fifth embodiment, when the ready-to-win effect result image is displayed, the decorative pattern P801 is in a state of being stopped (temporarily stopped) at the 3rd row, and the image is displayed for a short time of about 1 second. After the player visually recognizes the decoration pattern P801, the decoration pattern P801 is made small and retreated to the corner of the screen, and the "reverberation effect" is started.

Next, the "reverberation effect" that is executed during the variable display of the special symbols or during the fixed time of the special symbol pattern. ” is executed as a short-time effect of about 0.5 seconds for the purpose of switching the effect of the effect display device P80 to the background image of the “reverberation effect” in advance in order to display the ready-to-win effect as a series of flows. In the "reverberation effect" performed after the start of the small winning game, in addition to the background image, various effect displays are executed, the details of which will be described later.

A description will be given of the effect contents related to the lamp effect and the sound effect in the effect period of "reaching to reverberation effect (start)" in FIG.

The ramp effect and sound effect during the effect period of "during reach to afterglow effect (start)" are the same as the reach effect of the conventional game machine, and there are no special features to be noted. Regarding the lamp production and sound production during the production period of "reaching ~ reverberation production (start)", the production lamp P82 (board lamp P550 Or, the frame lamp P350) performs light emission production, and the speaker P83 (curtain board speaker P141, upper speaker P371) performs sound production.

《Direction control in reverberation performance》
Next, the effect control contents will be described for the "reverberation effect" period, which is the effect period during the small winning game, which is the characteristic point of the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment. This period is a period during the small winning game as shown in FIG. 62(a). More specifically, the main control board P40 (main control CPU) is a period during which the special electric auditors control process based on the small hit is executed, small hit start demonstration period, small hit round game (unit game) It is a period controlled by the execution period, small hit end demonstration period, etc.

As for the specific contents of the "reverberation effect", representative contents are shown in FIG. 62(c).

When the small winning game is started, the player is congratulated for winning the winning (small winning) by saying "Congratulations!" to the ``reverberation effect'' started during the pattern fixing time during the fluctuation of the special symbols. A message (blessing message P879) is displayed. At the same time, as a reverberation effect, a story effect corresponding to the content of the ready-to-win effect progresses. As mentioned above, the reach production is composed of character reach in which the story develops with the hero character and the heroine character, so story production (such as a sequel) that follows the process up to the winning branch production is developed. In addition, the story effect is continuously displayed until the start of the round notification effect during the jackpot start demonstration period (demonstration period for starting the combination of roles), which will be described later. It is composed of a relatively short production mode of about 10 seconds. In addition, if the round notification effect starts in the middle of the "reverberation effect", the round notification effect is started without waiting for the completion of the "reverberation effect", and if the small hit game continues even at the end of the "reverberation effect" , the final image of the "reverberation effect" is stopped and waited.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, at the same time as the start of the "reverberation effect" on the effect display device P80 (the display of "Congratulations!" In order to win the game, a ``specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838'' for prompting the player to shoot a game ball toward a specific area P760 provided inside the big winning hole P750 is superimposed on the story effect and displayed. "Specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" is an effect displayed on the effect display device P80 during the small hit game period in non-specific reach "Specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" (details will be described later) ), the area occupied by the display area of the effect display device P80 is smaller than that of ), and the visibility is lowered so as not to hinder the contents of the story effect as much as possible.

"Specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" and "Specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" are effects of separate notification P830 (recommended firing position notification) that notifies the player of the recommended firing position. Characters such as "Aim for the V!" and "Aim for the big prize opening!"

In addition, during the "reverberation effect" period, when the player performs a small winning game and the game ball passes through a specific area P760 provided inside the big winning hole P751, a "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" is performed. The display ends, and "V Winning Effect (Small)" is displayed. "V Winning Effect (Small)" means that the player has played a small winning game and the game ball has been detected passing through a specific area P760 provided inside the big winning opening P751, that is, the player has won a big win. This is an effect for notifying that the execution right has been successfully acquired.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, during the "reverberation effect" period, the effect display of the effect content of the story effect is made to be recognized by the player, so that the interest is enhanced. (small)" is preferably configured to be inconspicuous like the "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838", and the "specific area launch promotion effect (Small) P838” (near the position where “Specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838” was displayed), and “V prize effect (small)” is displayed in “Specific area launch promotion effect ( By making the occupied area of the display area of the effect display device P80 smaller than that of the small) P838, the visibility of the story effect can be further improved.

Next, the feature points of the lamp effect and the sound effect during the effect period of the "reverberation effect" in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62(d) and (e).

First, the ramp effect during the "reverberation effect" period is characterized in that at least two lamp effects are executed simultaneously.

One of the lamp effects during the period of the ``reverberation effect'' corresponds to a ``rainbow color luminescence effect (also referred to as a ``hit notification luminescence effect'') that emits light continuously from the execution of the win-lose branch effect. “Rainbow light emission effect” is a effect in which the effect lamp P82 (the board lamp P550 and the frame lamp P350) emits a rainbow color in order to notify the player of winning. In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, at least the frame lamp P350 emits rainbow color light to execute an effect. In this description, rainbow-colored light emission is used as an example, but it is not necessary to use rainbow-colored light emission as long as it notifies the player of the hit. The other light emitting units allocated to a part may appropriately execute light emitting effects corresponding to the story effect, light emitting effects corresponding to the winning of the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game, and the like.

Another light-emitting effect of the lamp effect during the “reverberation effect” period is a light-emitting effect corresponding to the “specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838” and is called “induction light-emitting notification P839”. "Induced light emission notification P839" is the production lamp P82 (board lamp P550 and frame lamp P350), the production lamp P82 provided on the left side of the pachinko game machine P or the game area P501. By performing lighting display (e.g., white light emission) so as to flow in order toward P82, it is notified that the game ball should be shot toward the big winning hole P751 provided in the right side area P501R of the game area P501. It is a lamp production. "Induction light emission notification P839" can be repeated multiple times to end light emission based on "Induction light emission notification P839" after a certain period of time has elapsed from the timing when each of the effect lamps P82 started lighting (for example, repeating three times, Always during the small hit game, or repeat until the execution of the V winning effect (small), etc.), and when the "induction light emission notification P839" ends, the light emission effect being executed at the same time, for example, the above It is configured so that the "rainbow light emission" and other effect light emission can be visually recognized.

That is, the "induction light emission notification P839" is set with a high priority as the light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 among the light effect that can be executed as the normal effect, except for the light effect for notifying special situations such as errors. ing.

Next, regarding the sound effect during the effect period of the “reverberation effect”, the sound effect during this period is the most audible BGM, voice (dialogue), and sound effects in the story effect. (maximum output).

During the period during which the story production is being executed, there is a sound effect (winning sound) for notifying that the game ball has won the big prize opening P751 and the passing of the game ball through the specific area P760 when the small winning game is executed. It is possible to output a V winning sound or the like that informs of the, but a sound effect that informs that the game ball has won the big winning hole P751 in the small winning game that is executed when a small hit occurs with a non-specific reach ( The sound volume is set lower than that of the winning sound), or the sound is configured not to be output. In addition, from the timing before the end of the story production or the end of the story production is almost confirmed, the volume of the sound effect (winning sound) that informs that the game ball has won the big winning hole P751, etc. It may be configured to enhance audibility by starting output. In addition, the V winning sound and the sound effect for announcing the start of the V winning effect (small) are voice outputs of about 0.5 seconds, which are temporary and do not affect the story effect. It may be configured to enhance audibility more than BGM, voice, etc. (increase the volume, or output a small sound with a high pitch).

In addition, during the period when the story effect of the "reverberation effect" is being executed, the player forgets to shoot the game ball toward the big winning hole P751 because the small winning game is in progress. (For example, after about 10 seconds have passed since the start of the story production, the situation after all the character's lines have been output, or in the case of a long story production, a small hit game regardless of the progress When a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the game, the game ball is launched toward the big winning hole P751, and a "jackpot loss avoidance alert" is performed to call attention to cause the game ball to pass through the specific area P760. can be configured to run. Since it is considered that the "jackpot loss avoidance alert" is a content that should be given priority over the story production, the production display device P80, the production lamp P82, and the speaker P83 give priority to the above-mentioned production contents. Directed in a manner that is highly recognizable and audible (for example, an image simulating the big prize winning opening P751 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the light emitting part provided in the big winning prize device P750 emits emphasized light in white, etc., and the "big winning opening It is preferable to output a dialogue voice such as "Aim for me" from the speaker P83).

<<Production control in round notification production>>
Subsequently, as intended by the designer, the player passes the game ball through the specific area P760 (V win), and when the small hit game ends, the transition starts. The effect control for the "round notification effect" period of the effect period corresponding to the operation start demonstration) period will be described.

The "round notification effect" is the same effect as the "big hit type notification effect" (see FIG. 26) described in the present embodiment, and the stop display mode of the special symbol that triggered the start of the small hit game (small hit pattern), it is executed for the purpose of informing the number of rounds of the big hit to be executed as a small win V (small win development big win). In addition, in the technique of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 26, the type of the big win effect to be selected is different from the case of only this big win, depending on whether or not there is a small win (big win) in the reserve. However, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the basic performance is composed of a performance for notifying the type of jackpot performance that differs depending on the difference in the number of rounds, such as a 10-round big win or a 4-round big win. (Depending on the circumstances, the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment may also inform the player of the hit in the pending state as in the present embodiment).

As an execution mode of the "round notification effect", for example, an object described as "HYPER_BIG_BONUS (10 rounds)", "BIG_BONUS (7 rounds)", "BONUS (4 rounds)" or the like circles around the character. , and the character selects one object from among them to notify the type of the jackpot to be executed. It should be noted that the number of rounds described in this description is the number of rounds converted assuming that the small winning game is the first round. It means that one round game (unit game) is executed.

In addition, the "round notification effect" is not limited to this example, and has multiple patterns of types of effects including characters and selection methods, and is executed as a "round notification effect" depending on the degree of profit of the jackpot to be executed. It may be configured such that the degree of expectation of the effect is made different, or the notification method can be switched according to the player's customization of the effect or selection of the effect.

Further, the light emission effect and the sound effect of the effect lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of the "round notification effect" are appropriately executed corresponding to the "round notification effect".

<<Direction control in jackpot round production>>
Finally, the effect control during the period in which the big hit game is executed will be described as the effect control when the small hit is achieved in the specific reach.

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the effect during the period in which the "jackpot round effect" is executed is similar to the general pachinko game machine P, and the effect of reproducing the movie effect is executed as a basic effect. there is

Further, in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, the following effects may be executed in a specific round during the small winning game.
(1) Suspension inner Renso fan effect (executable time: 3rd round, jackpot end demo)
(2) Round number promotion effect (executable time: jackpot start demo, 4th round, 7th round)
(3) Reduction of working hours promotion (executable time: 10th round)
In addition, these effects do not necessarily occur at the time (timing) that can be executed, and the timing that can be executed at the same time is set for multiple effects, not limited to the above-mentioned possible times. , which of the effects to be executed may be determined by a lottery or whether or not conditions for execution are satisfied (predetermined priority when conditions for execution of a plurality of effects are satisfied at the same time).

Suspended Renso fanning effect is a suspension related to a special symbol lottery of special symbols that are suspended during the execution of a big hit game This is an effect for informing whether or not there is a "hit" hold in the hold). It should be noted that the Renso swaying effect within the hold notifies that there is a hold that will result in a hit (small hit, big win) by a special pattern lottery in the hold by displaying the success mode of the production. Even if there is a hold that will result in a win (small hit, big win) by drawing lots, the failure mode can be displayed, and even if the failure mode is displayed in the suspension. is also configured to have a chance of winning within the hold. Also, when adopting the game property of the small win V like the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, since it is possible to win with a high probability in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, It is also possible to display the success mode multiple times to notify that multiple wins are on hold.

The round number promotion effect is actually carried out by the main control board P40 (main control CPU) after "BIG_BONUS (7 rounds)" and "BONUS (4 rounds)" are announced in the jackpot start demonstration period. This is an effect for notifying that the current big win rounds are 7 rounds or 10 rounds, and that the current big win effect will shift to a higher profit degree. As the execution time, the execution time is set during execution of the "round notification effect" of the jackpot start demonstration, and the fourth and seventh rounds corresponding to the final rounds of each jackpot effect.

In the time reduction number promotion effect, the number of times that the easy ball entry state (time reduction state) is set after the big hit of the small win V is, for example, 6 times or 95 times like the pachinko game machine P of the present embodiment (see FIG. 21). When the number of times of the easy-ball-entering state is 95 times in the case of having a small hit (big win), an effect or the like to notify that the easy-ball-entering state is 95 times during the big-hit game can be exemplified. As a more specific example, there is an example of switching (elevating) to an effect that notifies that the next small win is substantially determined, such as "TWIN_BONUS" in this embodiment.

Regarding the light emission effect and sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of the “jackpot round effect”, the above-described execution modes of the jackpot round effect (“movie playback”, “holding internal rendition effect”, “round number promotion Production", "Time-saving number of times promotion production", etc.) are performed.

(Production time chart of specific reach_Modified example)
Here, a modified example of effect control in the case of a small hit with a specific reach, which is also shown in FIG. 62, will be described.

<<Modified example of production control during production period of round notification production>>
First, a modification of the effect control executed during the effect period of the "round notification effect" in FIG. 62 will be described.

The pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment is the period before the execution of the "round notification effect" effect period, the "reaching-reverberation effect" and "reverberation effect" effect periods (control on the main control board P40 side As for the period, the number of rounds of the big hit game executed as the small win V (or big win) during the period from "during the variable display of special symbols" to "during the small winning game" (carried out in the small winning game (including rounds) reaching a specific number (for example, maximum) may be linked to the content of the effect and definitely notified.

In such a case, even if the effect for notifying the type of jackpot is executed during the effect period of the ``round notification effect'', the number of rounds that can be executed is already recognized by the player or easily guessed. It is possible, and it is considered that the "round notification effect" has weakened the effect of notifying the type of the jackpot that has been won.

Such a specific condition (if a player is given a “round notification effect”, the situation that can be easily guessed as a result of the content that can be notified as a result occurs) In the case of satisfying, the production contents of the "reverberation production" executed during the small hit game (for example, "story production" etc.), instead of the "round notification production", the after story of the reverberation production (subsequent It can be configured to perform special effects such as the continuation of the ``lingering effect'' that is not normally seen, such as displaying a ``lingering effect'' or displaying a related effect continuously. It can be configured to enhance the performance effect of "performance" (the effect of enjoying the afterglow of winning a big hit, etc.).

When a special effect such as a continuation of the "reverberation effect" that is not usually seen is executed, the light emission effect and sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 are performed instead of the "round notification effect". It is preferable that an effect is executed according to the "reverberation effect".

Here, a specific condition (a situation occurs in which it is easy to guess what kind of result will be given to the player when the "round notification effect" is executed). , some examples of effects shown as specific conditions in the effect period of "reaching to reverberation effect" and "reverberation effect" are illustrated.

(Production example 1 that satisfies specific conditions)
First, when a hit is notified by the execution mode of the ready-to-win effect, the degree of profit of the jackpot that can be executed (number of rounds, number of easy-to-enter states after the jackpot game, etc.) A case will be described where it is deterministic that the number of easy ball states is 95, etc.).

In the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment, it is explained that the specific reach is a reach effect developed by the main character and the heroine character. In the case where there is a combination of the main character and the heroine character B, the heroine character C, and the heroine character D, etc., it is determined that a specific profit state will occur in the case of winning. may be In other words, there is an example in which it is possible to clearly inform the player that a specific profit state will occur when a win is achieved depending on conditions such as a reach including a specific character or an increase in the number of characters. .

(Production example 2 that satisfies specific conditions)
Next, as another example of an effect that satisfies a specific condition, establishment of the condition based on the game method during the small winning game (during the effect period of the "reverberation effect") will be described.

Since the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment is a pachinko game machine that adopts a small win V as a game feature, the operation end condition (closing condition) of the big winning opening P751 (special electric accessory) during the small win game ) is not satisfied, the main control board P40 (main control CPU) delays the transition to the jackpot start demonstration period and intentionally lengthens the performance period of the ``reverberation performance''. For example, the execution mode of the small winning game is to open the big winning hole P751 for a short time (about 0.120 seconds) and repeat the process of closing it for about 1 second 13 times, resulting in a total operating time of about 14.560 seconds. If it is set, by intentionally not winning a specified number of game balls (10 balls, etc.), which is another operation end condition, to the big winning hole P751, the afterglow effect is achieved. The period can be extended up to about 15 seconds or so.

Using such specifications, in the small winning game that is the production period of the "lingering effect", the timing after the story of the "lingering effect" has finished progressing (for example, when the story ends in 6 seconds " 1 second later”, which is the timing after 7 seconds from the start of the reverberation effect, and may differ depending on the effect pattern. If there is no ball (V winning), etc., and if the small win this time causes a specific profit state (maximum number of rounds, easy ball entry state number of times 95, etc.), specific conditions Assuming that is satisfied, the additional effect of the ``afterglow effect'' is executed over the effect period of the ``round notification effect'' from the effect period of the ``afterglow effect'', and the ``round notification effect'' is not executed. mentioned.

With this configuration, the player can definitely recognize that a specific profit state has occurred during the effect period of the ``reverberation effect'' prior to shifting to the effect period of the ``round notification effect''. As a result, it is possible to enhance the game performance and the performance interest such as intentionally delaying the progress of the game in the small winning game.

In addition, instead of the "round notification production" shown as a modified example, the after-story (subsequent production) of the lingering production that is displayed, or other related production (not related like the after-story, but the heroine that appears Characters are common effects, etc.) does not suggest the type of jackpot immediately after as a specific profit state, but suggests a setting value related to the jackpot probability of the pachinko game machine P, It may be used as an effect to notify that there is a hit in the subsequent hold. However, when configured in this way, there is a risk that the number of rounds of the big win will be unknown, so the player intentionally plays the small win game as in "Example 2 of production that satisfies a specific condition". It may be configured to execute as an effect that can be displayed during a small win game, and to execute the "round notification effect" as originally planned (if the occurrence of a specific profit state is "set If it is a prerequisite for the execution of the notification effect of "value" or "reservation inner renso", a specific profit state + set value etc. will be notified at the same time, so as in the above-mentioned modification "Round notification effect" may be straddled during the production period).

In addition, in a pachinko game machine that adopts a small hit V, delaying the launch during a small win game may cause the risk of the game ball not passing through the specific area P760 (loss of the big win game), or the maximum prescribed number of game balls. Since there is a risk that a prize cannot be won, if it is considered that the player will be disadvantaged by the end of the small winning game at a specific timing or the presence or absence of a V prize, the effect period of the "round notification effect" The conditions for the execution of the alternative "reverberation effect" in the progress of the game, such as "when winning the effect execution lottery at the time of V winning", "when winning by lottery for each winning of the big prize opening P751", etc. It may be configured to be executed by a dramatic lottery.

In addition, regarding the "reverberation effect" instead of the "round notification effect" described as "a modified example of effect control during the effect period of the round notification effect", it is not intended to notify the occurrence of a specific profit state, but simply The execution may be determined for the purpose of increasing interest in the "reverberation effect". At this time, if the "round notification effect" is not executed, there is a risk that the type of the jackpot game, which is information that the player is highly interested in, may become unknown. (At this time, the light emission effect and sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 are given priority to the effect corresponding to the "reverberation effect").

<<Modified example of production control during production period of big hit round production>>
Next, a description will be given of an effect performed during the effect period of the "big hit round effect" with respect to a modified example of effect control when a small hit is achieved in a specific reach.

In the production period of the "jackpot round production", in the production period of the "round notification production", which is the production period immediately before, depending on whether or not the alternative "reverberation production" shown as a modification occurs, the "jackpot round production" ” is also configured to be executed in a different manner, and the details thereof will be described below.

During the production period of "round notification production", if there is an alternative "reverberation production" execution, until the execution of "reverberation production" is completed (until all production such as after story is displayed, 5th execution The production of the "jackpot round production" shown as an example ("movie playback", "holding internal rendezvous production", "round number promotion production", "time reduction number promotion production", etc.) is restricted (cancelled, canceled) Then, when the execution of the alternative "reverberation effect" is completed, it is configured to return to the effect of the "jackpot round effect".

At this time, for those that have execution timings such as "holding inner renso incitement production", "round number promotion production", and "time reduction promotion production", the timing of completing the execution of the alternative "reverberation production" is different for each It is configured not to execute (cancel) when the execution start timing of the effect has passed.

By executing the alternative ``reverberation effect'' starting from the effect period of the ``round notification effect'', the state of the jackpot start demonstration state in which the big prize opening P751 is not opened is changed to the state of the jackpot game in which the big prize prize opening P751 is opened. Since there is a possibility that the transition timing may not be clear, when the alternative "reverberation effect" is being executed, the big winning opening is displayed on the effect display device P80 based on the transition to the state of the big win game. In addition to displaying an image imitating P751, the lamp P82 emits light in the same manner as the guidance light notification P839. It may be configured to be executed until 1 or 3 balls are won, or 3 seconds after the start of the effect (referred to as "big prize opening promotion effect").

(Production time chart of non-specific reach)
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the effect control contents when winning a small hit by non-specific reach in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment will be described.

It should be noted that the production control in the non-specific reach of FIG. 63 is the production control at the time of a small hit that can be performed in the conventional pachinko game machine, and the "specific reach" which is the characteristic point in the pachinko game machine P of the fifth embodiment. Since it is described for the purpose of explaining the contrast with the effect control in , the explanation will be simplified.

《Production control during reach to afterglow production (start)》
First, an example of the effect control in the effect period of "during the reach to afterglow effect (start)" when the non-specific reach is executed will be shown.

In the case of the non-specific reach, the effect control of at least four points is provided in the effect period of "during reach to reverberation effect (start)".

The "hit-lose branch of ready-to-win effect" is the effect timing for notifying whether or not the end of the current ready-to-win effect will result in a win (success result), as in the case of the specific reach. In the pachinko game machine P of the embodiment, it is an operation input effect that requires the player to operate the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381 and the effect lever P382). The timing at which the player is actually notified of whether the player has won or lost is after the operation of the effect operation unit P380. It is configured to inform the player of a hit (minor win, big win) by the production of transition to "accessory action effect". In addition, the win-lose branch of the ready-to-win effect may not be an operation input effect, and may be an effect that progresses automatically (similarly, in the case of a specific reach, it may not be an operation input effect).

``Direction Accessory Action + Directional Accessory Action Effect'' is an effect that notifies the player of winning by using the direction action of the direction role P560, and advances to the front of the direction display device P80. It is a period during which the production control is executed by the production operation of the possible production accessory P560 and the effect (production effect) image displayed on substantially the entire screen of the production display device P80 in accordance with the operation of the production accessory P560.

``Demonstration Accessory Retreat + Decorative Pattern Temporary Stop'' is to retract the performance accessory P560 that has performed the performance action by the performance control of the ``performance role movement + performance role motion effect'' from the front of the display area of the performance display device P80. and display an image showing the end of the non-specific ready-to-win, and display a decorative pattern P801 for notifying that the current ready-to-win effect is a hit in a temporary stop (shaking and fluctuating state). be. In the case of specific reach, it was configured so that the special pattern ended the variable time and stopped display (during the fixed pattern time) at almost the same timing as this, but in non-specific reach, the special pattern was also at this timing. continue to fluctuate.

In the effect control of "reverberation effect + decorative pattern stop", in the effect control of "retraction of the performance role + decorative pattern temporary stop", the player is made to recognize the hit by displaying the end of the reach, and then the reverberation is further performed. It is a period during which congratulatory messages such as "Congratulations!" . In the non-specific reach, the stop display of special symbols and the design fixed time so as to shift to the production period of "small hit production" described later at substantially the same timing as the end of the production control of the "reverberation production + decorative design stop" The decoration pattern P801 is configured to be stopped and displayed in accordance with the end timing.

The light emission effect and the sound effect of the lamp P82 and the speaker P83 during the effect period of "ready reach to reverberation effect (start)" are performed according to the reach effect and the reverberation effect.

<<Production control in small hit production>>
Subsequently, the performance control during the performance period of the "small hit performance" performed during the small winning game when the non-specific reach is executed and the small winning is achieved will be described. The state of "during small winning game" is the main control board P40 (main control CPU), the small winning start demonstration of the special electric role product control processing, the small winning round game (while the special electric role product is in operation), and the small winning ending. It corresponds to the demo period. Note that the small winning end demonstration may be omitted or may be treated as being substantially absent only for a short period of time such as 4 ms when a V prize is won.

As shown in FIG. 63(c), during the effect period of the "small hit effect", two characteristic points are shown as the characteristic effect control.

The display of "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" is an effect that is executed during the small winning start demonstration or during the small winning round starting demonstration and the small winning round game, and is displayed in the big winning opening P751. This is an effect display that continues until a "V passing effect (large)" (described later), which is an effect displayed when the game ball passes through the provided specific area P760, is displayed. Unlike the "specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838" at the time of the specific reach, since other story effects etc. are not being executed, it is notified that the game ball will be fired to the specific area P760. The effect is displayed in substantially the entire display area of the effect display device P80 so as to be most conspicuous as the main effect (for example, so that the occupied area is maximized). As a specific example, the effect display device P80 displays a character image, the characters "Aim for V!"

"V passing effect (large)" is an effect displayed based on the game ball passing through a specific area P760 provided in the big winning opening P751 during the small winning round game. This is an effect that notifies that the right to win the jackpot (activation of the continuous differential device for the role) has been obtained. As with the "Specified Area Launch Promotion Effect (Large)", story effects etc. are not implemented in non-specific reach, so in order to reliably notify that a V prize has occurred, the "V pass" displayed in the specific reach Effect (Small)” is configured to be displayed in a more conspicuous manner (for example, display on the entire screen of the display area of the effect display device P80). "V passing effect (large)" may continue to be displayed until the period of the small winning game (during the small winning round game or small winning end demo) continues, or after displaying for about a few seconds, the "round It may be configured such that the display is started prior to the "notification effect".

During the effect period of the "small hit effect", the light emission effect of the lamp P82 is characterized by the guidance light notification P839 at the timing of executing the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" as in the case of the specific reach. It is characterized by the point of execution. In addition, in the case of non-specific reach, since the production of blessing by the afterglow production such as story production has ended, it is not the case that the guidance light emission notification P839 is superimposed on the rainbow light emission of the light emission mode, which is the so-called blessing mode. , only the light emission performance data of the guidance light notification is executed, and while the entire frame is darkened, the light emission of the bright guidance light notification P839 guides the shooting of the game ball to the big winning hole P751. In addition, if it is not rainbow color light emission, the light emission pattern of the guidance light emission notification P839 is superimposed with a higher priority on the place where the light emission pattern corresponding to the character effect of "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" is performed. You may control so that it emits light by pressing. In addition, when shifting to "V passing effect (large)", rainbow light emission is performed in order to celebrate that the right to win a big hit has been obtained.

Regarding the sound effect of the speaker P83 during the effect period of the "small hit effect", BGM, voice, and sound effects are generated according to the effect mode of the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" and "V passage effect (large)". controlled to let

<<Production control in round notification production and jackpot round production>>
Since the production control in the production period of "round notification production" and "jackpot round production" is the same as the control similar to the specific reach (except for the modified example related to "reverberation production"), for detailed explanation Omit.

(Production example of specific reach and non-specific reach)
Subsequently, when specific reach and non-specific reach are implemented, an example of how the effect is executed in the above-described effect control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG.

FIG. 64 shows an example of an effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 during non-specific reach. 64(a) to 64(c) illustrate the variable display of the special symbols and the effect during the fixed symbol time when the non-specific reach is executed and the small hit is achieved. 64(d) shows an example of the effect display of the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" of the small winning game (particularly during the small winning start demonstration period).

In FIG. 64(a), a battle effect is executed as a ready-to-win effect, and an image in which player side characters (two female characters on the right side of the figure) and enemy side characters (male characters on the left side of the figure) face each other. is displayed. At the top and bottom of the screen, instructions such as "battle mission" and "defeat Mr. B" are displayed, indicating that the player will be rewarded with a profit (win or the like) by defeating the male character on the left. It is Decorative patterns P801 forming a reach mode are retracted and displayed on the left and right sides of the upper part of the screen, and the substantially central area of the screen is made visible as an effect area.

After that, the battle effect of non-specific reach progresses, and the ending screen shown in FIG. 64(b) is displayed. As described above, the win-lose branch effect of non-specific reach is an operation input effect, and the effect is produced when the player operates the effect operation unit P380 (or when a certain period of time, which is the operation valid period without operation, has passed). Although it has been explained that the accessory P560 operates and progresses in the form of notifying the hit, in FIG. The ending screen after evacuation is illustrated. At this time, the character string "WIN" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen to clearly inform that the result is a success. It is in a situation where it is displayed in a square pattern as shown and is in a state of shaking fluctuation (temporary stop).

FIG. 64(c) shows a "reverberation effect" screen displayed at the time when the variable display of the special symbols ends and during the fixed symbols time when the non-specific reach indicates a win. In the display area of the effect display device P80, the characters "WIN" are displayed continuously from FIG. 64(b), and the decorative pattern P801 is reduced and moved to the corner (lower left corner) of the screen for display. (Note that the decorative pattern P801 in FIG. 64(c) may be replaced with a simplified drawing P802, which is not shown, and the decorative pattern P801 may be hidden). In the "reverberation production", two female characters appearing in the battle production are shown taking a fixed pose and speaking a fixed line ("Leave it to the TA!"). , the telop display of the decisive line is displayed in the vicinity of the character on the player side.

FIG. 64(d) shows that non-specific reach results in a hit (minor win), and during a small win game when a small win game is executed (especially during a small win round game from a small win start demonstration) 10 shows an example of the effect display of the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" executed at the beginning. On the left side of the screen, a character is displayed and by performing an action, the player's attention is focused on the display area of the effect display device P80. Promotion effect (large) P837" is displayed. "Right shot notification P832" and "Specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" are a kind of effect of the separate notification P830 that suggests the firing position (fire intensity) recommended for the player, and are a small winning round. The game method during the game (shooting the game ball toward the specific area P760 provided in the big winning opening P751 arranged in the right side area P501R of the game area P501) is suggested to the player.

In the example of FIG. 64(d), the "specific area launch promotion effect (large) P837" is a game in which the character "Aim!" By arranging an image simulating the big winning hole P751 and an arrow image pointing to the image simulating the big winning hole P751, it is configured to remind the game ball winning the big winning hole P751 as an image. are doing. In order to enhance the image, an image simulating a game ball may be displayed in addition to the arrow image. In addition, as described above, during the period when the "specific area launch promotion effect (large)" is displayed on the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82 (the board lamp P550 and the frame lamp P350) performs the guidance light emission notification P839. At this time, the position of the big prize opening P751 is clearly indicated by, for example, always blinking the light-emitting part provided in the big prize device P750.

FIG. 65 shows an example of the effect display in the "reverberation effect" (during the small win game) when the specific reach is executed as a result of the small win. The specific reach is different from the non-specific reach in that the main part of the "reverberation effect" is executed during the small winning game. A specific example of the ready-to-win effect is the character ready-to-win effect, as described above. Since the production flow is substantially the same as (a) and (b), the explanation is omitted.

When the specific reach is executed, the maximum feature when executed when the small hit is notified is that the "reverberation effect" is controlled by the main control board P40 (main control CPU). In FIG. 65, during the execution of the "reverberation effect" to make the player feel the end of the reach (acquisition of a hit) and increase the interest, the small win game is progressed. This shows the display contents to be performed on the In addition to the effect display of the effect display device P80, FIG. 65 shows the frame lamp P350 of the pachinko game machine P so that it can be visually recognized in order to explain the induced light emission notification P839 in the lamp P82.

First, the display contents of the effect display device P80 for the "reverberation effect" in the example of the specific reach effect shown in FIG. 65 will be described.

In the "reverberation effect" of the specific reach, the decoration pattern P801 stopped and displayed in the variable display of the special pattern is shown on the upper left side of the screen of the effect display device P80. In the case of the specific reach, as described above, the decorative pattern P801 is stopped and displayed immediately after the performance accessory P560 retreats after the win-lose split effect, and there is a possibility that the stop display mode of the decorative pattern P801 cannot be fully recognized. Therefore, even during the small winning game, the decorative pattern P801 is continuously displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

On the other hand, "Right shot notification P832" is displayed on the upper right of the display area of the effect display device P80, and a display is performed to clearly indicate to the player that the player should hit right as a game method during the small winning game. there is

In the center area of the display area of the effect display device P80, the heroine character who appeared in the character reach performed as the reach effect is displayed as the effect of the "reverberation effect", and the story, which is the "reverberation effect" related to the character reach effect, is displayed. An effect is displayed (in the example of FIG. 65, an image is displayed in which a female character faces the player and points with her right hand. (I'll give it to you.").

At approximately the center position in the height direction on the right side of the display area of the effect display device P80, a ``specific area launch promotion effect (small) P838'' is displayed superimposed on the story effect that is the ``reverberation effect'', and is specified in the small winning game. It is notified that the vehicle should pass through area P760. In addition, the display of "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" is "V passing effect (small)" (for example, "V") in response to the game ball passing through the specific area P760 in the big winning opening P751. character image). Unlike "V Passing Effect (Large)", "V Passing Effect (Small)" is not displayed in almost full screen, and is displayed in a small size at approximately the same position as "Specific Area Launch Promoting Effect (Small)". and configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the story production.

For example, "V passing effect (small)" is an image that imitates the big winning opening P751 displayed as "Specific area launch promotion effect (small)", the letter "V", and an arrow image pointing diagonally to the lower right. Of the combinations, only the letter "V" may be left and displayed, and further, a rainbow-colored effect image may be superimposed on the letter "V" to emphasize that the "V prize" has been won. . In this way, the ``V passing effect (small)'' is displayed smaller than the ``specific area launch promotion effect (small)'', thereby allowing the game ball to pass through the specific area P760 in the small winning game. Thus, the visibility of the story production is enhanced (the visible display area is expanded), and the interest in the story production can be enhanced.

It should be noted that "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" and "V passing effect (small)" are display objects that are displayed (upper layer) with priority over the story effect of "reverberation effect", It is displayed with low visibility (small area occupied by the display area) so as not to hinder the interest of the "reverberation effect" as much as possible, but the relevance to the effect image is low, and regardless of the progress of the effect Visibility becomes difficult due to system images with high display priority such as displayed error display (for example, part or all of "specific area launch promotion effect (small)" or "V passage effect (small)" is covered) there is a risk of In order to avoid such a problem, not only the display position shown in FIG. It may be configured to display "V passing effect (small)". By configuring in this way, even if the visibility of the story production, etc., is reduced by the system image, the notification of the game method, which is important information for the progress of the game, can be reliably visually recognized. It is possible to prevent risks such as a person losing the right to a big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, a description will be given of an example effect of the light emission effect "induction light emission notification P839" of the effect lamp P82 in the specific reach example effect.

When the "reverberation effect" of the specific reach is being executed, the effect lamp P82 (the board lamp P550 and the frame lamp P350 are based on the light emission effect (the priority is relatively low compared to the "induction light emission notification P839") ), and the player can see that the effect lamp P82 emits gradation light in various colors such as red, green, and blue.

Then, when the "induction light emission notification P839" is executed, a portion of the effect lamp P82 is included in the rainbow color to enhance the distinguishability from the light emission effect of the base, as shown in the dotted line area (P839) in FIG. The area that lights in white, which is a non-color, and lights in white as the guidance light emission notification P839 moves from the left side of the game machine to the right side via the upper side as shown in the arrow direction A in the figure. When the light emission area of the effect lamp P82 corresponding to the guidance light emission notification P839 moves to the right area, lighting display is restarted from the starting point of the left area. In addition, as shown in FIG. 65, the region that emits light as the induced light emission notification P839 is part of the production lamp P82, and is configured so that the lighting location moves so that it becomes a dynamic display mode. For the light-emitting portions of the effect lamps P82 at positions not corresponding to the guidance light-emitting information P839, the light-emitting effect is executed with a light-emitting pattern corresponding to the rainbow-colored light emission or the "reverberation effect" which is the light-emitting effect of the base.

"Induction light emission notification P839" continues until the game ball passes through the specific area P760 in the small winning game, and when the game ball passes through the specific area P760, "Induction light emission information P839" ends and the base light emission effect (Luminous effect corresponding to the story effect of the “reverberation effect”) is configured to be visible. At this time, at the timing of switching to the "V passing effect (small)", "V winning notification light emission" (for example, "induction light emission notification P839" for temporarily notifying that the V prize has been won on the effect lamp P82) is executed. All of the lamps are configured to flash twice in white regardless of the execution timing of "induction light emission notification P839").

It should be noted that the "guidance light emission notification P839" shown in the fifth embodiment is only an example, and any light emission mode that can suggest to the player that the game ball should be shot toward the big winning hole P751 can be used. It may be an aspect. For example, the frame lamp P350 provided on the lower side of the pachinko game machine P is also subject to the execution of the effect, and it may be lit from the left side to the upper side, the right side, and the lower side, and may be lit in a circular manner such that it returns to the left side. There may be multiple locations that are partially lit as the notification P839 (since it may be difficult to understand what is being suggested if multiple locations emit light at the same time, for example, there may be multiple emissions in the right area, which is the end point. may merge and expand in sequence, and may be displayed in such a way that a plurality of lights finally merge into one and disappear). In addition, the lighting pattern as the "induction light emission notification P839" may not be white, which is not included in the rainbow colors, and may be configured to display multiple colors at the same time or to display different colors in order. good too.

[Sixth embodiment]
Next, the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, which is characterized by light emission control of the effect lamp P82, will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 74. FIG.

The pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment performs characteristic light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82. It is applicable to pachinko game machines, and also applicable to other pachinko game machines, slot machines, ball game machines, etc., as long as there are no special factors that hinder their characteristics. .

In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, as a characteristic light emitting effect control, a light emitting section (in the sixth embodiment, a character role light emitting section P692 and a logo light emitting section P690), which is composed of a plurality of light emitting sections. , Details will be described later), depending on which stage has been reached as a result of the step-by-step production, a game result that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit at a pachinko game machine or a slot machine) A step-progressive performance (step-up performance, etc.) is performed to notify or suggest that a specific winning combination such as a bonus combination has been obtained or the possibility of an advantageous game result.

In the sixth embodiment, the main forewarning effect developed in the display area of the effect display device P80 has a low or no relevance to the effect. A lighting effect of a gaming machine that has the effect of increasing the interest of the performance of the gaming machine by executing a performance that notifies or suggests that a player can obtain an advantageous game result or the possibility of obtaining an advantageous game result. Control will be explained.

(Structure of pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment)
First, the structure of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 69. FIG. FIG. 66 is a front view including the game machine frame structure (outer frame P1, front frame P2, glass frame P3) of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, and FIGS. 67 to 69 are front views of the game board P5. It is a figure in which the position of the performance accessory P560 is different in each figure.

《Frame structure》
As shown in FIG. 66, the pachinko gaming machine P of the sixth embodiment has an appearance different from that of the pachinko gaming machine as a premise and the pachinko gaming machines of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment. The parts that are covered are mainly the design surface, and the essential structure related to the game of the pachinko game machine is the same as the pachinko game machine that is the premise and the pachinko game machines of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment, so the appearance A detailed description is omitted except for the above differences.

Regarding the structure of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the major difference between the premise pachinko game machine and the pachinko game machines of the present embodiment to the fifth embodiment is the design of the frame lamp P350 and the effect operation unit P380. is the design and structure of

The structure of the frame lamp P350 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment is such that the design of the frame lamp P350 on the right side as seen from the player protrudes further forward than the frame lamp P350 on the left side. It is configured to protrude toward the The right side frame lamp P350 is configured to be detachable from the glass frame P3, and inside the right side frame lamp P350, an effect sheet corresponding to the model installed as the game board P5 can be included. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect using the effect sheet. Also, although it is a position that cannot be seen in FIG. 66, a frame speaker P370 is arranged inside and above the right frame lamp P350, and forms an upper speaker P371 in pair with the frame speaker P370 on the upper left side of the glass frame P3. It's like Note that the right frame lamp P350 is not only a unit that contains a performance sheet as shown in FIG. is.

The structure of the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 66, a structure in which a effect button P381 is arranged on the top of a design part imitating an alien character. In addition, the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment also has a function as a effect lever P382 in the same way as the pachinko game machine or the like as a premise, and the head of the character imitating an alien can be operated. An input operation can be performed by tilting to the player side (toward the player).

Note that the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment moves to the lock release position when performing an input operation as the effect lever P382, unlike the effect operation unit P380 of the premised pachinko game machine. It is configured so that the tilting operation can be performed by operating a lock mechanism (not shown) provided inside (for example, a lock member driven by a solenoid or the like). .

Also, the effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment has a role as a frame movable accessory P360 configured to be operable not for the purpose of unlocking but for the purpose of effect operation. The effect operation unit P380 of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment can move the head of a character imitating an alien in the front, back, left, and right directions using the position shown in FIG. 66 as a reference point. It is configured to be able to perform a swinging motion, a revolving motion of the head, etc., and it is possible to perform an operation input effect such as a button effect, and a character action effect such as an advance notice effect and a look-ahead effect.

<<Game Board Structure: Game Area>>
Next, the structure of the game board of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, on the game board of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, a center accessory P540 (and effect display device P80) arranged in the center of the game board is sandwiched as a game area P501. It is designed to have a left area P501L on the left side and a right area P501R on the right side. It is configured so that game balls can be separately hit and shot.

When a game ball is launched to the left side game area P501L, winning to the first starting prize winning device P710 (first starting port P711) and the left side general winning device P730L (left side general winning school P731L) is easy, and the right side When the game ball is shot against the area P501R, normal operation gate device P740 (normal figure operation port P741), second start winning device P720 (second start port P721), large winning device P750 (large winning prize port P751), right side The general winning device P730R (the right general winning school P731R) is configured to be able to win a prize. An out port P790 is arranged at the lower position of the game board for the purpose of discharging game balls that do not win any prizes.

《Game board structure: production accessories and other production devices》
In a part of the back of the transparent game board, which is a substantially central area of the game board and which forms the area surrounded by the center accessory P540 and the game area P501, various effects are provided to increase the interest of the game machine effects. equipment is in place.

In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the effect devices arranged in the effect area of the game board P5 are the effect display device P80 that performs effect display, the logo light emitting part P690 that is one of the board lamps P550 that performs light emission effect, the effect It has a performance accessory P560 that performs motion and light-emitting performance, and in particular, the performance accessory P560 is configured to have a character accessory P691, an upper rocking accessory P694, and a lower lifting accessory P695. In addition, although not shown, a light guide plate having a light emitting effect portion is arranged in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 at the opening of the center accessory P540.

As shown in FIG. 67, as a normal waiting position (initial position), the "character role P691" is in a state in which there are six waiting positions in the display area of the effect display device P80. The character role light emitting part P692 can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center role P540 and the transparent game board P5. The character role P691 is arranged clockwise from the upper part of the display area of the effect display device P80, character role P691a, character role P691b, character role P691c, character role P691d, character role P691e, The character role P691f is arranged to hide a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 from the front view, while not hindering the visibility of the display of the effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 as much as possible. is configured to

The character role P691 is provided with a character role light-emitting portion P692, so that the light emitting effect can be executed. In the character role light emitting part P692, effect sheets on which different character designs are printed are arranged for each of the six character role things P691, respectively, and are configured to be able to execute light emitting effects. P692 is configured to be capable of swinging/rotating as shown in the direction of arrow A in FIG.

In addition, the character role light emitting part P692 arranges a light guide plate, which is a light emitting part for emphasizing the character pattern, on the back of the sheet on which the character pattern is printed. In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, a printing sheet on which six character patterns) are printed is arranged, and by causing an LED different from the LED that is the light source for the light guide plate to emit light, the character patterns are not printed. The pattern (character pattern) of the effect sheet on the back of the light guide plate is made visible (see FIG. 69). More specifically, while the printing method of the effect sheet of the character pattern is printing by the inkjet method with rough particles (low density), the effect sheet on the back of the light guide plate is silk printing with fine particles (high density). Since the symbols are printed by the method of (1), the patterns that can be visually recognized by the player are switched by switching the lit LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 68, the effect action of the character role P691 is such that the six character roles P691 move closer to the center of the display area of the effect display device P80, and the hexagonal character role light emitting portion P692 (For example, the movement of the character P691 on the left side is in the B direction in FIG. 68) can be executed, and the character The light-emitting portion P692 is capable of swinging/rotating as indicated by arrow A in FIG. 68 (rotating can be performed even at the initial position).

In addition, the character role P691 is provided with a mirror part P693 that moves following the forward/backward movement of the character role thing P691. P693 is also configured to form a hexagonal shape along the outer periphery of the character role light emitting portion P692. , The character design of the character object light-emitting part P692 is reflected in the mirror part P693, and the mirror image of the actual character role light-emitting part P692 and the mirror part P693 makes it possible to perform a kaleidoscope-like light emission effect. .

"Upper Swing Accessory P694" has a hexagonal main design (light emitting part ) is moved, and an effect is produced in cooperation with the character accessory P691. The upper swing accessory P694 is normally in a standby position in a state where it is difficult to see above the display area of the effect display device P80. It is configured to perform a swinging motion around the upper right rotation axis of the display area of P80.

In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the upper rocking accessory P694 is configured to operate only in the case of an effect in cooperation with the character accessory P691. The cooperation effect with P691 is, for example, a win-lose branch effect or resurrection effect that notifies the final result of the ready-to-win effect, and the effect to notify that the final result of the ready-to-win effect will be an advantageous result for the player (win It is designed to be executed as a decided effect, which is an effect to notify that the action has been performed.

The "lower elevation accessory P695" is a rod-shaped production accessory linearly straddling the width direction of the display area of the production display device P80, as shown in FIG. The standby position is retracted to a position that is difficult to see at the bottom of the display area of the effect display device P80, and is configured to perform an up-and-down motion during the effect operation. The highest position in the ascending/descending action is configured so that it rises to a position overlapping with the character accessory P691A arranged in the upper part of the display area of the effect display device P80. The effect can be executed in cooperation with the effect display device P80 and the effect devices such as a light guide plate (not shown) arranged in front of the opening of the character accessory P691 and the center accessory P540.

FIG. 69 shows an example of an effect using the lower ascending/descending accessory P695 (coordinated effect with the character accessory P691). FIG. 69 shows a diagram in which the lower ascending/descending accessory P695 rises to approximately the center height of the display area of the effect display device P80. At this time, the height of the lower ascending/descending role object P695 is in a state of being moved to a higher position than the three character role objects P691c to P691e among the character role objects P691. The character role light-emitting part P692 of P691 emits the character role of the character role P691c to the character role P691e that are positioned in a lower relative positional relationship than the lower elevation role P695 in accordance with the action of the lower elevation role P695. The object light emitting part P692c to the character role light emitting part P692e are configured so that the display mode is switched from the character design effect sheet display to the character design effect sheet display.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the display mode of the character role light emitting part P692 is changed, three characters of "mysterious", "favorable (not shown)", and "machine" are displayed as character patterns. It is a display mode that suggests that something is about to happen (for example, a ready-to-win effect is likely to be executed) or that it is a chance (high expectation of winning) as the effect development of the variable display this time. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 69 shows a state in which the action of the lower elevator role P695 has been performed twice (up to the second stage). It is positioned above the object P691d, and only the character role P691d is switched to the character pattern display.

In addition, the cooperation effect of the lower elevation role P695 and the character role P691 is up to the third stage (the stage following the stage shown in FIG. 69), and in the third stage, the lower elevation role P695 overlaps the character role P691a. While moving to the position, the three characters "high", "period", and "wait" are displayed on the light emitting parts of the character roles P691a, b, and f Aspects that are suggested to develop) are displayed.

(Ramp step-up production using character role P691)
Next, the "lamp step-up effect", which is the characteristic light emitting effect control using the effect lamp P82 performed in the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 75. FIG.

In the sixth embodiment, the "ramp step-up effect" will be explained using an example in which the back button effect is executed during the high expectation ready-to-win effect (SP ready-to-win effect) in which the expectation of a big hit is high. Here, the "back button effect" means that when the effect operation unit P380 is operated without displaying the button image P881 or the lever image P882 for prompting the player to operate the effect operation unit P380. , the effect of switching the display content of the effect display device P80, the lighting mode of the effect lamp P82, the content of the sound effect output from the speaker P83, etc., and is also called a "hidden button" effect.

In addition, regarding the effect control of the "ramp step-up effect" described in the sixth embodiment, not only the back button effect during reach, but also other button effects such as advance notice effect (operation input effect) and effect during big hit (for example, It may be configured to be practicable in a promotion effect, a holding consecutive effect, etc.). In addition, instead of operating the effect operation unit P380, the main control is sensor detection information related to the progress of the game, such as winning the start winning device (first start winning device P710, second start winning device P720) and the big winning device P750. A configuration may be adopted in which the process proceeds upon receipt of a command from the substrate P40. Furthermore, not only pachinko machines, but also other games such as light emitting effects used for the expectation of winning a specific role (bonus role) in slot machines, and chance zone effects that suggest AT winning etc. across multiple games It is also possible to change the design as appropriate for the performance of the machine as long as it does not deviate from its essence.

《Overview of Ramp Step-up Production》
First, an overview (rough outline of the progression of the effect) will be given for the "ramp step-up effect" of the sixth embodiment.

The "ramp step-up effect" of the sixth embodiment is a logo that is a light emitting effect part in the effect area (the opening of the center accessory P540 and the back area of the transparent game area P501) of the game board P5 of the pachinko game machine P. This is a light emitting effect that is executed using two main effect areas, namely, the light emitting part P690 and the character role light emitting part P692.

In addition, in the light emitting units other than the logo light emitting unit P690 and the character role light emitting unit P692 (for example, the frame lamp P350, and the light emitting units provided in various winning devices such as the start gate device and the big winning device), the related light emitting effect is executed. Alternatively, as a modification, instead of the character role light emitting part P692, a plurality of characters are printed on the effect sheet of the right frame lamp P350. The areas may be sequentially lit, or may be executed by linking the board effect lamp P550 (character role light emitting part P692, etc.) and the right side frame lamp P350 of the game board. .

The character role light emitting part P692 is provided with six light emitting areas (character role light emitting part P692a to character role light emitting part P692f) on which different patterns (character patterns, character patterns) are printed. In the "ramp step-up effect", the character role light-emitting part P692 performs an operation on the effect operation unit P380 of the player, and according to the operation situation (for example, the number of operations of the effect button P381), a predetermined pattern is performed. It is configured so that it lights up one by one (in a special pattern, a plurality of lights are lit together), or the color of emitted light changes.

In the "ramp step-up effect", the character role light emitting part P692 lights up or changes in color in order, for example, the character role light emitting part P692a, the character role light emitting part P692b, and the character role light emitting part P692c. When all the six light emitting units are lit or emit light of the same color, the lighting mode with a higher degree of expectation (increase in brightness or high degree of expectation) is performed again in a predetermined order (for example, clockwise from the character role light emitting unit P692a). It is configured to change to ).

In the sixth embodiment, as a basic lighting pattern, it is configured such that lighting or emission color changes clockwise from the character role light emitting part P692a, and when the six light emitting parts light up, one cycle of light emitting effect is completed. It is about to move to the next stage. The light emitting mode of the character role light emitting part P692 is such that the light emitting color is sequentially changed for each cycle of the light emitting effect: “light off (initial light emitting mode)”, “blue”, “yellow”, “green”, “red”, “gold (dark)”. By changing to a light emission that interweaves yellow and white, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high. In addition, the production cycle (stage) that can be finally reached is determined by lottery. However, even if it changes to "red" after that, all the six character role light emitting parts P692 cannot change to "red", and the production cycle cannot be completed, and "green" is emitted as the final stage. (described later with reference to FIG. 72).

As described above, the "ramp step-up effect" is configured to progress by the player's operation of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381). Minutes (up to 5 cycles or more including the premium pattern) operation is required, but since the production period is limited to SP reach (about 15 seconds), one character role light emitting part P692 emits light The change timing is determined so that the change in mode is switched after one to three operations of the production operation unit P380 (for the character role light emitting part P692f, the important timing for whether or not the production cycle is completed is determined). Therefore, the number of operations of the effect button P381 required for switching the lighting mode may be set to be larger than that of the other character role light emitting units P692 (for example, 5 times).

The logo light-emitting part P690 indicates a situation in which one cycle of the light emission of the character role light-emitting part P692 is completed, that is, each time the six character role light-emitting parts P692 are lit in the same light emission mode, one cycle of the light emitting effect is completed. As shown, it emits light in a light emission mode according to the completed production cycle. For example, the process (6 In a situation where one character role light emitting part P692 is not "yellow", the "blue" is maintained. In other words, the logo light-emitting portion P690 is a light-emitting portion that suggests the "final stage" when the "ramp step-up effect" ends in the current state of progress in the effect process. In the sixth embodiment, the "final stage" refers not only to the final stage of the "ramp step-up effect" determined in the effect lottery, but also to the "ramp step-up effect" when the player terminates the button operation in the middle. ” is no longer progressing.

In FIG. 70, the player operates the production button P381 under the condition that the SP ready-to-win production, which is the high-expectation ready-to-win production, is in progress, and the "ramp step-up production" as the back button production progresses at the same time. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a situation on the way to FIG. 70 shows a situation in which the light emitting modes are different between the character role light emitting portion P692a to the character role light emitting portion P692c after the change and the character role light emitting portion P692d to the character role light emitting portion P692f before the change. ing. Also, the logo light-emitting portion P690 shows a situation in which it emits light in the same color as the character role light-emitting portion P692d and the like before change.

(Specific production example of ramp step-up production)
Subsequently, using FIGS. 71 to 73, when the ramp step-up effect is executed (and not executed) under the situation where the high expectation reach during SP reach is executed as a variable effect will be described.

In FIGS. 71 and 73, "(a) effect period" indicates the progress of the effect content as the variable effect, and "(b) effect content example" indicates the effect content to be executed during the corresponding effect period. Among them, some of the characteristic productions are excerpted and described, and "(c) Lamp production_feature_*no back button" is the lighting of the production lamp P82 when the "ramp step-up production" is not executed. Shows an example of effect in effect control, and "(d) Lamp effect_feature_*with back button" shows an example of effect in light emission effect control of the effect lamp P82 when "Lamp step-up effect" is executed. . In addition, "(a) production period" in FIG. 72 indicates the progress of the variable production in the same manner as in FIG. A situation in which the operation of P381 is effective is shown in black (note that in this example, the explanation will be given under the condition that the operation is continuously performed during the effective period of the operation). (c) to (i) in FIG. 72 show specific examples of changes in the lighting modes of the character role light emitting portion P692a to the character role light emitting portion P692f and the logo light emitting portion P690.

《Production example 1_ramp step-up production (intermediate stage: at the end of the final result “green”, deviation fluctuation)》
FIG. 71 is a time chart diagram showing an example of an effect when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed in the variable effect executed when the result of the special symbol lottery is "loss". be. In the example of FIG. 71, since the result is "failure", even as the "ramp step-up effect", "green" with a low degree of expectation is decided by lottery as the final stage. there is

First, an example of the effect in the effect period “SP reach first half” will be described.

In the sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the SP reach is described as the first half of the heroine reach, and is a reach effect that progresses in a story production in which the main character and the heroine appear and develop. . As the content of the ready-to-win production, in addition to the story production that progresses in the background, "ready-to-win title display (preliminary notice)" and "incitement of character actor action" are executed. "Reach title display (advance notice)" will display the title, which is the theme of the reach production, in normal colors, a chance mode based on red, or a big chance mode based on the manufacturer's pattern. It is a notice that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by such as. "Character role action instigation" is a production that suggests whether or not to shift to the second half of the SP reach production period (the second half of the SP reach described later), and if successful (the character role P691 is the upper swing role 68 without accompanying the action of the object P694), it is notified that the effect will proceed sequentially in the "SP reach latter half development" and "SP reach latter half" shown in FIG. In the case of failure (when the character accessory P691 only rattles and stops), it is an effect in which the fact that it is "lost" is notified during the effect period of "SP reach first half".

"Ramp step-up effect" is a back button effect that is set during the period when heroine reach is being executed in "SP reach first half", and after the start of heroine reach (end of display of "reach title display (notice)" After) from the predetermined timing to the timing immediately before the execution of the "character role item action", the operation effective period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) continues. It should be noted that when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed, the light emission effect in the character role light emitting unit P692 (light emission effect control in the "final stage" light emission mode) will It continues until a predetermined timing (for example, until the occurrence of "win-lose branch cut-in") in the production period "SP reach first half". It is configured to end in line with the execution of the performance of the character role action (note that during the "character role action instigation", the character role light emitting unit P692 lights up the lighting mode of the "character role action instigation" effect. Since it has priority, even if the light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" is finished, it is not detected that the "SP reach first half" will be missed).

FIG. 71(c) shows the production lamp P82 in the production period of the "SP reach first half" when the "ramp step-up production" is not executed (especially the character role light-emitting part that is the target of the "ramp step-up production"). (P692, logo light emitting unit P690) shows the control contents of light emission effect control. If the "ramp step-up production" is not executed, as shown in FIG. Normal light-emitting effect linked to each notice such as "movement fan" (light-emitting effect linked to image display such as notice effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, look-ahead effect, reach effect, big hit effect, and so on. The light emission effect control of the "normal light emission mode") is performed.

FIG. 71(d) shows an effect lamp P82 (particularly, the character role light-emitting part, which is the target of the "ramp step-up effect", in the effect period of the "SP reach first half" when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed. (P692, logo light emitting unit P690) shows the control contents of light emission effect control. When the "ramp step-up effect" is to be executed, that is, after the start of the heroine reach (after the display of the "reach title display (advance notice)" is finished), the player performs the effect operation for executing the "ramp step-up effect". When the unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated, the character role light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 change from the normal light emitting mode to the light emitting mode corresponding to the "ramp step-up effect". Note that specific changes in the light emitting modes of the character role light emitting section P692 and the logo light emitting section P690 in the "ramp step-up effect" will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the presentation period of "SP reach latter half development" will be explained.

During the production period of "development of the second half of the SP reach", the production of "inciting the action of the character role" is successful in the "first half of the SP reach", the action of the character role P691 is executed, and the character role P691 is displayed on the production display device P80. Shows an effect display period during which an effect image matching the action of the character P691 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 while advancing to the front area of the area and performing the effect action. there is

In the example of FIG. 71, since it is a variation effect that is executed with a loss variation, the action effect of the character role object P691 related to the late development of the SP reach (the character role light emitting part P692, etc., which is the target of the “ramp step-up effect”) The light emission mode of the production lamp P82 including the production lamp P82 shows a situation in which a weak pattern production with a low expectation of a big hit is executed. When the motion effect of the character role P691 in the latter half of the SP reach is executed in a weak pattern, the character role light emitting part P692 or the like is configured to execute the light emission effect in a purple-based color. At this time, the light emission effect control relating to the action effect of the character role P691 is configured to be lighting controlled (in a higher light emission control layer) prior to the light emission effect control of the "lamp step-up effect". That is, the light emission mode of the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" is the control of other light emission effects from the start time of the "character role object movement" in the "first half of the reach" to the start time of the "second half of the SP reach". is prioritized, the effect continues, but is controlled so that it is not visually recognized by the player (the effect is discontinued and interrupted by the player), and the “second half of the SP reach” starts. It is configured so as to return to the "ramp step-up effect" effect suggesting the degree of expectation later.

Next, the contents of the production during the production period of the "SP reach latter half" will be explained.

In the production period of the "SP reach latter half", the latter half production of the heroine reach, for example, the continuation of the story production of the hero character and the heroine character developed in the first half of the heroine reach is developed as the background production. In the pachinko machine P of the sixth embodiment, in the "SP reach latter half", the notice effect during the compound reach "Reach title display (advance notice)"), "Cut-in before win-lose branch" is executed. ``Cut-in before win-lose branch effect'' indicates whether or not the end of reach-lost branch effect is advantageous to the player before the ``win-lose branch effect'' for notifying whether the result of the reach-or-lose branch effect is advantageous to the player. It is an expectation announcement production that suggests the possibility. In the ``cut-in before the winning/losing branch'', the effect of displaying the cut-in image superimposed on the background display in which the heroine reach story is developed is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, the effect lamp P82, the speaker Using P83, the corresponding lighting effect and sound effect are executed. In the sixth embodiment, only the "cut-in before winning/losing branch cut-in" was exemplified as the forewarning effect during the reach during the effect period of the "last half of the SP reach", but there may be a case where the forewarning during the reach is executed.

When the "ramp step-up effect" is not executed, as shown in FIG. 71(c), in the effect ramp P82, during the effect period of the "SP reach latter half", the heroine reach story effect and the "before winning branch It is configured to perform light emission effect control (normal light emission mode) corresponding to the "cut-in" effect.

On the other hand, when the effect period of the "SP ready-to-reach latter half" comes after the "ramp step-up effect" is executed, the character role light-emitting part P692 and the logo light-emitting part P690 are used during the "SP ready-to-reach latter half" effect period. , the light emission control for the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up production" continues (resumes), and the "ramp step-up production" is controlled until the "cut-in before the hit branch" production occurs. Suggestion of a jackpot expectation degree is performed. The reason why the effect of the “ramp step-up effect” continues until the effect period of the “second half of the SP reach” is that during the “first half of the SP reach” effect period, the “ The display of the ``final stage'' of the ``ramp step-up effect'' is emitted during the remaining period of the operation effective period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) or the remaining period until the ``inciting the action of the character role''. This is because there is a risk that the mode will not be fully recognized and the process will end.

When the "ramp step-up production" is executed and the "cut-in before the winning branch cut-in" production is executed in the production period of the "SP reach latter half", the production corresponding to the "cut-in before the winning branch" Since the light emission performance control is performed with priority over the light emission control of the 'final stage' of the 'ramp step-up performance', the player does not recognize the light emission of the 'final stage' of the 'ramp step-up performance'. For example, in the effect of "cut-in before winning branch", a green frame and a "green cut-in" of the cut-in image as a background image are displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, and a green-based effect lamp P82 emits light. When the performance is performed, a situation in which the light emission performance control of the 'ramp step-up performance' is not visually recognized continues because control such as continuation of the light emission performance based on green is performed until the timing of the win-lose branch performance. In other words, the light emitting effect control of the "cut-in before the win-lose branch" is executed even if the cut-in image is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. ), and it is configured to display the expectation of the winning branch effect longer than the display period of the cut-in image, so it is practically the “final stage” of the “ramp step-up effect” The light emitting effect control is configured so that the player cannot recognize it (finished state) at the start of the execution of the "cut-in before the win-lose branch" effect.

Finally, a specific example of the effect contents in the effect period of "notice of failure" will be described.

The example of FIG. 71 shows a situation in which the SP reach is executed in the losing variation, so the result of losing is notified as the win-lose branch effect during the effect period of "the second half of the SP reach". there is

When the result of losing is reported as a win-lose branch effect, it shifts to the effect period of "notice of losing", and reports that the story of Heroine Reach did not end in a manner that suggests a favorable result for the player. A story presentation is displayed.

In the effect period of the "notice of failure", the "lamp step-up effect" has already ended, and as shown in FIGS. Light-emitting effect control (normal light-emitting mode) for ready-to-win effect is executed.

Subsequently, the change in the light emission mode of the character object light emitting portion P692 and the logo light emitting portion P690 when the "ramp step-up effect" is executed in the effect period of the "SP reach first half" will be described with reference to FIG. conduct. The example of FIG. 72 is similar to the situation shown in FIG. 71, and the character role light emitting portion P692 and the logo light emitting portion P690 are set to "green" as the "final stage" light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" effect mode. ” is exemplified.

FIGS. 72(a) and (b) show the relationship between the progress of the effect during the "SP ready-to-play first half" effect period and the effective period of the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381). As described with reference to FIG. 71, the "ramp step-up effect" is performed after the execution of the "reach title display (advance notice)" of the heroine reach, which is the "first half of the SP reach". The effective period of the unit P380 (effect button P381) is started. Then, the effective period of the production operation unit P380 (production button P381) continues during the period up to the start time of the "character role item action stimulation" in the "SP reach first half", and the expiration of the period or the "ramp step-up production" , the progress of the "ramp step-up effect" is stopped, and the lighting state is switched to the "final stage".

FIGS. 72(c) to (i) show changes in the lighting modes of the character role light emitting portion P692 and the logo light emitting portion P690.

First, when heroine reach, which is SP reach, starts, until the start time of "ramp step-up effect", light emission control (normal state light mode) according to heroine reach story direction and "reach title display (advance notice)". is executed. This situation is described as "normal" in FIG. 72, and indicates a situation in which light is emitted in the normal light emission mode, which is a light emission mode linked with the advance notice effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

Next, when the effect period of the "ramp step-up effect" starts, the effective period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) (indicated by the black-painted period in FIG. 72) starts, and the "ramp step-up effect" starts. is started. In the example of FIG. 72, it is assumed that the player is continuously operating the effect button P381 during the effective period of the effect operation unit P380.

When the effect period of the "ramp step-up effect" is started and the player operates the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), the light emitting modes of the character role light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 are all extinguished. The state is switched to the state (the initial light emission mode of the "lamp step-up effect", which is described as "turn off" and "turn off" in the drawing), and the effect of the "lamp step-up effect" is started. In addition, the initial light emission mode in the "ramp step-up effect" is not limited to turning off, but it is a normal state linked to the main effect (SP reach effect) and the notice effect displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, such as emitting white light. It may be a mode different from the light emission mode as long as it is distinguishable.

When the "ramp step-up effect" is started and the lighting mode of all the target effect lamps P82 for the "ramp step-up effect" of the character object light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 becomes the initial light emitting mode (extinguishing), the following When the player operates the production operation unit P380 (production button P381) at the beginning, the light emission mode of the character role light emitting part P692 is switched to the first stage "blue" in a predetermined order. ing. In the example shown in FIG. 72, the color changes to "blue" one by one from the character role light emitting portion P692a clockwise to the character role light emitting portion P692f.

In addition, in the "ramp step-up effect", there is a period indicated as "point" immediately before the light emission mode of the character role light emission part P692 is switched. It indicates that the target lamp to be switched to the next light emission mode is indicated by "blinking". For example, in the case of changing from "blue" to "yellow", each time the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated, the light emission mode of the character role light emitting part P692 that changes next momentarily changes to "yellow". It shows the state of switching to the light emitting mode and returning to "blue" again. Then, when the number of operations of the production operation unit P380 (production button P381) satisfies the number of operations (about 1 to 3 times), which is the condition for switching the lighting mode, the lighting mode of the character role light emitting part P692 is changed to the following. It is configured to switch between stages. Note that if the number of operations for switching is one, the process proceeds directly to the next stage without going through the "point". In addition, in this example, the mode of "blinking" is a momentary light emission in the next stage emission color, but it may be "off", "white", etc. It is clear and easy to understand, and it is easy to create a chance pattern that changes from "blue" to "green" by breaking the order of "blue", "yellow", "green", etc.).

By the "ramp step-up effect", the timing at which the light emission modes of the six light emitting parts from the character role light emitting part P692a to the character role light emitting part P692f are the same (in the example of FIG. 72, the light emission mode of the character role light emitting part P692f changes to the next step), the logo light emitting portion P690 is also configured to switch the light emitting mode at the same time. The logo light-emitting part P690 is a production lamp that suggests which form will be the final form when the "ramp step-up production" ends at that timing, and the sixth character role light-emitting part P692 blinks. Even in the situation where the

The logo light emitting unit P690 may be configured to perform blinking in the same way as the sixth character role light emitting unit P692. When P692 blinks, there is a possibility that it will momentarily go to the next stage. Therefore, when proceeding to the next stage, the speaker P83, etc., emits a notification sound or the like to notify the completion of one cycle of the production. (Information sound may be output even when the logo light emitting unit P690 is not linked with the sixth character role light emitting unit P692).

In the example of FIG. 72, when the stage of production progresses to "green" (when the light emission mode of all the character role light emitting parts P692 and logo light emitting parts P690 becomes "green"), the subsequent player's production In the operation of the operation unit P380 (production button P381), in the example of FIG. It is configured to change to "red", which is the next stage of "green", and execute an effect to stir up whether or not the degree of expectation will further increase. In this case, the sixth character role light-emitting part P692 and the logo light-emitting part P690 do not change to "red" no matter how many times the operation of the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381) is executed, and the light flashes. It is configured to repeat the change of the light emission mode, which turns "red" for a moment and then returns to "green".

After that, when the operation effective period of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381), which is the effect execution period of the "ramp step-up effect", expires, all the character role light emitting parts P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 are turned on. It is configured to emit light in "green" which is the "final stage".

In addition, if the player stops the operation during the "ramp step-up effect" effect, for example, if the player stops the operation in the middle of the cycle of changing from "yellow" to "green", the "final stage" will be decided in the effect lottery. Even if is "green", "yellow" is displayed as "final stage".

In addition, since it is configured so that it does not change beyond the "final stage" determined by the production lottery, the character role light emitting part P692f is repeatedly blinking at the production cycle of, for example, "red" in FIG. There is a case where the player perceives that the situation does not change and stops the operation of the effect button P381. In such a case, without waiting until the expiration of the operation effective period of the effect operation unit P380, which is the effect execution period of the "ramp step-up effect", the operation can be performed in about 2 to 3 seconds after the operation is stopped. It may be configured to switch to the display mode of the "final stage" in timing.

After the end of the "ramp step-up production", when it comes to the production period of the "character role object action stimulation", the "ramp step The light emission mode at the final stage of the effect of "up effect" is switched to a mode in which priority is given to the light emission mode interlocked with the effect of "encouragement of character role item action". It should be noted that even during this period, the lighting effect control in the "final stage" of the effect of the "ramp step-up effect" is continued, although the player cannot visually recognize it. At the same time as indicating that the control "green" is being executed, " green (normal)”.

《Production example 2_Ramp step-up production (final stage: at the end of the final result “Fri”, hit change)》
Next, a second effect example in which the "ramp step-up effect" is executed in the effect period of the "SP reach first half" will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 shows an example of a case where the SP reach, which is a highly expected reach, is executed with hit variation, and shows an example of the effect when the "ramp step-up effect" becomes the final stage "gold" with the highest degree of expectation. ing. In addition, in the following description of example 2 of presentation, since there are many parts that overlap with example 1 of presentation, differences will be mainly described.

First, the contents of the effect executed in the effect period of "SP reach first half" will be explained.

In the case of hit variation in example 2 of presentation, the structure of the contents of the presentation executed in the presentation period of "SP ready-to-win first half" is almost the same, and the execution pattern is different in the case of the losing variation shown in FIG. is shown. That is, the example of FIG. 73 shows a situation in which various effects are executed in the execution pattern of the advance notice effect in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is relatively higher than that in the case of FIG.

In the example of FIG. 73, when the heroine reach is started and the "title display (notice)" effect is executed, the title displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 changes to "red" by the "title display (notice)". It is displayed in a chance pattern in which the title is displayed in the base color. The display of the chance pattern is configured such that after the normal pattern is displayed once, it is switched to the chance pattern. It is configured to emphasize that the "title display (notice)" has been switched to the chance mode by emitting light in a color based on "red".

In addition, in the example of FIG. 73, the "ramp step-up effect" is executed and progresses until the light emission mode of the character role light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 becomes "gold", but the effect example shown in FIG. The main difference from 1 is only the display mode of the "final stage" (the degree of progress of the production), and a detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, when the “ramp step-up production” progresses to “red” or “gold” (and its higher premiere), which is the highly anticipated “final stage” mode, “green” or “yellow” Rather than setting it to the "final stage," it is configured so that it is easier to adopt a lighting mode switching method that suggests that there is a high possibility of reaching the upper "final stage" in the progress process of the "ramp step-up effect." may For example, in the example of the basic light emitting mode switching method shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, six character role light emitting portions P692 are configured to light clockwise from the character role light emitting portion P692a. In the chance mode, switching of the light emission mode is started from lamps other than the character role light emitting part P692a, switching of the light emission mode is performed in order counterclockwise, switching of the light emission mode is performed in random order, or multiple The character role light emitting part P692 may be configured to execute a switching method of the light emitting mode, such as switching the light emitting mode at once. By making irregular changes such as changing to "red", it tends to reach the "final stage" of high expectations more easily than the basic lighting mode switching method shown in FIGS. 71 and 72. An example of making it possible to determine the execution pattern of "ramp step-up effect" is given.

Subsequently, a description will be given of an example of the performance period of the "development of the latter half of the SP reach" in the case of the hit variation.

As the effect during the effect period of "SP reach latter half development" shown in FIG. 73, similar to the case of FIG. An implementation is shown in FIG.

As an effect execution pattern (strong pattern) with a high degree of expectation for the effect action of the character role P691 used in the second half of the SP reach development, the lighting mode of the effect lamp P82 during the effect action of the character role P691 is based on "red". It shows an example in which an effect that emits light in the selected color is executed (when the pattern is weak, it emits light in "purple"). In addition, in the pachinko machine P of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the weak pattern shown in FIG. 71 and the strong pattern shown in FIG. After the light emission is performed, the effect lamp P82 arranged at the bottom of the game board is sequentially switched to red. The degree of expectation for a big hit of each pattern is configured such that the degree of expectation increases in the order of "weak pattern"<"strong pattern"<"promotion pattern". When the "promoting pattern" is executed, the performance action period of the character role P691 is set longer than in the case of the "weak pattern" or "strong pattern", and the player feels that the degree of expectation is increasing. configured to allow

Next, an example of the effect in the effect period of "the second half of the SP reach" in the case of hit variation will be described.

Regarding the latter half of the heroine reach in the hit variation of the production example 2, the difference from the production example 1 is whether or not "telop chance up" is executed.

The "telop chance up" effect executed in the effect example 2 is the timing of the beginning after the second half of the heroine reach has started, and the telop display corresponding to the lines of the reach effect is displayed in a normal display mode (for example, white text color). , to the display mode of the chance mode (for example, red character color). Then, in the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the performance action of the character role P691 (for example, the character role P691d placed near the telop rises in time with the timing when the telop display changes to the chance mode. At this time, the effect lamp P82 is configured to emit light in a light emission mode based on a light emission color ("red") corresponding to the chance mode of the telop display.

In the "telop chance up" production, when the production lamp P82 (especially the character role light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690) executes the light emission production corresponding to the "telop chance up", the light emission production of the "lamp step up production" control is prioritized. The light emitting effect corresponding to the “telop chance up” effect is limited to the character role P691d that performs the effect action and the effect lamp P82 in the vicinity thereof. You may control so that the light emission mode of a "final stage" becomes visible.

Finally, an example of an effect during the effect period of "hit notification" will be described.

When the result of winning is reported in the hit-loss branch effect executed during the effect period of "SP reach second half", the process shifts to the effect period of "hit report", and the story of heroine reach gives a favorable result to the player. A story presentation is displayed to notify that the suggesting mode has come to an end.

In the production period of "hit notification", the "lamp step-up production" has already ended, and as shown in FIGS. A rainbow light emission effect (hit notification light emission effect) is executed as the light emission effect control (normal light emission mode) for the reach effect effect.

In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment configured as described above, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a highly interesting light-emitting effect using the effect lamp P82 by executing the "ramp step-up effect". becomes. In particular, by using a plurality of light emitting units to change the light emitting mode so that the degree of expectation increases step by step, the situation where the degree of expectation is increasing according to the changing state of the light emitting state of the plurality of light emitting units can be realized. The player can feel it in accordance with the progress of the "ramp step-up effect", and it is possible to induce the player's sense of anticipation to increase in accordance with the switching of the light emission mode of the light emitting unit.

Further, in the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the execution of the "ramp step-up effect" is executed using the character role P691, which is the effect role P560, and the light-emitting portion with a high degree of attention Since the execution of the "ramp step-up effect" progresses in , it is possible to easily raise interest in whether or not the character role P691 is moving after that, and the character role P691 at the timing of the latter half of the SP reach development. It is easy to pay attention to the production action of the character role P691 at the timing of the production action and the winning branch production, and it is easy to increase interest in the production of important timing such as the development of reach with high expectations and the notification of the hit. there is

Then, in the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, when executing the “ramp step-up effect”, two light emitting parts (character role light emitting part P692 and logo light emitting part P692 and logo light emitting part P690), by combining a light-emitting portion that suggests the presence or absence of development to the next stage (character role light-emitting portion P692) and a light-emitting portion that suggests the final stage (logo light-emitting portion P690), Then, the light emission of the light emitting part (logo light emitting part P690) that suggests the final stage suggests the degree of expectation that will lead to an advantageous result in the production. The character role light-emitting part P692) makes it possible to execute a highly entertaining production that makes the player expect a change to a higher degree of expectation.

In addition, the light emission effect control in the “final stage” after execution of the “ramp step-up effect” continues even after the execution period of the “ramp step-up effect” (effective period of operation of the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381)) expires. It continues for a while, and until a predetermined timing in the progress of the subsequent production, the light emission production control for suggesting the possibility of obtaining an advantageous result for the player based on the "ramp step-up production" continues. Players can be made aware of the possibility of obtaining sufficiently advantageous results for the players.

Next, some examples of applicable modifications of the "ramp step-up effect" of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment will be exemplified.

<Modification 1>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, as the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect", the mode with the highest degree of expectation was described as "gold", but the SP reach is executed with hit variation. In this case, the premium pattern may be configured to have a "rainbow color" as a premier pattern for deterministically informing that the player has won.

As a premier pattern, when the “final stage” is set to “rainbow color” when the “ramp step-up effect” effect is executed, the character role light emitting part P692 and Until the logo light emitting part P690 becomes "gold", the same production progresses as when the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up production" is "gold". The aspect of the light emission effect control regarding the progress of the "ramp step-up effect" is a special control.

More specifically, when the "ramp step-up effect" with "rainbow color" as the "final stage" is executed as a premier pattern, the character object light emitting part P692 and the logo light emitting part P690 become "gold". After that, even if the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381) is pressed, it is configured so that no change occurs in appearance, and whether the player is inciting whether or not the change to "rainbow color" will occur. The production progresses in an unknown situation. Then, after the character role light-emitting portion P692 and the logo light-emitting portion P690 have become "gold", when the effect operation unit P380 (effect button P381) is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times), the character All light emitting parts of character object light emitting part P692 and logo light emitting part P690 are configured to suddenly switch to "rainbow color" light emission.

In this way, after reaching the final stage of "gold", which is set with the highest expectations as the execution mode of the normal "ramp step-up effect" that can be selected even in the loss variation, to the premium pattern that can be selected only in the hit variation By making it possible to change the "Lamp It is possible to enhance the interest of "step-up production".

<Modification 2>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, it has been explained that a light emitting effect device using a light guide plate (not shown) is arranged in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 at the opening of the center accessory P540. When executing the “ramp step-up effect”, it may be possible to combine and execute the light effect using the light emitting portion of the light guide plate.

More specifically, when the “ramp step-up effect” is executed, the light guide plate is turned on at the timing when the effect period is completed and the timing at which the light emitting mode of the logo light emitting portion P690 switches (excluding the timing at which the light emitting mode switches to the initial light emitting mode). The light-emitting portion may be configured to temporarily emit light in the same color as the logo light-emitting portion P690.

In addition, when the light-emitting portions of the light guide plate are interlocked, the light-emitting mode, such as "red", "gold", or "rainbow color", which is highly expected to result in an advantageous outcome of the ready-to-win effect for the player. When the light emitting part of the light guide plate is combined with the "ramp step-up effect" and executed by limiting only the changing timing, the number of light emitting parts emitting light corresponding to the back button effect increases, which is advantageous for the player. It may also be configured to make the player recognize that the degree of expectation for a successful result is higher.

Also, as a similar modification, if the "ramp step-up effect" is "gold", in order to suggest that it will develop into a reach effect that is not related to the story in the first half of the heroine reach and has a higher degree of expectation, Only in the case where the light emission mode is "gold", an implementation method is also conceivable in which the light emission portion of the light guide plate is linked to the "ramp step-up effect".

<Modification 3>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the six light emitting parts of the character role light emitting part P692 are sequentially switched one by one (or a plurality of pieces) as a "ramp step-up effect", and all the light emitting parts When switching to the same mode, one production cycle is completed and it is configured to proceed to the next stage. There is a possibility that the switching method of the lighting mode like the pachinko game machine P cannot be executed in a limited time.

Therefore, the progress mode of the "ramp step-up effect" effect (the mode of the process of progressing the stage suggesting a result that is advantageous to the player) is changed to may be configured to increase That is, when the character role light emitting part P692a lights up in white, the first stage is when the character role light emitting part P692b lights up, and when the character role light emitting parts P692a and b light up in blue, the character role light emitting part P692b is in the second stage. The light emitting part P692c lights up, and the character role light emitting parts P692a, b, and c light up in yellow. By configuring so that the light emission mode is sequentially switched, it is possible to display the progress status of the "ramp step-up effect" with a maximum of six changes, and from the mode shown in the effect example of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, Also, the total number of switching times of the light emitting modes is suppressed, and the production can be executed even within the limited production time.

<Modification 4>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, during the performance period of "SP reach latter half development", the performance action of the character role P691 is executed, and the execution pattern is the degree of expectation that the result (big hit) will be advantageous to the player. However, the content of the ready-to-win effect that develops in the "second half of the SP ready-to-win" may be changed according to the execution pattern of the effect action of the character role product P691 during the "late SP ready-to-win development" effect period. For example, when the "promotion pattern" is executed, a special character appears in the display area of the effect display device P80 in conjunction with the effect lamp P82 sequentially switching from "purple" to "red" from below. It may be configured such that a display is made such that a special character appearing in the "second half of the SP reach" is displayed, and the transition is made to a special reach effect.

<Modification 5>
In the example of the effect of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the light-emitting effect (for example, the "character role-moving action" that is controlled with priority over the light-emitting effect control indicating the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" , "Late reach development", light emission during the performance action of the character role P691, "Cut-in before hit and drop branch", etc.), but the light emission of "ramp step-up effect" rather than these effects Effect control may be preferentially executed, and the execution of the “ramp step-up effect” may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, the start timing of the win-lose branch effect).

In addition, as a condition for giving priority to the light emission control of the "ramp step-up effect" over the light emission control corresponding to other effects, the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" is a pattern with a degree of expectation of "red" or higher. By adding a condition such as there is, if it is the "final stage" of the "ramp step-up effect" with low expectations, by giving priority to light emission effect control based on other effects, the light emission effect linked to the effect On the other hand, if the expectation is high, the “final stage” of the “ramp step-up effect” will continue to be displayed, and the favorable result will be displayed until the final development. You may comprise so that a feeling may be easily continued.

<Modification 6>
In the example of the effect of the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the effect of the "ramp step-up effect" is configured to progress in a format that is not related to the effect display in the display area of the effect display device P80, but the modified example. Alternatively, an effect related to the "ramp step-up effect" may be displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

FIG. 74 shows an example of an effect in which an effect display related to the "ramp step-up effect" is displayed on the effect display device P80.

In the example of FIG. 74, at the timing when one cycle of the "ramp step-up effect" effect period is completed, a cut-in image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80, and a cut-in image (character object light emission) is emitted from the speaker P83. A cut-in image of the heroine character corresponding to the character design of 1 of the effect sheet of the section P692) is configured to output the words corresponding to the cut-in image).

In addition, when displaying such a cut-in image, the appearance of the story production of the reach production has a large impact, so for example, the "ramp step-up production" becomes a certain level of expectation such as "green" or "red". The related display of the "ramp step-up effect" on the effect display device P80 may be executed only at the timing. Further, the effect related to the "ramp step-up effect" may not be displayed on the effect display device P80. It is also possible to execute an example in which one of P692 emits light in a manner different from that of the others, and the character corresponding to the light emitting part speaks a line indicating that the degree of expectation is increasing from the speaker P83.

In addition, when displaying a cut-in image or when outputting lines from the speaker P83, the hero character, the heroine character and the heroine may be displayed in addition to the heroine character, or the lines of the hero character or the lines of the hero character and the heroine may be displayed. It is also possible to provide a chance pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, such as outputting a character's words.

In addition, as a display of the effect display device P80 related to the "ramp step-up effect", an effect (effect ) may be configured to display an image. By displaying the effect image in this way, when an error occurs in the game machine, the production lamp P82 (particularly the character role light emission part P692 and the logo light emission part P690) emits light based on the "lamp step-up production". Even if the effect control cannot be performed, the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 can be configured so that the progress of the "ramp step-up effect" can be confirmed. Combining the effect image with the lighting effect control of the "ramp step-up effect" can be expected to have the effect of enhancing the effect of the "ramp step-up effect" in addition to countermeasures against errors. .

<Modification 7>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the character role light emitting unit P692 has shown an example in which the degree of expectation is increased by switching the light emission color in the display of the character design, but the character role light emitting unit The step-up effect may be executed by displaying other effect sheets (sheets on which character patterns are printed) provided in P692.

In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, the character role light-emitting units P692a to P692f are respectively provided with "monster" (character role light-emitting unit P692d), "favorite" and "machine" (character role e). , c), ``high'', ``period'', and ``wait'' (character role light emitting part P692f, a, b). Furthermore, it may be configured to execute a "ramp step-up effect" in which the lighting mode is sequentially switched from the first stage "suspicious", the second stage "opportunity", and the third stage "high expectation".

<Modification 8>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, it has been explained that the "ramp step-up effect" is executed as a back button effect during the execution period of the SP reach, but the back button effect does not display the effect button image P881 or the like. Since it is an effect period in which the player is not actively notified that it is the execution period of the operation input effect, the player unintentionally touches the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381), and the "ramp step up" occurs. If the light emission effect control is performed in the initial light emission mode of "effect", there is a possibility that the progress of the ready-to-win effect will be affected.

Therefore, during the period from the start of the initial light emission mode of the "ramp step-up effect" to the completion of the effect cycle of the first stage (light emission mode change to "blue"), the effect operation unit P380 (the effect button P381) If the operation is not performed for a certain period of time, it may be configured to return to the light emission effect control of the normal light emission mode, which is the light emission effect control linked to the ready-to-win effect or the advance notice effect.

<Modification 9>
In the pachinko game machine P of the sixth embodiment, an example of light emitting effect control of "lamp step-up effect" was shown as light emitting effect control using the character role light emitting part P692, but the light emitting part of the effect role P560 is used. However, as an example of the light emission effect, it is also applicable to control of the light emission effect other than the notice related to whether or not the player has obtained an advantageous result.

FIG. 75 shows an example in which, among the volume/light amount adjustment functions, a plurality of light emitting units use the light emitting units of the character role light emitting unit P692 to perform notification regarding volume adjustment during a period in which the volume adjustment is being performed. ing.

FIG. 75 shows a situation in which the four light emitting parts of the character role light emitting parts P692b, c, d, and e are lit, and the currently set volume value is 4 (the total volume is set to 4). The voice of the heroine character printed on the effect sheet of the character role light-emitting part P692b that is lit when the setting is set to , "The volume is '4'!"

In this way, regarding the setting of the production environment such as the volume and the amount of light, the light emitting units of the character role light emitting unit P692, which are a plurality of light emitting units, are used to display the setting degree of the production, and the light emitting units arranged in the plurality of light emitting units. By constructing the characters corresponding to the character patterns on the production sheet to perform navigation regarding the setting degree of the current production environment, various characters provide a production that notifies the setting of the production environment in a dramatic manner. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the interest of the production even in the setting of the production environment.

[Seventh embodiment]
The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment has various characteristic configurations in addition to the basic configuration of the base technology described above. In the following, differences from the underlying technology will be mainly described, and descriptions of common points will be omitted. Among the elements constituting the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the elements identical or corresponding to the elements explained in the underlying technique are given the same reference numerals and explained.

[Mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment]
The mechanical configuration of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the front appearance of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment. 77 to 81 show the mechanical configuration of the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment (in particular, the upper role P650, the side role P670, and the lower role P680 as the production role P560). It is a diagram.

FIG. 76 shows the appearance of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment viewed from the player side. The difference between the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment and the premised pachinko game machine is the arrangement configuration of various winning devices such as the first start winning device P710 and the large winning opening P750 on the game board P5, and the center decoration unit It is the configuration of the performance accessory P560 provided in P6, and other various configurations of the game machine are the same as those of the pachinko game machine.

The arrangement configuration of various winning devices in the game area P501 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described below.

(Game area configuration of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, the center decoration unit P6 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area P501. It is divided into a right area P501R (right hitting area).

The left side area P501L is a game area where game balls tend to flow down when the launch strength of the game balls is relatively weak, and as shown in FIG. A winning opening P711) is arranged, and three general winning openings P730 are arranged as a left general winning unit P730L on the lower left side of the game area.

The right side area P501R is a game area where game balls tend to flow down when the launch intensity of the game balls is relatively strong, and a second start winning unit P720A ( A second start winning opening P721A) and a large winning opening unit P750 are provided at the lower right position of the game area P501R. The large winning opening P750 unit is provided with a large winning opening P751 and an operation opening P741.

The right area P501R further includes a second starting winning unit P720B (second starting winning opening P721B) that does not include a normal electric accessory P770 on the left side of the large winning opening unit P750.

Here, the first starting winning opening P711 in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment is a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special figure 1"), and a second starting winning opening P721A and the second starting winning opening P721B are starting winning openings corresponding to the second special symbol (sometimes referred to as "special figure 2").

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the normal game state and normal game (low probability/low base), the player shoots a game ball toward the left area P501L (left-handed area) (left-handed area). ), enter the game ball into the first start winning opening P711, and receive the lottery related to the first special symbol to aim to acquire the right to shift to the special game state (big hit, small hit) is the basic game Designed for sex.

On the other hand, normal game state and specific game (at least one of high probability state or high base state is in operation) or special game state (during jackpot game, small hit game), the player is in the right area P501R ( A game ball is launched toward the right-handed area) (right-handed), the game ball is entered into the second start winning opening P721A or the second starting winning opening P721B, and a lottery related to the second special symbol is received. Aiming to acquire the right to shift to a game state (big win, small win), and during a big win game or a small win game, it is possible to aim to win a large amount of prize balls by entering game balls into the big winning opening P751. It is designed as a basic playability.

The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment is configured so as to have the arrangement configuration of the various prize winning devices in the game area P501 and the basic game performance, but there is no effect on the effects, game control, etc., which will be described later. , or can be changed as appropriate if the relevance is low.

(Structure of the center decoration unit of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
Next, referring to FIGS. 77 to 81, the effect accessory P560 (also referred to as "effect movable accessory" or "movable accessory") provided in the center decoration unit P6 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment. I will explain about.

As shown in FIG. 77, the performance accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment is a representative performance accessory P560 that can advance in front of the performance display device P80 (effect display device Three movable accessories that perform exposure, concealment, etc. so as to reduce the visibility of at least a part of the display area of P80 are provided. Although it is shown in the seventh embodiment and will not be described in detail, it should be arranged such that it does not protrude in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 or has little effect on the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80. , a production device that operates without changing its position, and production operation means P81 (production button P381, lever P382) as a frame movable object P360 provided in the game machine frame (glass frame P3) shown in FIG. The production operation unit P380) is also included in the "production accessory P560 (movable production accessory)".

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, as the production role P560, the upper role P650 is arranged in the upper area of the production display device P80, and the side role P670L and the side role P670L are arranged on the left and right sides of the production display device P80. P670R is arranged, and a lower role P680 is arranged below the effect display device P80.

"Superior"
The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment is equipped with the upper part P650 on the upper part of the center decoration unit P6, and in the normal standby state, as shown in FIG. It is in a retracted state, and when performing a performance action, it advances to the front of the display area of the performance display device P80 as shown in FIGS.

From the initial state shown in FIG. 77 (the detection state of the elevation initial position sensor P657, not shown), the elevation motor P653, not shown, causes the elevation belt P654, not shown, to rotate. The central decorative portion P651 and the rotary decorative portion P652 move downward according to a lifting guide (not shown) until the state shown (up to the detection state of the lifting effect position sensor P658 (not shown)) is reached.

81, the rotary decoration part P652 is expanded by the action of the rotary motor P659 (not shown) until the presentation state shown in FIG. 78 is reached. The decoration part imitating five petals, which is the part P652, rotates clockwise. The operating position of the rotary decoration part P652 is controlled by a rotation position sensor P660 (rotation initial position sensor) (not shown). By rotating the rotary decoration part P652 counterclockwise from a state in which it has been rotated clockwise by an amount or more, the rotary decoration part P652 is retracted and becomes a non-developed state.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the upper role P650 is used when performing an effect operation that suggests that the expectation of a big hit will increase (for example, when notifying the development of SP reach or specific high expectation reach) or , and performance operation contents are set so as to be operated for deterministically informing that a big win has occurred in the performance (sometimes referred to as ``hit-lose branch performance'') for informing the end of the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, the frequency of the performance action is set relatively low compared to the other performance role P560, and the action of the senior role P650 evokes high expectations in the player, and the player's A "texture action" (texture effect) is performed, which is an action intended to congratulate the winning of a big hit. In this way, the upper role P650 plays a major role in raising the level of expectations regarding the game result (whether or not), which is the event that the player is most interested in, and informing the player of the win itself. Alternatively, it may be referred to as "main director role", "texture role"), etc.

In the operating state of FIG. 78, the superior object P650 operates at the same time as the secondary object P670, which will be described later, and both the superior object P650 and the secondary object P670 are configured so as not to interfere with each other. . On the other hand, when the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670 move simultaneously with the lower role object P680, there is a possibility that they may come into contact with each other (interfere), and they are configured so as not to move to the performance position at the same time. ing.

In addition, the upper part P650 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment has the position shown in FIG. 81, or a second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) ending with an operation of slightly moving up and down in the vicinity of the position shown in FIG. At this time, the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern) suggests the development of a specific reach, while operating to notify the final effect result (or the result of the winning lottery) such as reach , The second effect operation pattern (weak pattern) is used to suggest the development of a specific reach or SP reach with low expectations, and special situations ("B reach" described later) (lever chance)"), the second effect operation pattern is not used when the effect result is notified (the probability is lower than the case where the first effect operation pattern is executed, but the second effect operation pattern is not used) Even if the effect motion pattern is executed, there is a possibility that the game will develop into a ready-to-win effect with a high degree of expectation, such as the first effect motion pattern).

When the superior object P650 moves, as shown in FIG. 81, it is possible to display the superior object action effect P870 in the display area positioned around the superior object P650 of the production display device P80. In particular, as shown in FIG. 78, it is constructed such that the character full screen effect P873 is displayed in the entire display area of the effect display device P80 when operated by the first effect operation pattern (strong pattern). .

The upper role action effect P870 and the role full screen effect P873 are displayed in a plurality of display modes (for example, white, green, red, gold, Giraffe pattern (manufacturer pattern, rainbow color) can be displayed, and when the performance operation of the upper role P650 is executed in the first performance operation pattern, the character full screen effect P873 is red or more (red, gold, giraffe pattern, rainbow color).

In addition, the upper character object action effect P870 and the character object full screen effect P873 are displayed preferentially (displayed in a higher display layer) than the notice effect, the reach effect, and the decorative pattern P801. Display of information indicating the state of the game, such as the display of information indicating the state of the game, such as the ``right hand small display (P832)'', ``left hand small display (P834)''), and the simple hold display P814, has a display priority so that it can be visually recognized. is set.

《College role》
The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment is equipped with side objects P670 on the left and right sides of the center decoration unit P6. In the normal waiting state (non-performance state), the side role P670 has horizontal upper decorative parts P671L, R, horizontal central decorative parts P672L, R, and horizontal lower decoration parts P671L, R as shown in FIG. The decorative parts P673L, R are in a state of being opened in the vertical direction and on standby.

As shown in FIG. 79, when the horizontal role P670 executes the production, the horizontal upper decorative parts P671L, R, the horizontal central decorative parts P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative parts P673L, R are arranged from both sides of the center decoration unit P6. It is configured to advance while bringing the relative positional relationship in the vertical direction close to each other.

Note that the left hand side object P670L and the right side side object P670R are driven by stepping motors (driving motors P674), not shown, which are individual drive sources, respectively. is driven, the lateral upper decorative portion P671L and the lateral central decorative portion P672L are directed toward the center of the display area of the effect display device P80 by the action of a drive transmission mechanism (for example, a rack and pinion mechanism, a link mechanism, etc.) not shown. , and the horizontal lower decorative portion P673L are configured to operate (although the explanation is omitted, the horizontal character P670R arranged on the right side is the same).

The action positions of the side role article P670L and the side role article P670R are detected by storage position sensors P675L and R for detecting the initial positions provided corresponding to each, and the performance action positions provided corresponding to each. Detected by shielded position sensors P676L, R for

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the side role P670 is a pre-reach notice effect at the start of the fluctuation or before developing into a reach effect, a pre-reading effect, a post-reach notice during the reach effect, a decorative pattern (special design) ) is temporarily stopped, or the timing at which the chance number is finally stopped and displayed as a look-ahead effect. Among the three performance accessories P560 representatively described for the pachinko game machine P, the performance performance P560 has the highest operating frequency.

The action of such side role P670 is basically included in the production as part of the notice production (notice before reach, notice after reach), or it is combined with the notice production as a pre-reading production independent of the notice production. The purpose is to create an effect of heightening the expectation that the advance notice performance will lead to a favorable ending for the player, and that the subsequent performance content will be changed to a performance content with a high degree of expectation for a big hit. is set.

In this way, the side role P670 is intended to directly notify a big hit or suggest that the expectation of a big win is very high only by the action of the side role P670, like the above-mentioned high-ranking role P650. It is not set, and the purpose is to create a lively effect to enhance the splendor and appearance of the entire production by producing in combination with other production devices such as the production display device P80, other production accessories P560, and the speaker P83. It is a secondary production role used as. Therefore, the side role P670 may be referred to as a "sub-directing accessory" (or a "sub-directing accessory", a "lively role", etc.).

FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the side role object P670 is performing an effect action. In FIG. 79, the horizontal upper decorative portion P671L, R, the horizontal central decorative portion P672L, R, and the horizontal lower decorative portion P673L, R of the horizontal role P670 are in a state of shielding the display area of the effect display device P80. Then, whether or not the special decoration P804 (a symbol written as ``NEXT'', which when stopped and displayed produces a ``pseudo consecutive'' effect), which is a decorative pattern for a special effect during execution of the normal reach, is temporarily stopped. It is a situation that is inciting to the player.

In FIG. 79, the left decorative pattern P801L and the right decorative pattern P801R which are already in the stop display state (or the temporary stop display state) are displayed smaller than the middle decorative pattern P801C which is about to be stopped and displayed as the special design. , and whether or not the special design is stopped as the middle decorative pattern P801C is highlighted by the action of the horizontal performance role P670 and the horizontal role performance effect P871 (already displayed as the first and second stop patterns The left and right decorative patterns P801L and R are displayed small in positions to avoid interference with the side role P670 in order to make the tenpai patterns recognizable or to prevent visibility from being lowered. The left and right decorative patterns P801L and R may be hidden if not intended).

In the example of FIG. 79, in the display area of the effect display device P80 (the display area not hidden behind the side object P670) that is easily visible when the side object P670 is moving to the shielding position, A special decoration pattern P804 is displayed larger than the normal decoration pattern P801 in the stop decorative pattern row (decorative pattern row that is not in the temporary stop display mode), and other display is completed in the stop display mode (temporary stop display mode). The decorative pattern P801 of the decorative pattern columns (left column, right column) is displayed in a small size. By displaying in this manner, the player's attention is attracted to the symbols stopped and displayed in the medium symbols formed as the final stop symbol row by limiting the area visually recognized by the shielding of the side role P670. can be done.

In this way, under a situation where at least part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is blocked by the operation of the effect accessory P560, the timing for attracting attention to the display of the decorative pattern in the next stop display mode is simulated. This can be applied not only to continuous effects, but also to ready-to-reach effects. Furthermore, not only in the final stop symbol row, but also at least a part of the display area of the effect display device P80 is displayed by the operation of the effect accessory P560 when the second stop symbol row that switches to the second stop display mode is stopped. It is also possible to use shielding to draw attention to the already stopped symbol row and whether to form a reach mode.

In addition, the side actor action effect P871 has a plurality of production patterns (for example, the display colors are white, blue, green, and red, and the display sizes are small, medium, and large), similar to the upper role action effect P870. Depending on the display mode, the possibility (expectation level) of an advantageous performance result for the player differs. For example, in the example of FIG. 79, when the side role object action effect P871 is white, the special design P804 ("NEXT" pattern) is not stopped and displayed as the middle decoration pattern P801C, and a pattern such as "4" is displayed as it is. 343" etc. is highly likely to be notified, and when the side actor action effect P871 is red, the special arrangement P804 is always stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuation (pseudo-variation) re-variation is performed. An example configured as follows.

As described above, the side role P670 starts its operation at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation as a notice effect before the reach, or at the timing of the end of the fluctuation such as the stop of the chance eye etc. at the end of the fluctuation. As shown in FIG. 79, since it is a performance accessory P560 that operates relatively frequently, there is no or little interference with the simplified display P802 and the simple reservation display P814 during the performance operation. (That is, the display positions of the display indicating the game state, such as the simplified display P804, the simple hold display P814, or the not-shown split notification P830, are determined on the basis of the movement range of the lateral role P670). The display positions of the simplified display P802 and the simple reservation display P814 may be determined by including the motion range of other roles such as the upper role P650 and the lower role P680 to be described later. In the pachinko game machine P of the example, the display position is determined on the basis of the side role P670, which is the direction role P560 that is likely to act immediately after the start of the variation and just before the stop of the variation. If the lower role P680 is likely to move at the timing before and after the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop similarly to the side role P670, the simplified layout P804 and the It is preferable to determine the display position of the simple hold display P814 (as for texture accessories, it is configured to return to the initial position by the end of fluctuation basically in any situation as long as there is no abnormality etc. therefore not considered).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 79, the character object action effect such as the side character action effect P871 is displayed (displayed in a higher display layer) with priority over the display of the decorative pattern P801 and the like and the notice effect. , the display priority is lower than the operation promoting image (button image P881, etc.) prompting the operation of the effect operation means P81 such as the effect button P381 displayed for instructing the content of the effect to the player. Display information indicating the game state such as P804, a simple hold display P814, or an unillustrated beating notification P830, etc., rather than a display for letting the player recognize the state of the game even under the condition that the production accessory P560 is operating. The display priority is set low.

《Low-duty》
The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment has a lower part P680 under the center decoration unit P6. In the normal waiting state (non-execution state of the effect), the lower role object P680 is in a state of retreating from the display area of the effect display device P80 and waiting as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the lower role object P680 is executing the performance action, as shown in FIG. The central decorative portion P681 and the feather-like decorative portion P682 are easily visible.

The lower part P680 is driven by a drive motor P684 (not shown). When the drive motor P684 rotates, a rack and pinion mechanism (not shown) operates, and the central decoration P681 rises with the lowered position sensor P686 (initial position). Up-and-down operation is possible within the detection range (production operation range) of the position sensor P687 (production position). The pinnate decoration part P682 of the lower part P680 rotates a connecting gear (not shown) in conjunction with the vertical movement of the central decoration part P681. It switches from a downwardly inclined state toward the center to an upwardly inclined state (the state shown in FIG. 80).

The motion range of the performance action of the lower role object P680 overlaps with the performance motion range of each of the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670, and either the upper role object P650 or the side role object P670 operates at the same time. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, only the performance action of the lower role P680 is prepared independently. It should be noted that the directing role P560 can operate simultaneously like the upper role P650 and the side role P670 in FIG. However, the more the production role P560 that operates at the same time, the more power is devoted to the operation of the production role P560, and the production control CPU of the production control board P41, the production lamp P82, the speaker P83, and other production devices and control devices. Since there is an increased risk of affecting the operation of the , an electrical limit may be provided to limit the combination of simultaneously drivable production accessories P560 (the total current value when driving a plurality of production accessories P560). be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, an example of the rendering operation of the lower role item P680 will be described. The lower role item P680 is a "sub-effect accessory" similar to the side role item P670 described above, and is set to have a relatively higher effect execution frequency than the upper role item P650, which is the "main effect accessory". It is a directing accessory P560.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the lower role P680 is related to the content of the notice effect, such as when the character appears in the notice effect (see FIG. 80), or immediately after the start of re-variation of the decorative pattern P801 in the pseudo continuous effect. The production operation for the purpose of executing a certain production is mainly set. The effect action is set so that it is almost never used as an effect that suggests a content different from the display content of (In addition, the effect action pattern used as a prefetch effect may be set for the lower role P680.) . Since the lower role object P680 set in this way is a production role object with more production operation contents in a situation where there is a subsequent production as the production content than the side role object P670, the side role object P670 operates. It is a performance accessory that makes it easier for the player to get a sense of expectation for winning a big hit than when the player is playing the game.

In the production example of FIG. 80, as a notice production after reach (prediction during reach production), a character cut-in (production in which a strip-shaped character image is superimposed and displayed in the center of the display area of the production display device P80) and a lower role are displayed. An example effect is shown in which the P680 is operating. As shown in FIG. 80, the lower character action effect P872 is preferentially displayed (displayed in a higher display layer) than the character cut-in notice displayed superimposed on the reach effect in the background as a notice effect after reach. It has become. At this time, in the lower role action effect P872, a plurality of production patterns (for example, a pattern in which the display colors are blue, green, red, gold, rainbow, patterns with small, medium, and large display sizes, patterns with different display animation movements, etc.). Also, at this time, the character cut-in characters displayed as the lower part action effect P872 are associated to some extent, and the character A in the first composition is associated with the blue effect, and the character A or character B in the second composition is associated with the green effect. , a red effect for character A or character C in the third composition.

While the lower role P680 and the side role P670 each play a role as a secondary performance role, the side role P670 is directly related to the effect content of the advance notice effect displayed on the effect display device P80. While it is also used in the execution of performance accessory actions (prediction of performance accessory actions) as a low look-ahead effect and is widely used with high frequency, the lower role P680 is mainly used for the effect accessory actions related to the advance notice effect. , and while there are fewer places where it is used as a production action than the side role P670 (the frequency of execution of the production action is low), it directly suggests the result (expectation) of the variable display of the special symbol being executed. It is a directing role that is easy to relate to.

(Movable frame: Description of operation of production operation unit)
FIG. 82 is an operation explanatory view of the effect operation unit P380, which is one of the frame movable objects provided in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment.

FIG. 82(a) shows the initial position state (initial state) in which the effect operation unit P380 does not perform the effect operation, and FIG. 82(b) shows the effect state after the effect operation unit P380 performs the effect operation. is shown. The production operation unit P380 has a production button P381 and a lever P382 integrally formed. In the initial state, the lever P382 cannot be operated, and in the production state, the lever P382 can be operated. It has become.

More specifically, the effect operation unit P380 rotates a cylindrical grooved cam (not shown) connected to the pointing shaft of the effect button P381 and the lever P382 by the operation of the lever lifting motor P389. rises from the position detected by the lever initial position sensor P386 shown in FIG. 82(a) to the position detected by the lever raised position sensor P387 shown in FIG. 82(b). When the effect operation unit P380 moves to the position of the lever raised position sensor P387, the lever input sensor P388 can detect the input operation of the lever P382 by the player's tilting operation of the lever P382.

(Another example of character action effect)
As described above, in accordance with the actions of the higher role P650, the lower role P670, and the lower role P680, the upper role action effect P870, the side role action effect P871, the lower role action effect P872, and the role full screen effect It has been explained that an effect image such as P873 (an effect of displaying a uniform effect image (rainbow effect or the like) over the entire display area of the effect display device P80 during the effect of FIG. 78) is displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, there are other effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in response to the action of the effect accessory P560 (referred to as "effect linked display effect"). do. An example of other production accessory-linked display production is shown below.

《Pseudo role object action image》
The "pseudo role product motion image" is an image simulating the actual performance role P560 (or a similar image with a slightly modified design) that enhances the role object movement effect of the production role P560, This is a display effect that makes it possible to execute the effect of displaying in place of the actual role object movable effect.

For example, a pseudo-accessory motion image similar to the performance accessory P560 is interlocked with the motion of the performance accessory P560, and the pseudo-accessory moves forward or backward in the movement direction of the performance accessory P560 within the motion range of the performance accessory P560. By displaying an action image, the player is made to perceive it as an afterimage or blurring, and a case is conceivable in which an impression is given by giving an illusion of the action speed of the performance accessory P560.

In addition, the simulated role product motion image is displayed in a situation where the performance role product P560 cannot operate (for example, when the performance role product P560 cannot be restored due to step-out or the like and becomes a role product error state that prohibits the operation) ), by displaying the simulated role product motion image at the timing when the performance accessory P560 operates, even in a situation where the actual performance accessory P560 cannot perform the movable effect, the performance including the operation of the performance accessory P560 is performed. It can be made to recognize that it was a mode.

Since the "pseudo accessory action image" is an image that substitutes for the effect accessory P560 positioned in front of the effect display device P80 and has the effect of complementing the effect, It is an image with a higher display priority than the effect images such as the effect P871, the lower role item movement effect P872, and the role item full screen effect P873. display priority is low).

In addition, the "pseudo role product motion image" is an image (or a similar image) that imitates the production role product P560, but the display color, etc. need not be the same color as the design of the actual production role product P560. The image may be an image whose appearance has been changed by a display effect such as gray scale or sepia.

《Role movement inciting effect》

"Role object motion stimulating effect" is one of the display effects linked to the performance role object motion, and is the timing of performing the operation of the performance role object P560 (including the case of a fake pattern in which the performance role P560 is not actually operated). ), an effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the performance accessory P560, or a pseudo role product motion image is displayed in the vicinity of the operation range of the performance accessory P560, so that the target performance accessory P560 This is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that an action will be performed.

The "accessory action stimulating effect" is an effect suggesting that the action of the presentation accessory P560 leading to the degree of expectation of winning the special game is performed, and has a plurality of display patterns as the display pattern. As for the display pattern, the display colors are white, red, and gold, and the display size can be switched between small, medium, and large. (expectation level) is suggested to the player.

(Production movable accessory_initialization/recovery operation processing)
Next, using FIGS. 83 to 85, a description will be given of the “effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process” of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation process includes an "initial position return operation process" for returning the position of the production accessory P560 to the initial position, It consists of two processes of "initial operation confirmation process" for confirming whether the P560 can operate normally (see FIG. 83).

Effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is performed when the power of the game machine is turned on or when there is an operation abnormality (an event such as an error that requires operation confirmation) in the effect accessory P560. This process is executed when Determination of operation abnormality is performed in the production control process (step 4012) based on the result of the input port monitoring process (step 4008), which is the process of the production control board (production control CPU). A flag for requesting return operation processing (operation instruction, operation control) is established, and a request for initialization/return operation is executed for production accessory P560 in production device control processing (step 4010).

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, there are the following four situations in which a request for the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is made. In addition, the processing executed in the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing under each situation is also described.
1. Requests for both the initialization operation "initial position return operation processing" and the "initial operation confirmation processing" at power-on are executed.
2. When a step number over error occurs, both requests for "initial position return operation processing" and "initial operation confirmation processing" are executed.
3. When a position check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.
4. When a time monitoring check error occurs, only the request for "initial position return operation processing" is executed.

Here, the "step number over error" drives the number of steps that becomes the determination threshold after the design action request is executed when an action request (effect action or initial position return action) is made to the production accessory P560. This is an error that occurs when the sensor that should be detected is not inspected even if it is output to the motor. "Position check error" occurs at a predetermined game timing such as when fluctuation starts (or fluctuation ends) or when the game state changes. As a result of determining whether or not the role P560 is at the position where it should exist by various sensors (initial position sensor of the performance role P560, performance position sensor), the performance role P560 is not in the assumed position (the sensor to be detected is detected The "time monitoring check error" is an error that can occur as a result of making the same determination as the "position check error" at regular time intervals (for example, 5 seconds).

It should be noted that the "time monitoring check error" is excluded from the error monitoring target for the "position check error", and the production accessory P560 that is executing the production operation assigned by the variable production or the look-ahead production.

Also, the request for the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is made when the variable display of the special symbol is performed (for example, when the motion of the effect accessory P560 is performed as the variable effect). is also feasible. Then, when a request for the performance movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is made, the variation is performed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols until the performance movable accessory_initialization/return operation processing is completed. The operation of the production accessory P560 (at least the production accessory to be subjected to the production movable accessory_initialization/return operation process) based on the performance execution pattern is prohibited.

<<Direction Movable Accessory_Initialization/Return Operation Processing>>
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the processing flow of "effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" (step 5800). "Effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" is a process performed in the process within the effect device control process (step 4010) of the effect control board (effect control CPU). The contents of the processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in the “movable production accessory_initialization/return operation process”, it is determined whether or not a request related to the initialization/recovery operation of the production accessory P560 has been executed (step 5802). If a request for initialization/recovery operation is not made to the production accessory P560 (step 5802 NO), the process is terminated without performing subsequent processes. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a request for initialization/return operation for the production accessory P560 (step 5802 YES), the process proceeds to "initial position return operation processing" (step 5804), which is a sub-module process.

Details of the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the "initial position return operation process" is completed, it is then determined whether the current situation is a game stop state such as setting change (or setting confirmation) (step 5806). If the game is in a stopped state such as during setting change (setting confirmation), the production control board (production control CPU) waits for "initial operation confirmation processing" without the judgment result being NO until the game stop state is released. situation.

The reason for waiting for the "initial operation confirmation process" (step 5810) after the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) when the game is in a stopped state such as during setting confirmation (setting change) is that when the power is turned on In a game stop state such as changing settings (setting confirmation) to be transferred, the effect display device P80 shows the current setting status and security information indicating that the setting is being changed, and other settings for the game machine. It is possible to display the administrator menu screen, etc., and the effect accessory P560, which was positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device P80 before the power failure, is moved to the display area by the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804). This is because it is after retracting from the front, and it is considered to be an optimal situation in which the visibility of the display area of the effect display device P80 is not hindered due to an anomaly in the operation of the character object such as stepping out during the "initial operation confirmation process".

If it is determined that the settings are not being checked (settings are being changed) in the "effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process" (step 5806 NO), then the power is turned on or the number of steps is exceeded. It is determined whether there is (step 5808). As described above, in the pachinko machine P of the seventh embodiment, the specification is such that the "initial operation confirmation process" is requested when the power is turned on and when the number of steps is exceeded. It is because In other words, if the request is based on a position check error or a time monitoring check error, there is no need to execute the "initial operation confirmation process", so the effect control board (effect control CPU) is a submodule process "initial operation Confirmation processing” (step 5810) is not performed.

The details of the "initial operation confirmation process" will be described later. When the "initial action confirmation process" ends, the information of the request related to the execution of the initialization/return action is cleared, and the "effect movable accessory_initialization/return action process" ends.

<<Initial position return operation processing>>
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the "initial position return operation process" (step 5804) relating to the operation control of the performance accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. "Initial position return operation processing" is the performance accessory P560 determined not to exist at the initial position (the performance position sensor or the intermediate position sensor may be the "initial position" instead of the initial position sensor depending on the performance situation). is a process for returning to the initial position.

In the "initial position return operation process", first, a request to stop the operation (operation instruction, operation control) is output to all the performance accessories P560 (step 5820). In this process, when an error occurs due to a request for a performance operation that was output before the power failure, or a position check error or time monitoring check error, the operation of other performance accessories P560 in operation is stopped, This process is intended to prevent interference with other performance accessories when returning the performance accessory P560 to the initial position.

When the motion stop request for all the performance accessories P560 is completed, the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment then moves the lower role P680 to the initial position (detection position of the lowered position sensor P686). give instructions. If the lower article P680 has already been positioned at the initial position (when the lowered position sensor P686 has already been detected), this process is omitted.

When the lower role P680 moves to the initial position (or the initial position return operation is omitted), the upper role P650 moves to the initial position return operation. In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, first, it is confirmed whether the elevation initial position sensor P657 and the rotation position sensor P660, which are sensors related to the initial position of the superior object P650, are in the detection state (step P5824). As described above, the upper accessory P650 is configured to switch between the expanded state and the retracted state of the rotary decoration P652 depending on the rotation direction at the timing when the rotary decoration P652 detects the rotation position sensor. Even if the sensor P660 is in the detection state, there is a possibility that the rotary decoration part P652 is deployed, so it cannot be immediately moved to the detection position of the elevation initial position sensor P657. Therefore, in the case of returning the upper part P650, which does not exist in the initial position, to the initial position, the rotating decoration part P652 is expanded while being temporarily moved to the performance position, and after securely changing to the retracted state, It is necessary to let the sensor P657 detect it.

When it is determined that the superior object P650 does not exist at the initial position (step 5824 NO), the superior object P650 is moved until the elevation effect position sensor P658 reaches the detection state (step 5826). In addition, when the upper role object P650 is already at the position of the elevation effect position sensor P658, this process is omitted.

In the initial position return operation of the superior object P650, when the superior object P658 moves to the position (performance position) where the elevation initial position sensor P658 is detected, the rotating motor P659 is subsequently driven in the direction in which the rotary decorative portion P652 is deployed. Drive (step 5828). In addition to the next detection by the rotational position sensor P660, the rotary ornament P652 rotates to the retracted position at the position detected by the rotational position sensor P660 by the return operation (reverse rotation of the rotary motor P659).

When the superior object P650 changes to the deployed state at the production position, the “initial position return operation process” subsequently instructs the initial position return operation to the superior object P650 and the side object P670 at the same time (step 5830). In other words, after the rotating decorative portion P652 of the senior object P650 is put in the stored state, it is moved to the position detected by the elevation initial position sensor P657, and the secondary object P670 is moved to the position detected by the storage position sensor P675. (Processing is omitted when the side object P670 is in the initial position detected by the storage position sensor P675). Only the process of step 5830 is designed to simultaneously execute actions for a plurality of performance role objects P560. It is a combination of the actions of the performance accessory P560 that does not pose any problem in terms of electrical limitation (restriction of the total current value) even if they operate simultaneously in terms of performance.

Thus, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the lower role P680, the upper role P650, and the side role P670 are executed in order in the "initial position return operation process". The processing order of the "initial position return operation process" is configured to determine whether or not to execute in a predetermined order for a plurality of production accessories P560, and perform the operation to return to the initial position. When actions are performed in order, power for the action is not supplied to the performance accessory that is not the target of the action. The initial position return operation processing configured in this way prevents interference during the return operation by not starting the return operation of the initial position at the same time for all the production accessories P560, and by driving at the same time It is possible to prevent the use of a large amount of electric power from adversely affecting the operation of the performance control board and other performance devices. In addition, as in step 5830, it is possible to instruct the initial position return operation at the same time for the performance accessories P560 that do not interfere with each other and that do not interfere with the electrical restriction even if they are driven at the same time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the initial position return operation of the entire production accessory P560 from becoming excessively long.

<<Initial operation confirmation process>>
Next, detailed processing of the “initial operation confirmation processing” (step 5810) will be described. The "initial action confirmation process" is a process of checking whether or not the effect action can be executed in order for all the effect accessories P560 provided in the gaming machine (for example, all the effect accessories P560 are placed in the initial position to the production position) to confirm that it can operate normally.

When the "initial operation confirmation process" is started in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the operation confirmation process of the lower role P680 is first performed (step 5850). The lower role P680 operation confirmation process operates the drive motor P683 to move the lower role P650 from the state detected by the lowered position sensor P686 to the position detected by the raised position sensor P687, and then again to the lowered position sensor P686. It is configured to perform processing to operate until the state is detected.

When the confirmation operation of the lower role P680 is completed, the operation confirmation process of the higher role P650 is subsequently executed. In the operation confirmation processing of the superior role P650, the central decorative portion P681 of the superior role P650 is moved from the detection position of the elevation initial position sensor P657 to the position detected by the elevation effect position sensor P658 by operating the elevation motor P653. (Step 5852). Then, when the central decorative portion P681 of the upper role P650 moves to the performance position, the rotary motor P659 is operated to confirm whether the rotary decorative portion P652 can be transformed into the unfolded state, and the rotational position sensor P660 is detected next. The rotation motor P659 is operated by the amount of additional drive that can be accommodated by the rotary decoration portion P652 during the return operation, and the deformation operation of the rotary decoration portion P652 is confirmed (step 5854).

When confirmation of the performance action of the rotating decoration part P652 at the performance position of the upper role P650 is completed, an instruction to return the upper role P650 to the initial position is given, and the side role P670 is instructed to return to the initial position. Give an instruction to perform the operation confirmation process. In the operation confirmation processing of the side role P670, each decorative portion (horizontal upper decorative portion P671, horizontal central decorative portion P672, horizontal lower decorative portion 673) of the side role P670 is moved to the production position by operating the drive motor P674. make it work. That is, after the drive motor P674 is operated from the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 to the state where the shield position sensor P676 is detected, the drive motor P674 is rotated in reverse until the state detected by the storage position sensor P675 again. It is configured to allow

In the "initial action confirmation process", the upper role P650 and the side role P670 have a period during which they perform actions at the same time, but they perform actions at different timings than when actually performing the performance action (see FIG. 78). is configured as More specifically, when the motions of the upper role object P650 and the side role object P670 are performed as a production operation, the overlapping period of the operation output in which the operation output is performed at the same time is the operation output when the operation output is performed simultaneously in the initial operation confirmation process. It is configured to be longer than the overlapping period, and in the case of the initial action, by reducing the period of simultaneous actions as much as possible, the period in which the respective actions of the respective production accessories P560 are performed overlaps. is avoided, and the confirmation person can accurately and easily visually recognize the action of the performance accessory P560.

(Response to operation error of performance accessories)
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when a malfunction occurs in the production accessory P560 (for example, when the above-mentioned step number over error or position check error occurs), the production movable accessory_initialization・The return operation process is executed, but even if the effect movable accessory_initialization/return operation process is executed, if the situation where the effect operation can be executed cannot be secured for the effect accessory P560 If a situation occurs such as not returning to the initial position even after repeating the position return operation process and the initial operation confirmation process three times, or not being able to move to the production position), in order to prevent the failure of the production accessory P560, the corresponding It is configured to prohibit the performance accessory P560 and the operation of the performance accessory P560 that may interfere with the relevant presentation accessory P560.

In addition, even when the movable effect operation of the effect accessory P560 is prohibited due to the occurrence of such an error, the light emitting part of the effect accessory P560 is configured to execute the light emitting effect. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, since the light emission pattern for lighting the light emission part of the production accessory P560 is not exclusively set when the operation is prohibited, the normal movable production operation is executed. Lighting is controlled in the same manner.

(Playability of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be explained. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the transition between the normal game and the specific game in the normal game state and the effect state. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing the types of jackpots in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table normally used in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment.

The pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment employs parallel control, and is a game machine capable of independently variably displaying the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

It should be noted that the playability described below is the playability when the player normally plays the game, and the description of irregular situations is omitted.

《Normal game (low probability / low base)》
First, the game characteristics of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be explained. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the player first starts the game, the game is played in the normal game (low probability/low base) shown on the left side of FIG.

In the normal game (low probability / low base), the player shoots the game ball toward the first start winning port P711, aiming to win a big hit by special symbol lottery of the first special symbol (see Fig. 86 (a) ). When a big win is obtained by the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern, after the big win game is started, the big win game is executed by the special pattern (big win pattern) stopped and displayed on the first special pattern display device P51 when starting the big win. Depending on the type of (see FIG. 87), either “time-saving game (low probability / high base)” (see FIG. 86 (b)) or “variable game (high probability / high base)” (see FIG. 86 (d)) are distributed to specific games.

In normal games, the type of production state (production mode) is based on the "normal stage" (normal production mode) such as "A stage" to "C stage", and there are also "special stages". As (special production modes), it has "D stage", "E stage", and "character complete announcement mode".

"D stage" is a production stage (production mode) dedicated to pre-reading effects, and if you win a special pre-reading effect lottery, somewhere during the variable display before the variable display of the pending target for pre-reading starts It is a production stage that shifts with timing. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when shifting to the "D stage", the content of the effect displayed on the effect display device P80 is special until a predetermined timing during which the hold targeted for the look-ahead effect is fluctuating. In addition, the side role object P670 is configured to continue to swing near the initial position, and the magnitude of the action of the side role object P670 and the side role object action effect P871 increase as the degree of expectation increases. The amount has increased and the display pattern has changed to one with a high degree of expectation.

"E stage" is a case where a pseudo-variation effect (pseudo continuation) is executed, and re-variation display after the third time (referred to as "pseudo X" depending on the number of re-variations, in this case referred to as "pseudo 3") It is a special production stage (special production mode) that shifts when it becomes. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when it becomes pseudo 3, it is definite to shift to the high expectation reach (SP reach) among the reach effects, and the shift to any high expectation reach A dedicated effect for indicating whether to do is displayed before the start of the ready-to-win effect. In this "E stage", when it develops to normal reach, a plurality of icons suggesting high-expectation reach effects are displayed, and along with the moving display of the displayed icon images, the upper role P650, the right side role P670R, the lower role The object P680 and the left side role object P670L operate in order, and finally, one of the production roles P560 moves to the production position and the icon image is displayed, suggesting the high expectation reach of the development destination ( In the case of the upper role P650, it will develop to the highest expected reach, and before the icon image becomes visible, the movable role production using the rotating decoration part P652 and the role full screen effect P873 ).

The "accessory complete notification mode" is a special effect stage ( special production mode). In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the "perfect announcement mode" is selected, the upper role P650 and the side role P670 move to the front of the effect display device P80 (shown in FIG. 78). state), and a notice effect is executed mainly based on the operation of the light-emitting units provided in the upper role P650 and the side role P670 and the action of the side role P670 (in the display area of the effect display device P80 that is partially visible Character display, button image P881, etc. may be displayed). In the "personal object complete notification mode", in the event of a big hit variation, the effect of rotating the rotary decoration part P652 of the superior object P650 is finally executed to announce that the big hit will be achieved, and then the superior object P650. and the side role P670 returns to the initial position, and the display area of the effect display device P80 that has become visible performs an effect that notifies the type of the jackpot game won (light emission mode when the rotary decoration part P652 rotates) may suggest the type of jackpot to be won).

"D stage", "E stage", and "accessory complete announcement mode" are examples, and may be executed during a specific game as a modification. In addition, the "accessory complete notification mode" does not have to operate in advance the performance accessory P560 (in the previous example, the upper role P650 and the side role P670). P881 is displayed, and when the button is pressed, if the performance role P560 (the senior role P650 and the side role P670) operates, a big win is achieved. good.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the normal game (low probability/low base), a predetermined number of symbol changes (for example, 660 times) are performed after the RAM is cleared or after the previous jackpot game. In both cases, when the result of the special symbol lottery is "lost", the game shifts to a "support mode" which is a specific game (low probability/high base) without going through the jackpot game. "Support mode" is one of the states of the specific game (low probability/high base) to be described later, and whether the variable display corresponding to the special symbol lottery of 500 times is performed or the special symbol lottery wins the big hit game. (The jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol display devices P51 and P52). In addition, "support mode" does not exist when shifting via a big hit.

《Specific game: Time saving game (low probability / high base)》
Next, the time-saving game (low probability/high base), which is one of the specific games in the normal game state, will be described. As shown in FIG. 86, there are two types of specific game (low probability/high base) states. One is the "revival chance" and the other is the aforementioned "support mode". "Resurrection Chance" and "Support Mode" differ in entry timing and termination conditions.

``Resurrection chance'' and ``support mode'' are triggered and end conditions are that the ``resurrection chance'' shifts after the jackpot game (especially after the normal jackpot game, which will be described later), and 100 special symbol lotteries are performed. Or, it is a specific game state that continues until a big hit is obtained in a special symbol lottery within 100 times. On the other hand, in the "support mode", as described above, the symbol variation is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 660 times) after the RAM is cleared or after the last big hit game, and in both cases the result of the special symbol lottery is "lost". It is a specific game state which is continued until a special symbol lottery is performed 500 times or a big win is obtained in the special symbol lottery within 500 times.

In the normal game state of the specific game (low probability/high base), the player shoots the game ball to the right game area P501R, passes the game ball through the operation opening P741, and the normal electric accessory of the second start winning unit P720. P770 is operated, the opening/closing member P771 of the second start winning unit P720 is set to the winning easy state, the game ball is entered into the second start winning opening P721, and the game is played by receiving the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol (this A game performed by shooting a game ball into the right game area P501R is called a "right-handed game").

When a big hit is obtained in the special pattern lottery of the second special pattern (see FIG. 86(c)), the big hit pattern (the special pattern stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device P52) to start the big hit game. Depending on the type of the jackpot game, after the jackpot game, it shifts to the "support mode" again (for normal jackpots, see FIG. 86 (b)), or "X rush" (high probability / high base) or "X "Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base) (in the case of a probability variable jackpot, see FIG. 86(d)).

《Specific game: Variable game (high probability / high base or high probability / low base)》
Subsequently, the game in the normal game state of the probability variation game among the specific games of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 86, there are two types of variable probability games: "X Rush" (high probability/low base) and "X Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base).

The variable probability games "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" shift after a specific jackpot game (after the jackpot game of the variable probability big win) and continue until the next big win game is started. In addition, as a modification, if a special symbol lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) during "X Rush" (high probability / high base), the electric chew support function will end and "X Rush SUPER" (high probability / low base).

The game methods of "X Rush" and "X Rush SUPER" are performed in a right-handed game similar to the time-saving game described above. When a jackpot is obtained in a right-handed game (see FIG. 86(e)), a jackpot game is played according to the type of the jackpot pattern (special pattern stopped and displayed on the second special pattern display device P52) to start the jackpot game. After that, either shift to the "support mode" (for normal jackpots, see FIG. 86(b)), or repeat the variable game "X Rush" (high probability/high base) or "X Rush SUPER" (high probability/low base) (in the case of a probability variable jackpot, see FIG. 86(d)).

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is set high even under the condition that the electric chew support function is not operating (for example, when the probability of the normal symbol lottery is low: 299/300 , in high probability state: 300/300), even in normal games (low probability / low base) and “X Rush SUPER” (high probability / low base), the operation of the normal electric accessory P770 provided in the second start winning unit P720 are becoming more frequent.

In the state where the electric chew support function is operating, regarding the operation of the normal electric accessory P770, the opening extension function is activated, and when the right-handed game is played, the normal electric accessory P770 is operating. It is configured to occupy most of the time (for example, after the normal electric accessory P770 operates for 6 seconds, the normal electric accessory P770 is configured to operate again after about 1 second by the next normal symbol lottery. ), when a right-handed game is played in a high base state (state where the electric chew support function is operating), the game ball is downstream (large winning opening unit P750) from the second start winning opening P721. It is designed so that it does not flow too much.

On the other hand, in a situation where the electric chew support function is not operating (normal game or "X rush SUPER"), the second start winning opening P721 is won, and the game is played when the normal electric accessory P770 is not operating. A game ball can flow down toward a large winning opening unit P750 downstream of the second starting winning opening P721, and when a small winning is won by a special symbol lottery of a second special symbol, a small winning game is played. It is configured to be able to increase the number of game balls based on the winning to the inside large winning opening P751.

In addition, during "X Rush SUPER", since the special symbol probability variation and variation time reduction function are operating, the variation time of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol tends to be shortened (about 1 to 2 seconds) On the other hand, since the special symbol variation time reduction function is not activated in the normal game, the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol is configured to be a long-time variation (for example, 3 minutes), It is configured so that the number of game balls decreases even if the right-handed game is continued. A game state such as this "X Rush SUPER" in which a small hit game frequently occurs in a short time in a right-handed game, and the game ball can be increased by the small hit game can be collectively referred to as a "small hit rush". be.

(Types of special games of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, the types of special games of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described.

As for the jackpot probability of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, as shown in the lower part of FIG. It is (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol). Also, the small hit probability is 1/500 in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol, and 1/2 in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

As an explanation of the type of special game of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 87, in the "type of special game", the name of the type of jackpot game and small winning game that can be executed in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment It is shown. "State after special game" indicates whether the normal game state to be shifted after the corresponding special game (big win game, small win game) is executed, which state is the specific game or the normal game. "Ratio" indicates the ratio of which type of jackpot game (minor win game) is selected when the special pattern lottery of the first special pattern or the second special pattern results in a big hit or a small hit. ing.

The notation of "special figure 1 _" and "special figure 2 _" described in "type of special game" is either the first special symbol (special figure 1) or the second special symbol (special figure 2) It indicates whether it is the lottery result of the lottery, and "○R" indicates the number of rounds of the corresponding jackpot game. "Variable probability big hit" and "Normal big hit" will shift to variable probability game ("X Rush", "X Rush SUPER") after the big hit game (after the big hit), or shift to time-saving game ("revival chance") (usually after the jackpot) is shown. "Small win" indicates a small winning game, but the configuration has different execution modes of small winning games, such as "small winning_1" and "small winning_2" as the lottery results of the second special symbols. (For example, "small hit _1" is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "small hit _2" is opened twice for 0.6 seconds).

The content described in the "state after special game" indicates whether to shift to the state of the specific game described in FIG. It should be noted that "depending on the state before the start of the special game" after the "small hit" indicates that the game state is the same as before the start of the special game (the end condition of the specific game is satisfied). When it becomes a "small hit" in the variable display, it shifts to a normal game instead of a specific game).

(Variation pattern table of pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a representative example of the type of variation pattern (variation time) related to the variation display of the special symbols of the pachinko gaming machine P of the seventh embodiment. The vertical axis of FIG. 88 indicates the type of variation pattern, and the horizontal axis of FIG. 88 indicates the type of variation pattern table used in the situation when the variation pattern lottery (special symbol lottery) is executed. The variation pattern shown in FIG. 88 is a representative example, and the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment can also select other variation pattern types.

The symbols “○”, “△”, and “□” in the figure indicate the approximate frequency of selecting the target fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table, and “○” indicates high frequency (1/3 of the total “△” indicates that it is selected at a low frequency (about 1/20 to 1/50 of the total), and “□” indicates that it is selected at a very low frequency (1/10). 70 to 1/200).

As shown in FIG. 88, the type of the variation pattern table is a game property mainly based on the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the normal game. (“Out (special figure 1) normal game” table). The variation pattern lottery in the first special symbol lottery of the normal game is performed by switching the variation pattern table depending on the number of reserved first special symbols. It should be noted that although the result of the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not illustrated, the variation pattern table in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol in the normal game is a variation dedicated to the special figure 2 A lottery is performed using a pattern table.

On the right side of the "loss (special figure 1) normal game" table, the loss variation pattern during time saving is illustrated. Since the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment mainly plays the second special symbol (special figure 2), the lost variation pattern table during time saving is the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation pattern lottery. , exemplifies the variation pattern selected in . The variation pattern lottery during time saving of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is determined using a dedicated variation pattern lottery table for time saving special figure 1.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern table of "big win" and "minor win" shown as the fluctuation pattern table, it is shown that different fluctuation patterns can be selected depending on the type of the big win game and the type of special symbol at the time of winning the small win. there is

Here, there are two types of SP reach (A reach), "SP reach (A reach)" and "SP reach (A reach) _ role", but "_ role" has a target fluctuation pattern When selected, in the winning/losing branch effect that informs the player whether or not it is a big hit at the end of the reach, the production accessory P560 always operates (the first production operation pattern of the upper role P650, which is a fine accessory). indicates that In the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment, in the variable display of the SP reach (A reach) that is the 10R probability variable jackpot that is most advantageous to the player, the effect pattern of executing the action of the upper role P650 is executed. , In the case of other big hits, the operation of the upper part P650 is not accompanied (or the execution frequency is extremely low because it is decided by advance notice lottery, and the timing other than the winning branch effect, for example, the development effect to SP reach) possible) are configured to be executed. In addition, even in the variation pattern without "_ role", the upper role P650 operates at another timing during the variation display, or the advance notice accompanied by the operation of the side role P670 or the lower role P680 is performed. It is possible to

Also, although not shown, for example, during the execution of the small winning game "X Rush SUPER", the lottery result of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is either "small winning_1" or "small winning_2". Depending on whether or not, the operation pattern of the lower role P680 (or the side role P670) or the type of the lower role action effect P872 is different in accordance with the small winning game, so that the type of special game (small winning game) won is notified or It may be configured to allow suggestions.

(Execution example of effective production using the production accessories of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
Subsequently, in the variable production performed in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the production accessory P560 is used to effectively execute the movable accessory production that gives the player a highly interesting production effect. 89 to 91, description will be given along the flow (time chart) of the variable production at the time of A reach and B reach.

The contents shown in each of FIGS. 89 to 91 are as follows.

The “(a) production period” is a rough division of the production period of the variable production according to the content of the production. "Before reach (pseudo 1)" indicates the period from immediately after the start of fluctuation until the first fluctuation display ends or develops into reach production, "Before reach (pseudo 2 ~)" is the pseudo continuous production It is a variable display period of the decorative pattern P801 after the second time during one fluctuation of the special pattern when it is performed, and corresponds to the period until the development of the reach production (since pseudo 3 and later included in the period). In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the normal reach is always executed. It is also possible to display the losing mode without performing the ready-to-win effect in the variable display and end the game.

Of the "(a) production period", the period indicated by "normal reach" indicates a period in which low-expectation reach production is performed, and the result of the normal reach is used to notify the result of the winning lottery, or the subsequent It is a production period in which the development to the SP reach is notified. The period shown in "SP reach" is a reach production period in which the expectation of a big hit is higher than the above-mentioned normal reach, and it is a production period in which the result of the winning lottery is always notified as a result of the reach production (It should be noted that once lost In the seventh embodiment, this period includes a performance period called "resurrection performance" or "reversal performance" in which the content of the notification is overturned and the winning is announced after is announced).

'(b) Effect content example' shows an example of the content of the effect executed during the corresponding effect period in the above-mentioned '(a) effect period'. It should be noted that the examples shown are merely representative ones, and other notice effects and the like are naturally configured to be executable.

``(c) example of action of role object'' is linked to the effect shown in ``example of effect content'', and the effect role P560 (upper role object) provided in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment P650, supporting role P670, and lower role P680 will be explained as examples) shows what kind of performance action is performed.

"(d) Example of role lamp" is the light-emitting part of the production role P560 (upper role P650, side role P670, lower role P680 will be explained as an example) provided in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment. , What kind of light emitting effect is executed when the movable role object effect (exemplified in "(c) Example of effect operation"), notice effect, prefetch effect, etc. (exemplified in "(b) Example of effect content") is executed It gives an example of what to do.

In "(e) other lamps/sounds_features", what kind of light-emitting effects are produced by the production lamps P82 (frame lamps P350, board lamps P550, and production operation means P81 lamps) other than the light-emitting parts provided in the production accessories P560. It shows an example of whether or not to perform, and an example of sound effects output from the speaker P83.

``(f) button valid period'' is an effect (referred to as ``button effect'') using the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381, lever P382, etc.) during each effect period (see "(a) effect period"). It indicates whether or not a Note that the presence or absence of the button effect depends on the notice effect to be executed, the ready-to-win effect (notice effect during reach, etc.), etc. Therefore, the timing of execution and the presence or absence of execution are not limited to the example shown in the figure.

In the "(f) button effective period", the area shown in black indicates the period during which the operation of the effect operation means P81, which is required to be operated by the player in order to proceed with the effect, is valid. is an effect period in which an image imitating the effect operation means P81 (an operation promoting image such as a button image P881 and a lever image P882) is displayed to prompt the player to perform an input operation to the necessary effect operation means P81. On the other hand, during the shaded period in the figure, the input operation of the predetermined effect operating means P81 determined for the effect is valid, while the button effect is performed without displaying the operation prompting image such as the button image P881. It indicates that it is an effect period (referred to as a “back button effect”) that does not explicitly state that it is a period. The checkered area in the drawing indicates the timing of the win-lose branch effect, which is the effect timing for informing the result of the win/loss lottery among the button effects. In addition, during the back button effect period, the operation promotion image such as the button image P881 is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. to indicate that the operation is valid.

"Back button production" means that if it is executed before reach (pseudo 1), before reach (pseudo 2 ~), or during the period of normal reach, the possibility of development to subsequent high-expectation production such as SP reach It is one of the button effects that are configured to suggest or suggest the degree of expectation for a big win, and are executed as effects for notifying the degree of expectation for a big win when performed during the SP reach.

《SP Reach (A Reach): Lost, small hit》
First, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" shown in FIG. explain. In addition, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" performed in this explanation will be explained with one variation pattern name, but as a variation effect, "pseudo continuous effect" is performed and multiple times of variable display is performed It can be applied to various variation patterns (variation time) as long as A reach is executed as a final effect, such as whether or not, whether to go through normal reach. As shown in FIG. 88, A reach is a variation effect that can be executed with a variation pattern that is selected even in the case of a big hit. In the case of special figure 2_10R probability variable jackpot), A reach is executed along with the variation pattern of "SP reach (A reach) _ role" in which the upper role P650 always operates in the first effect operation pattern in the winning branch effect be done.

In the following explanation, explanation will be given based on the flow of variable production that develops to SP reach (A reach) via pseudo continuous production and normal reach. In addition, in FIG. 89, examples including various branch patterns described above are given.

When the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" is started, a variable effect corresponding to "before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed as a variable effect in the display area of the effect display device P80. , as examples of the contents of the effect to be executed, a dialogue announcement in which one character or a plurality of characters utter a dialogue, and a variety of images that change in stages (change in shape, size, color, gradual change, etc.) A notice effect decided by lottery is executed at the start of the variable effect, such as a step-up notice to move to). In addition to the effect content that is determined by lottery as the effect content at the start of the variable effect, the prefetch takeover effect (prefetch 1 production pattern of the prefetch production which is the same production as the production and is assigned up to the variable display to be prefetched is executed. In the seventh embodiment, such a look-ahead takeover effect will also be described as a "pre-read effect" (in the case of explaining the look-ahead effect of only the variable display that is the target of look-ahead, the "look-ahead take-over effect" or "the This is sometimes referred to as "prefetching", etc.).

An example of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reach (pseudo 1)" is as follows ("(c) production operation example", "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 89) ).

Superior P650: Does not work. The light-emitting part of the upper role P650 performs an effect in accordance with the advance notice effect or the like. (Fig. 89 shows the case of pseudo 1 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable production)
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (dialogue notice, step-up notice, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the side role P670 emits light in conjunction with the notice performance, but if the side role P670 is used in a look-ahead performance or the like to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit or the degree of expectation of development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.
Lower role P680: When the action of the lower role P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous occurrence notification, normal reach development alert, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the notice effect, but if the lower role P680 is used in a look-ahead effect, etc., to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit or the degree of expectation for development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.

In the period of "before reach (pseudo 1)", the light emitting part (production lamp P82) other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are basically decided by lottery decision of the advance notice production as a variable production. A light emission effect and a sound effect are executed according to the execution pattern. In addition, when the pre-reading effect (pre-reading succession effect) is executed at the same time as the advance notice effect in the pre-reading effect etc., the side role is performed in conjunction with the role action effect (side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, etc.) Along with the light emitting parts of the object P670 and the lower role P680, in order to effectively show the look-ahead effect using the production role P560, the light-emitting display and sound effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect are executed with priority over the notice effect (or may be executed at the same time).

Also, in the "before reach (pseudo 1)" period, if the execution of the button effect is decided as a lottery result of the notice lottery that determines the content of the variable effect at the start of the variable effect, the button effective period will be changed at the corresponding timing. Occur. The example in FIG. 89 illustrates one button effective period. Depending on the content of the notice effect to be executed, the button effect may be executed multiple times. A plurality of button effective periods may exist by defining the period. (Although not exemplified in FIG. 89, the button validity period may include an advance notice to be executed as a back button effect.)

Next, an example of the effect contents will be described for the effect period of "pre-reach (pseudo 2~)" during the variable effect period of "SP reach (A reach)".

A variable display regarding "SP reach (A reach)" is performed, and when the production of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)" is approached, the notice that can be executed in "before reach (pseudo 1)" is displayed as the content of the notice production The effect can be executed even in the period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)". In addition, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. ) is changed, but if it is not accompanied by such a stage change, a similar advance notice effect can be executed in pseudo 3 as well. In addition, in the effect period of "before reaching (pseudo 2 ~)", a "pseudo-continuous effect" (for example, the display of the effect display device P80 or side effect A display combined with a notice effect using the object P670, a movable accessory effect, etc.), and some prefetching takeover effects (for example, pending change prefetching, zone transition prefetching, etc.) are continued.

An example of the production operation related to the production accessory P560 in the production period of "before reach (pseudo 2-)" is as follows ("(c) production operation example", "(d) role lamp example in FIG. 89 ).

Superior P650: Does not work. The light-emitting part of the upper role P650 performs an effect in accordance with the advance notice effect or the like. (Fig. 89 shows the case of pseudo 2 ⇒ SP reach (A reach) as another example of variable production)
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (dialogue notice, step-up notice, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the side role P670 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect. In about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after, the effect operation of the pseudo-continuous effect and the light emission effect are preferentially executed. As an example of execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, for example, the side object P670 is shaken for about 2 to 3 seconds immediately after the start of the re-fluctuation, and green (announces a pseudo-2 change) or red (announces a pseudo-3 change) side object. Light-emitting effect by the light-emitting part of P670, or display of side role action effect P871, or the like can be mentioned.
Lower role P680: When the action of the lower role P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the advance notice effect (pseudo continuous occurrence notification, normal reach development alert, etc.), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the notice effect, but if the lower role P680 is used in a look-ahead effect, etc., to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit or the degree of expectation for development to reach, the notice Movable accessory performance and light-emitting performance according to the look-ahead performance are executed with priority over other notices, except for a period in which actions are executed in conjunction with the performance.

In the period of "before reach (pseudo 2 ~)", the light emitting part other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are basically determined by the lottery decision of the advance notice production as a variable production, according to the execution pattern of the notice production Executes the lighting effect and the sound effect. In addition, at the start of re-variation, etc., as described above, a pseudo-continuous effect that is a notification that the re-variation has been performed using the side role P670 is performed. In addition, the effect lamp P82 may be configured to execute effect display corresponding to the pseudo-continuous effect. In addition, with the hold change look-ahead and zone transition look-ahead, if the light-emitting part other than the performance accessory P560 and the speaker P83 are executing an effect corresponding to the look-ahead effect, the light-emitting effect and sound effect that continue to correspond to the look-ahead effect can be continued.

The occurrence of the button valid period during the period of "Before Reach (Pseudo 2 ~)" is the same as during "Before Reach (Pseudo 1)", depending on the lottery result of the notice lottery at the start of the variable production, once or more times button valid period can occur (one case is illustrated in FIG. 89).

Next, in the variable display in which "SP reach (A reach)" is executed, an example of the effect execution mode in the effect period in which "normal reach" is executed will be described. In this example, since it is a variable display in which development to SP reach (A reach) is executed, the display content of the effect display device P80 during normal reach is an icon image (special design P804) and the like are finally displayed as a result of normal reach.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect accessory P560 during the effect period of "normal reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect operation example" and "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 89).

High role P650: At the timing when the icon image suggesting development to SP reach (A reach) is displayed, or at the timing after it is displayed, the second production operation pattern (weak pattern) Movable role production is executed. At the same time, the high-ranking object action effect P870 (red) is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.
Side role P670: Performs an effect operation in accordance with the effect content displayed as the reach effect of normal reach. In addition, it does not operate when the corresponding effect operation is not set.
Lower role P680: Performs an effect operation in accordance with the effect content displayed as a normal reach effect. In addition, it does not operate when the corresponding effect operation is not set. Further, when the back button effect is executed, if the back button effect progresses based on the player's input operation to the effect operation means P81, the effect operation corresponding to the back button effect may be executed. In addition, when the performance timing of the accessory action of the ready-to-win effect and the movable accessory effect of the back button effect overlap, the back button effect is preferentially executed.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the back button effect during normal reach is performed by the player continuously operating the effect operation means P81 (effect button P381) during a predetermined button effective period (back button effective period) during normal reach. By performing multiple operations or long-pressing operations), the light-emitting portion of the lower role P680 steps up in the order of white→blue→green (→red→gold) and the lower role P680 Execute the "back button step production" that performs a vibration production as a production operation so that the will rise by a small amount and return to the initial position Although the final stage to reach differs depending on the type, it is always configured to reach green).

During the period of "Before Reach (Pseudo 2-)", the light-emitting parts other than the production accessory P560 and the speaker P83 execute production linked to the content of the Reach production. When execution of the back button effect is scheduled during the ready-to-win effect, the effect lamp of the frame lamp 350 (the effect operation unit P380) is caused to emit light in a manner indicating that the effect operation means P81 is effective. When the player operates the effect operation means P81 during the execution of the back button effect, the light emitting part provided in the lower role P680 executes the light emitting effect of the back button step-up effect. It may be configured to emit light simultaneously with the disk lamps 550 provided in the periphery for heightening.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the step-up performance is executed based on the back button step-up, even after the back button step-up performance during normal reach is finished, the luminous display in the finally reached luminous color is displayed. can be continuously displayed until the subsequent performance timing. More specifically, in the back button step-up production during normal reach, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit in the variation, and the notice production (cut-in It is possible to continuously display the final light emission mode of the back button step-up as the degree of expectation for a big hit until the timing of the announcement) and the timing of the winning branch effect. By doing so, the player can confirm the display mode of the back button step-up as one reference information as to whether the result will be a big win when executing the SP reach, thereby improving the interest of the SP reach performance. leads to In addition, as a modification, from the final lighting mode of the back button step-up, in conjunction with the chance-up effect during SP reach, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 is changed to a light-emitting color corresponding to the expectation of a higher jackpot. The light emission mode may be configured to be changeable.

The occurrence of the button valid period during the "Normal Reach" period can be set to the period corresponding to the back button step-up effect as described above, or the timing to notify the result of the subsequent Normal Reach (big hit notification or development notification to SP Reach). is. As described above, the lower role P680 is a role that interferes with the side role P670 and the upper role P650. However, as another method, only the lower role P680 can be operated during the back button step production period, and the side role P670 and the upper role P670 are configured to be operable. The effect content may be configured so that no effect action is assigned to P650.

Finally, the contents of the effect executed during the effect period of "SP reach" in the effect period of "SP reach (A reach)" will be explained. In "SP reach (A reach)", during SP reach, part of the background effect of the reach effect is configured to be different from the normal pattern (pattern with the lowest expectation among the effect patterns of A reach). A chance-up notice that suggests that the expectation of a big hit is high, a cut-in notice that characters and lines are superimposed on the background production of the reach production, and the result of the lottery will inform you whether the result is a big hit. It is a period in which various effects such as a button effect performed at the timing of the win-lose branch effect can be executed in a complex manner.

An example of the effect operation related to the effect accessory P560 during the effect period of "SP reach" is as follows (see "(c) effect operation example" and "(d) role lamp example" in FIG. 89).

Higher role P650: Does not work (because the lottery results are lost and it is a small hit). In addition, when the result of the winning lottery is a big hit other than the 10R probability variable big hit, when the execution of the button production is determined as a result of the lottery, the upper role P650 is operated in the first production operation pattern. can be configured to
Side role P670: When the action of the side role P670 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (chance-up notice during SP reach), the action is interlocked. The light emitting part of the side role P670 emits light (red light emission, and as a modification, white light emission in the case of the effect in which the surrounding board lamp 550 emits red light) in conjunction with the advance notice effect. When operating the side role P670, side role P670L close to the part where the chance up notice different from the normal pattern is displayed in part of the background effect during SP reach so that attention is directed to the chance up notice, One of R may be configured to operate.
Lower role article P680: When the action of the lower role article P680 is assigned in the effect pattern of the notice effect (notice of cut-in during SP reach), the action is interlocked. The light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits light in conjunction with the advance notice effect (for example, in the case of a green cut-in, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits green light, and the green lower role action effect P872 is displayed, In the case of red cut-in, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits red light, and the performance display of the red lower role action effect P872 is performed). In addition, when the back button step effect is executed in advance during normal reach, etc., the light emitting part of the lower role P680 continues to display the final light emitting mode of the back button step effect until the timing of the winning branch effect. It is configured to give priority to light emission display. As a modified example, for example, in the back button step production, when the light emitting part of the lower role P680 emits green light as the final light emitting mode, when a red cut-in notice occurs, the expectation is higher. A red display suggesting that is displayed according to the execution of the advance notice effect, and then the red light emission mode is continued without returning to the light emission mode corresponding to the green back button step effect until the win-lose branch effect. You may

The occurrence of the button effective period in the period of "SP reach" can be configured to be performed when the button presentation is executed when the notice of cut-in occurs or other notice presentation (chance-up notice, etc.) occurs. Also, the cut-in notice and other notice effects during SP reach may be configured as back button effects. Note that this example (see "(f) button effective period" in FIG. 89) is SP reach (A reach) in the case of a miss or a small hit, and is configured so that the button effect is not determined as a win-lose branch effect. .

《SP reach (A reach) _ role: big hit》
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 90, the contents of the variation effect when "SP reach (A reach)_role" is determined among the variation patterns shown in FIG. 88 will be described. The variation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _ role" is a variation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation big hit, special figure 2_10R probability variation big hit), and the contents of the variation production are shown in FIG. Since it is almost the same as the case of "SP reach (A reach)", only the characteristic differences will be explained.

90 and the example of FIG. 89, the contents of effects that can be executed before the start of "SP reach" are the same. In the example of FIG. 90, the biggest difference is that during the "SP reach (A reach)" effect period, the button effect (win-lose branch button effect) is always executed (that is, in the advance notice lottery at the start of the variable effect A special period is set before and after the effective period of the winning/losing branch button presentation is started, and further, the upper role P650 operates in the winning/losing branch presentation in order to notify the big hit. It differs from the production example of FIG. 89 in that it operates based on the operation of the production operation means P81.

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach) _ role" is a variation pattern that can be determined in the case of 10R probability variation (special figure 1_10R probability variation big hit, special figure 2_10R probability variation big hit) Therefore, in order to congratulate the player on winning the jackpot, the upper role P650 (texture role) is always operated in the variation performance performed when the variation pattern is determined, and further the performance is performed. In order to enhance the effect, the operation start of the upper role P650 is configured to be the operation timing for the presentation operation means P81 of the button presentation (win-lose branch button presentation). In the case of other types of jackpots, the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)" is one of the results that can be selected, so even if A reach is executed, unless the lottery is won, the winning branch button production is configured so that it does not occur.

The action of the superior object P650 in the win-lose split effect is executed according to the first effect operation pattern. The action effect P870 is displayed in rainbow colors. In addition, in the example of FIG. 89, the pattern in which the boss P650 operates in other types of jackpots was also mentioned, but in the case of other types of jackpots, it is different from when the 10R probability variable jackpot is won. In order to achieve this, as the effect content, the upper role object P650 may be configured to operate according to the second effect operation pattern instead of the first effect operation pattern. The object action effect P870 may be configured to emit light and display in other modes (modes other than rainbow colors).

In a special period provided before and after the start of the button valid period of the win-lose branch button presentation, the operation of the presentation accessory P560 which has been in a movable state until then is stopped (returned to the initial position or stopped on the spot), and the board lamp P550. , The light emitting parts of the frame lamp P350 and the production accessory P560 are turned off (or dimmed until dark), and the sound production from the speaker P83 (at least the sound production corresponding to the reach production) is temporarily stopped, and the production display device P80 The display in is blackout display (display of a black screen, notification of the fact that it is fluctuating with a simple installation pattern P802, a retreat pattern P803, etc.), making the pachinko game machine P dark and quiet, and button images according to the button valid period It is configured to display an operation prompting image such as P881.

After the start of the special period, when the player operates the effect operation means P81 during the button effective period of the win-lose branch button effect, the action effect of the upper role P650 is started, and the ready-to-win effect is produced. It is configured such that the light emission effect of the effect lamp P82 and the sound effect of the speaker P83 are restored.

In this way, in the variable production corresponding to "SP reach (A reach)" _ role", before the first production operation pattern (texture operation) of the upper role P650 (texture role), a quiet period (interest period) By providing the above, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the action of the upper role P650 and the execution of the button performance, and to further enhance the effect of the action of the upper role P650. can be done.

Note that the "special period" is not limited to dimming the effect lamp P82 of the pachinko game machine P and limiting the sound effect of the speaker P83 as described above, but also lighting the effect lamp P82 in a uniform color, A special sound effect may be emitted from the speaker P83. Any mode may be used as long as it makes it easy to draw attention to the texture.

In addition, the "special period" is the variation pattern "SP reach (A reach)", and when another type of jackpot is notified by the winning branch button production (at the start of the variable production, the winning branch button production will be It may be executed when it is determined to be executed), and by doing so, it is possible to prevent the "occurrence of a special period", that is, the "10R probability variable jackpot". In addition, the "special period" for attracting attention to the action of the production accessory P560 does not necessarily have to be a button production, and the normal reach and the period before reach (pseudo 1) and before reach (pseudo 2) Period), etc., may be provided in order to attract attention to the superior material P650 immediately before the development of S and P reach is notified by the superior material P650 (texture material). At this time, the superior object P650 is caused to vibrate slightly and the superior object P650 is displayed on the display of the effect display device P80 which is blacked out so as to attract attention to the superior object P650. A preparatory operation may be performed to flash the light-emitting portion of the .

《B Reach: Hit》
Next, an example of the content of the variation effect executed when the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" shown in FIG. 88 is selected will be described based on FIG. Here, first, if the outline of "B reach" is briefly explained, "B reach" is a directing "missing" mode in normal reach and SP reach assigned with low expectations. It is one of the types of SP reach, which is called "lever chance" that develops after being played, in which a big hit is notified if the upper role P650 operates by operating the production lever P382.

In the example of the effect in FIG. 91, after "losing" is announced once in normal reach, it shifts to B reach (lever chance), B reach becomes a success mode, and a big win is announced.

In FIG. 91, there is almost no difference from the aforementioned "A reach" in the presentation periods of "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2-)". The difference is that the B reach is after the notification of the loss in the normal reach and the SP reach, which is set to a lower degree of expectation, so that "before reach (pseudo 1)" and "before reach (pseudo 2 ~ )” is constructed so as not to suggest the development from the action of the boss P650 to the high-expectation SP reach (A reach, etc.). Since the other details are the same as those of the A reach, the explanation is omitted.

Next, an example of an effect executed in the effect period "normal reach" in which the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)" is executed will be described.

When the variable effect related to "SP reach (B reach)" is being performed, in normal reach, the withdrawal pattern P803 during reach is displayed in the corner of the effect display device P80, while the effect display device P80 is an abbreviation of the effect display device P80. A changing decorative pattern P801 (final stop pattern) is variably displayed in the central area. In the row of decorative symbols serving as final stop symbols, in addition to decorative symbols of the kind used as ready-to-win retreat symbols, there are cases where an icon image or the like indicating development of SP ready-to-win is displayed as a special symbol. Then, the fluctuation speed of the decorative pattern row, which is the last stop pattern in the vicinity of the retracted pattern during the reach and the patterns before and after it, or the special pattern (icon image), is reduced, and it is notified whether the reach will be a big hit (reach retreat) A winning mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are the same, or a losing mode in which the symbol and the final stop symbol are different combinations), and a notification related to SP reach development (stopping the icon image as the final stop symbol) are executed. In addition, in this example, in order to explain an example of shifting to lever chance after notification of loss of normal reach, it is assumed here that normal reach ends in a loss mode, but B reach (lever chance) with special symbols such as icon images ).

In this production example, when the normal reach ends in a lost state, as shown in FIG. A rattling motion of repeating up and down movements is performed, and a superior object action effect P870 is displayed in the vicinity of the superior object P650. Then, in the vicinity of the stop display area of the decorative pattern P801 of the effect display device P80, a simulated role product action image P874 relating to the upper role product P650 is faded-in displayed (transmittance is lowered so as to be clearly visible). The effect of fading out display (display that changes so as to increase the transmittance and disappear slowly) is repeated multiple times, and as a result of changing and displaying the simulated role object action image P874 multiple times in this way, it is finally clearly displayed. In this case, a shift to B reach (lever chance) is notified, and in the case of a miss, the simulated role product action image P874 is not displayed, and a variation effect is performed by a stop display of a miss mode of the decorative pattern P801. finish. Whether or not the pseudo-accessory action image P874 is displayed in this way, and the effect of arousing the transition to B reach (lever chance) by the movable effect action of the target superior role object P650 is referred to as "lever chance occurrence instigation".

When executing the "lever chance generation fanning", it is configured to display the superior object action effect P870 together with the rattling motion of the superior object P650. It may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation for development of B reach (lever chance) depending on the luminescent color and display mode of the character action effect P870. In addition, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a hit, the light emitting part of the upper role P650 during the lever chance generation and the light emission mode and display mode of the upper role action effect P870 are displayed in rainbow colors. By temporarily (instantaneously) mixing light emission and display, it has a rare premium production pattern that allows you to sense the winning of a big hit at the timing before the timing of the winning branch production during B reach (lever chance). may be configured.

In addition, in the "lever chance occurrence fanning", at the time of repeating the fade-in display and fade-out display of the pseudo role product action image P874, the pseudo role product action image P874 is displayed in grayscale, and finally B reach (lever chance ), the simulated role product action image P874 is configured to be displayed in color. A single color gradation display of the red system may be performed on the display screen, or a premium pattern including rainbow color display may be provided. In addition, in the repeated display before the final display of the simulated role object action image P874, not only the display method of fade-in display/fade-out display, but also other methods such as slide-in depending on the degree of expectation for development of B reach (lever chance) or a combination of multiple patterns.

Also, in the "normal reach" period executed during the variable production of "SP reach (B reach)", if the side role P670 and the lower role P680 are assigned a movable production operation to the reach production, the assignment The action is performed in accordance with the performance action pattern provided. As for the lower role P680, the effect operation and light emission effect based on the back button effect are assigned in the same manner as in the case of "SP reach (A reach)". However, even if the back button step-up is executed as the back button effect of the lower role P680, in the case of "SP reach (B reach)", the normal reach will temporarily stop display in the mode of removing the decorative pattern P801 ( When the temporary stop display is performed, the light emission display of the final light emission mode of the back button step effect is terminated before the execution of the lever chance generation bias. This is effective as a highly entertaining ready-to-win effect by suggesting the possibility that the player will win in reverse from the fact that the player is discouraged by being notified in a dramatic manner that the lever chance occurrence fanning is once lost. If the light-emitting display based on the back button step effect continues on the light-emitting part of the lower role P680, the effect of the lever chance occurrence will be diluted (development to B reach (lever chance) is perceived. This is because

Next, an example of the effect contents during the effect period "SP reach" in the variation effect in the variation pattern "SP reach (B reach)", the specific effect contents of B reach (lever chance) will be described.

B reach (lever chance) is, as shown in FIG. 93 (an example of the timing shown in the special period (B) in FIG. 91), when the normal reach ends and the lever chance is generated and succeeded, B reach (lever chance) After the start of , the production lever P382 (frame movable accessory P360) changes to a state in which input is possible (see FIG. 82(b)), and a production display prompting the player to operate the production lever P382 is performed. At this time, the variable display is started again from the display of the losing mode at the end of the normal reach, and if displayed, the decorative pattern P801 ("3" in FIG. 93) that will be a big hit is displayed together with the simulated role product action image P874. An effect display is performed to crush the decorative pattern P801 (“2” in FIG. 93). Then, when the player operates the production lever P382, the superior role P650 performs the production operation (second production operation pattern), crushing the missing decorative pattern P801 to indicate a successful mode (see FIG. 93). , only "3" is displayed, and the combination of Zome is displayed). Instead of the combination of the decorative pattern P801 and the simulated role product action image P874, instead of the simulated role product action image P874, the upper role object P650 is configured to rattle at the upper position of the decorative pattern P801. good too.

During B reach (lever chance), the supporting role P670 and the lower role P680 do not have a pattern for performing a movable effect action, and are configured to wait at the initial position, and the light emitting part emits light. The mode is also configured to emit light according to the ready-to-win effect.

The effect lever P382 becomes effective at the timing of the win-lose divergence button effect during B reach (lever chance). A preparatory operation is performed before the effective period of the effect operation means P81 (effect lever P382) for the win-lose branch button effect. B reach (lever chance) is a production intended to notify a big hit by a movable production operation of the upper role P650 based on the operation of the production lever P382. When performing the preparatory operation of the lever P382, the frame lamp P350 is configured to move toward the direction of the production lever P382 and light up in order, so as to draw attention to the production lever P382. ing. On the other hand, the board lamp P550 is lit up in a moving manner so that the light-emitting portion sequentially moves toward the superior object P650.

Then, in accordance with the timing at which the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 is completed, the effective period of the effect operation means P81 and the special period are generated. ”, the lighting mode of the production lamp P82 of the pachinko game machine P is extinguished and dimmed (except for the production lever P382 and the boss P650), and at least part of the sound production output from the speaker P83 is stopped, and the production lever image P882 is displayed on the production display device together with the character string "Drop the upper role!!" Configure to focus on action.

(Priority of Display Layers of Pachinko Game Machine in Seventh Embodiment)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 94 and 95, the priority of display regarding the display of various effects displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 shows an example of an effect screen during variable display of special symbols in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 95 shows the display priority of various effect displays.

FIG. 94 shows an effect display example during execution of the variable effect of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment. In the display area of the effect display device P80, an image of two female characters walking along the road is displayed as a background image P876, and in the example of FIG. 94, a black figure is displayed as a character appearance notice P877. (Note that, at this time, the two female characters in the background image P876 are also performing actions for character appearance notice, so the background image P876 is switched to an image in which the two female characters do not exist, and the character appearance notice (showing two images).

Then, in the effect display example shown in FIG. 94, a line notice P878 (a line of "Who!?" The lower role object action effect P872 is displayed in the vicinity of the lower role object P680 with priority over the dialogue notice P878 (at this time, the lower role object P680 is displayed in a movable production action when the character appearance notice P877 switches from the figure to the character display. (Because it is set to perform a preparatory or inciting action).

Also, a button image P881 is displayed in the vicinity (below) of the dialogue notice P878 to prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in order to surely prompt the player to operate the effect operation means P81, the operation promotion images (the button image P881 and the lever image P882) are provided with the role action effect (lower role action effect P872) is prioritized for display.

In FIG. 94, as other displayed items, there are a decorative design P801 and a simple design P802 for dramatically showing the lottery result of the special design during variable display. In addition, as a display for displaying necessary information for the player that is not directly related to the current variable display, a hold display object P811 and a simple hold P814 relating to hold, a split notification image P830, a display of the cumulative number of wins P824, and the like are displayed. it's shown.

FIG. 95 shows the level of priority set in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment (that is, allocation of display layers, priority is drawn in a display layer that is more likely to be visually recognized by the player). In the following, the display contents will be described in order from the lowest priority by way of example.

《Background effect》
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the "background effect" is set to have the lowest priority as the effect display contents displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80. "Background effect" is often displayed for the purpose of the player to understand the effect stage (production mode), and the scenery, characters, and objects are displayed as animations, and special patterns are displayed in a variable manner. This effect image can be continuously displayed even if there is no such effect image. In addition, the ``background effect'' may not be visible due to the game standby demo display that shifts due to the continuation of the period in which the variable display of special symbols is not performed, the notice effect that displays the full screen, the big hit effect, etc.

《Notice》
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, most of the image display of the notice effect is set to have a low display priority next to the background effect. As shown in FIG. 95, in the notice effect, a plurality of types of notices are set with different priorities. are displayed at the same time, it is determined which display should be given priority. According to the example described with reference to FIG. 94, the character appearance notice P877 corresponds to "notice 1", and the dialogue notice P878 corresponds to "notice 2". It is designed to be

《Look-Ahead / Pseudo Continuous Performance》
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the look-ahead effect and the pseudo-continuous effect (the effect of displaying "x2" or the like at the start of the re-variation) are displayed over a plurality of times of the variable display on the effect. It has an important role to inform that the expectation of a big hit is increasing (predictive effect), and to notify that the expectation of a big hit is increasing due to the development of a pseudo-continuous effect in the variable display during execution. Therefore, it has a higher priority than most teaser images. Note that there are exceptional prefetch effects that do not apply to the display priority, such as pending change prefetch displayed as a pending display.

《Character movement effect》
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, when the advance notice effect accompanied by the operation of the effect accessory P560, the look-ahead effect, or the pseudo-continuous effect occurs, the degree of expectation for the big win is relatively higher than when the effect accessory P560 is not operated. designed to be relatively high. Therefore, the display of the role action effects (higher role action effect P870, side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, role full screen effect P873, etc.) emphasizing the action of the production role P560 is By increasing the priority of display over images, look-ahead effects, pseudo-continuous effects, etc., and preventing the role object action effects from being hidden by these effect displays, it is easy to attract attention to the movable effect action of the effect role P560. It's like By constructing the action of the performance accessory P560 so as to easily attract attention in this way, it is possible to effectively notify the player that an event advantageous to the player is approaching, such as an increase in expectations for a big hit of the performance accessory P560. It becomes possible to notify.

<Direction assistance display>
"Production assistance display" is a stage name display that informs the player that the production stage (production mode) has changed for a few seconds at the timing when the production stage (production mode) is switched, and characters, etc. during the reach production. Auxiliary display such as telop display for displaying words corresponds to this. These displays are display objects that can be displayed only in a narrow display area at a very short timing (timing at which the voice is output from the speaker P83) when the characters in reach speak their lines when the presentation mode is switched. On the other hand, the display can be used as an advance notice to inform the player of the content of the production or to indirectly inform the expectation of the big win (for example, the display color of the telop characters can be configured so that the expectation of the big win is different). In order to improve the visibility when displayed as much as possible, the priority is set higher than the notice and character action effects.

《Decorative pattern》
"Decorative pattern" (decorative pattern P801) is an important display object for notifying the result of the special pattern lottery of the special pattern, so the display priority is set so that it is not hidden by the notice display or the action effect of the special symbol. configured to increase. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, during the high-speed fluctuation period during the variable display of the decorative pattern P801, the transmittance of the display of the decorative pattern P801 is increased so that it is hardly visible to the player, and the display priority is given from the player's point of view. is set lower than the decorative pattern, and the display of various notice effects and the like can be visually recognized.

Regarding the display of the decorative pattern P801, instead of changing the transmittance to make it easier to visually recognize the notice etc., the decorative pattern P801 being changed (low display priority) and the decorative pattern P801 being stopped (display By configuring the display priority of (high priority) to be different, the visibility of the changing decorative pattern P801 may be made lower than that of the notice effect or the like.

《Custom display (menu screen, volume/light intensity adjustment)》
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the menu screen (customized effect screen) for the player to arbitrarily select the effect mode, the volume output from the speaker P83, the brightness and color of the effect lamp P82, etc. are adjusted. It is possible to execute a custom display for adjusting the effect during the game, such as a sound volume/light amount adjustment display for adjusting the light amount to be played, and an automatic operation mode setting for setting the operation mode of the effect operation means to automatic operation. These custom displays include those that can be displayed even during the variable display of decorative patterns, and can be adjusted and set even during execution of advance notice and the like.

In addition, at the timing of displaying important information on the game result, such as the stop display of the decoration symbol P801 mentioned above, or during the period when high expectations are being reached, the display of the custom display is prohibited and switched to non-display. It can be constructed in such a way that the information necessary for the player can be easily visually recognized. In addition, "custom display" is information that has little relevance to effects such as advance notice effects, so it is possible to freely switch the display position different from the normal position displayed by default. When part of the image display area is covered by the operation of P560, the custom display to be displayed (or scheduled to be displayed) in the area can be configured to change the display position to ensure visibility.

《Total acquisition number display》
"Accumulated Winning Number Display" is a display section that displays the accumulated number of game balls won by the player during the period in which the specific game state and the big win game (or small win game) are repeatedly executed, that is, the so-called continuous game period. be. In addition to the accumulated winning number display P824, a round display P820 that displays the current number of rounds during the jackpot game, a jackpot icon P821 that indicates the number of times the jackpot has been executed, and the number of jackpot winning balls that displays the number of balls won during one jackpot. The display P823, the count display P825 indicating the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole during one round of the big win, etc. are set to have the same display priority.

《Holding display》
"Reserved display" is the reserved object P811 of the reserved display area P810 and the reserved object P813 of the reserved object display area P812. This is a display area for effectively displaying the pending number of symbol lottery and the pending display corresponding to the random number value used for the current variable display. It is distinguished from the simple hold display P814 described later, and in the "hold display", the effect display (for example, hold change directing, etc.) can be executed. The pending display may become difficult to see due to the effect display displayed as the special notice when the special notice with a high display priority, which will be described later, is executed. The display priority of the pending display area P810 and the pending object display area P812 is different, for example, the display priority of the pending object display area P812 is set higher than the special notice, and the special notice (reaching While the pending display area P810 becomes invisible due to a blackout, etc.), by continuing the display of the pending object display area P812 corresponding to the change in which the special notice is being performed, the degree of expectation of the special notice is held and whether or not the change is implemented can be determined. It is also possible to indirectly notify by displaying the pending object P813 as a result of inclusion in a complex manner.

《Special notice (e.g. blackout display, result production, etc.》
"Special notice" is a special notice of the above-mentioned SP reach (A reach), such as a blackout during the special period, for the player to draw attention to the effect (especially the content of the subsequent effect display), and other SP reach that you want to emphasize. This is a performance display of a variable performance corresponding to the variable display of a special symbol which is displayed with priority over other display objects in order to concentrate on a specific notice such as a middle performance. In addition, if you want to change the display mode of the pending display due to the effect display for displaying the game result such as the result effect that is executed at the timing of the final change of the time saving game, or the stage change effect, etc. It may be set as a special notice with high priority.

Although not shown, as the display priority of such a special notice, the display priority is set higher than the character action effect, and the notice display corresponding to the change, the look-ahead, and the character action effect are not displayed. Alternatively, a medium-priority notice may be set such that the display such as the display of the cumulative number of acquisitions is set to a display priority that is continuously visible.

In addition, as a modification, among the above-described role product motion effects, the role product full-screen effect P873 (rainbow color) for notifying a big hit using the superior role product P650 (textile role product) is suspended. It may be configured to set a display priority equivalent to that of the special notice because interest in the display or the like is reduced.

《Operation promotion image (button image)》
The "operation prompting image (button image)" prompts the player to operate the effect operation means P81 in order to switch the effect of the variable effect being executed, and is used to set the above-mentioned custom display selection contents. It is an image that guides the operation method, and since it is a highly necessary display, a high display priority is set so that it is not hidden behind other displays. It should be noted that it is configured such that it is displayed at a position that does not necessarily overlap display items with a higher display priority, such as simple layouts and simple reserves, which will be described later, or that the timing of display is not the same.

《Simple Hold》
"Simple hold" is a display related to the number of holds displayed in a display area different from the hold display area P810, which is the hold display described above, and the first special symbol and the second special regardless of the production stage (production mode) It is a display showing the display of the number of reserved symbols by numbers, symbols, or the like. The display of "simple hold" is positioned as important information (important UI) for the player, and can always be visualized even when performing a special effect such as a special notice.

《Breakout notification》
The "beating notification" (beating notification image P830) is a display that indicates to the player the position where it is recommended that the game ball should be shot at present. Right-handed small display P832, left-handed small display P834, right-handed attention alert notification P835, and left-handed attention alert notification P836 are assigned as UIs. The large right-handed display P831 and the large left-handed display P833 are dramatic displays that are displayed when the game state changes (for example, during the demo period when a big hit starts, or when a specific game (time reduction) starts or ends), and is a special display. It is handled (display priority) almost the same as the notice.

《Simple layout》
"Simple design" (simple design P802) is a display that indicates that the special design is being displayed in a variable display by its variable display, and notifies the lottery result of the special design by the stop display mode, and the decorative design P801 is It is designed to be displayed as one of the important UIs so that variable display and static display can always be performed even in situations where it cannot be visually recognized. During the special game (especially the big win game), the variable display of the special symbols is not performed, and the display of the big win performance may be switched to non-display in order to give the player a sense of happiness. During the small winning, only the variable display of the special symbols is interrupted, so that the display is not hidden even during the special game (during the small winning game), and the display is stopped during the small winning game. If you do, it will be misidentified as a game result, so even if the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted, the variable display of the simple design P802 can be continued (the symbol is switched as a variable display). However, it is also possible to execute the shaking fluctuation during the execution period of the small winning game, that is, during the interruption of the fluctuation display of the special symbol).

Also, one or two simple layouts P802 are displayed depending on the game characteristics of the gaming machine (gaming machine specifications, specs). For example, in the second special symbol (special symbol 2) preferential digestion control or incoming ball order digestion control, only one special symbol is always displayed in a variable display, so only one simple display P802 is required, but parallel control In this case, since there is a possibility that the two special symbols may perform variable display, it is preferable to also display the simplified design P802 in two places. It should be noted that even in the parallel control, only the special symbols designed as the subject of the game may be displayed as the simple layout P802 according to the production stage (production mode).

"error indication"
In addition, although not shown in FIG. 95, it is preferable that the error display when an error occurs in the gaming machine is configured so that it can be visually recognized under any circumstances. set. In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the display priority is set higher than the important UIs 1 to 3, such as simple hold, split notification, and simple layout. , changing the order of display priority has no practical effect.

Note that if the right-handed and left-handed caution alert notifications P835 and left-handed caution alert notifications P836 are designed with large images, there is a risk that they may overlap with the error image. It is preferable to set the lowest priority among the important UI and the error display.

(Production stage characterized by the action of the production accessory of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
Next, "X Rush SUPER", which is a production stage (production mode) characterized by the operation of the production accessory P560 of the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, will be described. "X Rush SUPER" is a production stage (production mode) corresponding to the game state of variable probability game (high probability/low base) shown in FIG. Since the operation mode is a non-electric chew support state, by shooting the game ball to the right side game area P501R, the ball enters the big winning opening P751 arranged downstream of the normal electric accessory P770 during the small winning game. is easy. Therefore, in "X Rush SUPER", it is a game state in which the number of game balls gradually increases due to winning in the big winning opening P751 during the small winning game even if the big winning is not won (referred to as "small winning rush").

As shown in FIG. 87, in the special symbol lottery corresponding to the second special symbol, the probability of winning a small win is as high as 1/2, and the small win is frequently won. In the mode) "X Rush SUPER", the same type of decorative pattern (for example, not a grid pattern but the same display color is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 in order to visually notify the winning of the small prize. and a special pattern for announcing a small hit) are stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the lower part P680 is made to rise. In addition, the effect of notifying that you have won a small hit in the special symbol lottery of such a second special symbol is performed only in "X Rush SUPER", and other right-handed strokes such as "X Rush" and "Resurrection Chance" In the performance stage (performance mode) where the game is recommended, it is not executed even if a small win is won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol.

In "X Rush SUPER", different operation patterns are set for the lower role P680 depending on the type of small winning game won in the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol. As shown in FIG. 87, there are two kinds of small winning symbols of the second special symbol, "special figure 2_small winning_1" and "special figure 2_small winning_2", and "special figure 2_small winning_1" is The big winning opening P751 is opened once for 0.6 seconds, and "special figure 2_small hit_2" is a small winning game in which the big winning opening P751 is opened twice for 0.6 seconds. That is, the player is more likely to get more prize balls when winning the "special figure 2_small win_2", which is advantageous. Therefore, as the operation pattern of the lower role P680 when notifying that a small hit has been won in "X Rush SUPER", the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1" and the "special figure 2_small hit _2” are prepared.

In the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small hit_1", the lower role article P680 rises to the rising position sensor P687 and immediately returns to the position of the falling position sensor P686, and the position of the rising position sensor P687 , the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 emits white light, and a small white lower role action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device P80. On the other hand, in the effect operation pattern for "special figure 2_small win_2", the lower role object P680 moves to a position detected by the rising position sensor, and in the process, the lower role object P680 emits white light from the light emitting part and produces an effect. Until the display of the lower role object action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the display device P80, the lower role object P680 is the same, while the lower role object P680 returns to the lowered position sensor P686 and rises to the position detected by the raised position sensor again. At the same time, the light-emitting part of the lower role P680 is caused to emit red light, and a large red lower role action effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80.

In addition, as a special effect operation pattern of the lower role P680 in "X Rush SUPER", when a small hit is won continuously in multiple special symbol lotteries (preliminary judgment information Or, it is determined by checking the pre-determination information for the suspension of the second special symbol that will occur later), the above-mentioned "special figure 2 _ small hit _ 1" effect operation pattern or "special figure 2 _ small hit _ 2" for A small winning game is executed a plurality of times while moving to the position detected by the rising position sensor without performing the returning operation (returning operation to the initial position) to the lowered position sensor P686 in the production operation pattern. In the meantime, the light-emitting part of the lower part P680 emits light in gold (a light emission pattern in which yellow, white, and orange are mixed), and a large golden motion effect P872 is displayed in the display area of the performance display device P80. ' is executable. In this way, the production operation pattern of the lower role P680 and the display contents of the production display device P80 are changed according to the types of small winning games with different profits and the determination of the number of consecutive small winning games using the prior determination information, Even if a small win is frequently won, the notification of the small win is not monotonous, and a performance that gives a sense of expectation for the game profit (number of game balls) that may be awarded. can be executed.

In the case of a big hit in "X Rush SUPER", in the same way as in the production stage (production mode) corresponding to other game states, when notifying the acquisition of the big hit with the action of the production accessory P560, the boss It is configured to use the object P650. Here, in the "X Rush SUPER", if the interval between the small winning games (variation display period of the second special symbol for each time) becomes longer, the ball feeling based on the acquisition of the game ball by the small winning game (a large amount of games Since the feeling of getting the ball) fades, in the variable game, which is a game state (high probability / low base) corresponding to "X Rush SUPER", the electric chew support function is not activated, but the special pattern The variable time shortening function of is in an operating state, and the variable display of the second special symbol is configured so that a short-time variation is likely to be selected. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, even when the "X rush SUPER" results in a big hit, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than in the case of a big win in other game states. Most of the big hits are notified using the action of the superior role P650 (except for the notification effects of exceptional jackpots, so that a variable effect accompanied by the action of the superior role P650 is always selected). is).

By adopting the operation mode of the performance role P560 in such "X rush SUPER", in "X rush SUPER", the player can "win big when the upper role P650 operates" and "play the lower role P680." You can enjoy the feeling and performance of the small winning game and the big winning game with a simple and easy-to-understand game performance with the feeling of "getting a small hit".

As a modification of the "X Rush SUPER", a 2R jackpot or a 4R jackpot in which an opening pattern (0.6 seconds x 5) having a opening time of the jackpot opening that is substantially the same as the small jackpot is executed in a plurality of rounds. A big hit is provided as a result of the special symbol lottery of the second special symbol, and when these big hits are won, the operation of the lower role P680 is performed in the same way as when the small prize is won instead of the upper role P650 (described above). A ``special performance operation pattern'' performed over a plurality of small winning games is executed, and configured to appear as if winning a plurality of small winnings in spite of the big winning. You may

(Modified example of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
<<Modification 1>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the effect is produced by notifying that a big hit is achieved by the display contents of the effect display device P80 and the effect operation pattern of the superior role P650 (texture role) during the ready-to-win effect. It has been explained that it is a pachinko game machine that provides a highly entertaining presentation that combines the actions of the role P560.

Here, as a modified example, depending on the type of effect operation pattern of the upper role P650 (texture role) during the ready-to-win effect, the degree of advantage in the special game (the number of winning balls, the number of winning balls, and the transition after the big hit game It may be configured to be able to make suggestions regarding the type of specific game).

In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, the "10R probability variable jackpot" shown in FIG. At the production position, the rotating decoration part P652 is expanded, the side role P670 is expanded behind the upper role P650, and the role full screen effect P873 is displayed in rainbow colors in the display area of the production display device P80. (The light-emitting portion of the superior object P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full-screen effect P873).

Here, as a modified example, as a pattern that suggests the type of special game by the performance action pattern of the superior role P650, in the case of a 4R probability variable big hit (or some 10R probability variable big hit), the superior role P650 is produced. While deploying the rotating decoration part P652 at the position, the side role P670 is not deployed behind the upper role P650, and the red role full screen effect P873 is displayed in the display area of the production display device P80 (upper A pattern for executing the medium-expectation mode in which the light-emitting part of the character P650 emits light in a color corresponding to the full-screen effect P873 may be prepared. In addition, in the case of a 10R normal jackpot or a 4R normal jackpot (or a partial 10R variable or 4R variable jackpot) with a low expectation of profit that can be given to the player, the upper role P650 is placed in the second effect operation pattern ( It is also possible to prepare a pattern for executing a low expectation mode in which the side role P670 is not developed to the performance position and the high role action effect P870 is displayed large in red.

In addition, in the case of transitioning to a special game (jackpot game) in a medium expectation mode or a low expectation mode, effects such as the light emitting part of the upper role P650 and the effect image displayed in the display area of the effect display device P80 The effect is continuously displayed in red or the like, and when it is reported that a big win (for example, 10R probability variable) which is actually more advantageous during the big win game, the light emitting part of the superior role P650 or the effect display device P80 is displayed. It may be configured such that the effect image or the like in the area is switched to the rainbow-colored light emission and display mode displayed during the jackpot game when the 10R probability variation is notified.

<<Modification 2>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, when the win-lose branch button effect occurs at the timing of the win-lose branch of the reach effect, attention is drawn to the action of the production accessory P560. Therefore, a special period during which the game is silent is provided.

Therefore, as a condition for providing such a special period, the chance-up effect occurs during the SP reach effect period, and the cut-in notice during the reach effect has a predetermined degree of expectation or more effect pattern (for example, blue < green < It is also possible to construct a pattern that generates a special period under conditions such as a case where red<gold cut-in patterns are present and more than red cut-in is executed. By doing so, the situation where the special period occurs is the situation where the SP reach is generated and the chance up effect is executed in the advance notice effect lottery, etc., and the possibility of a big hit is reduced. Limited to high conditions.

In addition, when configured in this way, the win-lose branch button effect is generated without generating a situation of silence as a special period, so that the preparatory operation of the superior object P650 (rattling operation and light emitting unit) In a state where light emission and display of upper role action effect P870) is continued, a button effective period for winning/losing branch button presentation is generated, and based on the operation of the player's presentation operation means P81, the mode of the preparatory action is set. (For example, the first effect operation pattern when winning, and the stop pattern when losing) may be switched to.

<<Modification 3>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, in the "lever chance" which is the SP reach (B reach) shown in FIG. , the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 of the effect operation unit P380 is configured to be executed in advance, but the start timing of the preparatory operation of the effect lever P382 is changed to coincide with or after the start of the special period. good too.

In addition, when configured in this way, the hit-lose branch button effect is when the operation of the effect button P381 is requested (weak pattern, the expectation of a big hit is relatively low), and when the effect lever P382 is requested to be operated (strong pattern , relatively high expectation of big hit), and during the special period (such as the special period of B reach shown in FIG. 93, the blackout display period of A reach, etc.), any effect The operating means P81 may be configured to draw attention to whether it is requested.

Further, after the shift to the special period for attracting attention to the operation of the performance accessory P560, when informing the operation content required for the performance operation means P81, when requesting the operation of the performance lever P382, the button valid By delaying the display start timing of the operation prompting image that informs that the timing of occurrence of the period will be later than when requesting the operation of the effect button P381 (for example, delaying by about 0.5 seconds), a sense of incongruity is given. The length of the special period up to the button effective period (the period for accepting the input of the performance lever) including the preparatory operation period of the performance lever is lengthened, and the length of the special period makes the player feel teased. It may be configured to increase the degree of attention to the win-lose branch button effect.

<<Modification 4>>
In the pachinko game machine P of the seventh embodiment, even if an error occurs with respect to the production accessory P560 and the movable production operation is prohibited, the situation is the same as the situation where the movable production operation is not prohibited. However, under the situation where the movable effect operation is prohibited, the light emission of the effect accessory P560 is different from the situation where it is not prohibited. It may be configured to have a lighting effect pattern dedicated to error so as to light up the part.

In addition, even if the movable production action of the production accessory P560 is prohibited, the effect image that was scheduled to be displayed corresponding to the movable production action of the production accessory P560 such as the advance notice production and the prefetch production is also movable. By enabling the display in the same manner as in the situation where the performance action is not prohibited, the game may be configured to be playable without impairing the information related to the degree of expectation of the pre-reading performance.

Furthermore, when the movable effect action of the production accessory P560 is prohibited, instead of the action of the production accessory P560, at the timing when the movable production action of the corresponding production accessory P560 should have been executed, Corresponding to the performance accessory P560 such as the effect image by displaying the pseudo-accessory motion image of the corresponding performance accessory P560 and outputting the movable performance operation sound corresponding to the movable performance operation of the performance accessory P560 from the speaker P83. You may make it comprehensible the meaning of the image display which carries out.

(Characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment)
<<Characteristic configuration 1>>
The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the first characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means A game having a device (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.) and a effect movable body (effect accessory P560) included in the effect device and capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation. a machine, wherein the main control means executes a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is established based on the progress of the game, and the special game includes at least a first special game; A second special game (such as a 10R variable probability jackpot) that is more advantageous than the first special game (a 10R normal jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, a 4R normal jackpot, a small prize, etc.), and at least a first special game as a performance movable body. It has a production movable body (upper role P650) and a second production movable body (side role P670, lower role P680), and the production control means provides a specific production ( The first effect operation pattern of the upper role P650) can be executed, and the specific effect is an effect that can execute a movable effect that displaces the first effect movable body in a specific mode, and is a second special game. is scheduled to be executed, there are times when a specific performance is executed, and when a first special game is scheduled to be executed, the specific performance is not executed.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, in a gaming machine comprising a plurality of production accessories P560, a higher role (texture role), which is a specific production accessory, performs a specific action (first production action pattern, The player can easily recognize that the special game obtained when performing the "fine action" is a special game advantageous to the player, and the content of the performance can be configured simply and clearly.

<<Characteristic configuration 2>>
The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the second characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , a production movable body (production accessory P560) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and a production light emitting unit (production lamp P82, light emitting unit of production accessory P560, etc.) included in the production device and executing a predetermined light emission production , wherein the main control means performs a win-or-fail lottery ( A special pattern lottery) is executed, and the performance control means can select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of performance patterns including a specific performance pattern (A reach, B reach, etc.) as an execution pattern of performance related to the result of the success or failure lottery. The specific effect pattern is to displace the effect movable body (superior object P650) to a predetermined position in front of the effect display means (superior object Execution of the first effect operation pattern of P650), and during a predetermined period (special period) immediately before the effect movable body moves toward a predetermined position, a specific display (for example, a blackout display, etc.) is performed on the effect display means, and the effect is performed. The gaming machine is characterized in that the movable body is stopped at a position other than a predetermined position, and the lighting mode of the effect lighting section is set to a special lighting mode (dimming mode or extinguishing mode).

By adopting this feature configuration, in order to notify the result of the special symbol lottery in SP reach etc. During the special period, the operation of the production display device P80, the production lamp P82, and the production role P560 (superior role P650) is set to a quiet mode (a mode of concentrating on the senior role P650), so that after the special period (production operation means After the operation of P81), the action of the performance role P560 (superior role P650) can be made to attract attention, and the performance effect of the big hit acquisition notification associated with the action of the senior role P650 can be enhanced.

<<Characteristic configuration 3>>
The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the third characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , and an effect movable body (superior role P650, side role P670, lower role P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement action, wherein the main control means controls a predetermined movement based on the progress of the game. When the execution condition is satisfied, a win-or-fail lottery (special symbol lottery) relating to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player is executed, and the effect control means executes the effect related to the result of the win-or-fail lottery. The pattern can be selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns, and the display contents displayed on the effect display means have a predetermined display priority depending on the display contents, and the effect execution pattern is a predetermined effect movable body. When an effect pattern involving a displacement motion is selected, the effect display means can display a display related to the motion of the movable object (character object motion effect), which is the display content related to the motion of the effect movable object, and can be used as the execution pattern of the effect. In a situation where an effect pattern involving a predetermined displacement motion of the effect movable body is selected, the display related to the motion of the movable body is displayed on the effect display means, and a predetermined advance notice that is display content related to whether or not the special game is executed. A game machine characterized by having a higher display priority than an effect display (announcement effect).

By adopting this configuration, in a game machine where the degree of expectation for a big hit increases when the advance notice performance and the action of the performance role P560 are combined compared to the case where they are not combined, the role action effect (higher role action effect P870 , side role action effect P871, lower role action effect P872, role full screen effect P873, etc.) is set higher than the display priority of the announcement effect executed in combination with the action of the production role P560. By setting, the performance effect of the performance role P560 is not hidden by the notice performance, etc., and the visibility for the player is improved, and the fact that the performance motion of the performance performance role P560 was performed in combination with the notice performance, etc., and the expectation of the big hit. It can be configured so that the display mode of the related role item full-screen effect can be reliably recognized.

<<Characteristic configuration 4>>
The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the fourth characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , and a plurality of effect movable bodies (higher role P650, side role P670, lower role P680) each capable of executing a predetermined displacement action, wherein the effect control means comprises a plurality of effect movable bodies. When a predetermined operation abnormality (step number over error, position check error, power supply start-up, etc.) is detected in at least one effect movable body of the body, the effect in accordance with the progress of the game of the main control means is being executed. However, it is possible to execute initial position return operation processing for returning to the initial position of each of the plurality of effect movable bodies in a predetermined processing order for each of the plurality of effect movable bodies, and to return to the initial position. During the execution of the action process, power is supplied to the drive source of the effect movable body for the return operation to the effect movable body that is currently in the processing order to perform the return operation to the initial position. and a game machine characterized in that power supply for returning operation is not performed to the drive source of the other effect movable body which is not in the current processing order.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, when an operation abnormality of the performance accessory occurs during the progress of the game (during the variable display of the special symbol), for all the performance accessories P560 that can advance to the front of the performance display device P80, It executes a process of performing a return operation toward the initial position in a predetermined order (ignoring if it is already at the initial position), and drives the performance accessory P560 that is performing the initial position return operation process. While power is supplied to the source, power is not supplied to the driving source of the production accessory P560 that is not the target of the initial position return operation process, so that the initial position return operation processing of the production accessory P560 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of electric power required for the operation, and it is possible to prevent the operation of other production devices from being affected.

<<Characteristic configuration 5>>
The pachinko game machine of the seventh embodiment has the following configuration as the fifth characteristic configuration.

Main control means (main control CPU) that controls the progress of the game, production control means (production control CPU) that controls the execution of the production according to the progress of the game of the main control means, and production controlled by the production control means Equipment (effect display device P80, effect lamp P82, speaker P83, effect accessory P560, etc.), effect display means (effect display device P80) included in the effect device and performing a predetermined effect display, and effect display device P80 included in the effect device , a game machine having a production movable body (lower role object P680) capable of executing a predetermined displacement operation, and a production light emitting unit provided in the production movable body and executing a predetermined light emission production, wherein the main control The means executes a win-or-fail lottery as to whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined execution condition is established based on the progress of the game, and the effect control means executes the win-or-fail lottery result. It is possible to select an execution pattern from a plurality of types of production patterns including a specific production pattern as the execution pattern of the production related to, and the specific production pattern is a first production period (for example, normal reach) and a second production period after the first production period. It is a production pattern having a production period (for example, SP reach), and in the first production period, by switching the light emission mode of the production light emitting unit multiple times, the first production period light emission production (back Button step-up effect) can be executed, and when the light emission effect is executed during the first effect period, until a predetermined timing during the execution of the second effect period (for example, until the winning branch effect during SP reach, or a chance until the occurrence of the up effect), the effect light emitting part is set to a light emitting mode related to the final light emitting mode of the light emitting effect during the first effect period.

By adopting this characteristic configuration, the expectation of a big hit notified by the production (back button step-up production of the light emitting part) using the production accessory P560 executed in the preceding production period is continued in the subsequent production period. By displaying , while continuously confirming the degree of expectation for a big hit reported by the performance using the performance accessory P560 in the preceding performance period, the user has a sense of expectation for the contents of the performance executed in the subsequent performance. It is possible to provide a novel and highly interesting production that can be faced with

P pachinko machine, P1 outer frame, P2 front frame, P3 glass frame,
P4 back set unit, P5 game board, P40 main control board,
P41 effect control board, P42 image control board, P43 payout control board,
P44 Power supply board, P47 Power switch, P48 Ram clear switch,
P49 setting key switch, P50 main control display device,
P51 first special symbol display device, P52 second special symbol display device,
P80 effect display device, P81 effect operation means (P380 effect operation unit,
P381 production button, P382 lever, P383 cross key),
P82 production lamp (P350 frame lamp, P550 board lamp),
P83 speaker (P141 curtain board speaker, P371 upper speaker),
P560 production accessory, P710 first start winning device,
P720 (P808) Second start winning device, P730 General winning device,
P740 Normal figure operation gate device, P750 (P809) Grand winning entrance device P755 Special electric accessory, P770 (P907) Normal electric accessory

Claims (1)

a main control means for controlling the progress of a game;
Production control means for controlling the execution of production according to the progress of the game;
effect image display means for displaying a effect image corresponding to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
A light emitting effect unit having a plurality of light emitting units that execute light emitting effects corresponding to the effect controlled by the effect control means;
and an operating means operable by a player,
The production control means is
image preview effect control for displaying an image preview effect by the effect image display means;
a light emission notice effect control for executing a light emission notice effect by light emission of a plurality of light emitting units of the light emission effect unit;
The production control means is
In a period in which the light emission effect control is not executed, the light emission effect unit can execute a light emission effect in a normal light emission mode corresponding to the image preview effect control,
The light-emitting notice effect control uses the light-emitting effect section to indicate in stages the possibility of a favorable outcome for the player regarding the progress of the game,
In the light emission notice effect control, when the player operates the operation means during a predetermined effect period, the light emission notice effect is started with the player's operation of the operation means as a trigger, and the light emission effect is performed. While switching the part from the normal light emitting mode to the initial mode of the light emitting notice effect, if the player does not operate the operating means during the predetermined effect period, the light emitting effect part remains in the normal light emitting mode. light up,
In the light emission effect control, when the light emission effect is switched to the initial state of the light emission effect, a specific light emission portion, which is at least a part of the plurality of light emission portions of the light emission effect portion, is switched to the plurality of light emission effect portions. A gaming machine characterized by emitting light in an initial mode different from that of other light emitting parts of the light emitting part .

Images